FREEDOM OF INFORMATION REDACTION SHEET · PDF filefreedom of information redaction sheet [samworth enterprise academy] [samworth enterprise academy funding agreement] exemptions in

FREEDOM OF INFORMATION REDACTION SHEET [SAMWORTH ENTERPRISE ACADEMY] [SAMWORTH ENTERPRISE ACADEMY FUNDING AGREEMENT] Exemptions in full Partial exemptions Personal Information has been redacted from this document under Section 40 of the Freedom of Information (FOI) Act. Section 40 of the FOI Act concerns personal data within the meaning of the Data Protection Act 1998. Factors for disclosure Factors for Withholding

further to the understanding of and increase participation in the public debate of issues concerning Academies.

to ensure transparency in the

accountability of public funds

To comply with obligations under the Data Protection Act

Reasons why public interest favours withholding information Whilst releasing the majority SAMWORTH ENTERPRISE ACADEMY FUNDING AGREEMENT will further the public understanding of Academies, the whole of the FUNDING AGREEMENT cannot be revealed. If the personal information redacted was to be revealed under the FOI Act, Personal Data and Commercial interests would be prejudiced.

THE SAMWORTH ACADEMY

FUNDING AGREEMENT

CONTENTS:

SECTION CLAUSE NO

INTRODUCTION

LEGAL AGREEMENT

CHARACTERISTICS OF AN ACADEMY

CONDITIONS OF GRANT

General

Governance

Conduct

Development plan and target setting

Pupils

Teachers and other staff

Curriculum, curriculum development and delivery and RE and collective worship

Assessment

School meals

Charging

Provision of Information to parents and others

GRANTS TO BE PAID BY THE SECRETARY OF STATE

General

Capital Grant

1 - 6

7

8

9

1 0 - 1 1

12

13 -15

16

17 -20

21 - 2 6

2 7 - 2 8

2 9 - 3 0

31

3 2 - 3 3

34 -35

36 -40

gud0000041I

Capital expenditure necessary to establish the Academy 41

Other capital expenditure 42

Conditions on capital grant 43

Arrangements for the payment of capital grant 44

Implementation Grant 45 - 47

Arrangements for the payment of implementation grant 48 - 49

General Annual Grant 50 57

Earmarked Annual Grant 58 59

Arrangements for payment of GAG and EAG 60 62

Other relevant funding 63 66

Financial and accounting requirements 67 79

Borrowing powers 80

DISPOSAL OF ASSETS 81 - 85

TERMINATION 86 - 94

Effect of termination 95 - 102

GENERAL 103 -104

Access by Secretary of State's Officers 105 -107

Notices 108 -111

ANNEXES (THESE REQUIRE THE SECRETARY OF STATE'S APPROVAL TO CHANGES)

Memorandum and Articles of The Samworth Academy Annex 1

Arrangements for Admission for pupils at The Samworth Academy Annex 2

Arrangements for pupils with SEN and disabilities

at The Samworth Academy Annex 3

Serious incidents of misbehaviour leading to fixed period gad00000411 2

or permanent exclusion Annex 4

ANNEXES RELATED TO BUILDING PROGRAMME FOR THE SAMWORTH ACADEMY

Capital Cash limit calculation, established by SBDU

Capital expenditure incurred for the purposes of or in connection with the establishment of the Academy prior to the execution of the funding agreement

Capital cashflow programme for monthly capital expenditure during the Academy's implementation phase

Architect drawings I specification of the Academy new build I refurbishment as prepared up to RIBA stage D

Schedule of approvals by Secretary of State required in relation to Capital Programme to establish The Samworth Academy

Annex 5

Annex 6A

Annex 6B

AA7av£:X GL>

Annex 7

gad00000411 4

INTRODUCTION

1) This Agreement is made under section 482 of the Education Act 1996, as substituted by the Education Act 2002, between the Secretary of State for Education and Skills and The Samworth Academy hereafter "the Academy Trust".

2) The Academy Trust is a charitable company incorporated in England and Wales, limited by guarantee with registered no 05367105.

3) The following expressions used in this Agreement have the respective meanings assigned to them by the numbered clauses of this Agreement referred to immediately after the reference to the expressions -

a) "Accounting Officer" - clause 67;

b) "admission arrangements" - clause 4 of Annex 2;

c) "annual letter of funding" - clause 61;

d) "GAG" - clauses 50-57;

e) "capital expenditure" - clause 36;

f) "the Academy" - clause 7

g) "the Academy Trust" - clause 1;

h) "EAG" - clauses 58-59;

i) "Financial Handbook" - clause 68;

j) "financial year" - clause 62;

k) "Governing Body" - clause 10

I) "recurrent expenditure" - clause 35;

m) "School Development Plan" - clause 13-15

n) "start up period" - clause 55a;

o) "the company" - clause 2;

p) "the Memorandum and Articles" - Annex 1

4) In this Agreement the following words and expressions shall have the following meanings:-

"LEA" means local education authority;

gad00000411 4

"headteacher" means the Principal of the Academy

references to "school" shall where the context so admits be references to the Academy.

"Agreement" means this agreement and its Annexes and a reference in the Agreement to a numbered clause or Annex is a reference to the clause or Annex of this Agreement bearing that number.

"Persons" includes a body of persons corporate or incorporate.

5) Questions arising on the interpretation of the arrangements in this funding agreement shall be resolved by the Secretary of State after consultation with the Academy.

6) Section 482 (1) of the Education Act 1996 as substituted states that -

"(1) The Secretary of State may enter into an agreement with any person under which -

(a) that person undertakes to establish and maintain, and to carry on or provide for the carrying on of, an independent school in England with the characteristics mentioned in subsection (2), and such other characteristics as are specified in the agreement, and

(b) the Secretary of State agrees to make payments to that person in consideration of those undertakings."

LEGAL AGREEMENT

7) In consideration of the Academy Trust undertaking to establish and maintain, and to carry on or provide for the carrying on, of an independent school to be known as the Samworth Academy ("the Academy") and having such characteristics as are referred to in clauses 8 - 9, the Secretary of State agrees to make payments to the Academy Trust in accordance with the conditions and requirements set out in this Agreement. Any obligations imposed upon or powers given to the Academy by this agreement are also imposed upon the Academy Trust.

CHARACTERISTICS OF AN ACADEMY

8) The characteristics of an Academy set down in section 482 (2) of the Education Act 1996 as substituted by the Education Act 2002, are that the school:

a) has a broad curriculum with an emphasis on a particular subject area, or particular subject areas, specified in the agreement, and

b) provides education for pupils of different abilities and who are wholly or mainly drawn from the area in which the school is situated.

CONDITIONS OF GRANT

gad0000041I

9) Section 482(4) of the Education Act 1996 provides for the agreement to specify other conditions and requirements. These conditions in respect of the Academy are that:

a) the school will be at the heart of its community, sharing facilities with other schools and the wider community;

b) there will be assessment in the core subjects of the national curriculum at Key Stages 1, 2 and 3, and the opportunity to study for external qualifications as defined by section 96 of the Learning and Skills Act 2000;

c) the admissions policy and arrangements for the school will be consistent with admissions law, and the DfES Codes of Practice, for maintained schools;

d) teachers will be required to have qualified teacher status; levels of pay and conditions of service for all employees will be the responsibility of the Governing Body;

e) there will be an emphasis on the needs of the individual pupils including pupils with special educational needs (SEN) both those with and without statements of SEN;

f) there will be no charge in respect of admission to the school and the school will only charge pupils where the law allows maintained schools to charge.

Governance

10)The Academy will be governed by a governing body ("the Governing Body") who are the directors of the company constituted under the Memorandum and Articles of the Academy Trust. The Governing Body shall exercise its powers and functions with a view to fulfilling a largely strategic role in the running of the school and shall consider any advice given by the headteacher. The Governing Body may exercise its powers and fulfil its functions through its servants or agents.

11 )Subject to the Memorandum and Articles, and to this Agreement, the Governing Body may regulate its own procedure and that of any of its committees.

Conduct

12)The Academy shall be conducted in accordance with:

a) the memorandum and articles of the company (attached as Annex 1 to this Agreement) which memorandum or articles shall not be amended by the Academy Trust without the explicit consent of the Secretary of State, such consent not to be unreasonably withheld;

b) all provisions by or under statute which confer rights or impose obligations on Academies;

gad00000411 6

c) the terms of this Agreement.

Development Plan and target setting

13)The Academy shall draw up a School Development Plan each year in accordance with a format and timetable to be advised by the Secretary of State. The School Development Plan shall, in particular:

a) in accordance with a format and timetable to be advised by the Secretary of State set out plans for ensuring that all pupils are supported to reach the highest standards of which they are capable;

b) describe the Academy's proposals to work with other schools and with the wider community.

14)The Academy shall set such targets in areas to be specified by the Secretary of State each year. The target areas for the initial year shall be:

a) percentage of pupils achieving level 2 or above at the end of Key Stage 1; and

b) percentage of pupils achieving level 4 or above at the end of Key Stage 2.

15)The Academy shall consult the Secretary of State and the LEA in whose area it is situated each year before setting these targets and shall take into account but not be bound by any comments received from the Secretary of State and/or the LEA. The Academy shall set its targets in accordance with the timetable for target setting which applies to maintained schools.

Pupils

16)The Academy is an all ability and inclusive school. The arrangements for:

a) the admission of pupils to the Academy; and

b) the admission of and support for pupils with Special Educational Needs and with disabilities (for pupils who have and who do not have statements of Special Educational Needs) (including the appointment of a responsible person);

are set out in Annexes 2 and 3 to this Agreement, together with the arrangements for making changes to such arrangements, including the requirement to secure the consent of the Secretary of State, such consent not to be unreasonably withheld. Arrangements for pupil exclusions are set out in Annex 4.

Teachers and other staff

17)The Academy Trust shall employ as teachers persons who meet the health standards set out in the Education (Health Standards)(England) Regulations 2003 (SI 2003/3139) and who are also qualified teachers within the meaning of the Education (School Teachers' Qualifications) (England) Regulations 2003 (SI 2003/1662) in each case as amended or re-enacted from time to time. It shall be

gad00000411 7

open to the Academy to employ persons (otherwise than as teachers) with other qualifications and experience.

18)The Governing Body shall ensure that all teachers employed at the Academy have access to the Teachers Pension Scheme and, in so doing, will comply with the statutory provisions underlying the scheme.

19)The Governing Body shall ensure that all employees other than teachers have access to the Local Government Pension Scheme.

20)lt shall be the responsibility of the Governing Body to agree levels of pay and conditions of service with its employees, and to determine and employ such numbers of staff as may be appropriate. The Governing Body shall approve policies for:

a) staffing structure, and staff remuneration; and

b) staff discipline and performance management.

Curriculum, curriculum development and delivery and RE and collective worship

21)The curriculum provided by the Academy to pupils up to the age of 16 shall be broad and balanced with an emphasis on business and enterprise. The core subjects of the National Curriculum must be taught to all pupils in years 1 - 1 1 except where, in the opinion of the principal, it is inappropriate for an individual pupil or groups of pupils to be taught one or more of those subjects.

22)The Academy shall make provision for the teaching of Religious Education and for a daily act of collective worship.

23)Subject to clause 25, provision shall be made for Religious Education to be given to all pupils at the Academy in accordance with the tenets of the Church of England.

24)Subject to clause 25, the Academy shall comply with the requirements of section 70(1) of, and Schedule 20 to, the School Standards and Framework Act 1998 as if it were a foundation school with a religious character or a voluntary school, and as if references to ' the required collective worship' were references to collective worship in accordance with the tenets and practices of the Church of England

25)Section 71(1) - (4) of the School Standards and Framework Act 1998 shall apply as if the Academy were a community, foundation or voluntary school, and as if references to "'religious education" and to "religious worship" in that section were references to the religious education and religious worship provided at the Academy in accordance with clauses 23 and 24 respectively.

26)The Academy shall have regard to any guidance issued by the Secretary of State on Sex and Relationship Education to ensure that children are protected from inappropriate teaching materials and they learn the nature of marriage and its importance for family life and for bringing up children.

gad00000411 8

Assessment

27)The Academy shall register with the Qualifications and Curriculum Authority for the purposes of arranging for all eligible pupils to take part in the national curriculum assessment system at the end of the Key Stages 1, 2 and 3 programmes of studies.

28)The Academy may not offer courses which lead to external qualifications, as defined in section 96 of the Learning and Skills Act 2000, unless they are either approved under section 98 of that Act, or, in respect of individual pupils, groups of pupils or all pupils in Key Stage 4, the Secretary of State gives specific consent for such courses to be offered.

School meals

29)The Academy shall, if requested to do so by or on behalf of any pupils at the Academy provide school lunches for those pupils unless it would be unreasonable for them to do so. Subject to the provisions of clause 30 charges may be levied for lunches.

30)ln relation to a pupil who is himself or whose parents are in receipt of benefits mentioned in section 512(3)B of the Education Act 1996 (or equivalent provision governing the entitlement to free school lunches of pupils at maintained schools), the Academy shall ensure that a school lunch is provided for such a pupil, which shall be provided free of charge.

Charging

31)Sections 402 (Obligation to enter pupils for public examinations), 450 - 457 (charges), 459 (regulations about information about charges and school hours) and 460 (voluntary contributions), 461 (recovery of sums as civil debt) - 462 (Interpretation re charges) of the Education Act 1996 shall be deemed to apply to the Academy with the following modifications:

a) references to any maintained school shall be treated as references to the Academy;

b) references to registered pupils shall be treated as references to registered pupils at the Academy;

c) references to the governing body or the local education authority shall, in each case, be treated as references to the governing body of the Academy;

d) the charging and remissions policies required to be determined under section 457, and any amendment thereto, shall require the approval of the Secretary of State; and

e) the Academy may charge persons who are not registered pupils at the Academy for education provided or for facilities used by them at the Academy.

Provision of Information to parents and others

32)The Academy shall publish a prospectus annually, shall send this on request (free of charge) to parents of pupils at the Academy and to the Secretary of State;

gad00000411

and shall make it available for inspection by other persons at the Academy. The prospectus shall include details of admission arrangements and, except insofar as such information is published in a document known as a School Profile (which would accompany the prospectus) the following:

a) details of the curriculum offered, of assessment arrangements and of the results of attainment tests and public examinations at school level, but this shall not include details of individual pupils' attainment and examination results;

b) details of any religious affiliation of the school; policy on providing for children with SEN; arrangements for pupils with disabilities (as specified in Annex 3 to this agreement); pupil absence rates; and destination of school leavers; and

c) such other information as the Governing Body may determine;

d) any further information as set out in Schedule 3 of the Education (School Information) (England) Regulations 2002 (SI 2002/2897) as applies to maintained schools.

33)The prospectus shall be published in the school year immediately preceding the school year to which it relates and shall be published at least six weeks before the closing date for applying for a place.

GRANTS TO BE PAID BY THE SECRETARY OF STATE

General

34)The Secretary of State shall pay grants under this Agreement towards capital and recurrent expenditure. Except with the Secretary of State's prior agreement, the Academy Trust shall not budget for expenditure in any year in excess of expected income. The Academy Trust shall not enter into commitments which are likely to have substantial implications for future levels of grant, or for the period for which grant may be required. No decision by the Trust shall commit the Secretary of State to paying any particular amount of grant.

35)"Recurrent expenditure" means any expenditure on the establishment, conduct, administration and maintenance of the Academy which does not fall within the categories of capital expenditure set out at clause 36. The Secretary of State shall pay two separate and distinct grants under the Agreement in respect of recurrent expenditure: General Annual Grant (GAG) and Earmarked Annual Grant (EAG).

CAPITAL GRANT

36)"Capital expenditure" means expenditure on:

a. the acquisition of land and buildings;

gad00000411 10

b. the erection, enlargement, improvement or demolition of any building including fixed plant, installation, wall, fence or other structure, or any playground or hard standing;

c. the installation of electrical, mechanical or other services;

d. the purchase of vehicles and other self-propelled mechanical equipment;

e. the installation and equipping of premises with furnishings and equipment, other than necessary replacements, repairs and maintenance due to normal wear and tear;

f. the installation and equipping of premises with computers, networking for computers, operating software and information and communication technology equipment, other than necessary updates or necessary replacements, repairs and maintenance due to normal wear and tear;

g. the provision and equipping of premises, including playing fields and other facilities for social activities and physical recreation;

h. works of a permanent character other than the purchase or replacement of minor day-to day items;

i. any major repairs or replacements which are specified as constituting capital expenditure in any grant letter relating to them;

j. such other items (whether of a like or dissimilar nature to any of the foregoing) of a substantial or enduring nature as the Secretary of State may agree shall constitute capital expenditure for the purposes of the Agreement;

k. all professional fees properly and reasonably incurred in connection with the provision of any of the above;

I. VAT and other taxes payable on any of the above.

"Capital grant" means grant paid under the Agreement in respect of capital expenditure.

37)The Academy Trust has agreed with the Secretary of State the Capital Cost Spreadsheet attached as Annex 5 to the Agreement. The Capital Cost Spreadsheet shows the limit of the capital costs which the parties have agreed the Academy Trust may incur in order to establish the Academy. Annex 5 includes capital costs incurred prior to the execution of the Agreement and capital costs to be incurred after execution of the Agreement and before the Academy opens. The Academy opens on the first day that its pupils attend school at the Academy.

»ad0000041! 11

38)Annex 6A of the Agreement shows the capital expenditure incurred before execution of the Agreement. The Academy Trust has agreed with the Secretary of State the Capital Cash Flow Programme attached as Annex 6B to the Agreement which shows the projected cashflow of capital expenditure by the Academy Trust after execution of the Agreement.

39)Both parties recognise that as the project develops it may be necessary to revise costs in the Capital Cost Spreadsheet (Annex 5) and to move costs between spreadsheet elements in order to ensure that the project remains within its approved budget. Where the Academy Trust wishes to make such adjustments of over £10,000, it must submit the requested adjustment with the reasons for it to the Secretary of State for approval.

40)Where the Academy Trust foresees a significant change in the timing of capital expenditure, that is a change to the figures in Annex 6B of over £100,000, a revised Capital Cash Flow Programme must be submitted to the Secretary of State for approval. The Academy Trust must ensure that no pattern of spending is allowed to develop which cannot be contained within the approved capital expenditure limits. The Secretary of State must be informed immediately if any danger of any of the capital costs set out in Annex 5 being exceeded is foreseen so that steps can be taken to rectify the situation and ensure that the project remains within its capital cash limit.

Capital Expenditure Necessary to Establish the Academy

41)The Secretary of State and the Academy Trust hereby agree that the Academy will be constructed/refurbished in accordance with the architect's drawings and specification on materials set out at Annex 6 Dof the Agreement and that:

a. the amount of capital expenditure necessary to establish the Academy is £19,501,915 ("the Cash Limit"). The Cash Limit includes capital expenditure incurred for the purposes of or in connection with the establishment of the Academy prior to the date of this agreement as described in Annexes 5, 6A and 6B;

b. the Secretary of State will bear £17,058,915 of the Cash Limit and the Academy Trust will bear £2,443,000 of the Cash Limit (which figure includes a contribution of £443,000 by the Bishop of Leicester for the establishment of a Chaplaincy Centre within the Academy and a contribution of £400,000 by Leicester City Council);

c. the arrangements (including timing) for payments for these costs are set out in clause 44 and Annex 6B of the Agreement. Payment by the Secretary of State will be dependent on his approval of the matters set out in Annex 7 to the Agreement;

d. if the costs finally incurred for the purposes set out in clause 41(a) above are less than the cash limit, the costs borne by the Secretary of State shall be reduced accordingly and the Academy Trust shall pay the same amount as indicated in clause 41(b);

°ad000004l l 12

e. if at any stage it appears that the costs incurred for the purposes set out in clause 41(a) are likely to exceed the cash limit, the parties to the Agreement shall urgently consider how to reduce those costs, if necessary by amending the specification of the Academy;

f. if the costs incurred for the purposes set out in clause 41 (a) exceed the cash limit these additional costs shall be the responsibility of the Academy Trust except that the Secretary of State shall contribute up to 80% of any agreed necessary additional costs the need for which could not reasonably have been foreseen at the time the cash limit was set;

g. if the parties agree that additional capital expenditure to establish the Academy, other than that specified in clause 41(a) may be incurred then the parties shall divide such additional costs between them in such proportions as may be agreed between them. No such additional expenditure is to be incurred without prior agreement in writing between the parties.

Other Capital Expenditure

42)Any capital expenditure during the life of this Agreement beyond the cash limit referred to in clause 41(a) on which grant payments are sought from the Secretary of State will require the specific agreement of the Secretary of State. Such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. Unless the Academy Trust undertakes to meet such capital costs entirely itself such approved costs as are incurred will be shared in a proportion to be agreed between the Secretary of State and the Academy Trust in relation to, and having regard to the nature of, each such capital project. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, the proportion contributed by the Secretary of State will not be expected to exceed the proportion mentioned in clause 41(f) save that any capital expenditure required in order to meet the requirements of legislation enacted or made after the date of this Agreement shall be funded at least to the percentage referred to in clause 41(f) by the Secretary of State.

Conditions on Capital Grant

43)Any payment of capital grant under the Agreement is subject to the fulfilment of the following conditions:

a. such grants are used to provide accommodation constructed and equipped to standards agreed by the Secretary of State as described in Annex 7, or to defray other expenditure approved by the Secretary of State;

b. the payment of such grants is subject to the Academy Trust certifying and providing evidence that all planning and other consents necessary for the development and all related infrastructure to be completed have been obtained or put in place.

gad0000041I 13

Arrangements for Payment of Capital Grant

44)Capital grant will be paid monthly by the Secretary of State to the Academy Trust. Each month the Academy Trust must submit a claim for grant to the Secretary of State in the notified format with supporting invoices and certificates as requested by the Secretary of State from time to time. Capital grant will be paid within 21 days from the day on which a claim for grant is received if the claim is in the proper format, supported by the appropriate documentation and the conditions on its payment set out at clause 43 are complied with. If a dispute arises as to whether a grant claim is acceptable or not both parties undertake to attempt to resolve it in good faith.

Implementation Grant

45)The Secretary of State shall pay grant (known as "implementation grant") towards the establishment of the Academy. Implementation grant covers the recurrent expenditure that the parties agree is necessary to establish and open the Academy.

46)The Academy Trust shall prepare and submit to the Secretary of State for approval an Implementation Budget showing recurrent costs to be incurred before the Academy opens and for which grant is sought.

47)Both parties recognise that as the project develops it may be necessary to revise individual costs in the Implementation Budget and to move costs between budget headings in order to ensure that the project remains within its approved budget. Where the Academy Trust wishes to make such an adjustment of over £10,000, the reason for the change and a revised Implementation Budget must be submitted to the Secretary of State for approval.

Arrangements for Payment of Implementation Grant

48)The Secretary of State will pay implementation grant in accordance with the approved Implementation Budget. Payments will be made by monthly instalments. The Academy Trust shall submit to the Secretary of State by the 10th of each month a grant claim in a form specified by the Secretary of State. If the grant claim is acceptable the Secretary of State undertakes to pay the amount due by the 25th of the month. If a dispute arises over whether a grant claim or part of it is acceptable, both parties undertake to attempt to resolve the dispute in good faith.

49)Any amount of approved implementation grant in respect of which the expenditure has not been incurred by the Academy Trust, by the date on which the Academy opens, will lapse and no implementation grant will be payable in respect of that part of the approved implementation budget. Any amount of implementation grant which has been paid but remains unexpended on relevant expenditure by the date on which the Academy opens will, without prejudice to any other mode of recovery, be taken into account in determining the total amount of grant to be paid to the Academy after it has opened. Any amount of implementation grant which is found to have been used on ineligible expenditure

£•(1000004)1 14

will, without prejudice to any other mode of recovery, be taken into account in determining the total amount of grant to be paid to the Academy.

General Annual Grant

50)General Annual Grant will be paid by the Secretary of State to the Academy Trust in order to cover the normal running costs of the Academy. These costs will include, but are not limited to:

a. teachers' salaries and related costs (including full and part time teaching staff and seconded teachers);

b. non-teaching staff salaries and related costs (including educational support staff, administrative and clerical staff and manual and premises related staff);

c. employees' expenses;

d. the purchase, maintenance, repair and replacement of teaching and learning materials and other educational equipment including books, stationery, ICT equipment and software, sports and laboratory equipment and materials, other supplies and services;

e. examination fees;

f. repairs, servicing and maintenance of buildings (including redecoration, heating, plumbing, lighting etc); maintenance of grounds (including boundary fences and walls); cleaning materials and contract cleaning; water and sewage; fuel and light (including fuel oil, solid and other fuel, electricity and gas); rents; rates; purchase, maintenance, repairs and replacement of furniture and fittings;

g. insurance;

h. medical equipment and supplies;

i. staff development (including in-service training);

j. curriculum development;

k. the costs of providing school meals for pupils (including the cost of providing free school meals to pupils who are eligible to receive them) and discretionary grants to pupils to meet the cost of pupil support, including support for pupils with special educational needs or disabilities (taking account of the fact that separate additional money will be available for pupils with statements of special educational needs);

I. administration;

gad00000411 15

m. establishment expenses and other institutional costs.

51)Subject to clauses 54 to 56, GAG for each financial year of the Academy Trust will be the total of the following areas of funding;

a. Formula Funding: Funding comparable to the level of funding which would be provided through the funding formula of the LEA in whose area the Academy is situated, to a maintained school which had all of the Academy's relevant characteristics, including its number of pupils;

b. LEA Holdback: Funding representing a proportion of the LEA Education Budget money which the LEA would be able to retain, from the non-delegated elements of the Schools Block and the relevant items in the LEA Block, if the Academy were a maintained school. The proportion which this funding will represent will be based on the elements of the LEA's Section 52 Budget Return which are relevant to the Academy.

c. Specialist Schools Allowance: Funding equivalent to that which a maintained school with the Academy's characteristics would receive in respect of their participation in the specialist schools programme;

52)The GAG for the Academy will also include the following areas of funding for as long as they are necessary and equivalent funding is provided to maintained schools:

a. LGPS contributions: Whilst it is necessary for the Academy to incur extra costs in order to be a member of the LGPS scheme due to having a small number of employees partaking in the scheme, the Secretary of State will pay an extra amount of grant in respect of these costs each financial year. Both parties acknowledge that new ways of working are being explored to lessen these costs and if these are successful this element of GAG will reduce or cease accordingly;

b. School Standards Grant: Whilst this direct grant for maintained schools (Direct Grant to Schools) is paid by DfES, the Academy will receive an equivalent amount as part of its GAG each financial year;

c. Teachers Threshold Payments: Whilst maintained schools receive a separate grant from DfES in respect of teachers threshold payments, the Academy will receive funding on the same basis as maintained schools for all of its teachers which are entitled to threshold payments.

d. Relevant New Grants for Maintained Schools: Where the Secretary of State starts to pay new grants (which are not standards fund grants) for specific programmes in maintained schools which are relevant to Academies, the Academy will receive funding on a similar basis.

53)The basis of the pupil number count for the purposes of determining the Academy's GAG will be the Governing Body's estimate in November for numbers

g a d 0 0 0 0 0 4 l I ,| g

on roll in the following September. The basis of the GAG calculation, including any annual re-pricing which may be necessary, will be set out in the annual letter of funding except that the level of Teachers Threshold Payments will not be included in the letter and will depend on the information provided by the Academy in that financial year regarding how many teachers are entitled to the payments and at what level.

54)The Secretary of State reserves the right to make in year adjustments to the level of GAG payable to the Academy Trust in the following circumstances:

a. pupil numbers are 10% or more below estimates;

b. pupil numbers are 5% or more above estimates;

c. additional grants relevant to the Academy are made by the Secretary of State to maintained schools.

The Academy Trust should notify the Secretary of State if at any stage in the year pupil numbers vary from the estimates by the amounts set out in clause 54(a) or (b). The Secretary of State will base his assessment of the variation of pupil numbers on information provided by the Academy Trust and data from the school census' in Septlmber and January each year. The adjustments to the level of GAG may be in respect of any element of the GAG.

55)The Secretary of State recognises that:

a. in relation to Academies which open with intakes representing only a proportion of the final planned size of the Academy, payments based simply upon the number of pupils present are unlikely to be sufficient to meet the Academy's needs in the years before all age groups are present at their planned size (the "start-up period") because of a lack of economies of scale. The Secretary of State undertakes to pay an appropriately larger GAG in the start-up period than would be justified solely on the basis of the methods set out in clauses 51 and 52, in order to enable the Academy to operate effectively. The Academy will make a bid to the Secretary of State for this addition to GAG, based upon need and providing appropriate supporting evidence;

b. in relation to Academies which open with pupils transferred from one or more LEA-maintained schools which have closed, additional GAG resources will be required to take account of transitional costs including any costs associated with supporting the integration of pupils from the closed schools and - where necessary - to offer a dual curriculum.

56)During the start-up period or during the period when year groups are present who have transferred from a predecessor school or schools, the Secretary of State will pay a further element of GAG additional to that calculated in accordance with the methods set out in clauses 51 and 52 to allow the Academy to:

gadOOOOO-411 17

a. purchase a basic stock of teaching and learning materials (including library books, text books, software, stationery, science equipment and equipment for physical education) and other consumable materials;

b. meet the costs associated with the recruitment and induction of additional teaching and other staff.

After the start-up period these costs will be met through the ordinary GAG.

57)The Secretary of State recognises that if he serves notice of intention to terminate this Agreement under clause 88 the intake of new pupils during the 7 year notice period is likely to decline and that in such circumstances payments based simply upon the number of pupils attending the Academy are unlikely to be sufficient to meet the Academy's needs during the notice period. The Secretary of State undertakes to pay a reasonable and appropriately larger GAG in the notice period than would be justified solely on the basis of the methods set out in clauses 51 and 52, in order to enable the Academy to operate effectively.

Earmarked Annual Grant

58)Earmarked Annual Grant shall be paid by the Secretary of State to the Academy Trust in respect of either recurrent or capital expenditure for such specific purposes as may from time to time be agreed between the Secretary of State and the Academy Trust and as described in the relevant funding letter. The Academy is free to determine how best to use each of its EAGs within the scope of the grant set out in the relevant funding letter.

59)Where the Academy Trust is seeking a specific EAG in relation to any financial year, it shall submit a letter outlining its proposals and the reasons for its request to the Academies Division, Sanctuary Buildings, Great Smith Street, London SW1P3BT, by 15th February preceding the financial year in question.

Arrangements for Payment of GAG and EAG

60)The Secretary of State shall notify the Academy Trust in December preceding the start of each financial year of the GAG and EAG figures which, subject to Parliamentary approval, the Secretary of State plans for that year and of the assumptions and figures on which these are based.

61 )The amount of GAG for an Academy financial year will be determined annually by the Secretary of State. The amount of GAG will be notified to the Academy Trust in a funding letter not later than 1 April preceding that financial year ("the annual letter of funding"). The annual letter of funding will not include the amount that the Academy Trust will receive in respect of Teacher Threshold Payments whilst that grant is paid as a separate payment that will be notified later in the year on a date to be agreed. Amounts of EAG will be notified to the Company according to an agreed programme.

62)For the purposes of this Agreement, the Academy's financial year shall be deemed to run from September to August, in order to align it to the school

gad00000411 18

academic year. The Secretary of State undertakes to pay GAG in monthly instalments on or before the twenty fifth day of each month, each such instalment to fund the salaries and other payroll costs for the relevant month of all monthly paid employees and all other costs payable during the next following month. The detailed arrangements for payment will be set out in the annual letter of funding.

Other relevant funding

63)The Secretary of State shall meet a proportion of the costs arising from the inclusion of Academies in the Schedules to the Redundancy Payments (Continuity of Employment in Local Government) (Modification) Order 1999. The Secretary of State shall meet the costs of the employee's prior eligible service and the Academy Trust shall meet the costs of service in the Academy. The Academy shall seek the Secretary of State's consent for these redundancies, such consent not to be unreasonably withheld, before committing to the redundancies.

64)The Secretary of State may meet costs incurred by the Academy Trust in connection with the transfer of employees from a predecessor school under the Transfer of Undertakings (Protection of Employment) Regulations 1981. Payment of grant in respect of such costs is to be agreed between the parties on a case by case basis and the Academy Trust shall not budget on the basis that it will receive any grant in respect of such costs unless it is specifically notified that such grant will be paid.

65)The Academy Trust may also receive funding from LEAs in respect of the provision detailed in statements of special educational needs for pupils attending the Academy in accordance with the provisions of Section 483A of the Education Act 1996 and regulations made under that section. The Academy shall ensure that all provision detailed in statements of SEN is provided for such pupils.

66)The Academy Trust should also receive funding from the LEA in whose area it is located, from the Standards Fund. The scheme under which the Standards Fund money is to be distributed by the Secretary of State to LEAs and schools will permit LEAs to receive grants on behalf of Academies in the same way as they can do for maintained schools. The Academy must use any grants received under the Standards Fund in accordance with any conditions specified in relation to that grant. Grants paid to the Academy Trust from the Standards Fund are not paid under this Agreement.

Financial and Accounting Requirements

67)The headteacher shall be the Academy's Accounting Officer. The Accounting Officer will be personally responsible to the Trustees for ensuring regularity and propriety, and for the economic, efficient and effective use of resources (i.e. ensuring value for money), and administration of the financial affairs of the Academy. The Accounting Officer may delegate or appoint others, such as a Finance Director, to assist in carrying out these responsibilities.

68)The Academy shall abide by the provisions within the Academies Financial

gad00000411 19

Handbook, as published by the Department for Education and Skills and amended from time to time, which sets out in detail provisions for the financial management of the Academy including guidance on financial systems and controls and accounting and reporting requirements.

69)The formal budget plan must be approved each year by the Governing Body.

70)Any payment of grant by the Secretary of State is subject to his being satisfied as to the fulfilment by the Academy of the following conditions:

a) that in its conduct and operation the Academy shall apply financial and other controls which conform with the requirements both of propriety and of good financial management;

b) that arrangements have been made to maintain proper accounting records and that statements of income and expenditure and balance sheets may be produced in such form and frequency as the Secretary of State may from time to time reasonably direct;

c) that such financial statements are published at the end of each financial year (as defined in clause 62) in such form and manner as the Secretary of State may reasonably direct and a copy sent to him by 31 December each year. These should carry an audit report stating that, in the opinion of the auditors, the statements show a true and fair view of the Academy affairs and that the grants were used for the purposes intended;

d) that the Academy prepares and files with the Companies Registry such annual accounts as are required by the Companies Act 1985;

e) that a statement of the accounting policies used is sent to the Secretary of State with the financial statements;

f) that the Academy insures or procures insurance by another person of its assets in accordance with normal commercial practice or under the terms of any subsisting leases in respect of the leasehold interest of the site upon which the Academy is situated;

g) (i) that the Academy prepares and files with the Charity Commission annual accounts prepared in accordance with the Statement of Recommended Practice;

(ii) the governing body shall comply with their obligation under the Charities Act 1993 (or any statutory re-enactment or modification of that Act) with regard to the preparation of an annual report and its transmission to the Charity Commissioners;

h)The Governing Body shall secure that the Academy's accounts are audited annually by independent auditors appointed under arrangements approved by the Secretary of State.

71 )ln addition, and at his expense, the Secretary of State may instruct auditors to report to him on the adequacy and effectiveness of the accounting systems and

gad0000041 20

internal controls to standards determined by the Secretary of State and to make recommendations for improving the financial management of the Academy.

72)The books and accounts and all relevant records, files and reports of the Academy including those relating to financial controls, shall be open at all reasonable times to officials of the Department for Education and Skills and the National Audit Office and to contractors retained by the Department for Education and Skills or the National Audit Office for inspection or the carrying out of value for money studies; and the Academy shall secure that those officials and contractors are given reasonable assistance with their enquiries. For the purposes of this clause, relevant means in any way relevant to the provision and use of grants provided by the Secretary of State under this Agreement.

73)The Governing Body shall submit indicative budgets to the Secretary of State not later than by 15 February before the start of each Academy financial year. Such budgets shall set out clearly the prospective income and expenditure of the Academy and shall differentiate, and give adequate details of:

a) a statement of expected income for that year including cash donations and gifts in kind from sources other than GAG, EAG and grants from the Secretary of State towards capital expenditure, distinguishing between income from public funds including the national lottery and income from other sources;

b) a statement of proposed recurrent expenditure for that financial year;

c) a statement of proposed capital expenditure for that financial year.

74)With the exception of grant covered by clause 74c below, the Academy will be permitted to carry forward savings from GAG from one year to the next:

a) equivalent to 2% of the total GAG received in the preceding year, which it may use for any of the purposes for which GAG is paid including all expenditure permitted under sub-clause (b) below;

b) equivalent to a further 10% of the total GAG received in that year, or such higher figure as may from time to time be agreed, which it may use on the upkeep and improvement of premises including the costs of equipment and routine repairs and maintenance and on capital expenditure;

c) Any additional grant provided over and above that set out in clause 51 and 52 and made in accordance with clause 55 and 56, may be carried forward without limitation or deduction until the start up period or the circumstances set out in clauses 55 and 56 come to an end.

75)Any savings of GAG not allowed under clause 74 will be taken into account in the payment of subsequent grant.

76)The Governing Body may also accumulate funds from private sources or public sources other than grant from the Secretary of State for application to the benefit of the Academy as it sees fit. Any surplus arising from private sources or public sources other than grant from the Secretary of State shall be separately identified in the balance sheet.

gad00000411

77)The Academy Trust shall not, without the prior written consent of the Secretary of State which shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed:

a) give any guarantees, indemnities (except such as are given in normal contractual relations) or letters of comfort;

b) write off any debts or liabilities owed to it above a value to be set out in the annual funding letter, nor offer to make any ex gratia payments;

c) make any freehold sale or purchase; or

d) grant or take up any leasehold or tenancy agreement for a term exceeding three years.

78)Each discovered loss of an amount exceeding the amount set out in the annual letter of funding, and arising from suspected theft or fraud, shall be reported by the Governing Body to the Secretary of State at the earliest opportunity.

79)lt is the responsibility of the Governing Body to ensure that the Academy balances its budget from year to year.

Borrowing Powers

80)The Academy Trust shall not run an overdraft beyond such amount (to cover irregularities in cash flow) as may from time to time be both approved by the Academy Trust in General Meeting and in writing by the Secretary of State, such approval by the Secretary of State not to be unreasonably delayed or withheld, and subject to any conditions he may reasonably impose. The Academy Trust shall not borrow except with the written consent of the Secretary of State against future years' current grant, or by using as collateral assets purchased wholly or partly out of monies provided by the Secretary of State. The Academy Trust shall not borrow against land and buildings transferred to it for less than the market price from an LEA or trustees of a voluntary aided school. Provided always that nothing in this clause shall prevent the Academy Trust from borrowing (whether by way of overdraft or otherwise) prior to the opening of the Academy nor from borrowing where such borrowing is made necessary by the failure of the Secretary of State to make in a timely fashion payments (whether of GAG or EAG or otherwise) agreed to be made by him under this Agreement.

DISPOSAL OF ASSETS

81)Where the Academy Trust acquires assets for a nil consideration or at an under value it shall be treated for the purpose of this Agreement as having incurred expenditure equal to the market value of those assets at the time that they were acquired. This provision shall not apply to assets transferred at nil or nominal consideration and which were previously used for the purposes of a school or where transferred from an LEA; the value of which assets shall be disregarded.

82)The sale, or disposal by other means, or reinvestment of proceeds from the disposal, of a capital asset by an Academy Trust shall require the consent of the Secretary of State where:

gad0000041I 22

a) the Secretary of State paid capital grant in excess of £20,000 for the asset; or

b) the asset was transferred to the Academy Trust from a Local Education Authority for no or nominal consideration

such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed. Furthermore, reinvestment exceeding £1m or with other special features will be subject to Parliamentary approval.

83)This clause applies in the event, during the lifetime of this agreement, of the disposal of a capital asset for which capital grant of any amount was paid, where the asset was acquired by the Academy Trust at market value. In this event, the Academy Trust shall repay to the Secretary of State the same proportion of the proceeds of the disposal as equates with the proportion of the original cost met by the Secretary of State, unless the Secretary of State agrees to some or all of the proceeds being retained by the Academy Trust for its charitable purposes.

84)This clause applies in the event, during the lifetime of this agreement, that the Secretary of State consents to the disposal of an asset which was transferred to the Academy Trust from a Local Education Authority for no or nominal consideration. In this event the Secretary of State may give consent on the basis that all or part of the proceeds of the disposal should be made over to the Local Education Authority from which the asset was transferred, taking into account the amount of the proceeds to be reinvested by the Academy Trust. The Secretary of State will have regard to any representations from the Academy Trust and the Local Education Authority from which the asset was transferred before giving a consent under this clause.

85)Except with the consent of the Secretary of State, the Academy Trust shall not dispose of assets for a consideration less than the best that can reasonably be obtained.

TERMINATION

86)Subject to prior termination of this agreement under clauses 88 - 94, the Secretary of State shall continue payments in respect of current expenditure for a period of not less than seven years.

87)Either party may give seven years written notice of its intention to terminate this Agreement, such notice to expire on 31 August in any year.

88) If the Secretary of State is of the opinion that the Academy no longer has the characteristics set out in clause 8 or that the conditions and requirements set out in clauses 9 - 3 3 are not being met, or is otherwise in breach of the provisions of this Agreement, the Secretary of State may give notice of his provisional intention to terminate this Agreement.

89)Any such notice shall be in writing and shall:

a) state the grounds on which he considers the Academy no longer has the characteristics set out in clause 8 or is not meeting the conditions and requirements of clauses 9 - 33 or is otherwise in breach of the provisions of

gad0000041I 23

this Agreement;

b) specify the measures needed to remedy the situation;

c) specify the date by which these measures are to be implemented; and

d) state the form in which the Governing Body is to provide its response and the date by which it must be provided.

90)lf no response is received by the date specified in clause 89d, the Secretary of State may give the Governing Body 12 months, or such lesser period as he considers appropriate in the circumstances, written notice of his intention to terminate this Agreement.

91 )lf a response is received by the date specified in clause 89d, the Secretary of State shall consider it, and any representations made by the Governing Body, and shall, within 3 months of its receipt, indicate that:

a) he is content with the response and that the measures which he specified are being implemented; or

b) he is content, subject to any further measures he specifies being implemented by a specified date or any evidence he requires that implementation of such measures have been successfully completed; or

c) he is not satisfied, that he does not believe that he can be satisfied, and that he will proceed to terminate the Agreement.

92)ln the circumstances of clause 91c the Secretary of State shall notify the Governing Body why he believes that he cannot be satisfied and, if so requested by the Governing Body within thirty days from such notification, he shall meet a deputation from the members and governors of the Academy to discuss his concerns. If following such meeting he has good reasons for remaining satisfied that the Academy does not and will not have the characteristics set out in clause 8 or does not and will not meet the conditions and requirements set out in clauses 9 - 33 or does not and will not otherwise comply with the provisions of this Agreement, he shall give the Governing Body twelve months written notice of his termination of this Agreement.

93)lf the Secretary of State has cause to serve a notice on the Governing Body under s.165 of the Education Act 2002 and the matters specified in the notice are not remedied, the period of twelve months notice referred to in clause 90 may be shortened to a period deemed appropriate by the Secretary of State.

94)The Secretary of State may at any time by notice in writing terminate this Agreement forthwith on the occurrence of any of the following events:-

a) the Academy Trust calls a meeting of its creditors (whether formal or informal) or enters into any composition or arrangement (whether formal or informal) with its creditors; or

b) the Academy Trust proposes a voluntary arrangement within Section 1 of the

gad00000411 24

Insolvency Act 1986; or

c) the Academy Trust is unable to pay its debts within the meaning of Section 123 of the Insolvency Act 1986 provided that, for the purposes of this Clause. Section 123 (1)(a) of the Insolvency Act 1986 shall have effect as if the amount of £10,000 was substituted for £750. The Academy Trust shall not be deemed unable to pay its debts for the purposes of this clause if any such demand as is mentioned in the said Section is being contested in good faith by the Academy; or

d) the Academy Trust has a receiver (and manager with the exception of Receivers and Managers appointed by the Charity Commission under the Charities Act 1993 or any subsequent re-enactment of that Act), administrator or administrative receiver appointed over all or any part of its undertakings, assets or income; or

e) any restraint, execution or other process is levied or enforced on any of the Academy Trust's property and is not paid out, withdrawn or discharged within fifteen Business Days; or

f) the Academy Trust has passed a resolution for its winding up; or

g) the Academy Trust has a petition presented to any Court for its winding up or for an administration order; or

h) the Academy has ceased to operate as a Academy (except where such cessation occurs temporarily by reason of an event of Force Majeure).

"Business Days" in this clause, means any day other than a Saturday, a Sunday, Christmas Day, Good Friday or a day which is a bank holiday within the meaning of the Banking and Financial Dealings Act 1971.

Effect of Termination

95)ln the event of termination of this agreement, however occurring, the school shall cease to be an Academy.

96)If the Secretary of State terminates this Agreement for reasons other than that the Academy no longer has the characteristics set out in clause 8, or is no longer meeting the conditions and requirements set out in clauses 9 - 33 or is otherwise in breach of the provisions of this Agreement, the Secretary of State shall indemnify the Academy Trust.

97)The amount of any such indemnity shall be determined by the Secretary of State having regard to any representations made to him by the Academy Trust, and shall be paid at such times and in such manner as the Secretary of State may reasonably think fit.

98)The amounts and categories of expenditure incurred by the Academy Trust in consequence of the termination of the Agreement in respect of which the Secretary of State shall indemnify the Academy Trust include (but not by way of limitation), staff compensation and redundancy payments, compensation

gad000004l 25

payments in respect of broken contracts, expenses of disposing of assets or adapting them for other purposes, legal and other professional fees, and dissolution expenses.

99)ln the event of the termination of this Agreement however occurring the Secretary of State shall procure that his nominee shall resign as a member of the Academy Trust and shall co-operate in making any associated amendments to the Academy Trust Articles of Association.

100) Subject to clause 101, on the termination of this agreement, however occurring, the Academy Trust shall repay to the Secretary of State a sum in respect of the capital contribution made by him under clauses 41-42 above. The amount to be repaid to the Secretary of State shall be a percentage of the value of the assets belonging to the Academy Trust at the date of termination (or by agreement with the Secretary of State) at the date of subsequent disposal of those assets, such percentage to be the same as the percentage of the capital contribution made by the Secretary of State to the original value of those assets, whether that contribution was made on the establishment of the Academy or later.

101) The Secretary of State may waive in whole or in part the repayment due under the above clause if:

a) The Academy Trust is unable to realise the market value of land or premises because they are returned to the Local Education Authority at less than market value; or

b) The Academy Trust obtains his permission to invest the proceeds of sale for its charitable objects; or

c) The Secretary of State directs all or part of the repayment to be paid to the Local Education Authority.

102) If any land or premises of the Academy were acquired from a Local Education Authority by a scheme under Schedule 35A of the Education Act 1996 or otherwise at less than the market price, and the Secretary of State does not make a scheme as provided for in Schedule 35A (Paragraph 8) of the Education Act 1996 , the Academy Trust may dispose of its interest in that land or premises but only with the consent of the Secretary of State, who shall have regard to any representations from the Academy Trust and the Local Education Authority from which the land was transferred before giving or withholding that consent.

GENERAL

103) Without prejudice to any other provision of this Agreement, the Secretary of State acting reasonably may from time to time call for information on, inter alia, the Academy's:

a) curriculum;

b) arrangements for the assessment of pupils;

gad00000411 26

c) targets, including those set in accordance with the provisions of clause 14;

d) teaching staff including numbers, qualifications, experience, salaries, and teaching loads;

e) class sizes;

f) outreach work with other schools and the local community;

g) operation of the admission criteria and over subscription arrangements for the Academy including numbers of applications for places and the number and characteristics of pupils accepted for admission;

h) numbers of pupils excluded (including permanent and fixed term exclusions);

i) levels of authorised and unauthorised attendance;

j) the Academy's charging and remissions policies and the operation of those policies;

k) organisation, operation and building management;

I) financial controls; and

m) membership and proceedings of the governing body.

104) The Governing Body shall make such information available to the Secretary of State, in such form and manner and at such times as may reasonably be required. The Secretary of State shall provide the Governing Body with such information as they may reasonably require of him for the running of the Academy.

Access by the Secretary of State's Officers

105) The Governing Body shall allow access to the premises of the Academy at any reasonable time to DfES officials. All records, files and reports relating to the running of the Academy shall be available to them at any reasonable time. The Governing Body shall provide the Department in advance with papers relating to all meetings of the Governing Body of the Academy and of members of the Academy. Two DfES officials shall be entitled to attend and to speak at all such meetings, but shall withdraw from any discussion of the Academy's relationship with the Secretary of State or any discussion of bids for funding to the Secretary of State. The Academy shall take any steps which are required to secure its compliance with the obligations imposed by this clause of the agreement.

106) The Academy shall ensure that:

i) the agenda for every meeting of the Governing Body;

ii) the draft minutes of every such meeting, if they have been approved by the person acting as chairman of that meeting;

iii) the signed minutes of every such meeting; and

gad0000041I 27

iv) any report, document or other paper considered at any such meeting,

are made available for inspection at the Academy and, as soon as is reasonably practicable, sent to the DfES.

107) There may be excluded from any item required to be made available and sent to the DfES by virtue of clause 106, any material relating to: a) a named teacher or other person employed, or proposed to be employed, at

the Academy;

b) a named pupil at, or candidate for admission to, the Academy; and

c) any matter which, by reason of its nature, the Governing Body are satisfied should remain confidential. - >

Notices

108) Any notice or other communication concerning this Agreement shall be sent, in the case of a notice or communication from the Secretary of State to the Governing Body at Church House 3/5 St Martin's East Leicester LE1 5FX or such other addressee/address as may be notified in writing from time to time by the Academy and, in the case of a notice or communication from the Academy to the Secretary of State to Head of Academies Division, Department for Education and Skills, Sanctuary Buildings, Great Smith Street, London SW1P 3BT; or such other address as may be notified from time to time by the Secretary of State and where any such notice or communication is sent by post, unless the contrary is proved, it shall be deemed, subject to satisfactory proof of posting, to be effected at the time at which the letter would be received in the ordinary course of post.

109) This Agreement may be amended in writing at any time by agreement between the Secretary of State and the Academy Trust.

110) The service by the Secretary of State of a notice of termination under any clause of this Agreement shall not prejudice the ability of the Academy (if it wishes to do so) during the notice period to admit pupils in accordance with the provisions of clause 16 and Annex 2 to this Agreement and to receive GAG and EAG in respect of them.

111) The Secretary of State and the Academy Trust recognise the difficulties in catering in this Agreement for all the circumstances which may arise in relation to the Academy and undertake in good faith to conduct such consultations as may from time to time be desirable in order to promote the interests of the Academy throughout the period of this Agreement.

gadOOOWMH 28

Annex 1

Memorandum and Articles of the Samworth Academy

THE COMPANIES ACTS 1985 AND 1989

A COMPANY LIMITED BY GUARANTEE

AND NOT HAVING A SHARE CAPITAL

MEMORANDUM OF ASSOCIATION OF

THE SAMWORTH ACADEMY Incorporated on

16th February 2005

Registered Office Church House

3/5 St Martin's East Leicester LE1 5FX

gad00000411 30


A COMPANY LIMITED BY GUARANTEE AND NOT HAVING A SHARE CAPITAL

MEMORANDUM OF ASSOCIATION OF THE SAMWORTH ACADEMY

1. The Company's name is THE SAMWORTH ACADEMY (and in this document

it is called "the Trust").

2. The Trust's registered office is to be situated in England and Wales.

3. The Trust's objects ("the Objects") are to advance for the public benefit

education in the United Kingdom, in particular but without prejudice to the

generality of the foregoing by establishing, maintaining, carrying on, managing

and developing a school offering a broad curriculum but with a specialism in

business and enterprise ("the Academy"). The Objects are to be conducted in

accordance with the principles of the Church of England.

4. In furtherance of the Objects but not further or otherwise the Trust may

exercise the following powers:-

(a) to draw, make, accept, endorse, discount, execute and issue

promissory notes, bills, cheques and other instruments, and to operate

bank accounts in the name of the Trust;

(b) to raise funds and to invite and receive contributions provided that in

raising funds the Trust shall not undertake any substantial permanent

trading activities and shall conform to any relevant statutory

regulations;

(c) to acquire, alter, improve and (subject to such consents as may be

required by law) to charge or otherwise dispose of property;

gad00000411 31

subject to clause 5(g) below to employ such staff, as are necessary for

the proper pursuit of the Objects and to make all reasonable and

necessary provision for the payments of pensions and superannuation

to staff and their dependants: Provided that such staff shall not be

governors, save for the head teacher of the Academy and staff

governors elected in accordance with the Academy's Articles of

Association;

to establish or support, whether financially or otherwise, any charitable

trusts, associations or institutions formed for all or any of the Objects;

to co-operate with other charities, other independent and maintained

schools, voluntary bodies and statutory authorities operating in

furtherance of the Objects and to exchange information and advice with

them;

to pay out of funds of the Trust the costs, charges and expenses of and

incidental to the formation and registration of the Trust;

to establish, maintain, carry on, manage and develop the Academy at

The Eyres Monsell Estate, Leicester;

to offer scholarships, exhibitions, prizes and awards to pupils and

former pupils, and otherwise to encourage and assist pupils and former

pupils;

to provide educational facilities and services to students of all ages and

the wider community for the public benefit;

to carry out research into the development and application of new

techniques in education in particular in relation to the Academy's area

of curricular specialisation and to its approach to curriculum

development and delivery and to publish the results of such research,

32

and to develop means of benefiting from application of the experience

of industry, commerce, other schools and the voluntary sector to the

education of pupils in Academies;

subject to such consents as may be required by law to borrow and

raise money for the furtherance of the Objects in such manner and on

such security as the Trust may think fit;

to invest the moneys of the Trust not immediately required for the

furtherance of its Objects in or upon such investments, securities or

property as may be thought fit, to hold the same as investments and to

sell, exchange, carry and dispose of the same, subject nevertheless to

such conditions (if any) and such consents (if any) as may for the time

being be imposed or required by law;

to provide indemnity insurance to cover the liability of governors which

by virtue of any rule of law would otherwise attach to them in respect of

any negligence, default, breach of trust or breach of duty of which they

may be guilty in relation to the Trust: Provided that any such insurance

shall not extend to any claim arising from any act or omission which the

governors knew to be a breach of trust or breach of duty or which was

committed by the governors in reckless disregard of whether it was a

breach of trust or breach of duty or not and provided also that any such

insurance shall not extend to the costs of any unsuccessful defence to

a criminal prosecution brought against the governors in their capacity

as governors;

to establish subsidiary companies to carry on any trade or business for

the purpose of raising funds for the Academy;

to do all such other lawful things as are necessary for or are incidental

to or conducive to the achievement of the Objects.

33

1

5. The income and property of the Trust shall be applied solely towards the

promotion of the Objects and no part shall be paid or transferred, directly or 4

indirectly, by way of dividend, bonus or otherwise by way of profit, to members

of the Trust, and no governor shall be appointed to any office of the Trust paid

by salary or fees or receive any remuneration or other benefit in money or

money's worth from the Trust. Provided that nothing in this document shall

prevent the payment in good faith by the Trust:-

(a) of the usual professional charges for business done by any governor f

who is a solicitor, accountant or other person engaged in a profession,

or by any partner of his or hers, when instructed by the Trust to act in a

professional capacity on its behalf: Provided that at no time shall a

majority of the governors benefit under this provision and that a

governor shall withdraw from any meeting at which his or her

appointment or remuneration, or that of his or her partner, is under

discussion; •

(b) of reasonable and proper remuneration for any services rendered to

the Trust by any member, officer or servant of the Trust who is not a

governor;

(c) of interest on money lent by any member of the Trust or governor at a

reasonable and proper rate per annum not exceeding 2 per cent less •

than the published base lending rate of a clearing bank to be selected

by the governors;

« (d) of fees, remuneration or other benefit in money or money's worth to

any company of which a governor may also be a member holding not

more than 1/100th part of the issued capital of that company;

(e) of reasonable and proper rent (as determined by an independent

valuer appointed by the Trust) for premises demised or let by any

member of the Trust or a governor; ^

g a d 0 0 0 0 0 4 ] 1 o A

(

(f) to any governor of reasonable out-of-pocket expenses;

(g) of reasonable and proper remuneration to any governor of the

Academy who is employed by the Trust at the Academy established or

continued by the Trust: Provided that at no time shall a majority of the

governors benefit under this provision and that a governor shall

withdraw from any meeting at which his or her appointment,

remuneration or terms or conditions specific to him or her at the

Academy are under discussion;

(h) of any premium in respect of any indemnity insurance to cover the

liability of the governors which by virtue of any rule of law would

otherwise attach to them in respect of any negligence, default or

breach of trust or breach of duty of which they may be guilty in relation

to the Trust: Provided that any such insurance shall not extend to any

claim arising from any act or omission which governors knew to be a

breach of trust or breach of duty or which was committed by the

governors in reckless disregard to whether it was a breach of trust or

breach of duty or not and provided also that any such insurance shall

not extend to the costs of any unsuccessful defence to a criminal

prosecution brought against governors in their capacity as directors of

the Trust.

6. The liability of the members of the Trust is limited.

7. Every member of the Trust undertakes to contribute such amount as may be

required (not exceeding £10) to the Trust's assets if it should be wound up

while he or she is a member or within one year after he or she ceases to be a

member, for payment of the Trust's debts and liabilities before he or she

ceases to be a member, and of the costs, charges and expenses of winding

up, and for the adjustment of the rights of the contributories among

themselves.

gad00000411 35

36

gad00000411 37



ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION OF

THE SAMWORTH ACADEMY Incorporated on

16th February 2005

Registered Office Church House

3/5 St Martin's East Leicester LE1 5FX

38



ARTICLES OF ASSOCIATION OF THE SAMWORTH ACADEMY

INTERPRETATION

1. In these Articles:-

"the Act" means the Companies Act 1985 including any statutory

modification or re enactment thereof for the time being in

force;

"the Academy" means The Samworth Academy as referred to in clause 3

of the memorandum and established by the Trust;

"the Trust"

articles;

means the company intended to be regulated by these

"the articles" means these articles of association of the Trust;

"clear days" in relation to the period of a notice means the period

excluding the day when the notice is given or deemed to

be given and the day of which it is given or on which it is

to take effect;

"clerk" means the secretary of the Trust or any other person

appointed to perform the duties of the secretary of the

Trust, including a joint, assistant or deputy secretary; the

secretary shall be known as the 'clerk' under article 66;

gad00000411 39

"executed" includes any mode of execution;

"the memorandum"

"the governors"

means the memorandum of association of the Trust;

means the directors of the Trust (and "governor" has a

corresponding meaning);

"appointed governor" means a sponsor, LEA, co-opted or additional governor

appointed under these articles;

"elected governor" articles;

means a parent or staff governor elected under these

"the Governing Body" means the governors;

"head teacher" means the head teacher of the Academy;

"the LEA" means Leicester City Council Local Education Authority

"member" means a member of the Trust and someone who as such is bound by the undertaking contained in clause 7 of the memorandum;

"Principal Sponsors" means The Bishop of Leicester (ex officio) (but during any vacancy in the See of Leicester then The Leicester Diocesan Board of Education Trustees (Registered) shall be a Principal Sponsor in his place) and Mr David Chetwode Samworth CBE, DL (but if he dies or is unable to act as a Principal Sponsor then a person nominated by the Trustees of The Samworth Foundation (Registered Charity number 265642) shall be a Principal Sponsor in his place) and the said Bishop of Leicester and Mr David Chetwode Samworth as Principal Sponsors are subscribers to the memorandum and articles;

gadOOOOO*]] 40

"the seal" means the common seal of the Trust if it has one;

"Secretary of State" means the Secretary of State for Education and Skills;

sponsor governor means a governor appointed by one of the Principal

Sponsors and includes a Principal Sponsor who has

appointed himself as sponsor governor

"staff' means a person employed to work at the Academy

(either under a contract of employment or a contract for

services)

"the United Kingdom" means Great Britain and Northern Ireland.

Words importing the masculine gender only shall include the feminine gender.

Words importing the singular number only shall include the plural number, and vice

versa.

Subject as aforesaid, words or expressions contained in these articles shall, unless

the context requires otherwise, bear the same meaning as in the Act.

OBJECTS

2. The Trust is established for the objects expressed in the memorandum.

MEMBERS

3. The members of the Trust shall comprise:

(a) The Principal Sponsors;

(b) 1 person appointed by each of the Principal Sponsors;

(c) 1 person appointed by the Secretary of State;

(d) the chair of the Governing Body

(e) any person appointed under article 6;

41

4. Each of the persons entitled to appoint members in article 3 shall have the

right from time to time by written notice delivered to the Trust's registered

office to remove any member appointed by them and to appoint a

replacement member to fill a vacancy whether resulting from such removal or

otherwise.

5. If any of the persons entitled to appoint members in article 3 die or become

legally incapacitated their right to appoint members under these articles shall

vest in the remaining members.

6. The members may agree unanimously in writing to appoint such additional members as they think fit and may unanimously in writing agree to remove any such additional members.

7. Every person nominated to be a member of the Trust shall either sign a

written consent to become a member or sign the register of members on

becoming a member.

8. The other members may in their absolute discretion permit any member to resign provided that after such resignation the number of members is not less than three. A member shall cease to be one immediately on the receipt by the Trust of a notice in writing signed by the person or persons entitled to remove him under articles 4 or 6 provided that no such notice shall take effect when the number of members is less than three unless it contains or is accompanied by the appointment of a replacement member.

GENERAL MEETINGS

9. The Trust shall hold an Annual General Meeting each year in addition to any

other meetings in that year, and shall specify the meeting as such in the

notices calling it; and not more than fifteen months shall elapse between the

date of one Annual General Meeting of the Trust and that of the next.

gadOQWMMH 42

Provided that so long as the Trust holds its first Annual General Meeting

• within eighteen months of its incorporation, it need not hold it in the year of its

incorporation or in the following year. The Annual General Meeting shall be

held at such time and place as the governors shall appoint. All general

meetings other than Annual General Meetings shall be called Extraordinary

General Meetings.

10. The governors may call general meetings and, on the requisition of members

pursuant to the provisions of the Act, shall forthwith proceed to convene an

Extraordinary General Meeting for a date not later than eight weeks after the

receipt of the requisition. If there are not within the United Kingdom sufficient

governors to call a general meeting, any governor or any member of the Trust

may call a general meeting.

NOTICE OF GENERAL MEETINGS

11. An Annual General Meeting and an Extraordinary General Meeting called for

the passing of a special resolution appointing a person as a governor shall be

called by at least twenty-one clear days' notice. All other Extraordinary

General Meetings shall be called by at least fourteen clear days' notice but a

general meeting may be called by shorter notice if it is so agreed

(a) in the case of an Annual General Meeting, by all the members entitled

to attend and vote; and

(b) in the case of any other meeting by a majority in number of members

having a right to attend and vote, being a majority together holding not

less than 95 per cent of the total voting rights at the meetings of all the

members.

The notice shall specify the time and place of the meeting and the general

nature of the business to be transacted and, in the case of an Annual General

Meeting, shall specify the meeting as such.

The notice shall be given to all the members, to the governors and auditors.

gad0000041I 43

12. The accidental omission to give notice of a meeting to, or the non-receipt of

notice of a meeting by, any person entitled to receive notice shall not

invalidate the proceedings at that meeting.

PROCEEDINGS AT GENERAL MEETINGS. 13. No business shall be transacted at any meeting unless a quorum is present.

A member counts towards the quorum by being present either in person or by

proxy. Three persons entitled to vote upon the business to be transacted,

each being a member or a duly authorised representative of a member

organisation, or one tenth of the total number of such persons for the time

being, whichever is the greater, shall constitute a quorum provided that there

must be present at every meeting each Principal Sponsor or the member

appointed by him.

14. If a quorum is not present within half an hour from the time appointed for the meeting, or if during a meeting a quorum ceases to be present, the meeting shall stand adjourned to the same day in the next week at the same time and place or to such time and place as the governors may determine.

15. The chairman, if any, of the governors or in his absence some other governor nominated by the governors shall preside as chairman of the meeting, but if neither the chairman nor such other governor (if any) be present within fifteen minutes after the time appointed for the holding the meeting and willing to act the governors present shall elect one of their number to be chairman and, if there is only one governor present and willing to act, he shall be the chairman.

16. If no governor is willing to act as chairman, or if no governor is present within fifteen minutes after the time appointed for holding the meeting, the members present and entitled to vote shall choose one of their number to be chairman.

17. A governor shall, notwithstanding that he is not a member, be entitled to attend and speak at any general meeting.

g«1000QQ41] 44

18. The chairman may, with the consent of a meeting at which a quorum is

present (and shall if so directed by the meeting), adjourn the meeting from

time to time and from place to place, but no business shall be transacted at

any adjourned meeting other than the business which might properly have

been transacted at the meeting had the adjournment not taken place. When a

meeting is adjourned for fourteen days or more, at least seven clear days'

notice shall be given specifying the time and place of the adjourned meeting

and the general nature of the business to be transacted. Otherwise it shall

not be necessary to give any such notice.

19. A resolution put to the vote of the meeting shall be decided on a show of

hands unless before, or on the declaration of the result of the show of hands a

poll is duly demanded. Subject to the provisions of the Act, a poll may be

demanded:-

(a) by the chairman; or

(b) by at least two members having the right to vote at the meeting ; or

(c) by a member or members representing not less than one-tenth of the

total voting rights of all the members having the right to vote at the meeting.

20. Unless a poll is duly demanded a declaration by the chairman that a

resolution has been carried or carried unanimously, or by a particular majority,

or lost, or not carried by a particular majority and an entry to that effect in the

minutes of the meeting shall be conclusive evidence of the fact without proof

of the number or proportion of the votes recorded in favour of or against such

resolution.

21. The demand for a poll may be withdrawn, before the poll is taken, but only

with the consent of the chairman. The withdrawal of a demand for a poll shall

not invalidate the result of a show of hands declared before the demand for

the poll was made.

22. A poll shall be taken as the chairman directs and he may appoint scrutineers

(who need not be members) and fix a time and place for declaring the results.

gad00000411 45

The result of the poll shall be deemed to be the resolution of the meeting at

which the poll was demanded.

23. In the case of an equality of votes, whether on a show of hands or on a poll,

the chairman of the meeting shall be entitled to a casting vote in addition to

any other vote he may have.

24. A poll demanded on the election of the chairman or on a question of

adjournment shall be taken immediately. A poll demanded on any other

question shall be taken either immediately or at such time and place as the

chairman directs not being more than thirty days after the poll is demanded.

The demand for a poll shall not prevent continuance of a meeting for the

transaction of any business other that the question on which the poll is

demanded. If a poll is demanded before the declaration of the result of a

show of hands and the demand is duly withdrawn, the meeting shall continue

as if the demand had not been made.

25. No notice need be given of a poll not taken immediately if the time and place at which it is to be taken are announced at the meeting at which it is demanded. In other cases at least seven clear days' notice shall be given specifying the time and place at which the poll is to be taken.

26. A resolution in writing executed by or on behalf of each member who would have been entitled to vote upon it if it had been proposed at a general meeting at which he was present shall be as effectual as if it had been passed at a general meeting duly convened and held and may consist of several instruments in the like form each executed by or on behalf of one or more members.

VOTES OF MEMBERS

27. Subject to article 23, on the show of hands every member present in person shall have one vote. On a poll every member present in person or by proxy shall have one vote.

g«J0000041J 46

28. A member in respect of whom an order has been made by any court having

jurisdiction (whether in the United Kingdom or elsewhere) in matters

concerning mental disorder may vote, whether on a show of hands or on a

poll, by his receiver, curator bonis or other person authorised in that behalf

appointed by that court, and any such receiver, curator bonis or other person

may, on a poll, vote by proxy. Evidence to the satisfaction of the governors of

the authority of the person claiming to exercise the right to vote shall be

deposited at the office, or at such other place as is specified in accordance

with the articles for the deposit of instruments of proxy, not less than 48 hours

before the time appointed for holding the meeting or adjourned meeting at

which the right to vote is to be exercised and in default the right to vote shall

not be exercisable.

29. No member shall be entitled to vote at any general meeting unless all moneys

then payable by him to the Trust pursuant to clause 7 of the memorandum

have been paid.

30. No objections shall be raised to the qualification of any voter except at the

meeting or adjourned meeting at which the vote objected to is tendered, and

every vote not disallowed at the meeting shall be valid. Any objection made in

due time shall be referred to the chairman whose decision shall be final and

conclusive.

31. An instrument appointing a proxy shall be in writing, executed by or on behalf

of the appointer and shall be in the following form (or in a form as near thereto

as circumstances allow or in any other form which is usual or which the

governors may approve) -.

"I/We, , of , being a member/members of the above named trust,

hereby appoint of or failing him of as my/our proxy to

vote in my/our name[s] and on my/our behalf at the annual/extraordinary

general meeting of the Trust to be held on 200[ ], and at any adjournment

thereof.

°ad0000041I

Signed on 200[ ]"

32. Where it is desired to afford members an opportunity of instructing the proxy

how he shall act the instrument appointing a proxy shall be in the following

form (or in a form as near thereto as circumstances allow or in any other form

which is usual or which the governors may approve):-

"l/We, of , being a member/members of the above-named trust,

hereby appoint.... of , or failing him of as my/our proxy to vote

in my/our name[s] and on my/our behalf at the annual/extraordinary general

meeting of the Trust, to be held on .... 200[ ], and at any adjournment thereof.

This form is to be used in respect of the resolutions mentioned below as

follows:

Resolution No. 1 *for * against

Resolution No. 2 *for * against.

* Strike out whichever is not desired.

Unless otherwise instructed, the proxy may vote as he thinks fit or abstain

from voting.

Signed on .... 200[ ]"

33. The instrument appointing a proxy and any authority under which it is

executed or a copy of such authority certified by a notary or in some other

way approved by the governors may -

(a) be deposited at the office or at such other place within the United

Kingdom as is specified in the notice convening the meeting or in any

instrument of proxy sent out by the Trust in relation to the meeting not

less than 48 hours before the time for holding the meeting or adjourned

meeting at which the person named in the instrument proposes to vote,

or

(b) in the case of a poll taken more than 48 hours after it is demanded, be

deposited as aforesaid after the poll has been demanded and not less

than 24 hours before the time appointed for the taking of the poll;

gad000004]I 48

(c) where the poll is not taken forthwith but is taken not more than 48

hours after it was demanded, be delivered at the meeting at which the

poll was demanded to the chairman or to the clerk or to any governor;

and an instrument of proxy which is not deposited or delivered in a manner so

permitted shall be invalid.

34. A vote given or poll demanded by proxy or by the duly authorised

representative of a corporation shall be valid notwithstanding the previous

determination of the authority of the person voting or demanding a poll unless

notice of the determination was received by the Trust at the office or at such

other place at which the instrument of proxy was duly deposited before the

commencement of the meeting or adjourned meeting at which the vote given

or the poll demanded or (or in the case of a poll taken otherwise than on the

same day as the meeting or adjourned meeting) the time appointed for taking

the poll.

35. Any organisation which is a member of the Trust may by resolution of its

board of governors or other governing body authorise such person as it thinks

fit to act as its representative at any meeting of the Trust, and the person so

authorised shall be entitled to exercise the same powers on behalf of the

corporation which he represents as that corporation could exercise if it were

an individual member of the Trust.

GOVERNORS

36. The number of governors shall be not less than three but (unless otherwise

determined by ordinary resolution) shall not be subject to any maximum.

37. Subject to article 39 the Trust shall have the following governors:

(a) 10 sponsor governors of whom 5 shall be appointed by each of the

Principal Sponsors

(b) 1 LEA governor

(c) 1 Headteacher (pursuant to article 42)

°ad0000041I 49

(d) 3 parent governors

(e) 1 Staff governor

The Trust may also have the following governors:

(f) any co-opted governor appointed under article 48; (g) any additional governor appointed under article 51;

38. The first governors shall be those persons named in the statement delivered

pursuant to section 10(2) of the Act, who shall be deemed to have been

appointed under article 40 and shall be deemed to be sponsor governors.

Future sponsor governors shall be appointed under article 40.

39. Future governors required by article 37 shall be appointed or elected, as the case may be, under these articles. Where it is not possible for such a governor to be appointed or elected due to the fact that the Academy is not yet established then the relevant article or part thereof shall not apply.

APPOINTMENT AND ELECTION OF GOVERNORS

40. The Principal Sponsors shall appoint the sponsor governors and may appoint themselves (if individuals) as sponsor governors.

41. The LEA may appoint the LEA governor.

42. The head teacher shall be a member of the governing body who shall be treated for all purposes as being an ex officio governor.

43. The elected parent governor(s) shall be elected by parents of registered

pupils at the Academy. A parent governor must be such a parent at the time

when he is elected. The number of parent governors required shall be made

up by parent governors appointed by the Governing Body if the number of

parents standing for election is less than the number of vacancies.

gadOOOMMU 50

• 44. The Governing Body shall make all necessary arrangements for, and

determine all other matters relating to, an election of parent governors,

including any question of whether a person is a parent of a registered pupil at

the Academy. Any election of parent governors which is contested shall be

held by secret ballot.

45. The arrangements made for the election of a parent governor shall provide for

every person who is entitled to vote in the election to have an opportunity to

do so by post or, if he prefers, by having his ballot paper returned to the Trust

by a registered pupil at the Academy.

46.

(a) Where a vacancy for a parent governor is required to be filled by

election, the Governing Body shall take such steps as are reasonably

practical to secure that every person who is known to them to be a

parent of a registered pupil at the Academy is informed of the vacancy

and that it is required to be filled by election, informed that he is entitled

to stand as a candidate, and vote at the election, and given an

opportunity to do so.

(b) In appointing a parent governor the Governing Body shall appoint a

person who is the parent of a registered pupil at the Academy; or

where it is not reasonably practical to do so, a person who is the parent

of a child of compulsory school age.

47.

(a) The staff governor shall be elected by persons employed to work at the

Academy. The staff governor must be so employed at the time he is

elected. If a staff governor ceases to be employed at the Academy he

shall resign. For this purpose 'employed' means employed under a

contract of employment or a contract for services.

(b) The Governing Body shall determine, for the purposes of an election of

staff governors, any question whether a person is employed under a

51

contract of employment or a contract for services at the Academy

otherwise than as a teacher,

(c) The Governing Body shall make all necessary arrangements for, and

determine all other matters relating to, an election of staff governors.

Any election of staff governors which is contested shall be held by

secret ballot.

CO-OPTED GOVERNORS

48. The Governing Body may appoint up to two co-opted governors. A 'co-opted governor' means a person who is appointed to be a governor by being co-opted by governors who have not themselves been so appointed.

APPOINTMENT OF ADDITIONAL GOVERNORS

49. The Secretary of State may give a warning notice to the Governing Body

where— (a) he is satisfied:-

that the standards of performance of pupils at the Academy are unacceptably low and are likely to remain so unless the Secretary of State exercises his powers under article 51, or

that there has been a serious breakdown in the way the Academy is managed or governed which is prejudicing, or likely to prejudice, such standards of performance, or that the safety of pupils or staff of the Academy is threatened (whether by a breakdown of discipline or otherwise); and

(b) the Secretary of State has previously informed the Governing Body of the matters on which that conclusion is based; and

(c) those matters have not been remedied to the Secretary of State's satisfaction within a reasonable period.

gad000004M 52

50. For the purposes of article 49 a 'warning notice' is a notice in writing by the

Secretary of State setting out:-

(a) the matters referred to in Article 49(a);

(b) the action which he requires the Governing Body to take in order to

remedy those matters; and

(c) the period within which that action is to be taken by the Governing

Body ('the compliance period').

51. The Secretary of State may appoint up to eleven additional governors as he

thinks fit if the Secretary of State has:

(a) given the Governing Body a warning notice in accordance with article

49; and

(b) the Governing Body has failed to comply, or secure compliance, with

the notice to the Secretary of State's satisfaction within the compliance

period; and

(c) the Secretary of State has given reasonable notice in writing to the

Governing Body that he proposes to exercise his powers under this

article.

TERM OF OFFICE

52. The term of office for any governor shall subject to Article 68 be 4 years save

that this time limit shall not apply to either the head teacher or the Principal

Sponsors (during any period that the Principal Sponsors is a governor).

Subject to remaining eligible to be a particular type of governor any governor

may be re-appointed or re-elected

53

RESIGNATION AND REMOVAL

53. A governor shall cease to hold office if he resigns his office by notice to the Trust (but only if at least three governors will remain in office when the notice of resignation is to take effect).

54. A governor shall cease to hold office if he is removed by the person or persons who appointed him. This article does not apply in respect of any elected governor; or a parent governor who has been appointed rather than elected.

55. Where a governor resigns his office or is removed from office, the governor or, where he is removed from office, those removing him, shall give written notice thereof to the clerk.

DISQUALIFICATION OF GOVERNORS

56. No person shall be qualified to be a governor unless he is aged 18 or over at the date of his election or appointment. No pupil of the Academy shall be a governor.

57. A governor shall cease to hold office if he becomes incapable by reason of mental disorder, illness or injury of managing or administering his own affairs.

58. A governor shall cease to hold office if he is absent without the permission of the governing body from all their meetings held within a period of six months and the governors resolve that his office be vacated.

59. A person shall be disqualified from holding or continuing to hold office as a governor if> (a) his estate has been sequestrated and the sequestration has not been

discharged, annulled or reduced; or

gad00000411 R~ A

(b) he is the subject of a bankruptcy restrictions order or an interim order.

60. A person shall be disqualified from holding or continuing to hold office as a

governor at any time when he is subject to a disqualification order or a

disqualification undertaking under the Company Directors Disqualification Act

1986 or to an order made under section 429(2)(b) of the Insolvency Act 1986

(failure to pay under county court administration order).

61. A governor shall cease to hold office if he ceases to be a governor by virtue of

any provision in the Act or is disqualified from acting as a trustee by virtue of

section 72 of the Charities Act 1993 (or any statutory re-enactment or

modification of that provision).


governor if he has been removed from the office of charity trustee or trustee

for a charity by an order made by the Charity Commissioners or the High

Court on the grounds of any misconduct or mismanagement in the

administration of the charity for which he was responsible or to which he was

privy, or which he by his conduct contributed to or facilitated.


governor if he is a person in respect of whom a direction has been made

under section 142 of the Education Act 2002.

64.

(a) A person shall be disqualified from holding or continuing to hold office

as a governor where he has, at any time, been convicted of any

criminal offence, including any that have been spent under the

Rehabilitation of Offenders Act 1974 as amended, excluding any

offence for which the maximum sentence is a fine or a lesser sentence.

(b) A person shall be disqualified from holding or continuing to hold office

as a governor at any time when he refuses a request by the Clerk to

the Governing Body, following a referral from either the Chair of

gad00000411 C C

Governors or the Head Teacher, to make an application under section

113 of the Police Act 1997, as amended for a criminal records

certificate. That application will be at an enhanced disclosure level. A

referral by the Chair of Governors or the Head Teacher shall be made

where the person is in their opinion giving cause for concern or will

have regular unsupervised contact with children. In the event that the

certificate discloses any information which would in the opinion of

either the Chair of Governors or the Head Teacher disqualify or prevent

a person from serving as a governor that person should be disqualified.

If a dispute arises as to whether a person shall be disqualified, a

referral shall be made to the Secretary of State to determine the

matter. The determination of the Secretary of State shall be final.

65. Where, by virtue of these articles a person becomes disqualified from holding, or continuing to hold office as a governor; and he is, or is proposed, to become such a governor, he shall upon becoming so disqualified give written notice of that fact to the clerk.

66. Articles 56 to 65 also apply to any member of any committee of the governors who is not a governor.

CLERK TO THE GOVERNING BODY

67. Subject to the provisions of the Act, the secretary shall be appointed by the governors for such term, at such remuneration and upon such conditions as they may think fit; and any secretary so appointed may be appointed by them. The secretary shall be known as "the clerk". The clerk shall not be a governor or the head teacher. Notwithstanding this article, the Governing Body may, where the clerk fails to attend a meeting of theirs, appoint any one of their number to act as clerk for the purposes of that meeting.

gad0000041) 56

CHAIRMAN AND VICE-CHAIRMAN OF THE GOVERNING BODY

68. The governors shall every three years, at their first meeting in that school

year, elect a chairman and a vice-chairman from among their number and

notwithstanding that their term of office would otherwise expire under Article

52 the chairman and vice-chairman shall remain a governor of a category to

which they were elected or appointed for the residue of their term of office as

chairman or vice-chairman. A governor who is employed to work at the

Academy shall not be eligible for election as chairman or vice-chairman.

69. Subject to article 68, the chairman or vice-chairman shall hold office as such

until his successor has been elected in accordance with that article.

70. The chairman or vice-chairman may at any time resign his office by giving

notice in writing to the clerk. The chairman or vice-chairman shall cease to

hold office if:-

(a) he ceases to be a governor;

(b) he is employed to work at the Academy;

(c) he is removed from office in accordance with these articles; or

(d) in the case of the vice-chairman, he is elected in accordance with these

articles to fill a vacancy in the office of chairman.

71. Where by reason of any of the matters referred to in article 70, a vacancy

arises in the office of chairman or vice-chairman, the governors shall at their

next meeting elect one of their number to fill that vacancy.

72. Where the chairman is absent from any meeting or there is at the time a

vacancy in the office of the chairman, the vice-chairman shall act as the

chairman for the purposes of the meeting.

73. Where in the circumstances referred to in article 72 the vice-chairman is also

absent from the meeting or there is at the time a vacancy in the office of vice-

chairman, the governors shall elect one of their number to act as a chairman

g a d 0 0 0 0 0 4 ] 1 57

for the purposes of that meeting, provided that the governor elected shall not

be a person who is employed to work at the Academy.

74. The clerk shall act as chairman during that part of any meeting at which the

chairman is elected, but for these purposes article 23 shall not apply.

75. Any election of the chairman or vice-chairman which is contested shall be

held by secret ballot.

76. The governors may remove the chairman or vice-chairman from office in accordance with this article: (a) a resolution to remove the chairman or vice-chairman from office which

is passed at a meeting of the Governing Body shall not have effect unless:-

it is confirmed by a resolution passed at a second meeting of the Governing Body held not less than fourteen days after the first meeting; and the matter of the chairman's or vice-chairman's removal from office is specified as an item of business on the agenda for each of those meetings.

(b) Before the Governing Body resolve at the relevant meeting on whether to confirm the resolution to remove the chairman or vice-chairman from office, the governor or governors proposing his removal shall at that meeting state their reasons for doing so and the chairman or vice-chairman shall be given an opportunity to make a statement in response.

POWERS OF GOVERNORS

77. Subject to provisions of the Act, the memorandum and the articles and to any

directions given by special resolution, the business of the Trust shall be

tad0000041] 58

managed by the governors who may exercise all the powers of the Trust. No

alteration of the memorandum or the articles and no such direction shall

invalidate any prior act of the governors which would have been valid if that

alteration had not been made or that direction had not been given. The

powers given by this article shall not be limited by any special power given to

the governors by the articles and a meeting of governors at which a quorum is

present may exercise all the powers exercisable by the governors.

78. In addition to all powers hereby expressly conferred upon them and without

detracting from the generality of their powers under the articles the governors

shall have the following powers, namely:

to expend the funds of the Trust in such manner as they shall consider most

beneficial for the achievement of the Objects and to invest in the name of the

Trust such part of the funds as they may see fit and to direct the sale or

transposition of any such investments and to expend the proceeds of any

such sale in furtherance of the Objects;

to enter into contracts on behalf of the Trust.

79. The governors shall exercise their powers and functions with a view to

fulfilling a largely strategic role in the running of the school and shall consider

any advice given by the head teacher.

80. Any bank account in which any part of the assets of the Trust is deposited

shall be operated by the governors and shall indicate the name of the Trust.

All cheques and orders for the payment of money from such account shall be

signed by at least two signatories authorised by the governors in respect of

their activities as governors.

GOVERNORS' EXPENSES

81. The governors may at the discretion of the Governing Body be paid all

reasonable and proper out of pocket travelling, hotel and other expenses,

59

excluding foreign travel, properly incurred by them in connection with their attendance at meetings of governors or committees of governors or general meetings or otherwise in connection with the discharge of their duties, but shall otherwise be paid no remuneration.

82. Except to the extent permitted by clause 5 of the memorandum and subject to articles 107 to 109, no governor shall take or hold any interest in property belonging to the Trust or receive remuneration or be interested otherwise than as a governor in any contract to which the Trust is a party.

THE MINUTES

83. The minutes of the proceedings of a meeting of the Governing Body shall be drawn up and entered into a book kept for the purpose by the person acting as clerk for the purposes of the meeting; and shall be signed (subject to the approval of the Governing Body) at the same or next subsequent meeting by the person acting as chairman thereof. The minutes shall include a record of: (a) all appointments of officers made by the governors; and (b) all proceedings at meetings of the Trust and of the governors and of

committees of governors including the names of the governors present at each such meeting.

DELEGATION

84. Subject to these articles the governors may delegate to any committee, any governor holding an executive office, or to the head teacher, such of their powers or functions as they consider desirable to be exercised by them. Any such delegation may be made subject to any conditions the governors may impose, and either collaterally with or to the exclusion of their own powers and may be revoked or altered.

85. Where any function of the governors has been delegated under article 84 or is otherwise exercised by any committee, any governor holding an executive office, the head teacher or any member, the person or committee to

ga <10000041J 60

whom the function has been delegated, or who has otherwise

exercised the function, shall report to the governors in respect of any action

taken or decision made with respect to the exercise of that function at the

meeting of the governors immediately following the taking of the action or the

making of the decision.

86. The governors may establish any committee to exercise, subject to these

articles, powers and functions of the governors. The constitution,

membership and proceedings of any committee of the governors shall be

determined by the governors. The establishment, terms of reference,

constitution and membership of any committee of the governors shall be

reviewed at least once in every twelve months. The membership of any

committee of the governors may include persons who are not governors,

provided that a majority of members of any such committee shall be

governors. The governors may determine that some or all of the members of

a committee who are not governors shall be entitled to vote in any

proceedings of the committee. No vote on any matter shall be taken at a

meeting of a committee of the governors unless the majority of members of

the committee present are governors.

HEAD TEACHER

87. The governors shall appoint the head teacher of the Academy. Subject to

these articles, the head teacher shall be responsible for the internal

organisation, management and control of the Academy, the implementation of

• all policies approved of by the governors and for the direction of the teaching

and curriculum. For these purposes the governors shall delegate those

powers and functions required by the head teacher.

MEETINGS OF THE GOVERNING BODY

88. Subject to these articles, the governors may regulate their proceedings as

• they think fit.

gad000004]I C A

89. The Governing Body shall hold at least one meeting in every school term. Meetings of the Governing Body shall be convened by the clerk. In exercising his functions under this article the clerk shall comply with any direction— (a) given by the Governing body; or

(b) given by the chairman of the Governing Body or, in his absence or where there is a vacancy in the office of chairman, the vice-chairman of the Governing Body, so far as such direction is not inconsistent with any direction given as mentioned in (a).

90. Any three governors may, by notice in writing given to the clerk, requisition a meeting of the Governing Body; and it shall be the duty of the clerk to convene such a meeting as soon as is reasonably practicable.

91. Each governor shall be given at least fourteen clear days before the date of a meeting:-

notice in writing thereof, signed by the clerk, and sent to each governor at the address provided by each governor from time to time; and

a copy of the agenda for the meeting;

provided that where the chairman or, in his absence or where there is a vacancy in the office of chairman, the vice-chairman, so determines on the ground that there are matters demanding urgent consideration, it shall be sufficient if the written notice of a meeting, and the copy of the agenda therefore are given within such shorter period as he directs.

92. The convening of a meeting and the proceedings conducted thereat shall not be invalidated by reason of any individual not having received written notice of the meeting or a copy of the agenda therefore.

93. A resolution to rescind or vary a resolution carried at a previous meeting of

the Governing Body shall not be proposed at a meeting of the Governing gadOMMHMll

Body unless the consideration of the rescission or variation of the previous

resolution is a specific item of business on the agenda for that meeting.

94. A meeting of the Governing Body shall be terminated forthwith if:-

(a) the Governing Body so resolve; or

(b) the number of governors present ceases to constitute a quorum for a

meeting of the Governing Body in accordance with article 97, subject to article

99.

95. Where in accordance with article 94 a meeting is not held or is terminated

before all the matters specified as items of business on the agenda for the

meeting have been disposed of, a further meeting shall be convened by the

clerk as soon as is reasonably practicable, but in any event within seven days

of the date on which the meeting was originally to be held or was so

terminated.

96. Where the Governing Body resolve in accordance with article 94 to adjourn a

meeting before all the items of business on the agenda have been disposed

of, the Governing Body shall before doing so determine the time and date at

which a further meeting is to be held for the purposes of completing the

consideration of those items, and they shall direct the clerk to convene a

meeting accordingly.

97. Subject to article 99 the quorum for a meeting of the Governing Body, and any

vote on any matter thereat, shall be any three governors, or, where greater,

one half (rounded up to a whole number) of the total number of governors

holding office at the date of the meeting).

98. The governors may act notwithstanding any vacancies in their number, but, if

the numbers of governors is less than the number fixed as the quorum, the

continuing governors may act only for the purpose of filling vacancies or of

calling a general meeting.

99. The quorum for the purposes of:-

gad00000411 64

(a) appointing a parent governor;

(b) any vote on the removal of a member of the Governing Body in accordance with article 54;

(c) any vote on the removal of the chairman of the Governing Body in accordance with articles 54 and 70

shall be any two-thirds (rounded up to a whole number) of the persons who

are at the time governors entitled to vote on those respective matters.

100. Subject to these articles, every question to be decided at a meeting of the Governing Body shall be determined by a majority of the votes of the members present and voting on the question.

101. Subject to articles 97 to 99, where there is an equal division of votes the chairman or, as the case may be, the person who is acting as chairman for the purposes of the meeting, shall have a second or casting vote.

102. The proceedings of the Governing Body shall not be invalidated by— (a) any vacancy among their number, or (b) any defect in the election, appointment or nomination of any governor.

103. A resolution in writing, signed by all the governors entitled to receive notice of a meeting of governors or of a committee of governors, shall be valid and effective as if it had been passed at a meeting of governors (or as the case may be) a committee of governors duly convened and held. Such a resolution may consist of several documents in the same form, each signed by one or more of the governors.

104. Subject to this article, the Governing Body shall ensure that a copy of— (a) the agenda for every meeting of the Governing Body;

(b) the draft minutes of every such meeting, if they have been approved by the person acting as chairman of that meeting;

(c) the signed minutes of every such meeting; and (d) any report, document or other paper considered at any such meeting,

gadOOOOMll a j

are, as soon as is reasonably practicable, made available at the Academy to

persons wishing to inspect them.

105. There may be excluded from any item required to be made available in

pursuance of article 104, any material relating to—

(a) a named teacher or other person employed, or proposed to be

employed, at the Academy;

(b) a named pupil at, or candidate for admission to, the Academy; and

(c) any matter which, by reason of its nature, the governing body are

satisfied should remain confidential.

106. Any governor shall be able to participate in meetings of the Governing Body

by telephone provided that he has given notice of his intention to do so

detailing the telephone number on which he can be reached at the time of the

meeting at least 48 hours before the meeting.

107. The Academy shall not enter into any contract or arrangement where a

member of the Governing Body has a duty or pecuniary interest (direct or

indirect), which conflicts or may conflict with it. Any governor who has any

such duty or pecuniary interest shall disclose that fact to the Governing Body

as soon as he becomes aware of it.

108. Without limitation to the generality of article 107, a governor shall be treated

as having a pecuniary interest in a contract or proposed contract or other

arrangement with the Academy if:

(a) he is a director or a member holding more than 1/100th of the issued

share capital of a company with which the contract or arrangement was

made or is proposed to be made or which has a direct pecuniary

interest in the matter under consideration; or

(b) he is a partner in a partnership or member of an unincorporated

association or any other body with whom the contract or arrangement

was made or is proposed to be made or which has a direct pecuniary

interest in the matter under consideration or

gad00000411 64

(c ) he, or a partner of his, is in the employment of a person with whom the

contract was made or is proposed to be made or who has a direct

pecuniary interest in the matter under consideration.

109. For the purposes of articles 107 and 108, an interest of a person who is,

within the meaning of section 346 of the Act, connected with a governor shall

be treated as an interest of the governor. This shall include:

(a) that governor's spouse, child or stepchild; or

(b) a body corporate with which the governor is associated (i.e. if that

governor and persons connected with him together are interested in

shares comprising at least one fifth of the share capital of the company

or are entitled to exercise more than one fifth of the voting power at any

general meeting of that company); or

(c) a person acting in his capacity as trustee of any trust the beneficiaries

of which include:

the governor, his spouse or any children or stepchildren of his; or

a body corporate with which he is associated; or

(d) a person acting in his capacity as a partner of that governor or of any

person who, by virtue of paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) above, is connected

with that governor.

PATRONS AND HONORARY OFFICERS

110. The governors may from time to time appoint any person whether or not a

member of the Trust to be a patron of the Trust or to hold any honorary office

and may determine for what period he is to hold such office.

THE SEAL

111. The seal shall only be used by the authority of the governors or of a

committee of governors authorised by the governors. The governors may

determine who shall sign any instrument to which the seal is affixed and

unless otherwise so determined it shall be signed by a governor and by the

clerk or by a second governor.

gad000004lI 66

ACCOUNTS

112. Accounts shall be prepared in accordance to the provisions of Part VII of the

Act.

• ANNUAL REPORT

114. The governors shall comply with their obligations under the Charities Act 1993

(or any statutory re-enactment or modification of that Act) with regard to the

• preparation of an annual report and its transmission to the Commissioners.

ANNUAL RETURN

115. The governors shall comply with their obligations under the Charities Act 1993

(or any statutory re-enactment or modification of that Act) with regard to the

preparation of an annual return and its transmission to the Commissioners.

NOTICES

116. Any notice to be given to or by any person pursuant to the articles shall be in

writing except that a notice calling a meeting of the governors need not be in

writing.

117. A notice may be given by the Trust to a member either personally or by

sending it by post in a prepaid envelope addressed to the member at his

registered address or by leaving it at that address. A member whose

registered address is not within the United Kingdom and who gives to the

Trust an address, within the United Kingdom at which notices may be given to

him shall be entitled to have notices given to him at that address, but

otherwise no such member shall be entitled to receive any notice from the

Trust.

gad0000041I 67

118. A member present in person at any meeting shall be deemed to have

received notice of the meeting and, where necessary, of the purposes for

which it was called.

Proof that an envelope containing a notice was properly addressed, prepaid

and posted shall be conclusive evidence that the notice was given. A notice

shall be deemed to be given at the expiration of 48 hours after the envelope

containing it was posted.

INDEMNITY

119. Subject to the provisions of the Act every governor or other officer or governor or auditor of the Trust shall be indemnified out of the assets of the Trust against any liability incurred by him in that capacity in defending any proceedings, whether civil or criminal, in which judgment is given in favour or in which he is acquitted or in connection with any application in which relief is granted to him by the court from liability for negligence, default, breach of duty or breach of trust in relation to the affairs of the Trust.

RULES

120. The governors may from time to time make such rules or bye laws as they may deem necessary or expedient or convenient for the proper conduct and management of the Trust and for purposes of prescribing classes of and conditions of membership, and in particular but without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing, they may by such rules or bye laws regulate: (a) the admission and classification of members of the Trust (including the

admission of organisations to membership) and the rights and privileges of such members, and the conditions of membership and the terms on which members may resign or have their membership terminated and the entrance fees, subscriptions and other fees or payments to be made by members;

g a d 0 0 0 0 0 4 1 1 6 9

(b) the conduct of members of the Trust in relation to one another, and to

the Trust's servants;

(c) the setting aside of the whole or any part or parts of the Trust's

premises at any particular time or times or for any particular purpose or

purposes;

(d) the procedure at general meetings and meetings of the governors and

committees of the governors and meetings of the governing body in so

far as such procedure is not regulated by the articles;

(e) generally, all such matters as are commonly the subject matter of

company rules.

121. The Trust in general meeting shall have power to alter, add or to repeal the

rules or bye laws and the governors shall adopt such means as they think

sufficient to bring to the notice of members of the Trust all such rules or bye

laws, which shall be binding on all members of the Trust. Provided that no

rule or bye law shall be inconsistent with, or shall affect or repeal anything

contained in, the memorandum or the articles.

70

Annex 2

Arrangements for Admission for pupils at The Samworth Academy

LEICESTER ACADEMY

ADMISSIONS POLICY

Arrangements For The Admission Of Pupils To The Leicester Academy

Introduction

1. This document sets out the admission arrangements for the Leicester Academy. These arrangements are without prejudice to the provisions of annex 3 to this agreement. The document forms an annex to the Funding Agreement between the Leicester Academy and the Secretary of State. Any changes to the arrangements set out in this document must be approved in advance by the Secretary of State for Education and Skills.

2. The Academy will comply with all relevant provisions of the statutory codes of practice (the School Admissions Code of Practice and the School Admission Appeals Code of Practice) as they apply at any given time to maintained schools. Reference in the codes to admission authorities shall be deemed to be references to the Governing Body. In particular, the Academy will take part in the Admissions Forum set up by Leicester City LEA and have regard to its advice; and will participate in the co-ordinated admission arrangements operated by Leicester City LEA.

3. Notwithstanding these arrangements, the Secretary of State may direct the Leicester Academy to admit a named pupil to the Leicester Academy on application from the LEA. Before doing so the Secretary of State will consult the Academy.

Admission Arrangements Approved By Secretary Of State

4. The admission arrangements for The Leicester Academy for the academic year 2006/07, and, subject to any changes approved by the Secretary of State, for subsequent years will be as described below.

a) The Academy will have an agreed admission number at Foundation 2 of 60 pupils and at Year 7 of 60 pupils. The Academy will accordingly admit at least 60 pupils in the relevant KS1 age group and 60 in the relevant KS3 age group if sufficient applications are received,

b) The Academy may set a higher admission number as its published admission

°ad000004l1 71

number for any specific year. Before setting an admission number higher than its agreed admission number, the Academy will consult In accordance with published statutory regulations.

c) Pupils will not be admitted above the published admission number unless exceptional circumstances apply and such circumstances shall be reported to the Secretary of State.

5. The Leicester Academy will take part in the primary and secondary co-ordinated admissions schemes for Leicester LEA, and will be made on the Common Application Form provided and administered by Leicester City LEA. The Leicester Academy will use the following timetable for applications each year (exact dates within the months may vary from year to year) which, whenever possible, will fit in with the common timetable agreed by the Leicester Admissions Forum or LEA:.

a. September - The Academy will publish in its prospectus information about the arrangements for admission including oversubscription criteria, for the following September (eg in September 2006 for admission in September 2007). This information will include details of open evenings and other opportunities for prospective pupils and their parents to visit the Academy. The Leicester Academy will also provide information to the LEA for inclusion in the composite prospectus, as required.

b. September / October - The Leicester Academy will provide opportunities for parents to visit the Academy.

c. November - Common Application Form to be completed and returned to the LEA to administer.

d. Spring term - Applications will be considered in line with arrangements agreed with the LEA and other admission authorities.

e. March - Offers made in writing to parents / carers.

Consideration Of Applications

6. The Academy will consider all applications for places. Where fewer than the relevant number applications are received for Foundation 2 [60] and year 7 [60], the Academy will offer places to all those who have applied.

a. The initial allocation of primary places (i.e. years Foundation 2 to year 6 in September 2007) at the Academy will be made on the basis that places in each year group shall be allocated firstly to children currently attending Southfield's Infant School and Newry Junior School.

b. Any remaining places in year groups Foundation 2 to year 6 shall be allocated to children living in the Designated Geographical Area [DGA] of the Saffron and Eyers Monsell Communities shown on the attached map. Which equates to the LEA's Priority Area for Newry Junior School and Southfield's Infant School

g a d 0 0 0 0 0 4 I l 72

c. The initial allocation of 120 secondary places (i.e. year 7 in September 2007) at the Academy will be made on the basis of children living in the Designated Geographical Area [DGA] of the Saffron and Eyers Monsell Communities shown on the attached map. Which equates to the LEA's Priority Area for the former Mary Linwood secondary school.

d. In subsequent years, the allocation of 120 places for admission to KS3 [Secondary] at Year 7; will be such that pupils already attending the Academy in Year 6 are entitled to a place in year 7. The remaining 60 places will, in the first instance, be allocated to pupils living in the Designated Geographical Area [DGA] of the Saffron and Eyers Monsell Communities shown on the attached map.

Procedure for Allocating Places, Including Dealing With Over-Subscription

7. Where there is over subscription, ie the number of applications for admission to the Academy is greater than the published admissions number, applications will be considered against the criteria set out below. After the admission of pupils with Statements of Special Educational Needs where the Leicester Academy is named on the statement, the criteria will be applied in the following order:

a. Children who are in the care or interim care of a local authority pursuant to S31 & 38 of the Children Act 1989, or children who are accommodated by a local authority, pursuant to S20 of the Children Act 1989 'Looked After Children'.

b. Children with professionally supported medical or social need for a place at the Leicester Academy who live in the Designated Geographical Area.

c. Children of parents living in the designated area [DGA] For initial and mid term applications into Ks1 & 2 [Fd 2 to year 6]

d. Children whose siblings currently attend the Leicester Academy and who will continue to do so on the date of admission. This criterion does not apply to admission into KS 3 & 4 [Y7 to y11]

e. Children on the basis of proximity to the school using straight line measurement from the main entrance of the Leicester Academy to the main entrance to the child's home.

Definitions

8. Children are siblings if they are half, full or adoptive brother or sister or if they are children living within the same household.

9. 'Living' means that the child's home address is that where the child spends the majority of time and is living with the person who has parental responsibility and/or is the main carer as set out in the Children Act 1989. If a child regularly lives at more than one address, the main address when

gad00000411 64

allocating places will normally taken as the address where Child Benefit is paid and / or where the child is registered with a doctor.

10. Applicants expressing a first preference will be considered first in accordance with Leicester City's co-ordinated admissions system. Applicants expressing a second or subsequent preference will be considered in order of preference, and places allocated in the same way as for those expressing a first preference.

Operation Of Over-subscription Lists

11. Subject to any provisions regarding waiting lists in the LEA's co-ordinated admissions scheme, the Leicester Academy will operate a waiting list. This will be maintained by the Leicester Academy and it will be open to parents/carers to ask for their child's name to be placed on the waiting list following an unsuccessful application.

12. Names of unsuccessful applicants placed on the waiting list will remain there through the subsequent academic year. The waiting list will then be closed and a new waiting list started in the following September.

13. Position on the waiting list will be determined solely in accordance with the criteria set out in paragraph 7 above. Where places at the Academy become available, they will be allocated to children on the waiting list in accordance with the same criteria. This implies that a child's name may go up or down the over-subscription list.

Arrangements For Appeals Panels

14. Parents have the right to appeal to an Independent Appeal Panel if they are dissatisfied with an admission decision of the Leicester Academy. The Appeal Panel will be independent of the Leicester Academy. The arrangements for Appeals will be in line with the School Admission Appeals Code of Practice published by the DfES as it applies to Foundation and Voluntary Aided schools. The determination of the Independent Appeal Panel will be made in accordance with the Code of Practice on School Admission Appeals and is binding on all parties. The Academy will prepare guidance for parents about how the appeals process will work and provide parents with a named contact who can answer any enquiries that parents may have about the process.

Arrangements for Initial Admission of Pupils in the year of opening and subsequent years as the Academy Builds to its Full Capacity

15. The Leicester Academy will open on the 1st September 2007 with a published admissions number relating to pupils in Foundation 2 and year 7. Pupils in years Foundation 2 to Year 6 will be transferred automatically from the predecessor schools, Southfields Infants and Newry Juniors, which will both

g a r f 0 0 0 0 0 4 1 I 74

close on 31st August 2007.

16. During the period from 1st September 2007 to the admission of Foundation 2 Year groups 7 to 11 will be open to admissions only in the year groups that have already been populated. The Academy will only take applications for all year groups from September 2012 [Please refer to chart at Appendix A]

17. Admission to Year Groups without a Published Admission Number will be based upon the size of teaching groups already existing in the Leicester Academy and the efficient use of resources.

18. There will be the right of appeal to the Independent Appeal Panel for unsuccessful applicants.

75

II: ANNUAL PROCEDURES FOR DETERMINING ADMISSION ARRANGEMENTS

CONSULTATION

19. In accordance with the DfES School Admissions Code of Practice the Academy shall consult each year on its proposed admission arrangements.

The Academy must consult by 1 March in each year:

a) the LEA in whose area it is located and any other LEAs from where pupils are likely to attend the Academy;

b) any other admission authorities for primary, special and secondary Schools located within the relevant area for consultation set by the LEA.

c) Any other governing body for primary and secondary schools, as far as not falling within paragraph b, located within the relevant area for consultation.

Determination and Publication of Admission Arrangements

20. Following consultation, the Academy must consider comments made by those consulted. The Academy shall then determine its admission arrangements by 15 April of the relevant year and notify those consulted what has been determined.

Publication of Admission Arrangements

21. The Academy will publish its admission arrangements each year once these have been determined, by providing copies:

a) to Primary, Special and Secondary Schools in South Leicester;

b) in the offices of the relevant LEA area;

c) copies being made available without charge on request from the Academy;

d) to public libraries in the relevant area for the purposes of being made available at such libraries for reference by parents and other persons.

The published arrangements will set out:

a) the name and address of the Academy and contact details;

b) a summary of the admissions policy, including criteria for dealing with over-subscription;

c) numbers of places and applications for those places in the previous year;

d) arrangements for hearing appeals (consistent with the provisions of the statutory Code of Practice on School Admission Appeals as it applies to foundation and voluntary aided schools).

g a d 0 0 0 0 0 4 1 1 76

Representations About Admission Arrangements

22. Where other admission authorities in the relevant area make representations to the Academy about its admission arrangements, the Academy will consider such representations. Where the Academy and other admission authorities cannot reach agreement locally, any admission authority in the relevant area may make representations to the Secretary of State. The Secretary of State will consider the representation and in so doing will consult the Academy. Where the Secretary of State judges it appropriate, the Secretary of State may direct the Academy to amend its admission arrangements.

23. Other admission authorities in the relevant area have the right to ask the Academy to increase its proposed published admissions number for any year. Where such a request is made, but agreement cannot be reached locally, an admission authority may ask the Secretary of State to direct the Academy to increase its proposed published admissions number. The Secretary of State will consult the Academy and will then determine the published admission number.

24. The Secretary of State may direct changes to the Academy's proposed admission arrangements where this is necessary to provide for those arrangements to be consistent with the provisions of admission law and the Statutory Code of Practice as they relate to maintained Schools.

Proposed Changes to Admission Arrangements by Academy After Arrangements Have Been Published

25. Once the admission arrangements have been determined and published, the Academy should propose changes only if there is a major change of circumstances. In such cases, the Academy must consult again those consulted under Clause 19 above and must then apply to the Secretary of State setting out:

a) the proposed changes;

b) reasons for wishing to make such changes;

c) any comments or objections from those entitled to object.

Need to Secure Secretary of State's Approval for Changes to Admission Arrangements

26. The Secretary of State will, usually, consider applications from the Academy to change its admission arrangements only when the Academy has consulted on the proposed changes as outlined in Clause 19 above.

27. Where the Academy has consulted on proposed changes and there have been no objections from other admissions authorities, the Academy must still secure the agreement of the Secretary of State before any such changes can be implemented. The Academy must seek the Secretary of State's approval in writing, setting out the reasons for the proposed changes and passing to him any comments or objections from other admission authorities/other

gad00000411 64

persons.

28. The Secretary of State can approve, modify or reject proposals from an Academy to change its admission arrangements.

29. Records of applications and admissions shall be kept by the Academy for a minimum period often years and shall be open for inspection by the Secretary of State.

gadOOWHMll 78

Annex 3

Arrangements for pupils with SEN and disabilities at The Samworth Academy

Duty to have regard to the Code of Practice and other guidance

1. The Academy shall have regard to the Special Educational Needs Code of Practice (2001) and any guidance issued by the Secretary of State relating to sections 316 and 316A of the Education Act 1996.

Duties in relation to pupils with SEN

2. The governors of the Academy shall designate a person, who may be the headteacher, the chair of governors or another governor as appropriate, who shall be the responsible person for the purposes of the following duties in relation to pupils with SEN.

3. The governors of the Academy shall:

• use their best endeavours, in exercising their functions in relation to the school, to secure that, if any registered pupil has special educational needs, the special educational provision which the pupil's learning difficulty calls for is made;

• secure that, where the responsible person has been informed by the local education authority that a registered pupil has special educational needs, those needs are made known to all who are likely to teach the pupil;

• secure that the teachers in the school are aware of the importance of identifying, and providing for, those registered pupils who have special educational needs; and

• consult the local education authority and the governing bodies of other schools in the area, to the extent that this is necessary for co-ordinating provision for pupils with SEN.

4. Where a child who has special educational needs is being educated in the Academy, those concerned with making special educational provision for the child shall secure, so far as is reasonably practicable and is compatible with:

(a) the child receiving the special educational provision which his learning difficulty calls for,

(b) the provision of efficient education for the children with whom he will be educated,

(c) the efficient use of resources and

gad00000411 79

(d) that the child engages in the activities of the school together with children who do not have SEN.

5. The Academy prospectus shall include details of the governing body's policy for pupils with SEN and in particular shall include the information specified in Schedule 1 to the Education (Special Educational Needs) (Information) Regulations 1999 as amended or re-enacted from time to time. It shall also include details of the arrangements for the admission of disabled pupils; the steps taken to prevent disabled pupils from being treated less favourably than other pupils; and the facilities provided to assist access to the Academy by disabled pupils (disabled pupils meaning pupils who are disabled for the purposes of the Disability Discrimination Act 1995).

Admissions

6. The Academy shall ensure that pupils with SEN are admitted on an equal basis with others in accordance with its admissions policy.

7. Where a local education authority proposes to name the Academy in a statement of SEN made in accordance with section 324 of the Education Act 1996, the Academy shall consent to being named, except where admitting the child would be incompatible with the provision of efficient education for other children; and where no reasonable steps may be made to secure compatibility. In deciding whether a child's inclusion would be incompatible with the efficient education of other children, the Academy shall have regard to the relevant guidance issued by the Secretary of State to maintained schools. In the event of any disagreement between the Academy and the local education authority over the proposed naming of the Academy in a statement, the Academy may ask the Secretary of State to determine whether the Academy should be named. The Secretary of State's determination shall be final.

8. Where the Academy has consented to be named in a child's statement of SEN, or the Secretary of State has determined that it should be named, the Academy shall admit the child.

gadOOMKMll 80

Annex 4

Serious incidents of misbehaviour leading to fixed period or permanent exclusion

1. In discharging their duties the Head and Governors of The Samworth Academy will have regard to the Secretary of State's guidance on exclusions1

as if the Academy were a maintained school, except that:

• references to the maintaining LEA in paragraph 26(c) of the guidance should be construed as a references to the LEA in which an excluded child is resident;

• the Academy, and not the LEA, is responsible for making arrangements for independent appeal panels to hear appeals against permanent exclusions where the governors do not direct reinstatement (see paragraph 35 and part 5 of the guidance, and below);

• the governors are not expected to seek the advice of an LEA officer when considering an exclusion (paragraph 73 of the guidance), although an LEA officer may attend any meeting to consider an exclusion at the request of a parent; and

• part 8 of the guidance (arrangements for money to follow pupils who have been permanently excluded from school) does not apply.

Constitution and conduct of independent appeal panels

2. The Academy will be responsible for carrying out the functions assigned to the LEA in part 5 of the guidance with regard to the management of the appeal procedure. Appeals panels must be impartial and constituted in accordance with the detailed provisions of paragraphs 95-97 of the guidance. The Academy will arrange suitable training for appeal panel members and clerks.

3. The appeal panel's decision is final and binding on the Academy. A parent may seek a judicial review of a panel's decision. A parent may not, however, appeal to the Commissioner for Local Administration (the Local Government Ombudsman) about maladministration because the Commissioner's remit is limited to considering the conduct of appeal panels constituted by LEAs.

1 References in this annex to the Secretary of State's guidance are to "Improving Behaviour and Attendance: Guidance on Exclusion from Schools and Pupil Referral Units", which is published on the DfES website at: http://www.teachernet.gov.uk/wholeschool/behaviour/exclusion/guidance/. The guidance may be subject to amendment, and the Academy is required to have regard to the guidance as it stands at any given time.

gad000004l I Q H

http://www.teachernet.gov.uk/wholeschool/behaviour/exclusion/guidance/

Annex 5

Capital Cash limit calculation, established by SBDU

yadOOOOOJl I 82

33 Other building abnormals 92,141 34 Professional fees on 33 11,978 2,096 35 Specialist fees 203,699 36 Professional fees on 35 0 31,115 37 Maintaining the educational vision 110,828 38 Professional fees on 37 14,408 2,521 39 Section 106 Traffic Works (including associated legal costs of £5k) 142,533 40 Professional fees on 38 (n/a undertaken by LA inc in 39) 41 Chaplaincy Centre 396,719 42 Professional fees on 41 39,810 6,967 43 Allowance for BB93 funding 126,417 44 Professional fees on 43 14,563 2,549 45 Reduction to design contingency 4 April 2005 52,189 46 Professional Fees on item 45 6,785 1,187

47 SUB TOTALS 2,854,815 312,483 190,477 48 SUB TOTAL OF ADDITIONAL COSTS 3,357,775 49 FUNDING AGREEMENT TOTAL 19,501,915

31 Other site works 286,566 32 Professional fees on 31 37,254 6,519 33 Other building abnormals 92,141 34 Professional fees on 33 11,978 2,096 35 Specialist fees 203,699 36 Professional fees on 35 26,481 4,634 37 Maintaining the educational vision 110,828 38 Professional fees on 37 14,408 2,521 39 Section 106 Traffic Works (including associated legal costs of £5k) 142,533 40 Professional fees on 38 (n/a undertaken by LA inc in 39) 41 Chaplaincy Centre 396,719 42 Professional fees on 41 39,810 6,967 43 Allowance for BB93 funding 126,417 44 Professional fees on 43 14,563 2,549 45 Reduction to design contingency 4 April 2005 52,189 46 Professional Fees on item 45 6,785 1,187

47 SUB TOTALS 2,854,815 338,964 163,996 48 SUB TOTAL OF ADDITIONAL COSTS / 3,357,775 49 FUNDING AGREEMENT TOTAL / 19,501,915

Annex 6A

Capital expenditure incurred for the purposes of or in connection with the establishment of the Academy

prior to the execution of the funding agreement

gad000004l 1 83

ANNEX 6A | DATE | 28/04/20051

| CAPITAL EXPENDITURE INCURRED PRIOR TO THE FUNDING AGREEMENT ~|

The figures set out below represent the approved capital expenditure incurred prior to the signing of the Funding Agreement. This expenditure forms part of the capital cost of the project and is included within the overall cash limit referred to in clause 46a of this agreement

| Element | | £ | Vat | Total

1 Building/external works 0 0 0 2 Professional fees on 1

a Architect 231,327 40,482 271,809 b Quantity Surveyor 71,333 12,483 83,816 c Structural Engineer 144,094 25,216 169,310 d Services Engineer (See 2c) 0 0 0 e Landscape Architect (See 2a) 0 0 0 f Planning Supervisor (See 2c) 0 0 0

g Building Project Management 76,521 13,391 89,912 Total of 2a - 2g 614,847

3 Fixed educational F&E 0 0 0 4 Professional fees on 3 0 0 0

5 Loose educational F&E 0 0 0 6 Professional fees on 5 0 0 0

7 ICT equipment 0 0 0 8 Professional fees on 7 6,150 1,076 7,226

9 Surveys (incl Fees/Vat) 60,787 10,638 71,425 10 Statutory fees (incl Fees/Vat) 16,500 n/a 16,500 11 Other (incl Fees/Vat) 24,600 4,305 28,905 12 Legal costs (incl Fees/Vat) 0 0 0

13 | TOTAL | 738,903

EXPENDITURE SPLIT

14 CONTRIBUTION - SPONSOR 0 15 CONTRIBUTION - OTHER 0 16 CONTRIBUTION - OTHER 0 17 CONTRIBUTION - DfES 738,903

18 TOTAL 738,903

A N N E X 6A | DATE | 28/04/2005*1

L CAPITAL E X P E N D I T U R E INCURRED PRIOR TO THE FUNDING A G R E E M E N T

The figures set out below represent the approved capital expenditure incurred prior to the signing of the Funding Agreement. This expenditure forms part of the capital cost of the project and is included within the overall cash limit referred to in clause 46a of this agreement

| E lement | | £ | Vat | Total

1 Building/external works 0 0 0 2 Professional fees on 1

a Architect 231,327 40,482 271,809 b Quantity Surveyor _.„- 71,333 12,483 83,816 c Structural Engineer / 144,094 25,216 169,310 d Services Engineer (See 2c) / 0 0 0 e Landscape Architect (See 7fa) 0 0 0 f Planning Supervisor ( S e e ^ c ) 0 0 0 g Building Project Manage/ ient 76,521 13,391 89,912

Total of 2a - 2g / 614,847

3 Fixed educational F & E / 0 y 0 0 4 Professional fees on 3/ 0 / 0 0

5 Loose educational Ff>E 0 0 6 Professional fees o 5 /o 0 0

7 ICT equipment / 0 0 0 8 Professional fees c n 7 / 6,150 1,076 7,226

9 Surveys (incl Fees^/at) 60,787 10,638 71,425 10 Statutory fees (incl fees /Va t ) 16,500 n/a 16,500 11 Other (incl Fees/Vat \ 24,600 4,305 28,905 12 Legal costs (incl Fee^Vat ) 0 0 0

1 3 |TOTAL \ / l l I I 738,903

\ / E X P E N D I T U R E SPLIT

14 CONTRIBUTION - S P O N S O R / \ 0 15 CONTRIBUTION - O T H E R / \ 0 16 CONTRIBUTION - O T H E R / \ 0 17 CONTRIBUTION - DfES / \ 738,903

18 T O T A L / 738,903

Capital cashflow programme for monthly capital expenditure during the Academy's implementation phase

84

I ANNEX 6B - |

I CAPITAL CASH FLOW PROGRAMME |

[ CAP FORM 1 T

I NAME OF ACADEMY | LEICESTER ~| |OATE | 25A35/2005|

ELEMENT

PRE-FA P O S T F U N D I N G A G R E E M E N T E X P E N D I T U R E ELEMENT

CASHFLOW TOTALS

£ROM

COST PLAN

ELEMENT FROM 2006 2006 2007 2009 2010 2011 -

ELEMENT CASHFLOW

TOTALS

£ROM

COST PLAN

ELEMENT ANNEX JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC J/F/M AM/J JIMS O/N/D J/FfM AM/J J/A® O/NJD 2008 2009 2010 2011 -

ELEMENT CASHFLOW

TOTALS

£ROM

COST PLAN

ELEMENT

6A JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC J/F/M AM/J JIMS O/N/D J/FfM AM/J J/A® O/NJD 2008 2009 2010 2011 -

ELEMENT CASHFLOW

TOTALS

£ROM

COST PLAN

£000*8 COOO's COOO's £00?* £000'» COCO'S eooo's £000'S COCO'S £000's eooo's eooo's eooos £000'* £000's COOCs COOCs eoocs £000's eooo's £000*a COOO-s eooo's £000's £000*8 £000'* C's Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat hclVat incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat biclVat Incl Vat bid Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat tncl Vat Incl Vat kiclVat Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat bid Vat Incl Vat

Buitdino/extemal works * * 28 53 156 266 118 97 203 2,094 3,827 3,130 2,170 609 292 7 194 13,244 13,243^561 Professional fees on 1 615 306 99 99 99 52 52 31 31 31 96 93 93 93 93 93 1,976 1,976,353

Fixed educational F&E 0 500 500 500,197 Professional fees on 3 0 16 8 8 8 8 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 72 72,194

Loose educational F&E 0 1,652 106 1,758 1,860,111 Professional fees or) 5 0 12 18 18 18 18 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 12 18 10 137 35,250

ICT equipment 0 1,391 100 1,491 1,491,310 Professional fees on 7 7 8 8 8 8 1 1 t 2 18 18 8 88 88,125

Surveys (incl Fees/Vat) 71 1 2 74 234,814 Statutory fees (incl Fees/Vat) 17 3 2 22 inc Other (incl Fees/Vat) 29 27 4 4 5 4 2 2 5 5 5 5 5 2 104 inc Legal costs (incl Fees/Vat) 0 4 4 4 4 4 11 2 2 35 inc

MONTHLY TOTAL^ 739 0 0 0 365 169 145 199 250 338 154 135 241 2,200 3,930 3,234 2,289 1,238 3,457 18 0 400 0 0 0 19,501 CUMULATIVE TOTALS 739 0 0 0 365 534 679 878 1,128 1,466 1,620 1,755 1,996 4,196 8,126 11,360 13,649 14,887 18,344 18,362 18,362 18,762 18,762 18,762 18,762 19,601 19,601,916

EXPENDITURE SPLIT

CONTRIBUTION - TRUST 0 28 102 1,463 7 1,600 1,600,000 CONTRIBUTION - OTHER 0 443 443 443,496 CONTRIBUTION - OTHER fLCCl 0 400 400 400,000

CONTRIBUTION - DFES 739 0 0 365 141 145 199 250 338 154 135 241 2,200 3,930 3,234 2,187 1,238 1,551 11 0 0 0 0 0 17,058 17,058,419 MONTHLY TOTALS 739 0 0 0 365 169 145 199 250 338 154 135 241 2,200 3,930 3,234 2,289 1,238 3,457 18 0 400 0 0 0 19,601 19,601,915

" Includes demolitions, abnormal buildings related costs and temporary accommodation, (including VAT) Item 15 = Chaplaincy Centre Item 16 = Sale of school sites Item 6 includes the professional fees lor Creative Design to advise on the FFE installation. As their agreed fee exceeds the allocated fee allowance on the CCL for these works, the balance has been drawn from the capital expenditure funding for the loose FFE. item 4 The Catering Consultant Fee is to be drawn from the Fixed FFE budget. Item 14 Total Sponsor Contribution = £2,000,000 however the Annex 6b shows a contribution of £1,600,000 to reflect that the Sponsor has already purchased the Van Hire Centre at a cost of £400,000. Item 14 The £137k contribution is to cover the cost of the off site highway works (excluding the £5k legal fee contribution) Item 4 Professional Fees Associated with the core design team.

c ANNEX 6B : I CAPITAL CASH FLOW PROGRAMME |

I NAME OF ACADEMY I LEICESTER •

{ CAP FORM 1 |

| DATE | 25/05/2005|

ELEMENT

PRE-FA P O S T F U N D I N G A G R E E M E N T E X P E N D I T U R E ELEMENT

CASH FLOW TOTALS

FROM FA

COST PLAN

ELEMENT FROM 2005 2006 2007 2009 2010 2011 -

ELEMENT CASH FLOW

TOTALS

FROM FA

COST PLAN

ELEMENT ANNEX JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC J/F/M A/M/J J/A/S O/N/D J/F/M A/M/J J/A/S O/N/D

2008 2009 2010 2011 -ELEMENT

CASH FLOW TOTALS

FROM FA

COST PLAN

ELEMENT

6A JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC J/F/M A/M/J J/A/S O/N/D J/F/M A/M/J J/A/S O/N/D

2008 2009 2010 2011 -ELEMENT

CASH FLOW TOTALS

FROM FA

COST PLAN

£000's COOO's £000's COOO's COOO's £000's £000's £000's £000's COOO's £000's £000's COOO's COOO's £000's COOO's COOO's COOO's £000's £000's £000's COOO's COOO's £000*8 COOO's COOO's C's

Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat Inct Vat Ind Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat Inct Vat (net Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat tndVat Incl Vat Incl Vat Incl Vat InclVat lncl Vat Incl Vat

Building/external works * - * 28 53 156 266 118 97 203 2,094 3,827 3,130 2,170 609 292 7 194 13,244 13,243,561 Professional fees on 1 615 306 99 99 99 52 52 31 31 31 96 93 93 93 93 93 1,976 1,976,353

Fixed educational F&E 0 500 500 500,197 Professional fees on 3 0 16 8 8 8 8 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 72 72,194

Loose educational F&E 0 1,652 106 1,758 1,860,111 Professional fees on 5 0 12 18 18 18 18 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 12 18 10 137 35,250

ICT equipment > 0 1,391 100 1,491 1,491,310 Professional fees on 7 7 8 8 8 8 1 1 1 2 18 18 8 88 88,125

Surveys (incl Fees/Vat) 71 1 2 74 234,814 Statutory fees (incl Fees/Vat) 17 3 2 22 inc Other (incl Fees/Vat) 29

S N ^ 27 4 4 5 4 2 2 5 5 5 5 5 2 104 inc Legal costs (incl Fees/Vat) 0 4 4 4 4 11 2 2 35 inc

MONTHLY TOTALS 739 0 0 0 ' 365 169 175 S ^ 199 250 338 154 135 241 ^00 3,930 3,234 2,289 1,238 3,457 S S i o 400 0 0 0 19,501 CUMULATIVE TOTALS 739 0 0 0 , 365 534 679 , 1,128 1,466 1,620 1,755 4,196 8,126 11,360 13,649 14,887 18,344 18,362 V . 3 6 2 18,762 18,762 18,762 18,762 19,501 19,501,915

EXPENDITURE SPLIT | CONTRIBUTION - TRUST 0 28 102 1,463 7 1,600 1,600,000

CONTRIBUTION - OTHER 0 443 443 443,000

CONTRIBUTION - OTHER (LCC) 0 400 400 400,000

CONTRIBUTION - DFES 739 0 0 365 141 145 199 250 / " 3 3 8 154 135 t 2,200 3,930 3,234 2,187 1,238 1,551 11 0 0 0 0 0 17,058 17,058,915

MONTHLY TOTALS 739 0 0 0 365 169 145 199 2&<J 338 154 135 241 3,930 3,234 2,289 1,238 3,457 18 0 400 0 0 0 19,501 19,501,915

elated costs and temporary accommodation, (includin " Includes demolitions, abnormal buildin< Item 15 = Chaplaincy Centre Item 16 = Sale of school sites Item 6 includes the professional fees for Creative Design to tfag FFE instaHatiQELXtHeir agreed fee exceeds the allocated fee allowance on the CCL for these works, the^lStance has been drawn from the capital expenditure funding for the loose FFE. Item 4 The Catering Consultant Fee is to be drawn from the Fixed FFE budget. Item 14 Total Sponsor Contribution = £2,000,000 however the Annex 6b shows a contribution of £1,600,000 to reflect that the Sponsor has already purchased the Van Hire Centre at a cost of Item 14 The £137k contribution is to cover the cost of the off site highway works (excluding the £5k legal fee contribution) Item 4 Professional Fees Associated with the core design team.

1 2

3 4

5 6

7 8

9 10 11 12

13

14 15 16

17 18

Architect drawings I specification of the Academy new build I refurbishment as prepared up to RIBA stage D

85

Arup Fire Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP

0.0 Introduction 0.1 Client Sign-off

Client Approval of Scheme Design Review

This confirms our approval of the Design and the Brief, the Programme and the Cost Plan for the Scheme Design Review, RIBA Stage D and our instruction to the design team to proceed to RIBA Stage E Detail Design on the basis of the attached report.

We understand that from this point onwards changes to the signed-off Scheme Design, which are client originated, may mean additional expense and will be controlled and monitored in line with Change Order Procedure attached.

Costs will be monitored against changes in a 2-step process, whereby the change proposed is costed by the Quantity Surveyor and upon this cost advice the decision is made to include or ignore.

Signed on behalf of Department for Education and Skills

(Paul Sandford)

Signed on behalf of David Samworth CBE DL (Caroline Whitty)

Signed on behalf of Bishop of Leicester (Reverend Canon Peter Taylor)

(Date)


0.0 Introduction 0.2 Scope, Purpose and Timescale

Scope and Purpose

This report has been prepared by the Design Team to describe the Scheme Design (RIBA Stage D) of Leicester City Academy. It summarises the status of the brief, the design and the programme, prior to commencement of the development of the detailed proposals (RIBA stage E).

Separate sections describe the brief, the site, the design including architecture, services, structure, landscape and specialist areas), the cost, project management issues, statutory approvals and CDM issues. The Appendix includes briefing documents which record the discussions and amendments made to the brief. This will need to be considered in more depth during the next phase of design development to RIBA Stage E.

Approval of this report enables the scheme to be submitted for Funding Agreement. Subsequently this will enable the project team to continue the design development towards Detailed Design, submit for the Detailed Planning Application and the preparation of tender packages.

Timescale

The new Academy building is to be complete by May 2007, to allow the Academy to open at the start of the Autumn Term 2007. The school will be constructed under a single stage 'Traditional Contract' starting on site in November 2005. It is proposed that the design team will initially complete work packages for 80% of the total contract value. This will then be tendered, whilst the design team will complete the remaining 20% of the work packages.

The detailed design will be developed over the next two months, during which time there is the opportunity for the design team to incorporate input from the client body and local community prior to finalisation of the design. The reserved matters planning application will be made at the beginning of February. After approval of the design at Stages D and E, changes introduced (by any party) become increasingly difficult to incorporate, could cause delay or additional costs, and are therefore to be avoided.

After the approval of the Stage D report, the design and Brief Document will be submitted to the DfES for the Academy Funding Agreement, which will confirm the capital funding which the DfES guarantees for the project, and agrees the terms for the operation of the Academy, and its teaching ethos.

Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP Arup Fire Fleming and Barron

Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds

0.0 Introduction 0.3 The Client Structure

Design to RIBA Stage D

Client

Client Sponsor

Department for Education and Skills Academies Division 4P Sanctuary Buildings Gt Smith Street London SW1P 3BT

Keith Panes Rob Tate Paul Sandford

David Samworth CBE DL The Samworth Brothers Group of Companies Chetwode House Samworth Way Melton Mowbray Leicestershire LEi3 iGA

Project Lead SBDU SBDU

The Chairman

The Academy sponsors are David Samworth CBE DL and the Bishop of Leicester who are members of the Academy Trust. Please refer to the Project Execution Plan for more detail on the client structure.

Prior to the Funding Agreement the design team is employed directly by the Department for Education and Skills (DfES). We have liased with the DfES, developing the academy design within the guidelines set out for Academies by the DfES, while taking direct instructions from the sponsors with regard to the specific design for this site. In addition we have received advice from Tribal Education; educational consultants employed by the DfES to prepare the brief for the Academy.

After Funding Agreement the design team appointments are novated to the Academy Trust. The members of the Academy Trust are: the Sponsors (David Samworth CBE DL and Bishop of Leicester); appointees of the Sponsor; the Chair of the Governing Body; and appointee of the Secretary of State, and any extra members unanimously agreed by the founder Members.

Client Sponsor

Caroline Whitty

Rev Tim Stevens Diocese of Leicester Bishop's Lodge 10 Springfield Road Leicester LE2 3BD

Sponsor representative

Rev Canon Peter Taylor Sponsor representative


D

0.0 Introduction 0.5 Table of Contents

0.0 Introduction 0.1 Client Sign-off 0.2 Scope, purpose and timescale 0.3 The client structure 0.4 The team 0.5 Table of Contents 0.6 Executive summary

1.0 The Brief 1.1 Client's vision of statement 1.2 Client standards, policies and maintenance issues 1.3 Curriculum model 1.4 Brief/ Area Schedule 1.5 Brief Analysis / Relationship Diagrams 1.6 Consultees

2.0 Site Analyses/infrastructure 2.1 Site & Context Analyses: 2.2 Site Information: 2.3 Boundary conditions 2.4 Landscape Analyses 2.5 Surveys

3.0 Architectural Report 3.1 Feasibility proposals 3.1.1 Design Aspirations/ Key Design Principles 3.2 The Building Design 3.2.1 The design concept/principles 3.2.2 Drawings 3.2.3 Model photos 3.2.4 Phase I: Study 3.2.5 Phase 2& 3: Study 3.2.6 Science lab Layout 3.2.7 Dining Area Study 3.2.8 Chaplaincy Centre 3.2.9 The Envelope - Phase 1, 2 & 3 Study 3.2.10 Security 3.2.11 Site Security 3.2.12 Building Security 3.2.13 Precedents: Study Visits 3.2.14 Precedents: Exterior 3.2.15 Precedents: Major Heart 3.2.16 Precedents: Sports Halls 3.3 Sustainability Agenda 3.4 Universal Access and Design Standards 3.5 Outline Specification 3.6 Recommendations

4.0 Services Engineering Report 4.1 Executive Summary 4.2 Design Assumptions, standards, and criteria 4.3 Site Analysis 4.4 Building torm and environmental strategy 4.5 Green opportunities 4.6 Outline Specification 4.7 Utilities report

5.0 Structural Engineering Report 5.1 Building Description 5.2 Site 5.3 Structure 5.4 Design criteriav 5.5 Demolition 5.6 Earthworks 5.7 Drainage

6.0 Landscape Report 6.1 Response to site and curriculum 6.2 The Proposals

7.0 Specialist Reports 7.1 Fire 7.2 Acoustics 7.3 ICT

8.0 Cost Report 8.1 Cost Plan 8.2 Abnormals 8.3 FF&E assumptions 8.4 Exclusions 8.5 Benchmarks 8.6 Life Cycle Costings

9.0 Project Manager's Report 9.1 General issues / Project Delivery Plan 9.2 Programme 9.3 Procurement options/recommendations 9.4 Performance specified and specialist packages 9.5 Risk and Value management 9.6 Recommended Next Steps

10.0 10.1 10.2 10.3

Statutory Authorities Planning Transport Plan Building Regulations

11.0 CDM Report & Risk Assessments 11.1 Report by Planning Supervisor

12.0 Drawings and Drawings Register

13.0 Appendix Appendix A Appendix B

Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F

Appendix G Appendix H Appendix J Appendix K

- Room Data Sheets - Minutes of Briefing Meeting No.1

Minutes of Briefing Meeting No.2 - Elevational Rules - Project Risk Register - Value Improvement Register - Acoustic Relaxation letter

Additional calculations - DfEE Security Questionare - ICT Initial Report - Breeam Assessment - Performance Specified Work/ Contractor Designed

Portions

Arup Fire Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds Fei lden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP

0.0 Introduction 0.6 Executive Summary

Leicester City Academy will open tor the academic year at the beginning of September 2007 on the site of the former Mary Linwood School. The existing school buildings will be demolished and the new Academy will be built in a similar location on the site. The Academy is a new type of school, funded jointly by the DfES and by its sponsors, David Samworth CBE DL and the Bishop of Leicester. The Academy will be independent of the LEA and will be fully inclusive and non fee-paying.

The Academy will have a specialism of Business and Enterprise with a curriculum focus on food, which will be the theme that will be used to inform teaching and learning in all curriculum areas. The core principle which underpins the development is the ethos of healthy body, mind and spirit. In physical terms, the food technology rooms will be given prominence in the design, with a strong connection with the dining area. It is anticipated that strong links with local industry will further enrich the potential of the specialism, but it should be emphasised that the Academy will offer a full curriculum and be expected to attract pupils with a wide range of interests.

The Bishop of Leicester, as one of the sponsors, has added a further layer to the brief which integrates a chaplaincy centre at the heart of the Academy. It is envisaged that the chaplaincy space will be used by the school but also by the wider community. This will add an 'inspirational and uplifting' space into the building.

The Leicester City Academy will be an all-ability 3 to 16 school, amounting to a total of 1046 pupils. Ages 3 to 11 will have a 2 form entry [30 per classbase, 60 per year] and ages 12 to 16 will have a 4 form entry [30 per classbase, 120 per year]. It is planned that there will be a transfer of pupils from the nearby primary schools, Newry and Southfields Primary schools which are due to close. At the outset, the upper half of the school [which would be traditionally a secondary school) will not be at capacity, and will be fed through from the lower years, and will be at capacity in 2011.

The Government has stated that all Academies will be schools:

• Which are centres of Excellence, securing the highest possible standards of achievement.

• With a broad and innovative curriculum relevant to today's students, whatever their educational needs.

• With state of the art facilities.

• At the heart of their community, sharing their facilities with other schools and the wider community.

The design team, Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects, Buro Happold and Davis Langdon were appointed in late June 2004 for the design of the Academy. Churchman Landscape Architects were subsequently appointed as landscape architects in August 2004. Fleming and Barron were appointed as acoustic consultants in October 2004; Approved Inspector Services as Building Control in October 2004 and Arup Fire as fire consultants in January 2005.

As part of the ongoing consultation process, the team have liaised with both the local community [through the Stakeholder's Group) as well as the two schools, Southfields Junior and Newry Infant schools whose pupils and staff will be transferring to the new Academy. This process is being lead by the sponsors representatives (Rev Peter Taylor and Caroline Whitty) in conjunction with the Stakeholders Review Group.

An Outline Planning Application was lodged on the 29 October 2004, requested permission for use and extent. Permission was granted on 18 January 2005 with conditions detailed in Section 10.1. Reserved Matters Planning Application will be lodged on the 11 February 2005, allowing a further 13 weeks before the Demolition Contract can be awarded.

Currently the plans appended in this document illustrate a scheme of 7914sqm. The arrangement of the spaces aims to provide for the curriculum, pastoral and social structures described within the sponsor's vision and brief as well as providing an engaging environment with a strong visual identity.

The general principles of the architectural design are:

• A major heart where the pupils and staff from all phases can mix and use the common resources providing a common unified identity

• Three distinct phases with their own individual hearts

• Expressing the curriculum's focus on food by giving dominance to the food technology rooms and dining area

• Positioning the Chaplaincy centre so that it can relate to the major heart of the school, and yet open up to the Phase 1 hall for larger occasions, as well as providing a marker at the entrance

• The school will be a beacon within the local area by having a street presence on Trenant Road to the north, whilst still addressing Saffron Lane to the west.

• Clearly expressing the three phases in the building form and related landscape concepts

• Positioning the community facilities in such a way that they will feel welcomed but in a controlled secure environment

The landscape design is of high importance to promote the 'Healthy Mind, Body and Soul' concept. It is anticipated the focus on food will be brought into the design. It is vital that the Diamond Jubilee Covert is seen as a resource for learning for the Academy and the wider community, and as an asset which is cared for by the pupils.

It is the intention to pursue integrated solutions for the many issues arising from a through school in such a way that the individual aspects of the building design resolves issues across the disciplines. For example, as well as its merits as a structural solution, the current preference for a flat slab concrete structure allows for a freedom in plan geometry, fewer FF&E co-ordination issues, future flexibility of internal wall layouts and thermal mass to help attenuate external temperature swings.

The key strategies for the building are outlined in this report. The Design Team is committed to developing a design and specification that achieves the highest environmental sustainability within the budget, whilst creating a socially robust development in this sensitive community. The team will be appointing a BREEAM assessor towards the beginning of Stage E to carry out interim assessments on our proposals and initiate discussions on how the sustainability of the proposal can be improved.

Fei lden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP Arup Fire Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds

1.0 The Brief 1.1 Client Vision Statement

DfES Vision for the Academy Programme

Schools Building on Success, the Green Paper published in February 2001, set out the Government's commitment to transforming education and to creating an education system that prepares children for a rapidly changing world and develops the potential of everyone, no matter what their background or where they live.

The innovative Academies programme, launched in March 2000, enables sponsors from the private and voluntary sectors to establish new all-ability schools whose running costs are met by the state. Academies represent a radical option to help raise achievement in areas of historic underperformance through innovative approaches to school management, governance, teaching and the curriculum.

Academies will have facilities comparable to the best in the maintained sector, providing a high quality learning environment. They will be located in areas where many pupils lack facilities at home, and where communities lack resources. Academies will stand at the heart of their community, sharing resources and facilities with other local schools and the wider community. By offering access to the best in Information and Communication Technology (ICT), sport and other facilities, they will provide a community focus for adult education and lifelong learning.

High-quality design will be fundamental to the high aspirations for Academies. For Academies, good design is not an 'add-on' - it is fundamental in ensuring that teaching and learning occupy the central place in the institution's life.

The Sponsors Vision for Leicester City Academy

The Vision Statement

The Academy will have a strong Christian ethos, welcoming and nurturing all irrespective of their faith. The Academy's specialisim of Business and Enterprise shall be explored through the curriculum focus of food. The Academy will be student focused and dedicated to the young people of the local community it serves. Through its ethos, environment and curriculum the Academy will enable young people to realise their true potential, encourage them to make positive contributions to society and prepare them for adult life.

Through its inspirational environment it will also provide a focus and resource for the local community for re-generation and growth. Access to the Academy's accommodation, facilities and programmes will provide the community with learning and development opportunities.

The Core Principles

The Core Principles will underpin the work of the Academy in its entirety and are the basis of its ethos which will guide and inform decision making. While this ethos is rooted in the Christian faith, the beliefs and practices of all faiths will be valued and respected.

The Academy will be committed to the pursuit of high standards and levels of achievement in all areas of learning activity and behaviour. Students will be challenged to achieve through a culture of high expectations.

These core principles that supports the vision of the Academy can be outlined as follows:

• to provide an environment and ethos that encourages Spiritual development

• to provide a holistic approach to create a united school community • to provide a learning environment that supports social inclusion • to provide opportunities that enhance the development of thinking

and learning for students and staff • to provide opportunities that promote the ability of students to

develop positive relationships and to cope constructively with challenging social life situations

• to maintain high expectations and aspirations for all.

The Vision for the Academy

In response to the initial brief document, Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects identified the following eleven key aims and objectives for the project. They consist of both educational and building aspirations and are to be used to help evaluate emerging design proposals.

1. Vision. An Academy where the ethos, environment and curriculum enables young people to realise their true potential, encourage them to make a positive contribution to society and prepare them for adult life.

2. Quality - People - Performance. The environment should be such that it respects the pupils, develops them to the maximum potential, at their own rate of learning and allows them to achieve their best results.

3. The Through School. To create an Academy for young people aged 3-16 which has a single coherent identity. The continuity found in a through school will be used to maximise the pupils potential.

4. Phases. To organise the Academy into three distinct 'phases' within the unity of the whole.

5. Spirituality. To place spirituality at the heart of the school by fully integrating the Chaplaincy centre into the everyday life of the Academy.

6. Specialism. Business and Technology shall be creatively explored through the focus on food to deliver a broad and well-rounded curriculum

7. Community. To fully integrate the life of the school with the local community creating a catalyst to re-invigorate and refresh the local area.

8. Sustainability. Through the design of the building strive to achieve economic, social and environmental sustainability.

9. Architecture. To translate the concept and vision of the Academy into an uplifting and inspirational new building.

10. Adaptability. To provide long term adaptability and flexibility that will allow the building to adapt to the inevitable changes in pedagogy over time.

11. Value for Money. To provide added value by maximising the internal quality and facilities within the budgetary constraints


1.0 The Brief 1.2 Client Standards, Policies and Maintenance Issues

DfES

The DfES provides extensive documentation as design guidance for the design of City Academies, and schools generally.

DfES Building Bulletin 82 - Area Guidelines for Schools [BB82, (2002 rev)], has been used as the base area schedule for Leicester City Academy, and developed as a comparator within the briefing sessions held with the project's sponsors.

DfES BB82 [2002 rev] has also been used as a basis for the curriculum analysis and specific brief produced by Tribal Education and is identified later in section 1.4.

The DfES have defined additional standards which apply to particular aspects of the building, which are defined in the Building Bulletin series of publications, including new standards such as BB93 Acoustic Design of Schools which has now come into force and is relevant to this project.

A summary of the available guidance on school design is given in the document:

Schools Building Design Unit, Key Design Guidance for Schools: access to information for school design. January 2003

This lists information under the following headings which will be referred to in the detailed development of the design:

1.0 Statutory Framework: A summary of statutory legislation which affects schools 1.1 Disability Discrimination Act 1.2 The Education School Premises Regulations 1.3 Protection of Sports Playing Fields 1.4 Planning Regulations 1.5 The Building Regulations 2000 1.6 DfES Constructional Standards 1.7 Construction (Design & Management) Regulations 1994 1.8 Health & Safety Regulations

2.0 Initial Investigations for Site development

3.0 Strategic School Design 3.1 Revised Area Guidelines 3.2 Curriculum Analysis Method 3.3 Inclusion SEN & Special schools 3.4 Schools for the Future summary 3.5 Community use

4.0 Specialist School Facilities 4.1 Early Years 4.2 Sports 4.3 Secondary school specialist subjects 4.4 Information & Communication Technology, Learning Resources 4.5 Sanitary Accommodation 4.6 Furniture and Equipment

5.0 Sustainability & Low Energy 5.1 Environmental Design including heating 5.2 Ventilation and cooling 5.3 Lighting 5.4 Acoustics 5.5 Security and safety 5.6 Co-ordination of Building Services

6.0 Constructional Standards & Planning for Construction Works


Curriculum model

The curriculum model has been developed by Tribal Education, as an interpretation of the client and sponsors vision and ethos. The Academy will have a specialism of Business and Enterprise with a curriculum focus on food.

The curriculum focus will be delivered in partnership with the Leicester Food Industry and the wider business community. Using specialist knowledge and expert input, all students will have the opportunity to access an innovative and broad curriculum that will enable them to explore the science and practice of:

Producing Food Food Technology and Design Marketing Business Studies The Environment The Ethics of Food

To deliver the curriculum focus of food the Academy will need to further develop the curriculum themes outlined above. It is envisaged that traditional subject-based teaching could be organised around a particular theme / sub theme so that, for example, at a given point in the year the teaching of literacy, numeracy, art, design, technology could be focused around 'Producing Food'.

Early evidence from other 3 - 1 6 schools indicates that they have very quickly reverted to a traditional primary and secondary structure. It has been agreed that the design of the curriculum and the staffing structure should reflect the desire to prevent such tendencies being repeated in Leicester City Academy.

The Academy will be designed so as to cut across the Key Stage and primary / secondary divide to avoid the high fall-out percentage at the end of Key Stage 2. Thus the introduction of three 'phases' that naturally breaks away from the traditional primary - secondary mould.

• Phase 1 ages 3-9 Nursery, Reception and Years 1 -4 • Phase 2 ages 10-13 Years 5-8 • Phase 3 ages 14-16 Years 9-11

Within Phase 1 the pupils and teaching will be class-based. This will entail pupils generally staying in one classroom for the majority of the day and having all the subjects taught there.

In Phase 2, Years 5 and 6 will be class-based. From Year 7 onwards the pupils will have classbases for registration but will also be moving around the school to use the specialist facilities.

Arup Fire Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon

1.0 The Brief 1.3 Curriculum model

PHASE 1 PHASE 2 - x -

PHASE3 tFoniEKntr

N R 2 4 • 1 3

««jMienwr

10 11

• SHARED SPECIALIST

.GROUP RMS FOOO IFOOD IRSSSTMAT

TEXT I GRAPH lART

MUSIC BUS ST tCT

Diagram of the class bases and associated specialist rooms

YEAR AGE PUPIL NO KEY STAGE PHASE FORM ENTRY

3 26 FOUNDATION 4 PHASE I

RECEPTION 5 K1 [326 pupils] 1 6 30C 2 FE 2 7 3 £ K2 4 9 5 M H H C 12C e • • H 1 1 1 7 24C K3 4 FE £ M 1 3 6 H H B B 3

1C 36C K4 11

Diagram of the year structure and associated pupil numbers and form entry

Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP

1.0 The Brief 1.4 Brief / Area Schedule

Building Area Chaplaincy Centre

The revised DfES budget for the project has allowed for a gross internal area of 7675sqm. This is based on:

• 7567sqm based on BB82 (July 2002). • 33sqm additional area to achieve dining requirements • 75sqm additional area for the ramps between the phases

Over and above this there is additional area for the Chaplaincy centre amounting to 238.5sqm.

The total gross internal area for the project is 7914sqm.

The following key aspects of the curriculum model are noted in their effect upon the brief areas proposed.

• Christian ethos Although the Chaplaincy area is separately funded, it is completely integrated with the Academy. There is opportunity (when available) for the Academy to utilise the Chaplaincy centre facilities and vice versa.

• Curriculum focus on food The emphasis on food has resulted in the provision of two food technology rooms instead of the standard one. These are envisaged to have cookery facilities in both rooms.

• Phase structure of the Academy The vision developed by the sponsors clearly states the desire for succinct phase areas that have an identity and 'heart' of their own. This has resulted in more area been given over to these 'hearts', instead of having double-loaded corridors.

• SEN provision There is a predicted high percentage of approximately 38% of pupils requiring SEN. However, the DfES has stated that no additional area and therefore funding will be granted for SEN provisions. To satisfactorily provide for SEN, a classroom of 56sqm needs to be allocated purely as an SEN work space. This space cannot be used as a classbase.

The inclusion of a Chaplaincy Centre enriches the Academy's brief, bringing an unusual layer into a school environment. As a worship space the Chaplaincy needs to have its own physical identity whilst also being at the heart of the Academy.

The existing congregation of St Christopher's Church, Saffron Lane will be transferring to the Chaplaincy and it is vital to maintain a sense of ownership for this community. A fine balance needs to be struck between enabling the congregation to stamp their identity on the space and creating a space that is welcoming to all faiths within the Academy and wider community.

"A design which allows for the chaplaincy to be visually recognisable, and for the church to retain its integrity, will be of value not only to the church and the Academy, but also to the parish more widely." - a representative of St Christopher's

The brief requirements of the Chaplaincy are to allow for:

• Sunday morning and evening worship • Evening clubs for children, including Club 8-10 (Sunday School

replacement), Football Club and 'Disco Divas' • Scout Groups • Parent and toddler groups, currently held two mornings a week • Midweek evening meetings for study, prayer etc. • Sunday lunches and evening activities. These may include

preparation and cooking of food occasionally and the food technology rooms could be utilised.

• Daytime holiday club in school holidays

The Chaplaincy wishes to have use of the following Academy spaces:

The brief areas are as follows:

120sqm Dedicated worship space for 60 people (sacred space, focal point specifically for worship) Office for Chaplain/ Priest inc. sacristy 25sqm [counselling, consultation, small meetings, storage of church documents] Meeting room 20sqm Storage 20sqm For equipment for parent and toddler groups Circulation and partitions 54sqm

Primary hall and store Secondary hall Food technology rooms for catering Sports Hall Classrooms / staff room

[during the school day] [out of hours] [out of hours] [out of hours] [out of hours]

It has been confirmed by The Rt Revd Tim Stevens that the Chaplaincy centre will not be used for funerals during school hours, but may need to accommodate them in special circumstances.

Community Use

The following spaces are intended to be accessible to the community: -

Sports Hall and associated changing Phase 1 hall and Assembly Hall [and associated stores] Chaplaincy Centre Chaplaincy Centre meeting room for use by parent's Specialist classes (e.g. food technology) ICT Suite/ resource areas Drama Studio General teaching spaces for Adult Learning initiatives

TOTAL: 239sqm

Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP Arup Fire Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds

I

PHABE1

rr nr

. 1 rr rr Rr fir rr Br Rr

Rr | rr j Rr r

nc

PHASE 2

IRU

mini—Mi Br

Alt* All WJ

Rn

Br

B E D S An

nr

Ar mr

PHASES

fin* Itffi RIIi Rffi ftTI* Ittlt BHi

mt ,mv l - l l - l l - l

fir

nr m flsi.

SPECIALIST

SSVi Hi* BAi m

I Rn

1 ••• M H I I I W U B —

nn, k 9Ri flra ar

IRli



HALLS

m

IK in

m tn

REMAINING NON-NET AREAS

CENTRAL RESOURCES I mia I ru»

Iff

CATERING AND ADMHWIKATION

CHAPLAINCY

'«r H a t [k,. |

KEY:

wnm —im mom



The Brief Area

The revised DfES budget for the project has allowed for a gross internal area of 7675sqm. This is based on:

• 7567sqm based on BB82 (July 2002). • 33sqm additional area to achieve dining requirements of through-

school • 75sqm additional area for the ramps between the phases

Over and above this there is additional area for the Chaplaincy centre amounting to 239sqm.

The total gross internal area for the project is 7914 sqm.

Analysis

The attached tables schedule out the detailed brief as prepared by Tribal Education. This is compared against revisions to the brief and the areas drawn in the Outline Design (Stage C) and Scheme Design (Stage D).

The brief has been added and amended to include: (achieved within the gross area)

• Phase I Group Rooms • Music Recording Room • Specific brief for ICT areas (inc. ICT hub and laptop storage) • SEN workbase • Revised administrative area

(inc. Principal's PA office, meeting room) • Water storage • Storage (inc. dining chair store, cleaners, etc)

The design incorporates the following areas over and above the brief: (achieved within the gross area)

• Extra area in the LRC (DfES concerned that the brief was not sufficient)

• Increased toilet area (an additional 100sqm to meet BS guidelines)

Nmery Clan Bon Foundation 1 Clan Ban Reception Orrtt Bow, fear 1 Ctaaa Ban fear 1 Cfcni Baae fear 2 Clan Ban fear 2 Clan Base ear 3 Cten Ban ear 3 Clan Ban

Intentew Roam Stared Group Room 5tared Grcup Room

f r t a l H a n i t k n b a n J w ^ r "

'Araety aterage

l i i i >• tc

ReuplanStnjt

fear 1 Storage Vear 2 Storage Year 2 Storage

ear 5 Claw Base

fear 0 Class Base fear 6 Class Base General Classroom

General Classroom General Classroom General Clanrnom General Classroom Staff Office Stall Office Intersew Room

Total Phaee H Claaa Base Area

fear 5 Class Base Storage A Class Base Storage

Vear 6 Class Base Storage General Classroom Storage General Ctasvoom Storage General Clesauuiii Storage General Classroom Storage General Classroom Storage

Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP Arup Fire Fleming and Barron Buro Happold

Phaa* II Clasrooms _ ..

General Classman 56 56 0 56 0 General Classman 56 56 0 56 0 General Classroom 56 56 0 56 0 General Classroom 56 56 0 56 0 General Classroom 56 56 0 56 0 General Classroom 56 56 0 56 0 General Classroom 56 56 0 56 0 General Classroom 66 56 0 56 0 General Classroom 58 53 •3 0 0 Staff Office 24 16 16 6 Staff Office -6 0 -6 Interview Room 2 0 •6

T otal Phase III Classroom Area H i 4

Phase ID Storaoa . General Classroom Storage 0 4 0 General Classroom Storage 0 4 0 General Classroom Storage 0 4 0 General aassroom Storage 0 4 0 General Classman Storage 0 4 0 General Classman Storage 0 4 0 General Oanroon Storage 0 4 0

General Oawooni Storage 0 .4 0 0 0

9

Science

-atuxalory • Ph in 90 90 0 90 0 .Moratory • Ph in ! > 90 0 90 0 -ebortWy • PhW • > 90 0 90 0 feretory - Ph ID 90 90 0 90 0 .aboratory • Ptt III « i 97 7 90 0 Prep. Room 30 30 0 30 0

/otai 4denee k im 44o 4*7 6

Doaign Technology _ __

Resistant Mateiids Room 112 109 J 113 Electronics 1 Control Room 90 90 0 90 0 Textles Room 90 90 0 90 0 Graphics Room 77 77 0 77 0 Food Room 100 95 -6 Prep. Room 30 25 -5 30 0

Total Unlgn Technology Area 6o6

Oesiyi ,T»chnology Storage _ . . .

Resistant Matertds Storage 0 5 0 electronics / Control Storage 0 5 0 Textles Storage 0 -5 GrapNcs Storage 0 5 0 Food Storage 4 5 0

I otal Uaaifin Tech Storage Area SO

Specialist Kooms - —

Food Technology Latwatory 100 99 95 •5 3ustess Studies / ICT 70 69 70 0

90 90 0 90 0 <ln Room 0 0 Music Room 74 74 0 65 64 Music Practice Room 7 0 7 0 Music Practice Room 7 0 7 0

PracSce Room 7 0 0 0 0 Recording Room 17 17 0

TotsJ Specialist Area ttt S57 -2 U4 JJ

Specialist Rooms Storage

Food Technology Lab. Storage 3 -2 5 0 Food Technology Lab. Storage 3 -2 5 0 Butfness Studies 1 ICT Storage 5 0 5 0 Aft Room Storage 10 5 10 5 A/1 Room Storage 0 -5 0 -5 hsttwnent Stare 10 9 0 4 4

•3

Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds


CT_. _

title • Phase I CT Suite • Phase U CT Suite • Phase III fedwwiaft Room ICT Teaching Space ICT Resource Base - Phase I CT Resource Base • Phase II CT Resource Base - Phase III

ICTStorage Area

CT Suite Store - Phase I ICT Sute Suxe - Pfcase II ICT Suite Sure - Phase III Tedriaan Store ICT Teadvng Store

-Phasel - Phase II & III Level 0 - Phase II & III Level 1

Laptop Storage - Phase I - Phase II & IU Level 0

Storage - Phase II A III Level 1

Total ICT Stomge Ataa-*

Sports & Assembly HaBa_

Sports Hal Sports Hal Store Phaae I Hal Phase I Chair Store AasenkHy Hall

Oatr Store

Drona Studo Store Chaplaincy Space

Total Sports A AsaomMy Halls Araa

Small Group Room Phase I Small Group Room Phase II Small Group Room Phase III Small Group Room LRC

Centre! Resources

.eamtog Resource Centre

.RC Phase I

.RC Phase DA til LRC Store

kuerview Room

fSTSScrtnil Rasof caa Ar— ~

mlblnlng A.

Recaption Area Gonad Office General OStee Store Reprographics Area Refrograpfsca Store Medical Rocni

PTMeH Stafl Social Roam

Prindpar>P*>0(«ce Meeltog Room

Total AdraWatratian Area""

Toilets "

Pup*! Toilet* • Reception Toilets • Ph I

PifiU Toilet* • Ph II Pifril Toilet* - Ph III Staff ToieS Disabled Toiet

PvpU Ctangirg

Jctal Tofiei Ares

Remaining Hoi> Hot Arsa. .

Catering

Total Catering Area

faU t^M Area '

Resultant Corridors / Circulation Corridors / Circulation - Ph I Cloakroom Ph I Corridor* I Circulator) - Ph U • GF Corridas 1 Circulation • Ph Ul • GF Corridors / Circulation • GF

CorrfcSon / Circulation - Ph U - FF CorriOors / Ckcuiation - Ph 01 • FF Sports Hal balcony

fatal fckcJation A»» ft

kitsnal Partitions

fatal faUroalPartfiUa

WTAlUbt idefAjST -

Owpl»incY CwttOm

CotmWtttttp Space •nice

Meettng Roof,,

Net to Non-net comparison

The table below compares the DfES BB82 (02) guidance document against the Tribal Schedule of Accommodation & FCBA Stage D drawings.

Area BB82 July 2002 Tr iba l T o t a l Area FCB To ta l A rea Gross Area 7567 m' 7567 m' 7675 m' Net Area 5070 r r ' 5317 m ' 5306 m' Non Net Area 2497 m' 2250 m' 2369 m' % Ne! to Non net 67/33 70/30 71/32

Summary

The above chart highlights that the scheme net to non-net area % is higher than the BB82 guidelines. This identifies that a high proportion of net area (classrooms, workrooms, LRC, etc) is achieved within the scheme, with the non-net area remaining below BB82 guidelines (even with the increase in gross area).


1.0 The Brief 1.5 Brief Analysis/ Relationship Diagram

The Brief is described in detail in 'The Briefing Document' Rev A, dated 24 Spetember 2004.

This diagram has been developed as a 2-dimensional representation of the adjacencies between spaces in The Brief. The diagram identifies the main features of the academy:

• The main hall, Chaplaincy Centre and sports hall form the street frontage to the Academy

• The Academy has a main heart with the Chaplaincy Centre, dining and staff room at the centre of it.

• The concept of a main heart which links to the individual minor Phase hearts

• The teaching accommodation is arranged in three phases, each phase:

Has an individual phase heart Has a strong relationship back to the main school heart Forms part of a whole school identity

• Phase I has a clearly defined threshold, within which it has its own hall and library space, and limited connection to the specialist classrooms.

• The specialist rooms are located on the ground floor and are to be used by Phase 2 & 3, and out of hours community use.

Phase 2 and 3 class bases and hearts are located on the first floor.


Brief Analysis Diagram


1.0 The Brief 1.6 Consultees

The Public Consultation for Leicester City Academy is being directed by Tribal Property Services, Tribal Education, Revd Peter Taylor and Caroline Whitty. The following work has been done to date:

• Stakeholders reference group meetings on a regular basis [chaired by Justin Wilson). FCBA has given a presentation to the group giving an overview of how the design is progressing. The current plans will be issued at the next Stakeholders Meeting on 2 February 2005.

• Public meeting (attended by the sponsors in mid-September)

• 5000 leaflets distributed to local residents and 1000 brochures to the stakeholders and local residents.

The feedback received through this process will be summarised in Tribal's "Consultation Report" which will be prepared for Leicester cabinet, prior to Funding Agreement.

Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects have directly consulted with the following bodies in the development of the scheme:

• Caroline Whitty and Peter Taylor representing David Samworth CBE DL and the Bishop of Leicester

Future Consultations:

The following consultations will be held during this next period leading up to and beyond Detailed Planning Application:

• Local residents and interested parties through the Stakeholders Reference Group Meeting.

• More detailed consultation with the existing St Christopher's Church to develop the Chaplaincy design

• Consultation with City Council over detailed design issues leading to the full Planning Application.

• Specialist input from the Sponsors and other organisations in connection with the specialism and curriculum focus [e.g. Otley Food College],

The Department for Education and Skills (DfES)

Tribal Education acting on behalf of the DfES

Leicester City Council Planning and Highways Department

Southfields and Newry Schools on ICT provision and general design principles

Leicestershire Police to understand the risks and criminal statistics of the area. [See section 3.2.14-16 for further details]

ICT educational consultant, Cambridge Education (CEA). [See section 7.3 for further details]

Denis Wilson Partnership for the Traffic Impact Assessment and Green Travel Plan [See section 10.2 for further details]

Buro Happold to advise the team on Sustainability and more specifically leading up to an interim BREEAM assessment



Locally Known as 'Pork Pie Roundabout'

Cemetery

Leicester City Academy Site

Diamond Jubilee Covert

Council-owned Playing fields

2.0 Site Analysis/ Infrastructure 2.1 Site & Context Analysis

Aerial View of Site



Site Location

Leicester City Academy is located to the southeast of Aylestone. The Academy is to be built on the site of the former Mary Linwood Secondary School. This former school was approximately 7800sqm in area and enrolled around 950 pupils. It has been closed since 1999. The site will be cleared towards the middle of 2005 in preparation for construction in late 2005.

The site is fanked by:

• Trenant Road to the north of the main line of access for the site • Saffron Lane to the west - a wide single carriageway which leads to

the 'Pork-Pie Roundabout' and northwards to the city centre • Council-owned playfields to the south - currently used by the public

for football and general recreation • Diamond Jubilee Covert to the North-East - a dense wooded area

in need of attention and improvement to the boundary conditions

Aerial View of Site


2.0 Site Analysis/ Infrastructure 2.1 Site i Context Analysis

Transport Infrastructure

The Academy site is bounded byTrenant Road to the north and Saffron Lane to the West. Trenant Road it currently used as a rat-run between Saffron Lane and Stonesby Avenie to avoid the 'Pork-Pie Roundabout'.

To the west is the wide Saffron Lane which is fronted by two-storeyed residential properties. There is a large 10m wide Council-owned central reservation which separates the busy single carriageway from a quieter, narrow residential feeder road immediately adjacent to the dwellings.

Both Saffron Lane and Stonesby Avenue are served well by the local bus network. Leicester Railway Station is located 4.4km north of the site but is again well-served by bus routes.

Site Transport Infrastructure

Arup Fire Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape Architects 'm < Feilden Clegg Brad1


Noise

Saffron Lane is a busy road which will geneate a certain level of both incident noise and background noise to the site. Trenant Road, although wider, is a quieter road out of peak hours. There is a primary school, Holy Cross Primary, to the east of the site where a certain level of background noise will be emitted.

The site is orientated almost due north-south, with a natural wind and sun barrier of tall poplars to the southern boundary of the site. The building is angled towards the northern edge of the site. This move has been generated by the urban and contextual geometries, as well as the desire for the school to have a presence on Saffron Lane. As a result, the principle facades face both south-east and south-west. The south-east elevation will be subject to low morning sun, which needs to be addressed in the design of the fagade.

Levels

The site rises from the north-west corner up to the eastern and southern edges, with an overall increase of 5m across the site. The site covers an area of 54 OOOsqm, excluding the Covert.

Site Analysis



Land Use

The Academy site is located in a predominantly residential area in southern Leicester. There are a number of schools in close proximity to the site. Newry Infants and Southfields Juniors are both situated to the north of the ring road A563, both of which will be closing and pupils will be transferred to the new Academy.

There is a certain amount of light industry to the south of the site adjacent to the railway that curves round to the west.

Key

Residential

I Religious

r { / ^ ^ J j . Recreation

Education

Government

Retail

Land use diagram Light Industrial



Playing Fields to south of the school ground



Trenant Road

Pen Close and Trenant Road Junction

A r u P R r e Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape Architects "•• '••.- Fei lden C ler

2.0 Site Analysis/ Infrastructure 2.2 Site Information

Site Ownership

The Academy site is predominantly owned by Leicester City Council, and will be transferred over to the Trust post-Funding Agreement.

The site boundary includes a section of the Diamond Jubilee Covert.

There is a slither of privately-owned land within the main site with an existing MOT / van hire business. The acquisition of the land is currently being finalised and the design is therefore being developed on the basis that this forms part of the Academy site.

The site area of 54,000sqm is not sufficient area for an Academy of this size's external sporting requirements. There are currently negotiations underway between Tribal Property Services [representing the Sponsors] and the Local Authority who own the playing fields south of the poplars. The Joint Use Agreement will be drawn up to agree on the shared use.

Ownership diagram

Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP

•• «•!•.•".>»•, " A -

Arup Fire Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds

• • •

Amp Fire Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churcl

2.0 Site Analysis/ Infrastructure 2.3 Boundary Conditions

The Academy site is addressed by two roads, Saffron Lane and Trenant Road. The character of these frontages have been described earlier, where both are made up of residential properties.

The Saffron Lane boundary presently has an assortment of fencing and struggling vegetation, The Trenant Road boundary is a walled fence edge with metal gates to the two existing access points.

To the south of the site there is a line of well-matured poplars, generally in good condition, the trees will be retained and a secure boundary will be built along this line, separating the playing fields from the Academy site.

The east edge of the site is dominated by the Diamond Jubilee Covert, alongside the rear of Holy Cross Primary School and a small section of residential properties to the north-east corner of the site. The latter are separated from the site with a small feeder path.

The Covert is presently over-grown and mis-managed resulting in an insecure space that is easily accessible by the public on its western edge. This area will need to be thinned out and made secure, to be utilised as an educational asset tor the Academy as well as the Community.


2.0 Site Analysis/ Infrastructure 2.4 Landscape Analysis

Overall Setting

The site is within an urban setting south of the Leicester Ring Road, bounded directly to the west by a major road and residential areas, to the north and south by residential areas and to the east by a mature wooded area and greenspace.

Immediate School Grounds

- A mix of paved, macadam and turfed surfaces of poor quality. Uninteresting shrubbery, several species of mid aged small trees, many of limited landscape value when viewed as a whole. (See site analysis sketch) Several individual trees are worthy of retention including the mature Planes to the eastern boundary of the school buildings and the mature Poplars directly to the south east of the school buildings.

- A series of steps and walls constructed at varying times with varied materials and details. A series of security fences divide the immediate grounds into compartments giving a prison-like quality.

Frontage

School is set within a residential estate. A variety of mid aged small trees set randomly in large turfed areas. The frontage would benefit from a more considered and cohesive landscape treatment, with the inclusion of larger structural parkland/ street trees. The school building is currency set back generously from Trenant Road and well back from Saffron Lane. The buildings are currently set low in the landscape relating to Trenant Road level, directly south of the school the land banks up to reach grade and continues to rise gradually south across the pitches.. Approx 1,5m boundary railings with brick piers and steel gates. Hedge planting and higher quality boundary treatment would improve the aspect from both roads. Large staff car park dominating a large section of the frontage. Delivery bay along frontage.

Main Playing Field

Grass pitches behind the school at a higher level. Bounded to the south by a row of mature poplars which form a strong landscape feature and provide visual screening between the school and residential areas. To the east the pitches are bounded by the mature mixed woodland of the Diamond Jubilee Covert. To the west the boundary with Saffron Lane consists of a mix of low quality evergreen trees and shrubbery which partially screen the road. No authorised public access although several dog walkers noted. A considered boundary planting scheme would much improve the Saffron Lane Aspect. An area of hard surfaced courts adjacent to Saffron Lane at a lower level to the main sports pitches.

Municipal Playing Fields

- A buffer between the school grounds and the residential area to the south. Level with the school pitches. Bounded and partially screened on all sides by shrubbery and domestic planting.

Northern Field

A generous buffer between the adjacent school and residential areas.

Diamond Jubilee Covert

- A mature mixed woodland which would provide a valuable teaching resource for the school. Heavy canopy cover with limited undergrowth at present. The area is currently unsecured with the security fencing breached in several locations. The woodland is being used by dog walkers and by teenagers. There is a litter and safety issue.

- It is suggested that an ecologist be consulted to carry out a phase 1 Habitat survey to identify ecological value and to assist in the production of a management regime proposal for use in discussions with the Local Authority and City Academy.

w v x ; : : '

n — e n

Ji


2.0 Site Analysis/ Infrastructure 2.5 Surveys

The following surveys have been commissioned and completed:

Topographical Survey • Completed in August 2004 by MET Surveys • Site levels [including the Council Playing Fields to the South] • Underground and overground utility tracing • Detail survey of existing school buildings

Asbestos Survey • Type 3 Survey completed in October 2004 by Environmental

Management Services • Asbestos was found both internally and externally • Demolition Contract will need specialist asbestos contractors to

remove and dispose of the asbestos safely. • Leicester City Council have subsequently contracted their asbestos

consultant [AOH] to make safe the external and interior of all the buildings where asbestos was exposed.

Tree Condition Survey • Completed on 5 January 2005 by Symbiosis Consulting • Condition of all the trees within the Diamond Jubilee Covert was

surveyed • An assessment was made of the extent of the litter within the Covert • Survey of existing trees to be retained on the broader site. • See Section 6 tor further details

Bat and Habitat Survey • See following page for further details

Geotechnical and Contamination Investigations • See Section 5 for further details

Acoustic Survey • See Section 7.2 for further details

Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds Fei lden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP

2.0 Site Analysis/ Infrastructure 2.5 Surveys - Initial Bat and Habitat Survey

Capita Symonds commissioned ecologists at FPCR to undertake an initial protected species survey within and on land adjacent to the former Mary Linwood School. This survey was carried out to identify significant ecological constraints that could affect programming for redevelopment and inform of further survey work that would be required.

Summary of Results:

•From current survey evidence it is considered that there are no statutory ecological constraints to re-development of the site from great crested newts or badgers.

•At the time of survey it was determined that long-eared and pipistrelle bats are roosting within the roof voids denoted as 1 a "1 c, Figure 1. These roost sites are a statutory constraint to

demolition affecting the building sections denoted as 1 a - 1 d. To facilitate demolition a DEFRA licence and mitigation for the loss of the roost will be required. Prior to submission of the DEFRA application full detailed planning permission is required.

• Evidence observed during the survey indicates that the roost sites were small and occasionally used. However, this conclusion will have to be confrmed during the period mid-May to July (inclusive) with emergence surveys. Surveys undertaken earlier than this period could lead to DEFRA licence application being rejected on the grounds of insufficient survey data.

• Currently the house and the van hire centre within the curtilage of the site have not been surveyed given access restrictions. It is considered that the house would be a suitable roost site but other buildings within this land were of limited use for bats.

Mitigation:

• Bat boxes may be considered as acceptable mitigation if the roost sites are determined to be small and occasionally used. However, in the long-term bat boxes are generally ineffective mitigation and may not be accepted by English Nature. In the event that a significant roost is found, or English Nature will not accept bat boxes for mitigation, then an alternative roost structure will have to be created, indicative designs are shown in figures 2 - 3.

• If an alternative roost building is required this structure will require planning permission and a long-term maintenance plan will have to be agreed prior to submission of the licence. The planning permission could be submitted either prior to or following submission of the licence application. However, if submitted following submission of the licence application there is the possibility

that granting of the licence application could be slowed down until planning permission for the alternative roost site has been granted.

Following submission of a DEFRA licence the application is generally processed within six - eight weeks. Once granted works to demolish the roost can commence, although it is recommended that the demolition of that identified building should be postponed to September when the numbers in the roost will be reduced.

Prior to commencement of demolition, roost surveys need to confirm that no bats (or a small number of bats are present) will be required. In the event that large numbers of bats are found to still be roosting within the building, demolition will have to be delayed whilst exclusion devices are installed or the colony naturally disperses. On confirmation that bats are absent or only a small number of bats are present, methods for demolition of the roost normally comprise hand stripping ridge and roof tiles within one meter and roof tiles within 1 m of the eaves in the presence of licensed bat worker.

Tab l . 2 - Internal Bui ld ing Impac t ions A Roof Void Su iv^ rs .

&ldg Raf No,

Fttaturva Strucf t tw Ri

?

I

uratF a of V«

I F I !

#aturas id

111

f

l i

Evldanca of occupat ion observed In the roof void.

1a Wooden rafters and purlins constructed around a steel frame. The void was approximately 2m to (he pitch and flrewvlls segregated the void Into several sections. Loft insiietlon was present.

Long eared and plpistreflo bat droppings and urine staining was found scattered throughout the roof void. SmaB concentrations of long eared droppings were found adjacent to partition walls.

1b Wooden rafters and purlins constructed around a steel frame. The void was approximately 2m to the pitch and firewalls segregated (he void into several sections. Loft Insulation was present.

Long eared droppings were observed scattered throughout the roof void and concentrated adjacent to (he partition waO. One small concentration of pipistrelle dropping was also observed adjacent to a partition wad.

Wooden ratters and purflns constructed around a steel frame. The void WBS approximately 2m to (he pitch and firewaBs segregated the voW into BBVBTB! sections. Loft insulation was present

Long eared droppings were observed scattered throughout the roof void. Urine staining was also observed on copper piping.

1d Wooden rafters and purlins constructed around a steel frame. The steel frame within this section supported a large water tank: consequently the environment was more cluttered. The void was approximately 2m (o the pitdi and firewalls segregated the void into several sections. Loft Irmlation was present.

Very little evidence of bat activity observed. Oriy the occasional long eared dropping was found al Ihe time of survey.

No true roof void, false hanging eeiing under a concrete roof structure.

No evidence observed a l lhe Ume of survey.

If No due root void. Fdse hanging celing was present at the time of survey.

None at the time of survey.

2a Internally a false hanging under a s inê skinned corrugated Iron roof.

None al the Ume of survey.

2b A false hanging celing was present under a Dat concrete roof.


3 Intemafy a fdse hanging cel ing W8S present. The main roof metertd had been under boarded,


4 Internally a fcfse hanging cel ing was present. The rrain roof ireterisl had been under boarded.

No evidence of occupation was observed.

5 No access al the time of survey. Unknown.


3.1.1

3.0 Architectural Report 3.1 Feasibility Proposals

Design Aspirations / Key Design Principles The executive summary in Section 0.6 provides the overview of the Academy design. This section focuses on the architectural design principles of the building itself.

The design concept has developed to encompass a number of considera-tions, ranging from organisational and curricular issues to the specifics of the sponsor's vision. The following ideas are key to the development of the academy:

• A building form that expresses the phasing organisation of the Academy

• Creation of a major heart which incorporates the dining • Expression of the specialism with the placement of the Food

Technology Rooms off the central dining space • Creation of minor, more independant hearts within each phase • The definition between public and private space.

The building form has evolved from a number of initial studies into various different school typologies, detailed in section 3.1.2. The 'Ribbon' creates a path through the Academy as the children move through the years. This ribbon forges both internal atria [individual phase hearts] as well as external courtyard breakout areas that are 'owned' by each phase.

Within the larger volume towards Trenant Road, this all-encompassing 'Ribbon' houses the communal resources [sports hall and associated changing and store, assembly hall and plant]; it then moves on to form Phase 1, Phase 2 and finally turns to form Phase 3. The Chaplaincy marks the entrance by being a circular form, which protrudes from the Academy facade as well as emerging proud of the roof scape. This volume, whilst being physically integrated within the Academy, also stands alone as a clear identifiable element.

The entrance sequence brings you past the Chaplaincy, reception and delivers you straight into the major heart of the Academy. This hub of activity is created by pupils using the communal resources, the Chaplaincy and the dining area. This uplifting space has a strong relationship with the exterior (past the centralised kitchen) with a predominantly glazed roof. The dining area can be cleared for larger gatherings but can also be re-configured on a daily basis for informal meetings, workshops, homework group etc. We invisage this space to be quite dynamic and flexible by having fold-away doors between the dining and the Assembly Hall.

The minor hearts are also of the same language. These are flexible spaces that can be inhabitated by the phase that 'owns' it. The Phase 1 heart is on axis with the major heart. Phase 2 and 3 hearts have a linking circulation spine between the two. This spine is a generous zone where the phase-specific ICT break-out facilities are placed to utilise a potentially quiet area during lessons.

The site has a slight slope up towards the south-east corner. The building levels have been determined to work with existing level changes. These internal level changes of 500mm also help distinguish the different phases. Phase 1 is single-storey with a glazed centrally-ventilating atrium. Phase 2 and 3 are over two floors with the Specialist provisions at the ground floor. This area is accessed by both phases. The phase-specific areas are found on the first floor - associated with the more private hearts. There is a clear strategy for community access with facilities on the ground floor being open to the community. The phase hearts remain private.

Phase 1 heart is a flexible space that can be incorporated into a classroom or left free for resource areas. The classbases have a relationship with each other across the central space. The group rooms are accessible by all and are more informal.

Phase 2 and 3 hearts are towards the end of the axis. The classbases have been arranged to allow for future flexibility of opening up these rooms into one larger space.

As a check list for design quality, the development of the design has considered the following 10 key principles of a good school as put forward by CABE (the Commission for Architecture and the Built Environment). These points will be continually referred to in the development of the design.

• Good clear organisation, an easily legible plan, full accessibility • Spaces that are well proportioned, efficient, and fit for purpose • Circulation that is well organised, and sufficiently generous • Good environmental conditions throughout, including appropriate

levels of natural light and ventilation. Environmentally friendly materials

• Attractiveness in design, comparable to that found in other quality public buildings, to inspire pupils, staff and parents

• Good use of the site, public presence as a civic building wherever possible to engender local pride

• A layout that encourages broad community access and use out of hours

• Attractive external spaces offering appropriate security and a variety of different settings

• Robust non-institutional materials that will weather and wear well • Scope for change in both the physical and ICT environment,

possibility of extension where appropriate


3.0 Architectural Report 3.2 Building Design 3.2.1 The Design Concept/ Principles

Urban Form / Massing

• 'Ribbon' being clearly expressed in the massing and elevations

• Circular rooflights down the central spine creates a rythym and light that is distinctly different to the clear atria of the Major and Minor Hearts.

Communal Space and Phase Space

• Halls and larger volumes towards the Trenant Road frontage

• Generic classrooms within 'Ribbon' volume

Circulation

• Change in level to distinguish between each Phase

• Cirulation spine linking major heart with Phases 2 & 3

Atria

1 Major and minor hearts expressed through atria spaces

• Cirulation spine connects the entrance and major heart with Phase 2S3 hearts

Curriculum Focus

• Open plan dining at the heart

•Showcase food rooms, centrally located for potential community use

The Ribbon

• External ribbon wrapping

• Horizontal expression in roofscape Internal lined spaces


3.0 Architectural Report 3.2 Building Design

3.2.2 Drawings The site plan has been developed with a number of issues in mind:

• Building presence on both Trenant Road and Saffron Lane [the skewed alignment allows both to happen]

• Creating a sympathetic relationship with the residential properties on Trenant Road by pulling back the perimeter fencing line

Allowing the separate entrances into the building to work easily with the landscaping indicating the routes

Sports brief - maximising the number of pitches north of the poplars

Site Plan Site Model


3.0 Architectural Report 3.2 Building Design 3.2.2 Drawings

Ground Floor Plan



3.2.2 Drawings

11 D

Rrst Floor Plan



Main frontage to Trenant Lane



3.2.2 Drawings

Main entrance



View from main entrance into dining



3.2.2 Drawings

View from dining into Phase I


• • • • • • •


View into Phase I and out to Foundation play

Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP Arup Fire Fleming and Barron Buro Happold

Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds

• • • • • • • • •


3.2.2 Drawings



Chaplaincy Centre


3.0 Architectural Report 3.2 Building Design 3.2.9 The Envelope: Phase 2 & 3 Study


3.0 Architectural Report 3.2 Building Design 3.2.4 Phase I Study




3.2.9 The Envelope: Phase 2 & 3 Study

„p Removing walls between same year bases Classbases as shown on current plan

Combining storage into the classbase Forming clusters across the atrium and year bases

• These diagrams describe the inherent flexibility in the plan of the phase 1 classrooms and the ways in which it could adapt for a variety of teaching methods. This ranges from incorporating the stores into the classroom spaces as furniture to opening up the classroom spaces to the corridor space. The final layout demonstrates a more open plan approach to the Phase 1 area.

• It should be noted that due to stringent acoustic requirements set out in B893 a specific case would need to be made to the DfES for a relaxation of these regulations based on the agreed educational requirements. • The options have been reviewed by the existing heads, who concluded that Phasel should be set out as described in Option 1 as it created clearly defined classrooms.


3.0 Architectural Report 3.2 Building Design 3.2.9 The Envelope: Phase I Study

i


1 ^

mm ; )

I S •vrxr 0 O"

s r 1 st"



* These diagrams describe the inherent flexibility in the plan of the Phase 2 and 3 first floor classrooms and the ways in which it could adapt for a variety of teaching methods. The class bases are primarily located on the first floor and the diagrams suggest how pairs of classrooms could be linked together and then across the open plan ICT spaces or bridge link spaces to form new enlarged teaching areas.

» As noted on the Phase 1 diagrams there are stringent acoustic regulations currently restricting this approach and a relaxation would need be sought on educational grounds to achieve the majority of these proposals at this time. Any flexible screens between classrooms would have high acoustic requirements to ensure that both classrooms could be used when the screen is closed. Please refer to section 7.2 Acoustics for further details.


3.0 Architectural Report 3.2 The Building Design 3.2.5 Phase 2 & 3: Typical Classroom Layout


• The drawings indicate a variety of table and chair layouts within a 56 and 63sqm classroom space.

• The structural columns are located within the classroom freeing the walls for service runs and simplifying the wall construction.

• Hanging from the ceiling are a series of acoustic baffles within which are recessed lights. These lights have an uplighting element to avoid dark patches on the ceiling above these baffles.



3.0 Architectural Report 3.2 The Building Design

3.2.6 Science Lab Layout

• The drawings indicate two possible ways to layout the science laboratories on the ground floor of Phase 3. There are major implications of each on teaching methods and sen/ices distribution in these rooms. Further discussion is required during the next stage of the project to identify the approach.

• Similarly to the classrooms, acoustic baffles hang within the space incorporating light fittings.

Reflected Celling Plan



The dining space is an open plan double height space within the first entrance zone within the Academy. The brief is to provide sufficient space to sit a phase and a half (540 students). This is achieved by opening up the dining hall to the main assembly hall space through an acoustically rated sliding door. A chair and table layout is illustrated one of many arrangements to incorporate the 540 places required. Adequate chair storage is located adjacent to the dining space. Space has been identified for queuing and servery functions which will need further development at the next stage of the project. It is intended that furniture should be selected that can be used by all ages within the Academy. Staff also eat in this space as part of the ethos of the Academy. Appropriate acoustic measures will be incorporated into the coloured panels on the wall of this space to create an acceptable environment. The dining space can be used as an extension or adjunct of the assembly hall/ studio for performances.




235 37

4-

Sill Perspective of Interior

East-west section

• The chaplaincy centre is focused on the rotunda chapel space at the entrance to the Academy. The Phase 1 assembly hall is directly adjacent to the entrance to the chapel and the two can be joined together to make one larger space for productions, social events and to accommodate larger congregations. The chaplain's office and meeting room are also connected directly to the chapel entrance space.

» Architecturally the rotunda acts as a beacon marking the entrance to the Academy. It is clad in vertical oak boarding and sits under the entrance roof. It protrudes through the roof to provide high level roof lights to the internal space.

• Internally, the space is lined behind the altar space with an inner rendered wall and formed in this are a series of timber lined alcoves providing seating and acoustic absorption. » Access to the chaplaincy centre can be achieved without fully entering the Academy so it can be used independently out of hours without a security risk.



• The typical bay elevation of Phase 1 illustrates the detailed proposals for walis and windows. • The windows to Phase 1 ne are full height screens which incorporate a sliding door and opening windows behind louvre panels. The louvres provide secure night time ventilation for the natural ventilation strategy and on the

north elevation facing Trenant Road the louvres incorporate acoustic baffles. • The walls are faced in an external polymer render system above a 600mm high precast concrete panel with exposed aggregate face and etched surface. All render to have anti-graffiti treatment. The render bays between

windows are coloured to tonally match the precast panel.




PLAN

• The typical bay elevation of Phase 3 illustrates the detailed proposals for walls and windows to both Phases 2 and 3. • The windows to the ground floor have an 1100mm high cill and have inward opening vents as they need to be accessed over laboratory perimeter

benches. The higher cill height allows trunking for power and data to run internally above a 900mm high worktop. • The first floor windows have a 900mm cill height and are restricted to open out 250mm to guard against falls. • As for Phase 1, louvre panels provide secure night time ventilation operable by opening a solid panel on the inside of the room. • Precast concrete panels are generally 1100mm high to the underside of the cills and higher in vulnerable areas adjacent to doors and routes.


3.0 Architectural Report 3.2 The Building Design 3.2.10 Security FCBA have consulted with the Leicestershire Police regarding the local trends in crime and vandalism as well as site and project-specific issues and risks. David Budd [Community co-ordinator] and David Trantum [Central Crime Reduction Officer], along with two colleagues, met with FCBA on 30 November 2004. In response to this meeting, the Police have outlined the following concerns and suggestions:

Crime Statistics for Aylestone, Eyres Monsell and Freeman for 2002 to 2003:

Aylestone Eyres Monsell Freeman City

Burglary - No. of recorded crime 136 212 149 3355 rate per 1000 households 28.5 45.4 37.7 30.4

Criminal damage - No. of recorded crime 324 521 490 9755 rate per 1000 households 30 46.4 49.1 34.7

Theft from vehicle- No. of recorded crime 162 122 161 6033 rate per 1000 households 15 10.9 16.1 21.7

Theft of vehicle - No. of reccrded crime 83 112 102 2257 rate per 1000 households 7.7 10 10.2 8.1

Robbery - No. of recorded crime rate per 1000 households

16

1.6

FCBA have now sent updated drawings to Stuart Bradshaw, the Architect Liaison Officer who heads up the 'Secure By Design' Scheme within Leicester. FCBA are due to meet Stuart Bradshaw in the week commencing 7 February 2005 to discuss the project in more detail. It is hoped that this process will stand us in good stead for a 'Secure By Design' Award from the Leicestershire Police. It should be noted that they have been very supportive and helpful in aiding us in the design.

In addition to this, FCBA have completed DfEE publication questionnaire, 'Improving Security in Schools', Guide 4. [See Appendix G] The following summarises the questionnaire.

24/30 80% Part 1 - Crime High Risk [local area trends and statistics] Part 2 - Environment and Building 27/75 Medium Risk [Academy's proposals] Part 3 - Security measures 1 6 / 4 Medium Risk [Security proposals in place - both physical and management]

36%

35%

Overall Medium Risk

67/150 45%

1108 4.1



3.0 Architectural Report 3.2 The Building Design

3.2.11 Site Security The site is simply secured by two lines of security.

The first area, which is the majority of the site, is contained within a continuous 2.4m high perimeter fence that runs along the road-bounded perimeters as well as along the line of poplars to the south and the Diamond Jubilee Covert to the east.

Access through this primary perimeter security line is at three primary points:

• Service and emergency access from Saffron Lane - controlled times for

• Pedestrian access off Trenant Road into the main entrance of the building. The north-western corner of the site is 'given' back to the community, allowing the area in front of the sports hall to become public domain.

• Two pedestrian access points from the car park. These will be used by the staff, and the northern gate for Phase 1 pupils and parents, and the southern gate for the Phase 2 pupils.

• Controlled access point to the Covert. It is envisaged that the Covert will be used by both the Academy pupils and the wider community for educational reasons.

• Controlled access point at the line ol the poplars between the Academy's playing fields and the Council's Playing Fields to the south.

At the main entrance there is a section of land 'handed over' to the public domain. The fence line at this point is pulled back. The sponsors are keen to maintain this element of the design, whilst realizing there are certain security measures that need to be resolved in order to allow this to happen. It should be noted as well that the Police are in support of this move. There is a proposal at present for a gated system up close to the main entrance that will keep the public away from the building envelope out of hours.

The second line of security primarily deals with the car park and the Diamond Jubilee Covert which comprises of two perimeter fences. Both areas run the risk of being occupied out of hours and this cannot affect the security of the school building. The first perimeter fencing is to the east of the car park which backs onto the adjacent housing. The main entrance to the car park will be along this line off Trenant Road. It is proposed that this line is 1.8m high fencing. The second perimeter fence is to the external perimeter of the Diamond Jubilee Covert. There is a trend for local teenagers to enter the Covert through the Cemetery and the eastern boundary. It is proposed that this line is a 3m high fence.

service.


3.0 Architectural Report 3.2 The Building Design 3.2.12 Building Security

Security within the building is dealt with as a series of layers, from the open public area to the private and secure Academy space.

• Primary Public Access

The reception area and Chaplaincy are open to the public. The reception and general office forms a natural control point for both pupils/staff and visitors. The Phase 1 Hall will be used for 'mothers and toddlers' groups through the Chaplaincy. This will be a management and timetabling issue to be co-ordinated during school hours.

• Limited Public Access

Sports Hall, Assembly Hall, dining space and supporting facilities and circulation will be accessible for out of hours use. Entrance to the building will be through the main entrance where there will be a secure control point. There is an additional exit to the sports fields from the changing rooms / sports hall. In order to separate this zone from the Limited Public Access area at the top of the ramp entering Phase 2, there needs to be some system that can be utilized during out of hours. An example of this could be roller shutters that would be concealed during school hours. This needs to be developed in the following stage.

• Secure Public Access

The circulation areas on the ground and first floor in Phases 2 and 3 will have limited public access. Ideally there should be no access to the first floor but this will result in barriers at the top of the stairs.

• Secondary Secure Public Access

Certain specialist rooms will need access out of hours for adult education purposes. They will be accessible by a simple 'hotel type lock', only allowing access to the required classrooms by the authorised people.


Ground Floor, Building Security

First Floor, Building Security




Hellerup School. Hellertip, Denmark Arhitema

Naerum School, Copenhagen, Denmark

The Design Team have done extensive research into alternative school and Academy precedents, both within England and abroad. The ideas emerging from these studies are summarized in the following images.

.':,„ In addition to this, the Design Team and client body have visited the j ! following:

Hellerup School, Hellerup, Denmark

Mossbourne Academy, Hackney, London









3=0 Architectural Report 3.3 Sustainability Agenda

3.3.1 Environmental Issues

Leicester City Academy has been designed as an exemplar low energy building - maximising use of natural daylighting and natural ventilation wherever possible. Additionally the specification of the construction materials and systems within the Academy will be designed to minimize energy use and be sourced from sustainable sources. Leicester is designated as an environment City and the planning discussions to date expect appropriate environmental measures to be fully integrated into the scheme.

The building design will follow the recommendations of BB87 'Guidelines for Environmental Design in Schools'. In the past the Academy's budgets included a 10% budget uplift for enhancements which allowed for the appropriately high environmental standards to meet these requirements. In the revised DfES budget for the Leicester City Academy, references to this particular budget allowance have been omitted.

The design will be assessed under the Schools Environmental Assessment Method (SEAM) as described in BB83.

3.3.2 Social issues

The participation of the local community and the teaching staff in the development of plans for the school is ongoing and described elsewhere. It is vital to the success of the Academy that both the pupils and staff as well as the local community feel an ownership for the Academy, a sense of pride. This can be achieved through:

• The design team and client body taking on board the major issues raised by the Stakeholders

• The building's response to the urban context [dissolving the boundary between school and public realm]

• Through detail design of public access into the Academy [welcoming yet robustly secure]

• The Chaplaincy is a pivotal element. The existing congregation will bring their own layers of ownership and identity to the Academy

3.3.3 Economic Issues

The design of the school is to achieve best value for the DfES and the sponsors, not simply in capital cost, but also over the life of the building. Operational costs should be minimised, in order to maximise the potential budget available for teaching from revenue funding streams without compromising the efficient operation of the building.

The choice of building components will consider the use of local trades, materials and components wherever suitable in order to encourage spending in the local regional economy.

The Academy specialism of Business and Enterprise will focus teaching and interests on economic issues, and it is hoped that the Academy's extended school agenda may well involve local businesses and organisations that have facilities in the immediate vicinity of the school.

The design will follow the guidance contained in BB90 (Lighting Design in Schools). Particular attention is being given to issues of natural day lighting in order to provide exemplary working conditions and reduce electricity consumption resulting from artificial lighting use.

The design will also address the issues of sustainability described in BB95 (Schools for the Future) and consider whole life environmental impact and energy consumption over time, and will encourage the establishment of feedback and monitoring programmes to create a framework for effective decision making while the building is in use.

Part 5 (Green Opportunities) of the services report in section 4 describes some of these issues categorised under the headings Good Practice, Best Practice, Committed and Cutting Edge. Budgetary constraints do limit the environmental and sustainable ambitions of this Academy.

The design will incorporate the recommendations of BB91 (Access for Disabled People to School Buildings) and consider the requirements of Design Note 25 (lighting and Acoustic Criteria for the visually handicapped and hearing impaired in schools).

The aim of the school design is that the building should be fully (and wherever possible equally) accessible to people of all physical and mental abilities, and should facilitate equal access to educational learning materials and teaching.

The design will consider the requirements of the DDA and make recommendations in the stage E report on items which may impact on future operation to suit the needs of individuals with particular requirements not catered for in the base building design.


3.0 Architectural Report 3.3 Sustainability Agenda - BREEAM Assessment

What is BREEAM? Areas for Improvement Easy wins Areas for Improvement

The Building Research Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM) is the world's leading system for assessing the range of environmental impacts associated with buildings. BREEAM is used by owners, users and designers to demonstrate their environmental commitment and to reduce the impact that their buildings have on the environment. Buildings are assessed against performance criteria set by the BRE and awarded 'credits' based on their levels of performance.

BREEAM for Schools derives from the offices model but has a considerable number of changes of emphasis and additional credits. It was released late 2004 and is endorsed by the Department for Education and Skills. The achievement of a Very Good rating will be a requirement of future funding of major new build and refurbishments.

How scores could be further improved in the relevant sections. This information can be used to bring the rating up from "Good" to "Very Good".

With the entire list below and the entire list above. This just scrapes into Excellent. You could also improve the water credits if one of these is too difficult.

Aspect score Poss score

Comment

Management 20 7 H called in before stage B this would of helped Construction site impacts will also help to improve this and will involved the contractor buying into it

Health and Well being

19 8 Work on specific lighting and thermal zoning of phase 1 floor heatinq has lonq laq

Energy 15 12 Connecting water meters to the BMS will help

Transport 6 5 Provision ot lockers tor cyclists to use will improve score

Water 7 3 Sanitary shut oft wfll help to prevent flood damage, out of hours if toilet cistern ball valve breaks.

Materials 17 4 A re look at some of the materials used could help here

Land Use & Ecology

13 5 If someone in the design team is a practicing ecologist member of the Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA) or

full member of the Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (IEEM) with 3 years+ experience of impact assessments this could lead to improved ecoloqy

Pollution 12 5 Specify external luminaries to prevent liqht pollution

Overall (weighted) 48.32 %

A "GOOD" Rating

Management:

Energy:

Land Use and Ecology:

Health and well-being:

Transport: Water

Pollution:

Further Credits would be awarded if

M02: Recalculate lifecycle at 60 years M03: ease of maintenance study-should be good practice anyway M10: Construction site impacts: pick easier wins to achieve 2 credits out of 4. M12: identify aspect that could be a learning resource: discuss with client/head and get commitment

E01: if 2nd credit withheld for no pulsed output, add this as easy spec win.

Materials get poor mar1<s, Not addressed yet as may be expensive to change MW02: addressing recycling facility easy win + getting user buy in for 2 credits

EC03: check ecologist qualifications. Otherwise get client to appoint one. EC06: then get ecologist to develop 5 year plan

H05: improve IT room lighting to comply H16: add water coolers for drinking water

Water: I have not addressed these as a very low weighting in the marks so makes small difference P01: specify external luminaries to prevent light pollution P06: insulant ODP/GWP: change spec of floor insulation. Scores 59.7% so some room to drop a few of these out

Management:

Energy:

Materials:



Transport:

Water Pollution:


M04: add full seasonal commissioning M09: go for full considerate constructors points M11: commit to publishing building information

E04: reexamine light fitting specs to achieve higher efficacy (probably expensive)

Materials: generally reappraise in light of Green Guide as this is a poor scoring section MW01 a: change floor finish specification for 2 credits MW01 c: external walls: many conventional methods achieve A MW01d: internal walls: ditto MW04: protection for longevity: sensible design really

EC04: use ecologist to develop biodiversity improvement

H06: add better lighting controls H07: add better thermal zoning, perimeter heating etc

T02: increase cyclist provision (possibly expensive)

P03: provide petrol interceptors etc

Arup Fire Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds Fe i lden C legg Brad ley Architects LLP

3.0 Architectural Report 3.4 Universal Access and Design Standards

The Academy will be designed to be fully inclusive. As such it will be accessible to all.

The scheme will comply with Part M of the Building Regulations: Access and Facilities for Disabled People. A revised version of this document has been issued this year, against which this scheme will be assessed.

Particular attention will be paid to:

• Ramped approaches to the entrance and site. • Level thresholds to external doors. • Provision of handrails. • Design of the doors and lobbies. • Lift provision. • The design of disabled WC and changing provisions. • Means of escape for disabled occupants.

Design Standards

The design of the school is to comply with The Education (School Premises) Regulations 1999, Statutory Instalment 1999 No.2 and the DfES's Constructional Standards For Schools incorporating Approved Documents from the Building Regulations 2000.

Other regulations also apply to the construction of school buildings which are outside the scope of the Building Regulations, e.g. British Standards etc. These will be complied with where relevant.

Recommendations from the Building Bulletin Series will be acknowledged. The environmental performance of the building will be assessed using the SEAM criteria.


3.0 Architectural Report 3.5 Outline Specification

D Substructure • Site scrape and removal of all material off site to suit reduced level

excavations. • Strip foundations to structural engineer's design. • Reinforced concrete retaining walls and foundations as Structural

Engineer's details. • Over site concrete ground slab with perimeter insulation.

Compacted sub base and blinding to suit cut and fill reworking of the site, all to Engineers details.

• Below slab drainage and service entry routes & trenches to engineer's specifications. Data and electrical services trenches and draw pits external to the building envelope.

• In situ reinforced concrete stairs between different ground floor levels and associated levels ramps.

• External site infrastructure and drainage scheme to engineers details including works to adjacent highways and on site deep drainage system.

E Pre cast and In situ Concrete • Suspended ground floor and upper level flat slabs and roof deck to

teaching wings in nominal 300mm thick in situ reinforced concrete slabs over in situ columns. See engineer's details.

• Class B finish minimum to all exposed soffits and columns. Painted white finish.

G10 Structural Steel Framing • Steel frame to sports to engineer's specification typically consisting

of universal or RHS columns and beams to sports hall, entrance roof infill and phase 2 and 3 rootlights.

• External exposed steelwork to be galvanised, to fire escape stairs and structure.

• Main Sports Hall structure to be exposed steel frame with fabricated terminations and joints all designed to take loading over.

G20 Carpentry and Timber Framing • Treated SW framing and plywood backings as BWIC in association

with partitions package.

H10 Curtain Walling/Windows- External Glazing • Nominal 40 % of school teaching wings external elevations to be

high performance Aluminium faced /timber backed window system with opening lights in selected panes [60% of glazed areas to be openablej. Glazing systems to include clear lights with a variety of double glazed windows. Secure night time ventilation to be provided through overlay of aluminum louvers.

• Double glazed roof light and clear storey glazing in a curtain wall aluminum system. High level window operation on actuator operation as part of ventilation strategy.

• Natural ventilation smoke clearance system provided within atria. • Sports Hall clear storey and roof lights in double glazed aluminium

high performance systems including opening lights on actuator operation as part of natural ventilation strategy to these areas.

• High performance impact resistance glazing to all low level glazing. • 2 storey high glazed elevations between circulation areas and

external spaces at phase heart ends in curtain walling. • High performance solar glazing to east, west and south elevations

and rooflights. • All windows and curtain walling to be contractor's design. • Automatic operation glazed entrance doors and enclosure at

main entrance. Aluminium doors within curtain walling systems elsewhere.

• Opaque and coloured glass strips to be inserted into the ribbon window in to the sports hall

H External Cladding • External walls to teaching wings generally in high performance

metsec stud type secondary steel framing incorporation breather membrane, insulation, internal air tightness membrane and 2 x impact resistant plasterboard inner linings.

• Externally insulated polymer render system with silicone top coat-90mm insulation. Colour generally white with feature coloured panels to phase 1.

• Precast concrete cladding panels with exposed aggregate and etched surface varying in height from 600mm-2400mm. Panels fixed back to metal stud system and supported on base on foundation.

• Planed and finished oak cladding to chaplaincy centre rotunda.

H72 Metal roofing • Preformed metal tray roofing systems with powder coated flashings to

phase 2 and 3 rooflights.

J40 Tanking Damp proof Membranes • Bituthene or similar retaining wall tanking systems to changes in

level and other locations to suit. • 1200mm gauge below slab membrane on sand blinding.

J42 Single Ply Roof Coverings • Teaching wings to have single ply roof system over Jablite

insulation, min 0.2 U-Value. • Vapour barrier over all concrete flat roofs as torch on bitumen

sacrificial temp waterproof layer. • Stone chippings to main roof areas with retention system for sloping

elements of phase 1 roof. • Anodized aluminium flashings and copings to all roof edges. • Man safe access clipway system to be provided on all roof areas.

K10 Plasterboard, Dry linings • Partitions between offices, teaching areas etc. on general floor

plates to suit flexibility requirements to be British Gypsum standard partition systems, consisting of 2 x 15 impact resistant plasterboard each side of metal studding, nominal overall thickness 130mm.

• Specification of partition systems dependent upon location and will be enhanced performance in many instances to suit requirements of BB93, this will include larger stud section, insulation quilts and separate wall sections around music room and performance areas.

• Partitions in ground floor circulation and areas around cores, Sports Hall etc to be blockwork.

• Plasterboard and perforated acoustic plasterboard ceilings and bulkheads within circulation areas.

• Atria edges to teaching wings to be high performance stud systems and linings as floor plates, including secondary steelwork support rails to primary structure at hand rail levels.

• Partitions to include timber glazed screens. • Plasterstop detail required to deal with slab deflection movement

joints and fire separation.

K20 Timber floors and panelling • Birch plywood linings to lower levels of sports hall on framing to suit

in accordance with Sport England guidelines. • Timber strip flooring to main school hall, dining room and Chaplaincy

areas, dance, performance etc. • Acoustic panels within main hall spaces, Chaplaincy and circulation

areas to consist of rockwool insulation within timber frame, nom 100mm thick, faced in flame retardant material with birch battens planted over, in nominal 50x19 widths and gaps, allow 60% of facing as timber.

K40 Suspended Ceilings • Nominal 1200mm width planks below in situ concrete slabs areas

to be standard detail of perforated metal or perforated veneered plywood with acoustic insulation backing to provide sound absorption within room. All fixed back to SW framing to suit.

• Perforated metal ceiling tiles to access ceilings required in main services distribution routes, primarily along circulation routes.

• Plain metal tiles to WC, Kitchen, Shower - Changing areas and other services areas.

• Perforated and plain Birch Plywood ceilings with shadow gap details, all set out in defined modules to central areas and atria lights. All Birch ceilings to have flame retardant coatings to suit location.

• School Hall and primary circulation spaces to have similar Birch ceilings.

• Perforate metal with acoustic backing acoustic panels within teaching wings at high level to meet criteria of BB93.


3.0 Architectural Report 3.5 Outline Specification

L10 Rooflights • Aluminium double glazed units and solar glazing to all main

circulation and atria areas. Including opening vents on actuator control.

• Triple skin high performance polycarbonate circular rooflights. Acoustic performance still to be assessed.

L20 Internal doors and Joinery • Walls between teaching space, open plan areas, circulation spaces

and voids to atria edges to include HW timber screens and doors including nominal 20% glazing to whole wall area. Pin board outer facings for display.

• Hardwood door frames with hardwood veneered fire door leaves with robust stainless steel ironmongery throughout. Fire rating of doors and screens to suit particular locations.

• Specific screens within main circulation spaces to incorporate doors on hold open devices.

• Electronic lock ironmongery to all spaces, card operating, type to be agreed.

• High performance acoustic folding screens between the Chaplaincy and Phase 1 Hall; between the Assembly Hall and dining; and between the assembly hall and the studio.

• Metal screens and doors in circulation spines with high performance criteria, Fendor Hanson or similar.

L30 Staircases and Balustrades • Pre-cast concrete stairs and landings within main circulation

spaces. • Type 1 - Accommodation staircases and solid balustrades -solid

timber clad balustrades with stainless steel handrail. • Type 2- Powder coated steel uprights with perforated aluminium

infill panels and stainless steel handrails. • External escape stairs in galvanised steel with robust chequer plate

treads and steel flat guarding. Galvanised steel mesh panels to sides of external fire escape stairs to protect from rain and snow.

L40 Glazing • External glazing under Curtain Walling sub contract. • Internal fire resisting glazing to suit locations within internal screens. • Acoustic glazing to be provided between all circulation - teaching

space as required under BB93.

M10 Screeds • 100mm floor buildup zone allowing for screed and finish to both

floor levels. • Floating screeds over Jablite insulation to phase 1 area for

underfloor heating. • The halls, dining area, Chaplaincy and Phase 1to have under floor

heating, Phase 2&3 to have wall-mounted radiators, see M&E Strategy and spec notes.

M20 Plaster Wall Finishes • British Gypsum partitioning system to take direct decorations

generally. • Pre-finished panels to the rear of the curtain walling system by

curtain walling sub-contractor as required. • Concrete soffit to teaching and office accommodation left exposed

for radiant cooling. Finishes made good to receive direct decoration finish, minimum class B.

M40 Ceramic Tiles • Non slip vitrified ceramic tiles to all WCs Changing and Shower

rooms. • Plain wall tiles in wet areas to all wall surfaces. Splash back tiling

within teaching spaces at sides etc.

M50 Rubber and Carpet • Carpet to all circulation and teaching areas within wings. . Heavy duty safety flooring to Kitchen, stores, Food Technology

rooms and other associated service areas. • Rubber flooring to main circulation spine and areas of circulation

and changing subject to wet foot traffic. • Full width mat wells to entrance areas. • Specialist Sports Hall flooring to suit multi-use. • Resin screed safety floors in DT areas. • High performance chemical resistant safety floor to science labs.

M60 Painting • Anti graffiti coatings to all high risk exposed areas and fair face

finishes. • F lame re ta rdan t c o a t i n g s to all e x p o s e d t imbe r to suit r equ i remen ts . • Specialist bunded floors to plant rooms. • High quality washable durable coatings to internal areas.

M61 Intumescent Coatings • Contractor designed paint system to all exposed steelwork.

N10 General fixtures and fittings • Scope under contract to be defined. • Internal blinds. • Fixed HW benches within circulation areas. • Shelving to stores. • Display boards and exhibition space. • Kitchen and servery. • Library. • Reception area. • Changing room fit out. • Sports Hall nets.

N13 Sanitary appliances • Standard appliances and IPS systems to suit school use. • DSB changing and WC facilities. • Staff changing and dedicated WCs.

P20 Isolated trims • Recessed HW skirting to carpet areas. • HW window boards. • HW Architraves to internal doors.

P21 Ironmongery • Robust stainless steel internal ironmongery including full height pull

handles, kick plates, floor springs etc.

R10 Rainwater goods • Internal insulated RWPs and gutters to match associated cladding

materials.


3.0 Architectural Report 3.6 Recommendations

The information compiled in this report covers Stage D of the RIBA scheme of works. It is intended to provide sufficient information in order to go to Funding Agreement. There are however areas of the design that will be re-examined at Stage E and changes to the design will be inevitably be made. Any changes will be within the cost limitations of the DfES Funding Agreement.

Approval of the Stage D design as described in this report enables the design team to progress into final proposals and production information (Stage E), in the knowledge that the arrangements in each section are agreed, and that the design will be submitted for detailed design approval.

Changes to the brief at this stage which cannot be accommodated within the form of the building would be very difficult to incorporate at this stage, and could significantly delay the project. However design developments within the constraints of the Stage D design can be incorporated and it is expected that the following issues will be addressed in the next stages:

Stage E

Detailed External Envelope Development - Typical details Further work will be carried out to finalise the different elevational treatment of areas of the building and all typical details will be produced.

• Room Data Sheets Room data sheets will be prepared for each room in the building to describe the facilities services and environment in each space. This process will be lead by Tribal Education and additional briefing information will be required from the Sponsors in order to finalise the design. The design team will prepare typical room layouts to set the principles for the development of the FF&E design by others.

• Detailed Internal Finishes The scope of the internal finishes will be finalised with particular attention being paid to the development of the internal acoustic finishes in the atria and the Chaplaincy Centre. The success of the internal spaces will depend heavily on how well they are acoustically treated.

• Structure and Services Co-ordination Running parallel with the development of tender information will be the co-ordination of the fabric, the structure and the services.

• Access Consultant An access consultant is required during Stage E to advise on DDA and its implication on the academy design.


4.0 Services Engineering Report

Building Services Report Stage D Report


4.0 Services Engineering Report

This report has been prepared for the sole benefit, use and information of the Department for Education and Skills and the liability of Buro Happold Limited, its Partners and Employees in respect of the information contained in the report will not extend to any third party.

Author Mike Entwisle Approved

Signed Signed

Date Date

Revision Status Date Initials

00 draft


4.0 Services Engineering Report 4.1 Executive Summary

This report has been written to outline the concept design for the building services and environmental design for the proposed Leicester Academy in the southern suburbs of that city.

The brief for the new Academy comprises of the demolition of the existing Mary Linwood School followed by the construction of a new 7914 m2 school for 1046 pupils between the ages of 3 and 16 years. The school "specialism" is to be business enterprise with a focus on food.

The sponsors of the Academy are David Samworth CBE DL and the Bishop of Leicester. In recognition of this, food ("plough to plate") is to play a significant role in the curriculum and this is reflected in the design of certain elements of the building. A chaplaincy is also to be incorporated to assist with integration of the scheme into the local community.

The building is to replace the existing Mary Linwood School which has been closed for approximately ten years.

The addition of a 6 " ^ Form and health facility were previously discussed but are new outwith the scope of the project.

The new Academy will include:

General classrooms Music Classrooms, Art Classrooms, IT classrooms, Technical classrooms and workshops, Administration Support Areas.

- Sports Hall, Chaplaincy and worship space Dining Hall/atrium and associated kitchen and links to food technology areas Internal atria used for circulation and other activities

The Academy is organised into three phases, rather than the more familiar primary/secondary division, as follows:;

Phase I Nursery to year 4, 2FE from reception to year 4 Phase II Year 5 to year 8, 2FE years 5 and 6, 4FE from year 7 Phase III Year 9 to year 11, 4FE

The building services design approach is holistic and considers the environmental impact and operating costs as well as the initial design of the Academy. The building form has developed in response to many constraints and opportunities (brief, cost, phasing of education, "presence", acoustics) and is being configured to minimise reliance on active systems such as mechanical ventilation. It must be recognised that the scheme is under a severely constrained budget and that the design has had to respond to this factor.

A BREEAM assessment process has been initiated and we are participating fully in order to optimise the rating without skewing the design away from the requirements of the core brief

A low energy, flexible building services strategy will continue to be developed which respects the lifetime of the school, anticipated to be over the next forty to fifty years, and the changes the Academy may want to make over that time.

The main highlights of this report centre on the following topics:

Design Assumptions (including client brief assumptions) Site Analysis Building Form and Environmental Strategy (noise, pollution, heating, ventilation, daylighting, lighting, flexibility etc) Green/sustainable Opportunities Building Services Outline Specification

Further development work for stage E will include;

Finalised thermal and daylight modelling of classrooms and communal spaces Detailed design including initial room layouts (pending provision of FF&E information) Further advice on fagade treatment (glazing, shading etc) Further co-ordination with structure and architecture Further dialogue with specialist consultants, such as ICT, acoustics and fire engineer Assisting the QS with the cost plan Furthering negotiations with utilities

Further details of this are given in the architect's section of this report.

The brief requires each phase to have its own entrance and identity and each is also to have its own social/breakout space.


4.0 Services Engineering Report 4.2 Design Assumptions, standards and criteria

4.2.2 Design Standards

The detailed design and installation of the building sen/ices will be in accordance with CIBSE general standards and codes in conjunction with the relevant DfES Building Bulletins and Building Regulations. However, the following Building Bulletins are particularly relevant to environmental services design for the Leicester Academy:

- BB87: DfES Building Bulletin 87, 2 n d Edition Version 1 (May 2003)-Guidelines for Environmental Design in Schools

- BB90: DfES Building Bulletin 90, Lighting Design for Schools (1999) BB80: DfES Building Bulletin 80, Science Accommodation in Secondary Schools (2004)

- BB93: DfES Building Bulletin 93- Acoustic Design of Schools (2003) - BB97: DfES Building Bulletin 94, Inclusive School Design-

Accommodating Pupils With Special Educational Needs And Disabilities In Mainstream Schools (2001) BREEAM: Building Research Establishment Environmental Assessment Method. This is intended to supersede the Schools Environmental Assessment Method (SEAM).

The Building Bulletins are taken as the initial DfES brief for the City Academy and the particular design criteria for each Building Services system are listed in the table below.


Briefing Element Assumption

Sustainability wish- The building incorporates the following design features which all contribute list to a sustainable design

Optimal location on site, orientation, and building form Predominantly naturally ventilated Use of thermal mass to reduce summertime overheating Highly insulated and well sealed fa fade Well daylit spaces Flexible and adaptable design to allow reconfiguration Heating systems appropriately designed and sized and use of condensing and low NOx boilers

Elements of design which will be investigated in the next design stages include;

Fagade and rooflight design Integration of services routes to facilitate simple reconfiguration of rooms Incorporation of brief Appropriate controls for heating, lighting and ventilation Possible use of rainwater recycling Possible use of renewable energy (e.g. solar), perhaps as a demonstration/education project.

There are many other elements of sustainable design which fall outside the remit of building services engineering, including;

Sources of hardwoods and softwoods (supplier and certificationj Use of recycled materials in new buildings Ozone depleting chemicals (ODCs) Volatile organic compounds School grounds Recycling facilities and waste disposal Asbestos in existing buildings Health and safety Maintenance Home to school transport policy School environmental policy The selection of low energy IT equipment to reduce electrical energy consumption (e.g. laptops in place of desktops, energy management software etcj.

Note there are allowances in the budget for only some of these items (see later in the report).


BREEAM assessment

The design is being subjected to a design stage BREEAM assessment. This methodology has recently been released by the DfES and BRE, and has been trialled on the DfES Exemplar Schools project and on Liverpool Kensington Academy. BREEAM looks at the following issues:

Land Use Ecology Transport Materials and Waste Energy use Health , well being and IAQ

- Water Pollution Operation and Management Acoustics Security

The DfES require a rating of "good" - we are also investigating the possibility of a "very good" rating

Energy Efficiency BB87 calls for the Academy to be designed to achieve a carbon performance rating no more than 5 kgC/m ! per year according to the DfES calculation spreadsheet. Initial assessments indicate that the current design complies with this.

Outdoor temperature

As BB87: Winter: -4°C saturated (heating plant), -1°C saturated (room temperatures) As CIBSE A guide: Summer: 29°C db / 20°C wb (air conditioning/cooling plant)

Naturally ventilated / passively cooled areas design is based on the CIBSE Test Reference Year (see weather year section).

Rainfall System will be designed to BS EN 12056:3 Return period storms will be based on the assumption of a building life expectancy of 40 years.

Solar Radiation As BB87- data will be taken from the CIBSE Test Reference Year from CIBSE Guide J. Note this weather year has a relatively cool summer with only one hot period where temperatures reach 30°C. Hence, in years which are warmer than the test reference year (a weighted average year) summertime temperatures may exceed the DfES guidelines.

There is of course evidence that global warming will increase summertime temperatures which BB87 does not yet address. The use of heavyweight construction and thermal mass provides an inherent stability which will equip the building well to cope with the future external conditions and we will aim (where possible within the other design and budget constraints) to reduce summertime temperature significantly below current guidance.

Wind As BB87- data will be taken from the CIBSE Test Reference Year from CIBSE Guide J. Note this weather year has a relatively cool summer with only one hot period where temperatures reach 30°C. Hence, in years which are warmer than the test reference year (a weighted average year) summertime temperatures may exceed the DfES guidelines.


Weather Year

As BB87- data will be taken from the CIBSE Test Reference Year from CIBSE Guide J. Note this weather year has a relatively cool summer with only one hot period where temperatures reach 30°C. Hence, in years which are warmer than the test reference year (a weighted average year) summertime temperatures may exceed the DfES guidelines.



12 Design 4.0 Services Engineering Report

Assumptions, standards and criteria

Internal temperatures during occupied hours

As BB87: Winter:

Normal physical activity- Teaching, private study, exams: 18°C Lower physical activity- sick rooms, isolation rooms, SEN etc: 21 °C Higher physical activity- physical education, circulation etc: 15°C

Summer: Teaching spaces: not more than 80 hours above 28°C per year (air temp) during the 3 term Academy year as defined in BB87 (note this means that the Academy is assumed to be unoccupied in late July and throuqh August).

Occupancy BB87 states that annual energy consumption should be based on an annual occupancy of 1040 hours (about 30 weeks of 5 day weeks with 7 hour days). The Academy is assumed to be closed in August for summertime overheating calculations.

The Academy occupancy will be assumed as follows:

General Classrooms: 30 students 9am to 4pm Technical Classrooms: 30 students 9am to 4pm Sports hall: To be used for exams and therefore requiring controlled and quiet ventilation. Nat vent openings not practical due to noise breakin. External sports facilities: to be confirmed Drama studios: 30 students 9am to 4pm Music rooms: 30 students 9am to 4pm in music recital room, 2 students in music practice rooms 9am to 4pm Dining hall area; max occupancy 540 pupils

Note internal gains during the lunch hour in teaching spaces are assumed to reduce to one third of their daytime value.

Out of hours use to be confirmed Air Movement BB87 does not mention any design limits on air movement.

Draughts will be minimised in all areas. Air movement in the sports hall may need to be controlled depending on the standard of sports to which the hall is designed. Additional costs for this (say for county standard badminton) may be incurred.

Relative Humidity Not controlled General Acoustics As the requirements of BB93.

Note building acoustics forms part of the acoustic consultants report.



Internal Services and traffic noise

As BB93- all values (dB)

Large lecture rooms (more than 50 people), Music, Drama 30 Audio visual, video conferencing rooms, Assembly hall, Individual study, interview, teacher prep, libraries, general teaching, Nursery quiet room and playroom 35 Science labs, metal work 40 Offices, Toilets, changing areas, corridors, stairwells, Indoor sports, dining rooms 45 Note that various relaxations are available for some of these criteria - in particular acceptable noise levels in classrooms are expected to be 5dBA higher than this under conditions of normal ventilation - please refer to the acoustic consultant's report

Fresh Air As per BB87 apart from toilets where extract ventilation will be increased from 6 to 10 air changes per hour (to limit unpleasant odours):

All occupied areas 3 I s"' person ' minimum Teaching areas: 8 I s"' person1 minimum Note that higher ventilation rates (c. 201 s1 person"' are required in many spaces during warm periods to avoid summertime overheating. This approximates to 10-15 air changes per hour (ach) for a typical classroom .Night time cooling to classrooms typically requires 2-3 ach Landlocked offices etc - allowance of 6 ach until occupancy confirmed

See Appendix C for more details of specific areas. Heating and Ventilation Systems Controls

Local control will be provided within each space via wall thermostats (e.g. for Phase I classrooms) or TRVs (for phase II and III classrooms). A computerised building management system will control all central plant. The Academy will be split into zones to allow separate time scheduling of areas with out of hours use etc., but this zoning will be limited (say to four zones - phases I, II, III and communal areas) to reduce capital cost and complexity.

Daylighting Generally as BB87 - note that these requirements should be viewed as target levels which are difficult to achieve, particularly on lower floors.

Occupied areas: target daylight factor of 4% to 5% Uniformity ratio 0.3 to 0.4 for side lit rooms Uniformity ratio 0.7 or greater for top lit rooms Minimum 20% of classroom internal fapade should be glazed to provide views out.

We have carried out initial daylight modelling, the results of which are appended separately.

Artificial Lighting

As BB87: General teaching space (including labs - refer to BB80): 300 lux Visually demanding teaching space: 500 lux Stairs and Corridors: 80 120 lux Entrance halls, lobbies, waiting rooms: 175 to 250 lux


Uniformity ratio not less than 0.8 over task areas in teaching areas Colour rendering index (RJ greater than 80 in classrooms Lamp colour warm to intermediate (CCT 2800°K - 4000°K) High frequency ballasts to minimise subliminal lamp flicker, extend lamp life and reduce energy usage

BB87 calls for a uniformity of 0.8 over the "task area" and refers to the CIBSE lighting guide, but the latter document does not call for this high value. The CIBSE lighting guide offers useful guidance on the issue of a "task area" as a single workstation or (in the absence of a defined layout) an area of 0.5 m2 and it is across this approximate extent that we will base our design.

Emergency Lighting: Escape routes: 1 lux minimum

External Lighting Generally as per BB87. Also see security section. High colour rendering through the use of metal halide and fluorescent fittings Illuminance at floor level: 5 to 20 lux in areas where external lighting is appropriate. High level lighting to incorporate main beam angles less than 70° to limit light pollution. Infra red CCTV / low light CCTV will be used externally so external lighting can be switched off after occupied hours (low light preferred as these use less energy). External lighting will be minimised generally with coverage of paths and roadways only. External MUGA to be floodlit - lighting levels to be agreed

Lighting Controls Classrooms: local control within each classroom via PIR and daylight sensor. Override by Teacher's remote control or local switch... Internal circulation spaces: Timeclock control combined with daylight dimming as appropriate, and "held on" by adjoining area lighting control Large internal spaces (e.g. sports hall) manual switching combined with timeclock control. Daylight dimming where appropriate External lighting: Combination photocell and timeclock control with manual override

Heat Gains Based on BB87 and CIBSE Guide A:

Small power: see IT section Lighting: 12 W/m2 in classrooms during occupied hours Occupancy - seated moderate work - figures given for adult males 18°C: 103 W sensible, 37W latent 21 °C: 95W sensible, 45W latent 26°C: 70W sensible, 70W latent Values for adult females and children are 85% and 75% respectively of these figures.


IT Heat gain assumptions will be based on the provision of one of the following combinations within each general classroom as defined in Appendix H

Phase 1; 30 laptops (occasional use) and 2 desktop computers with TFT screens.

Phases II and III: Standard classrooms - 30 laptops or 10 desktop computers with TFT screens Enhanced ICT rooms - as Standard classrooms Specialist Rooms - 30 laptops or 5 desktop computers with TFT screens. ICT teaching rooms, Business studies - 30 fixed PCs with TFT screens (mechanical cooling will be necessary for these rooms)

All classrooms to accommodate a data projector, interactive whiteboard, teacher laptop and docking station with other peripherals

Fabric Leakage (air tightness)

The building is assumed to comply with part L2 of the Building Regulations:

10 mVhour per mz of permeable envelope at a maintained pressure of 50Pa

Domestic Water Services

The limited capacity of the incoming water main requires that storage be provided to serve non-potable outlets - see outline specification. Hot water temperature at showers and taps no more than 43°C. Hot water storage temperature no less than 60°C. Hot water distribution temperature in distribution pipework no less than 60°C although the temperature may drop at 2.0m. (max.) away from each outlet.

Resilience and maintenance

Systems will be designed as follows: Avoid dependency upon single systems where possible Systems as simple as possible Passive systems used wherever possible

Life Span This is a complex issue, but broadly speaking the lifetime of various components of services installations can be anything between 5 and 50 years. Significant examples (for which replacement should be budgeted) include (in years); Condensing boilers, chillers 15-20 Plastic water cisterns 30-35 Galvanised steel ductwork 25-35 Fans, radiators (depending upon type) 10-25 Attenuators, louvres 15-25 Underfloor heating - screeded plastic pipe 25-40 Water pipework (copper) 30-35 Heating pipework (steel) 25-30 Pumps 15-20 Internal drainage (plastic) 15-20 Internal drainage (Cast Iron) 30-35 Electrical switchgear 20-25 Mains cables 25-30



Final circuit cabling, internal lighting 20-25 During this time frame, planned maintenance regimes will replace and refurbish many systems components.

Energy monitoring Individual systems will be metered to Part L2 requirements as a minimum (water, gas and electrkity). A modem will be provided to allow external access to the BMS system.



The intention of this section of the report is to highlight the documents that relate specifically to the Building Services design, rather than describe all aspects of the design. The Building Services will be designed, during the detailed design phase to comply with the regulations listed below as a minimum.

The building sen/ices design will comply with the statutory requirements of the Building Regulations by meeting the requirements of the Approved Documents.

Building Regulations Related Issues • Efficiency of lighting installations and their control

• Setting of minimum standards of boiler efficiency

• Boiler and heating system controls

• Monitoring and reporting of electrical energy usage.

It is assumed that we do not need to comply with the revised building regulations part L approved document which comes into force at the end of 2005.

Approved Document E (2003) - Acoustics

E4 Acoustic conditions in schools (refers to BB93)

Approved Document F (1995) - Ventilation

F1 Means of ventilation It is assumed that we do not need to comply with the revised building regulations part F approved document which comes into force at the end of 2005.

Approved Document G (1992) - Hygiene.

G3 Hot water storage

Approved Document H (2002) - Drainage and Waste Disposal.

H1 Foul water drainage H3 Rainwater drainage

Approved Document J (Amended 1992) - Heat Producing Appliances

J1 (air supply) J2 (discharge of products of combustion) J3 (protection of building).

Approved Document L (2002) - Conservation of Fuel and Power

L2 - Buildings other than Dwellings (refers to BB87).

The requirements include;

• Insulation levels

• Air tightness testing

• Alternative methods of showing compliance


4.0 Services Engineering Report 4.3 Green Opportunities

s k ^ Young. R n r i f t r l l n s m ^ j i g j

Site Location

The New Academy will be located on the site of the existing Mary Linwood School partly bounded by Saffron Lane (to the West) and Trenant Road (to the North) on the southern side of Leicester. The site is in addition bordered by the Diamond Jubilee Covert (an area of woodland) to the East and a playing field owned by the council to the south. The site slopes gently downwards from South to North and the new building is to be located in the same area of the site as the existing building, i.e. along the northern edge.

Site Orientation

The building achieves a balance between optimising orientation from an environmental point of view while providing a presence and responding to the site boundaries and the need to contribute to the regeneration of the area. The majority of the facades will face SSE or NNW.

Solar Gains and Daylight

The daylighting issues can be divided into many areas, but the principal ones are;

General ground floor classrooms - daylight is effectively admitted from only one side of the classroom, with the chance ol a small amount of adventitious natural light entering from the street/atrium areas (BB93 permitting). While effective daylighting will be possible to a depth of approximately 3 m in these spaces, the rear of the classrooms will require artificial light for much of the time to attain a working light level. Note that ground floor classrooms in single storey areas (Phase I) can be daylit across their depth and have rooflights at their rear edge to achieve this.

Internal ground floor classrooms - daylight will need to come from limited glazed openings onto adjacent street/atria areas. Daylighting possibilities are particularly restricted in these classrooms.

First floor classrooms - in some instances use of rooflights provides additional daylight to the rear of the classrooms, but the bulk of the first floor classrooms spaces are side lit from a single fagade.

Street/Atria - there are no particular guidelines set for these areas and the daylighting is as much to do with the effect achieved as the absolute levels, but we should aim for a minimum daylight factor of between 5 and 15% at floor level.

Large spaces, particularly the sports hall - there is a perceived conflict between daylight and many sports, particularly those where participants spend a substantial time looking upwards (e.g. badminton) - commonly used techniques are for rows of rooflights to be oriented parallel to and between the edges of the badminton courts, or for a ribbon of glazing at high level around the hall. While this might not comply with the most stringent requirements, for the purposes of sports in Schools and for local amenity and competition use it is normally acceptable.

Indicative daylight model results are shown elsewhere in the report.

The majority of the windows will face SSE and NNW and there are limited opportunities for achieving self-shading. In view of this and the cost of external shading the solar control is achieved through use of solar treated glazing and controlled glazing areas. The facpade treatment has been developed to allow ventilation to be maintained when blinds are down (for instance due to bright sunshine or use of visual displays). In addition, this incorporates secure night ventilation to purge the building for the next day.

Acoustics

The presence of Saffron Lane and Trenant Road present an acoustic challenge to the location and design of some areas of the Academy. Further details are enclosed in section 7.2


4.0 Services Engineering Report 4.3 Site Analysis

Acoustics

Refer to Section 7.2 for further details from acoustic survey and its implications.

Utilities

We have made enquiries to the local utility authorities to ascertain the extent and capacity of their local networks. The plans of the existing installations are shown on the next page, but the main features are summarised below. It is critical that any section 106 requirements which might require alteration to road layouts are confirmed as soon as possible so that any additional costs incurred by major utilities diversions etc can be flagged up at an early date. This is especially important at the western end of Trenant Road where major service routes are present in Saffron Lane.. A geophysical survey has been carried out close to the Saffron Lane boundary to check that no utility services are present on the site. This has ruled out any major sen/ices clashing with level changes and buildings, but installation of fences etc will depend upon further minor investigations work being carried out at the time in the normal way.

Telecoms

BT has ducts running along Trenant Road. When the service requirements of the Academy are clear, we will approach them regarding a data/telecom connection for the Academy. No other telecom providers currently have installations in the area.

Water

The existing School is served by a 3" connection from Trenant Road. The local network comprises a large number of pipes running close to the site boundary in Saffron Lane. We have received indications that Severn Trent will only provide a supply of 2.5 I s"1 capacity, which is insufficient to supply the Academy directly off the main, but which will suffice with the use of tanked storage. The fire consultants will need to confirm the requirements for hydrants on site and (if so) whether this supply is adequate for this purpose.

Gas

The existing School is served by two supplies, neither of which is likely to be adequate for the purposes of the new building (the existing boilers are believed to be coal fired). The local network comprises relatively small pipes in Trenant Road, but Saffron Way has 12", 6" and 4" pipes running down it. British Gas have indicated a budget quote of £5,000 for a new supply in a location close to the eastern edge of the site, i.e. supplied from Trenant Road. While this location is incorrect, this indicates that the local network capacity is adequate for the load predicted.

Electricity

There is no existing substation on site and we have received a budget quote of approximately £30,000 from Central Networks for supplying the Academy at HV from the local network. On site HV work and providing a transformer is covered within the outline specification with an additional budget of £30,000. The current MV supply to the School will be made redundant. There is an existing HV supply running across the southern end of the site to the Aylestone FC pavilion. It is intended that this will be left undisturbed. When the exact location of the proposed HV switchgear and transformer are confirmed, we will approach Central Networks for a confirmed price and design (for which they will charge a fee).





Feiliton Clagg Bradley Architects LLP Arup Fire Reining and Barron



4.0 Services Engineering Report 4.4 Building form and environmental strategy

The building is arranged around a series of internal spaces providing breakout informal teaching space and social areas. Phase I is single storey and other areas are two storeys in height. The large spaces (sports hall and assembly hall) are located on the northern edge of the site to provide easy access to the community and to enable the classroom areas to connect simply to the external play spaces to the south of the site.

The different phases of the Academy are terraced up the site by 0.5 m as a response to the site topography. This also offers the opportunity to provide further definition and identity to the phases.

Ventilation

The scheme is predominantly naturally ventilated. The environmental strategy for good natural ventilation design relies on the following elements:

1. Minimise internal and solar gains (careful design of glazing)

2. Sensible lighting design with controls, careful selection of other equipment with local extract where required - equipment to be switched off when not in use), flat screen computer monitors etc

3. Optimise orientation and integrate with shading strategy.

4. Maximise thermal mass of building - exposed slab soffits, masonry walls in halls etc

5. Ensure effective ventilation throughout the year - draught free trickle ventilation in winter and mid season (note these trickle vents become quite large to comply with the winter ventilation requirements in BB87), potentially large openable areas in summer with secure night ventilation to purge the heat stored in the structure during the day.

6. A maximum depth of 7.5 m and a minimum ceiling height of 3 m.

The nature of the building has resulted in a number of internal spaces within the building. These areas will rely on mechanical ventilation and borrowed natural light from the central atrium. On upper floors rooflights will assist with ventilation and maximise daylight.

The atrium will be naturally ventilated via high level vents at roof level and low level vents in available fagade elements. Additional air can be introduced mechanically via ceiling voids or buried tubes. This ventilation will be automatically controlled via the BMS and will incorporate hard wired panels to allow use for smoke clearance as part of the fire strategy.

Initial indicative ventilation areas for the main atria are as follows; Dining atrium Western end; 5m 2 at low level, 10m 2 at mid level

Eastern end or roof level; 15m2

Phase II and III atrium Low level; 6m2

High level; 10m2

Daylighting

Good daylight penetration with good control defines the character of a building and adds to the open feel within the classrooms. DfES Building Bulletin 87 states 'A space is considered well lit if there is an average daylight factor of 4-5%'. With the addition of lighting control significant energy savings are available as lighting is automatically switched off when adequate daylight is present. The building form provides daylighting regimes as described earlier in this report and this will be investigated during and beyond stage D.

The building form provides daylighting regimes as described earlier in this report and further information on the daylighting levels is included elsewhere.

Facade design

The design of a fagade must incorporate the following features Ventilation in differing modes as described above Daylighting as described above Appropriate glazing A positive aesthetic response to the surrounding features and the aspirations of the design and client team. High levels of insulation and airtightness Appropriate capital and whole life cost Accommodation of any specific acoustic or technical features from specialist rooms.

We will advise on appropriate environmental solutions as they evolve in the next design stages.

Rainwater Re-cycling

Water conservation is an important aspect of good sustainable design. Water utilities are generally trying to reduce the amount of water being discharged into their infrastructure to reduce erosion and pollution of water courses and the sea. The strategy to reduce water usage is as follows: Water conservation at point of use- This means specifying low water content toilet cisterns, push button lower flow rate showers, spray taps and

flow restrictor type control valves (e.g. urinal PIR sensors). Use of waterless urinals would be investigated.

Rainwater collection and use- This means collecting rainwater from roofs, storing and distributing to non-potable water outlets, such as toilet cisterns or urinals. This is a simple way to reduce reliance on local utility mains water supply by collecting a 'clean' and free water source for distribution with minimal treatment through the building. The budget cannot currently accommodate this but we would be keen to reintroduce it should funds become available. The site has a restricted outflow of water into the surrounding drains and the current scheme is to provide storage in buried void formers (refer to the Civil Engineering report). Should the mode of storage be changed to below ground storage tanks this would reduce the "extra over" cost for the recycling scheme.

Environmental Strategy and Services drawings

• General Classroom Ventilation Strategy Diagram(?) • Ground floor - environmental zoning • First floor - environmental zoning • Section through phase I • Section through phase ll/lll • Ground floor - plant spaces and services routes • First floor - plant spaces and services routes • Environmental sections through building - phase I, phase ll/lll(?)



_ _j ffilll/IS Single Sided Natural ventilation

Natural ventilation by Crass Ventilation

Natural ventilation with either mechanical supply or extract system

Mechanical supply and extract

Mechanical extract only

Mechanical cooling

Ground Floor - Ventilation Strategy

Arup F i re Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds Fei lden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP


\ Single Sided Natural ventilation

Natural ventilation by Cross Ventilation

Natural ventilation with either mechanical supply or extract system

r V r * Mechanical supply and extract

, Mechanical extract only

Mechanical cooling

Ground Floor - Ventilation Strategy






Dining Area - Environmental Section




HIGH LEVEL DISTRIBUTION DISTRIBUTION IN CHUNG VOID

^ ^ s RISER

Ground Floor Services Route



First Floor Services Route


4.0 Services Engineering Report 4.5 Green Opportunities

Summary

As the attention paid to environmental issues increases due to awareness of issues such as global warming, pollution, water supply, energy supply and quality of internal environment, this building presents an opportunity to design and construct a building which is as environmentally benign as possible within the constraints of time, brief, budget, client intent and planning constraints can allow. There are many ways in which this can be addressed, including (those which are included are underlined);

Good practice

Restricting natural ventilation to rooms 7.5m deep Restricting solar gains and providing appropriate shading devices Use of high efficiency boilers Investigation of heat recovery on ventilation systems Use of CFC free ODP refrigerants where mechanical cooling is required Use of T5 or other high frequency fluorescent lighting Use of lighting control in communal area Controlled glazing and shading to provide 2% average daylight factor and summertime temperatures within DfES guidelines. Insulation levels to comply with Building Regulations, not offset in CO2 Design for air leakage of 10 m3 hr~1 at 50 Pa

Best practice

Use of thermal mass to facilitate natural ventilation in maintaining comfortable summertime conditions Fagade design to facilitate effective natural ventilation even when shading in use or at night Lighting control applied to general lighting systems Condensing boilers Var iable s p e e d p u m p s a n d fans Use of atrium spaces to reduce heat loss and drive ventilation Underfloor heating where appropriate Controllable openings (automatic in communal areas) to maximise night cooling in summer and reduce heat loss In winter Use of different fagade designs depending upon orientation and room use to maximise daylight and minimise summertime overheating Use of northlights on upper floors or in single storey buildings to obtain mean daylight factor of 5% and summertime temperatures within DfES guidelines. Increased insulation levels Design for air leakage of 7 m3 hr~1 at 50 Pa

Committed

Use of renewable energy - solar panels Ground source (open or closed loop or ground coupled via tubes) heating and cooling Adiabatic evaporative cooling in mechanically ventilated areas. "Termodeck" or similar mechanical ventilation with regenerative heat recovery in AHUs Use of moveable shading devices Use of timber in place of steel where possible Avoiding use of PVC (cables, pipes) Use of trees and other foliage for shading Green roof to restrict water run-off, reduce albedo, and increase biodiversity Mean daylight factor of 5% and summertime temperatures exceeding 28°C for less than 20 h per year (when calculated according to DfES guidelines). Ventilation via buried labyrinths to precool air in summer and prewarm in winter Recycled rainwater for use in WCs Light tubes and setbacks in building form to maximise daylighting Further increased insulation levels Design for air leakage of 5 m3 hr'1 at 50 Pa

Cutting edge

Rammed earth or Timber structure Trombe walls for storing solar heat Use of biomass (coppiced woodland etc) Dynamic insulation External shutters to control solar gain and increase winter insulation levels Use of coppiced woodland as fuel source Organic insulation material (straw bales or wool) Even further increased insulation levels Design for air leakage of 3 m3 hi"1 at 50 Pa

Assumptions outlined in the briefing section indicate that the Academy environmental design is likely to fall somewhere around 'best practice' but also incorporating some features from the "committed" list. This will be explored in more detail during the next stage of the design process.

Other issues

Other issues which can be addressed as part of the construction process include;

Co-ordination of supply chain and also with other projects to minimise trips to and from site Use of local labour Use of recycled materials (GGBFS, crushed aggregate from demolished building) Recycling of water on site Use of fluorescent lighting during construction rather than festoon bulbs Prefabrication off site to improve quality and reduce waste Involvement of entire supply chain to reduce waste Sorting of waste on site for recycling

The BREEAM assessment will indicate where there is scope for pushing some of the environmental issues further and a cost/benefit analysis should be carried out to optimise the BREEAM rating to inform any decision made. Initial feedback suggests that the scheme will achieve a "good" rating but that it needs additional funding to achieve a "very good" rating. It is important that we interpret the client's thoughts on sustainably correctly and/or lead them to a place where we can all feel that the solutions proposed are appropriate. Many of these sustainability issues can be used as part of the curriculum, teaching environmental responsibility to pupils as part of their day-to-day learning.


4.0 Services Engineering Report 4.6 Outline Specification

R10 - Rainwater

The complete above ground rainwater pipework systems shall be designed and provided, including all pipework, fitting and accessories, to discharge all rainwater from the building that would occur under standard storm conditions. The rainwater systems shall be designed in accordance with BS EN12056:3, the Building Regulations and all other technical manuals and guides which may be considered to be applicable.

The rainwater pipework system serving the main flat roof areas, will be a gravity rainwater system, designed to Category 2, as defined in BS EN 12056:3. The system will be designed on a rainfall intensity of 0.058 I s"1 rrf

based on a standard storm duration of 2 minutes; this rate equates to a storm return period of 90 years.

All internal rainwater pipes will insulated against the formation of condensation. Where necessary and in areas sensitive to noise, internal rainwater drainage pipework will be acoustically insulated against the outbreak of noise and vibration.

Internal rainwater pipes will be installed in cast iron with flexible joints from the connection at the rainwater outlet, to the connection to the below ground drainage system. Materials for any external pipes will be agreed with the architect.

The rainwater pipework will be provided with access doors as required by the Building Regulations and BS EN 12056:3. These will therefore be provided at changes in direction, at the top floor level and lower ground floor level as a minimum, at 1200mm AFFL.

Note: The return period storms, stated above, have all been based on the assumption of a building life expectancy of 60 years.

Refer to the Architects specification for details of the roof elements and the Civil/Structural Engineer's specification for the below ground drainage pipework.

R11 - Soil and waste

The foul drainage above ground system will be installed to meet the performance requirements stated in BS EN 12056:2, the Building Regulations and all other technical manuals and guides which may be applicable..

The foul drainage pipework systems will generally be based on a primary ventilated stack or modified primary ventilated stack arrangement, as described in BS EN12056:2. Systems will be based on the discharge unit method; the units used will be those as identified as System III, Table 2 in

the BS EN 12056:2.

Where considered necessary, separate, independent foul drainage pipework systems will be provided to serve the sanitary fittings, laboratory fittings and kitchen areas, for connection to the below ground foul drainage system.

Drainage pipework will generally be installed in cast iron or friaphon for the larger sizes and vertical pipework, with uPVC, PP, PE, or muPVC used for the small bore waste pipework. Pipework serving the laboratory fittings will be installed in chemically resistant polypropylene pipework with electro-fusion welded joints e.g. 'Vulcathene'. Any small bore pipework within the kitchen areas that may be subjected to extremely hot discharges will be installed in copper.

Main kitchen areas that contain appliances which may discharge waste flows to the drainage system containing grease, will be provided with an approved grease treatment system, comprising a grease enzyme dosing system, which will be installed to give free-flow to the kitchen foul drainage pipework, in accordance with the requirements of the Building Regulations and BS EN 12056:2. S12 - Cold and hot water

A new metered connection to the site boundary will be provided by Severn Trent Water (Budget quote £8,331) to supply 2.5 I /s from a 50mm service pipe.

A new MDPE main water supply will be taken from the utility connection point to a cold water storage tank, at first floor between the Sports Hall and Assembly Hall, the kitchen, the academic catering facility.

The cold water storage system will include a modular GRP water tank, nominal capacity 1 w i t h internal divider and a multistage booster set to serve all internal coldwater requirements along with the domestic hot water system.

Domestic hot water fed from the boosted cold water system will be centrally generated, apart from science labs, using two gas filled condensing heaters each with 450 litre storage vessel (typical selection 2 x Andrews Supa-Flo R303 each with 455 litre insulated buffer vessels.).

Separate tank system for the boosted cold water system will serve a science lab use with booster set and local on peak electric units for heating.

All pipework to be copper, instaflex, or similar with chrome plated copper tails. Incoming supply fitted with "water fuse" to detect leaks.

S30 - Compressed air

It is assumed that local compressors will be supplied as part of the fit out. These will be located on a room by room basis where required.

S32 - Natural gas

A new 90mm gas supply will be provided by British Gas/Transco to a meter enclosure adjacent to the Kitchen. (Budget cost of about £5,000 to be updated when meter location negotiated) to provide a design load equivalent to about 250KW.

A new steel gas supply will be taken from the main meter chamber to the first floor plantroom with sub metered supplies to the following:

Heating boilers Domestic Hot Water Heaters Main Kitchen Food Technology Rooms Science Laboratories

Emergency Isolation and pressure regulation equipment to be provided at service entry to building.

S65 - Fire hydrants

An existing fire hydrant is located by the main pedestrian access to the site, at the junction of Pen Close and Trenant Road. Fire hydrants may be required external to the building this requirement will to be confirmed following discussions with building control and the fire officer.

Dry risers, hose reels, and sprinklers are assumed not to be required.

T31 - Heating

Modular condensing boilers of total output approx. 800KW will be located in the main plant room (2x250 kW and 1x300 kW as Hoval Ultragas - no redundancy provided following value engineering). All boilers will be directly compensated to maximise condensation and thereby increase efficiency. Boiler efficiency will be optimised by maximising the hours of operation at low return temperatures. Various techniques will be used to achieve this and in turn reduce capital as well as running costs, including;

Passing water through radiators before underfloor circuits; Separating low and high return temperature circuits, putting the former through the secondary heat exchangers on the boilers Variable speed pumping Use of direct compensation to minimise use of secondary pumps and 3-port modulating valves. Underfloor heating will be controlled using local thermostats and 2-port valves, avoiding tertiary pumps.



Secondary pumps will be variable speed to reduce pumping energy usage.

The following areas will be heated by underfloor heating; Sports and assembly halls and atria (careful selection of system and timber flooring needed) Changing rooms Dining area Phase 1 classrooms

The following areas will be heated by radiators - WCs

Kitchen, Food Technology classrooms, and Resistant Materials workshop Science prep room Areas requiring high levels of heat input or with specific ventilation requirements Stores Phase 2 and 3 Classrooms

All the controls will be lockable and associated detectors will be robust and remote from its heat emitter.

Pipework to be steel, copper, instaflex, or similar.

T6 - Cooling

Local cooling units are likely to be required for IT hub rooms and cabinets, ICT teaching spaces, and the Business studies classroom.

lype of Ventilation

Principal Applicable Areas (see drawings for details)

System Description

Natural Cross Ventilation

^hase I Ciass Bases, Atria and Dining Hall

f-agade to include louvres and openable w indows to provide local manual control of ventilation rate. Roof lights to provide louvres wi th remote manual control of ventilation rate. Louvres to be acoustically treated where attenuation required.

Natural Single sided Ventilation

Phase II and III Class Bases

hagade to include mid and high level louvres and openable windows to provide local manual control of ventilation rate.

Natural Ventilation wi th either

Science Labs

hagade to include openable windows to provide local manual control of ventilation rate.

Mechanical Extract to provide fume extract with local electronic control and remote over ride. Passive inlet via louvred opening

Sports Hall Mechanical Supply and extract to provide high rate ventilation wi th local electronic control and remote over ride for use in examinations and other high density gatherings.

hood Technology.

Supply air handling unit with filters, heater battery, energy recovery section and fan. Extract fan unit to be interlocked with air handling unit. Remote control with temperature sensors and set point adjustment,

Refrigerant will be R134a or R407c or similar which have zero Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP). Refrigerants with Global warming potential (GWP) are not yet in common use and will attract additional cost but could be considered.

Cooling for catering cold stores is assumed to be covered by the catering specialist and will utilise external condensing units

U10 - ventilation

Generally a philosophy of natural ventilation has been integrated into the building design. Where the space requirements do not allow this approach to be utilised mechanical ventilation systems are provided to augment or replace natural means. The followings strategies will be incorporated into the design.

Areas requiring mechanical ventilation are detailed on the environmental zone drawings, but are principally as follows;

Landlocked classrooms or offices IT resource areas

- WC's Kitchen and Food Technology Classrooms Halls (often limited for use in high occupancy) Music areas (vent equipment supply and extract- extra quiet mechanical ventilation with cooling to high population density rooms) Changing area (AHU supply and extract with heat recovery)



Area Description Ventilation System Outline Notes Phase 1 Toilets, Disabled WC's

Domestic scale in-line extract fan, for each pair of cubicles or single disabled WC, ducted from ceiling level air valves and roof level discharge.

Control via PIR in each cubicle.

Allow 6 ach with local fans

Phase 1 Hall Package Air Handling Unit (AHU) with filter section, heater battery, energy recovery section and supply and extract fans. AHU located above adjacent store.

Ductwork from ceiling level louvres to vertical louvres at roof level.

Control from panel in adjacent store with duct mounted temperature sensor.

Nominal duty 3 m 3 s"1

peak

Central Worship Space

Supply AHU with filter section, heater battery and fan located above adjacent store.

Passive exhaust via openable sections in rooflights.

Ductwork from ceiling level louvres to vertical louvres at roof level.


Nominal duty 2 m 3 s " 1

peak

Internal Office Spaces

Package Air Handling Unit (AHU) with filter section, heater battery, energy recovery section and supply and extract fans. AHU located in ceiling void of area served.

Ductwork from ceiling level louvres to vertical louvres in Electronics or Business studies

Control from panel in space served with duct mounted temperature sensor.

Allow 6 ach with local fans and

Internal office support spaces

Extract tan unit in ceiling void. Ductwork from ceiling level air valves and roof level discharge.

Control via PIR in each cubicle.

Allow 6 ach with local plant

Studio Package Air Handling Unit (AHU) with filter section, heater battery, energy recovery section and supply and extract fans. AHU located above adjacent store,

Ductwork from wall grilles to vertical louvres in external wall.


Nominal duty

Assembly Hall Supply AHU with filter section, heater battery and fan located above adjacent store.


Ductwork from ceiling ievel vertical grilles to vertical louvres in external wall.


Nominal duty

Changing Rooms and communal oilets

In line twin fan units with ductwork from ceiling grilles to roof level discharge cowl for each group of spaces. Cross talk attenuation to be provided if more than one area served.

Time control to be provided with remote reset.

Allow 6 ach with local fans

Sports Hall Supply AHU with filter section, heater battery and fan located externally on adjacent roof by plantroom.


Ductwork from ceiling level vertical grilles to vertical louvres in external wall.


Kitchen for Dining Room

Supply AHU with filter section, heater battery and fan located externally on roof by plantroom.

Cooker hood extract, to suit kitchen equipment, to be ducted to fan unit at roof level adjacent to the main piantroom with venture discharge.

Control panel in kitchen office/store to provide time control and system interlocks for local operation and remote override. Interlock to prevent use of gas appliances when ventilation inactive to be provided.

System to be designed to comply with DW172

Food Technology

Package Air Handling Unit (AHU) wi th filter section, heater battery, energy recovery section and supply and extract fans. AHU located in ceiling void of area served.

Ductwork from ceiling level louvres to vertical louvres in Electronics or Business studies


Science Labs Natural ventilation to be augmented by ducted extract wi th in-line fan. Duct work to run from air valves at high level within space to section of wall louvre.

Local manual control.

LRC Natural ventilation to be augmented by ducted extract with in-line fan. Duct work to run from air valves at high level within space to section of wall louvre.

Local manual control.

Nominal duty

Internal Class Bases

Package Air Handling Unit (AHU) with filter section, heater battery and supply fan. AHU located in ceiling void of area below.

Ductwork from low level grilles in classrooms to vertical louvres in ceiling void above Electronics and/or business studies.


Nominal duty



Plantrooms The intent is to try and naturally ventilate these, 1 m 2

which requires louvred openings to outside for louvre combust ion air and to avoid overheating. These area low areas will need to be provided during RIBA stage level, E. 0 . 5 m 2

louvre area high level

W60 - Control (BMS)

The Academy will be provided with a computerised building management system (BMS). This will provide automatic control and logging facilities for all mechanical and electrical plant. Key to the success of the system is making the interface between users and the BMS simple. This is very important as low energy use in most successful low energy buildings is reliant on all building occupants taking ownership and pride in the performance of their building. Typically, interfaces will take the form of a graphical user interface at a computer head end for the caretaker with simple local manual overrides in classrooms for the teachers. Teachers and caretakers would be trained in the use of the system following the completion of the building by both the consultant and the controls installer. This is also important as it is normally the consultant who has the most holistic overview of the operation of the building as a whole.

The BMS will be interfaced with the following systems; Heating plant Water booster sets and hot water generation Ventilation plant Cooling plant Ventilation openings in communal areas Security systems Gas valve Lighting control system User overrides Any other alarms/interfaces required

We propose to use a modem link to dial into the BMS system to monitor the building's performance and diagnose problems without having to come to site. The system will use equipment from one of the following manufacturers; Trend, Siemens, SeaChange or Cylon.

Electrical services V10 - Electricity generation

No generation or central UPS plant will be provided. Local UPSs to be part of fit-out/IT active equipment package if required.

V11 - HV services

A new incoming 11KV electrical supply will be provided by the regional electricity company (Budget quote £28,550) to a ring main unit (RMU to be housed in enclosure provided under the contract) on the site boundary (position to be agreed on Saffron lane).

A new 11 KV cable will be trenched, and ducted where necessary, from the REC RMU to a 800KVA packaged substation. The substation will include a HV switch, a resin transformer and an LV section. The latter is outlined in the section V20 below.

A new 11 KV cable will be trenched, and ducted where necessary, from the REC RMU to an 800KVA packaged substation located in the ground floor plantroom. The substation will include a HV switch, a resin transformer and an LV section. The later is outlined in the section V20 below.

V20, V22 - LV mains

The main LV board will be located adjacent to the academy's transformer. This will be a cubicle-type panel equipped with protection by means of circuit breakers. Multi-function meters will be provided on the incoming and outgoing ways. Automatic power factor correction will be provided to improve the efficiency of the installation.

Subsidiary 3e boards will be provided in the following locations to supply circuits to the zone in which they are located, fed by XLPE/SWA/LSF cables;

Main Plantroom Kitchen Plantroom Classroom wings (zoning tbc) Food classrooms Changing room Plantroom Sports Hall Area DT room area Externa! areas

Generally, power outlets will be located in classrooms and other teaching areas in dado trunking, or installed within the wall construction of permanent partition walls - discussion is required with the client to determine the preferred solution. Accessories will generally be impact resistant white plastic, with metalclad items in plant areas and metal items in corridors etc and other heavily used areas. RCD protection will be provided to DSSOs. All outlets which may serve IT equipment will be fitted with double earths to comply with IEE regulations. A clean earth facility will not be provided. Cabling will generally be LSF/XLPE singles in conduit/trunking.

Alternatives for distribution in cables in classrooms and other spaces are shown below:

Flush mounted outlet plate

00

CD

Dado tracking



V21 Lighting

Lighting uses around one third of a typical school's annual energy consumption with carbon intensive electricity. Therefore, energy efficient improvements to lighting systems typically have short payback periods and are one of the simplest and most cost effective methods of lowering annual energy consumption. The lighting scheme focuses on two main elements of the lighting design.

Reducing lighting energy at source, i.e. specify high efficiency fittings (e.g. high frequency fluorescent lamps and ballasts) with efficient light distribution.

Reducing the time and intensity for which this energy is used.

Internal Lighting Lighting will principally comprise high frequency fluorescent fittings to ensure high lighting efficiency. Within classrooms these will comprise linear suspended fittings to allow light to spill up to the ceiling to give good uniformity and a pleasant lighting environment. To maximise efficiency and avoid complicated conduit runs at first floor ceiling level, classroom lighting may consist of lighting "booms" cabled from one side of a run of classrooms via a plasterboard bulkhead. This will allow the removal of flanking walls without affecting the cabling. As the fittings will provide a degree of uplight, It is important that any soffit or panels which might act as reflectors are as reflective as possible (for instance by painting soffits white)

The lighting will generally be switched by presence detection with an infrared over-ride control. Daylight linking (dimming) control will be provided to all fittings adjacent to windows and to top floor classrooms.

Switching for large open spaces such as the sports hall will generally be grouped into banks and manually operated. A central timeclock will ensure lighting is switched off at night during unoccupied periods and daylight linking will be used in spaces only where it will save significant amounts of energy.

Lighting of communal circulation type spaces will be controlled centrally on a timeclock combined with photocells within each communal space for dimming and activation. When areas adjoining a circulation space are in use, the lighting to the circulation spaces will be "held-on" to prevent occupants having to exit the school in darkness.

B H

rpf.

A rea Desc r ip t i on Manu fac tu re r i n fo rma t ion

Type A Science/classrooms Suspended direct/indirect twin lamp luminaire. Suspended at either end via a V shape wire. Titanium in coloured with Ini ivre

Zumtobel Staff Spheros

Type B Double height corridor areas

Wire suspended high bay luminaire with aluminium reflector

Zumtobel Staff

Type C Offices/meeting rooms

Recessed direct/indirect downlight, twin lamp with white reflector. Aluminium in mlnnr

Zumtobel Staff Mellow Light III

Type D Plantrooms Surface mounted polycarbonate li iminaire IPfifi rated Twin T?R lamps

Zumtobel Staff Chiarn FT T?fi

Type E Dinning room kitchen Recessed clean room luminaire to house twin lamps. IP54 rated. White

Zumtobel Staff LNPE

Type F Sportshall Quad lamp aluminium shell with wire guard to resist impacts from balls. Omni-directional luminance control louvre to reduce eye level glare.

Philips lighting Superomni FCH 481

External Lighting

The general design approach for the external lighting is to minimise the lighting energy at source- i.e. minimise the areas that need to be lit at night. Amenity lighting will be provided to routes which will be used during hours of darkness, but infra red lights for CCTV will be avoided through specification of suitable cameras which are capable of viewing images down to a very low light level. External lighting will incorporate low cut off angles to ensure compliance with planning regulations.



BH ref. Area Description Manufacturer Information Type G External wall mount Externally rated wall mounted combined

up/down lighter. Twin lamp with aluminium finish.

Concord Marlin

Type H External ground buried

In ground buried LED uplighter. DX colour change controller. Aluminium extrusion with perspex window. IP68 rated

Clarity Lighting Multi LED with colour chance.

V40 - Emergency lighting

The emergency lighting system will consist of self-contained emergency conversion of the normal lighting systems. These will be designed and installed to comply with BS 5266 and BS 5588. Emergency lighting will be specified for a 3-hour duration in the event of a power failure. New regulations will demand that accurate records of testing are maintained, and hence a central test and diagnosis facility will be provided via the lighting control system, which will automatically test the system and maintain records.

W10, W30 - Data and Telecommunications

ICT and small power uses around one quarter of a typical school's annual energy consumption with carbon intensive electricity. ICT equipment represents the majority of this load which is often forgotten. The ICT energy consumption manifests itself in two forms:

The electrical energy used by the computers themselves The electrical energy used by a ventilation / cooling system to maintain comfortable conditions within the classroom

Therefore, it is critical that the ICT functional specification, the building's environmental control strategy and budget are carefully matched to ensure an optimal solution is reached in terms of both building occupant comfort and the ICT educational delivery.

Therefore, it is critical that the ICT functional specification, the building's environmental control strategy and budget are carefully matched to ensure an optimal solution is reached in terms of both building occupant comfort and the ICT educational delivery. This is because large numbers of desktop computers within classrooms would cause overheating and intolerably high internal temperatures during the summer months unless cooling is provided (note that the environmental servicing strategy is required to meet the summer temperature conditions outlined in Building Bulletin 87).

Refer to Section 7.3 for further details

The final data and telecoms installation will be selected and installed by others.

Facilities will be provided to allow analogue and digital communications services to enter the school. A main incoming frame and communications room will be located in a dedicated internal ground floor area where the incoming service and building installation will be interfaced.

Wireways will be provided between the communications rooms and the main building service route to service the on-zone ICT rooms as required.

W 1 2 - Public Address

The size and extent of any PA system needs to be agreed with the client

W20 - TV System It is envisaged that this will be facilitated by the ICT network, but the size and extent of any TV system needs to be agreed with the client

W20, W40, W41 - CCTV, access control, intruder alarm The security strategy will require consultation with all stakeholders during and beyond stage E, as the available options are many and varied and their cost can vary widely. In addition, the aspiration to obtain a "Secure by design" certification may require provision over and above that which is currently included. The security strategy in the Academy is complicated by the inclusion of the areas that will be used by the public and other users both during Academy time and out of hours. Security zoning diagrams are included in the architectural drawings. These should be read with the following strategy:

It is anticipated the Academy will be secured in three stages: The external site perimeter A secondary site perimeter, excluding the main car park and the Diamond Jubilee Covert The building perimeter (including internal areas where public access is anticipated)

The classroom perimeter

Our initial suggestion for compilation of the security budget is as follows:

Access Control: Fence surrounds site perimeter. Manually operated gates, intercom and video entry provide controlled access through site perimeter fence where required. Live access control doors with magnetic/motor locks on all building perimeter doors with hold offs. Teachers can open doors with their swipe cards (if activated). Doors are held open with magnetic contacts during main entry and exit times. Main entrance doors powered for disabled access. Video Intercom at main entrance (for when receptionist isn't there). Live access control doors with magnetic/motor locks on all high security

and technical rooms, such as the hub rooms etc.

Hotel type locks on a selection of internal doors (some classrooms, plantrooms, IT rooms, offices etc) - allows teachers (only) to control internal door access. Each teacher's card is enabled for pre selected areas by a security administrator. Hotel locks have proved very successful as they are cost effective (lock cost is offset by ironmongery) and replacement keys are cheap and easy to programme. Note that the cost of this needs to be rationalised with the overall cost plan. Areas with outside hours use (sports hall, assembly hall, and changing facilities for example) accessed through main entrance or gate with intercom. Secure access routes through building to these areas.

CCTV

Internal fixed cameras at main building entrances (not including push type fire escape doors) Column mounted colour/infra red PTZ camera to survey Academy grounds. Digital Recording and control central workstation linked to central monitoring station.

Intruder Alarm:

New DD243 (2002) intruder alarm for ground floor and a selection of frst floor areas with double knock detection via two different sensing devices within high value rooms.

The current cost plan figures allow for the following provision; - CCTV - 12 fixed internal, 17 fixed external, 3 PTZ domes, 2 poles, 48

way matrix and telemetry, 3 monitors, and DVR (recorder). Intruder alarm - adequate provision if configured as above Access control - 15-17 doors.

While the first two of these provide adequate provision the latter may need augmentation.

4.1.1.1 W50 - Fire Detection and Alarm

An analogue addressable system will be provided to give appropriate coverage (as defined by the fire strategy - likely to be L1 or L2 or similar provision depending on specification provided by fire consultant) to the entire building. The system will be activated by manual break glass call points, heat and smoke detectors to accord with the requirements of BS 5839. All parts of the fire alarm and detection will be wired in an approved type of fire resistant cable.


4.0 Services Engineering 4.7 Utilities Report

The main control panel will be located in the Academy main reception and will be capable of identifying the alarm signal by Zone, area, level and activator e.g. Call point, smoke detector etc. A mimic panel will be provided in the Phase I area.

The fire alarm system will be interfaced with other systems within the building to provide further alarm signals, to send signals to other systems to activate or shut down mechanical plant, including the following:

BMS system lifts to ground security system to release door access systems lighting control system to bring on designated escape lighting mechanical services to shut down ventilation plant audio visual systems gas shut off valve

The Academy will operate a single stage evacuation following a fire incident condition, using conventional detectors.

Induction loops will be provided to rooms associated with SEN, entrance areas, chaplaincy, Assembly hall and the theatre

An analogue addressable system will be provided to give appropriate coverage (as defined by the fire strategy - likely to be L1 or L2 or similar provision) to the entire building. The system will be activated by manual break glass call points, heat and smoke detectors to accord with the requirements of BS 5839. All parts of the fire alarm and detection will be wired in an approved type of fire resistant cable.

The main control panel will be located in the school main reception and will be capable of identifying the alarm signal by Zone, area, level and activator e.g. Call point, smoke detector etc. A mimic panel will be provided in the primary school area.

The fire alarm system will be interfaced with other systems within the building to provide further alarm signals, to send signals to other systems to activate or shut down mechanical plant, including the following:

BMS system lifts to ground security system to release door access systems lighting control system to bring on designated escape lighting mechanical services to shut down ventilation plant audio visual systems gas shut off valve

The school will operate a single stage evacuation following a fire incident condition.

It is suggested the alarm sounded will be of the voice type whereby pre-recorded instructions can be given to all parts of the building, but this is to be confirmed as the design develops.

Induction loops will be provided to rooms associated with SEN, entrance areas, assembly hall and the cha. The extent and exact requirements of assisted hearing systems are to be determined during stage D.

W51 - Earthing

The school building will have a comprehensive earthing system, which will be designed in accordance with BS 7671 BS 6651 and BS7430.

A main earth bar will be located in the LV switchroom on the ground floor.

Each riser will be fitted with an earth bar, for general connection of earthing systems. Each of these bars will allow for the connection of all building earth provisions, and will incorporate a proprietary link facility to enable disconnection for test purposes.

The main earth connections within the main LV switchrooms will generally comprise the following as a minimum;

lightning protection system main earth bond dedicated earth provision to incoming telephone services room

In addition all exposed and extraneous conductive metalwork will be bonded through local earthing provisions.

Generally all earthing provisions will comprise single core LSF sheathed (green/yellow) copper conductors, final sizes of which will be determined through the design.

The earth system will be connected to the general mass of earth by connection to the building structures foundation, and via driven earth rods where required.

The final arrangement of the site earthing system will be subject to discussions and approval from the Supply Authority with the following earthing provisions provided;

supply transformer star point earthing transformer frame earthing incoming HV service earthing all general LV room earthing requirements

All main and final circuits will have the earth conductors sized to withstand the mechanical and electrical effects of the prospective short circuit current calculated for the respective circuit.

The earthing design will also incorporate provisions to deal with potential transient over-voltages where required, and these facilities will be included at the main distribution positions.

W52 - Lightning Protection

A lightning protection system will be provided to fully protect the building, its contents and occupants against the hazard of a lightning strike.

The lightning protection system will comply with BS 6651 and will comprise four main elements as follows:

air terminal network down conductor network earth termination network bonding

Generally the air termination network across the building will be designed to provide an inter-linked grid pattern of high conductivity copper tape, located at roof level. In certain areas this will comprise the roof structure or metalwork.

The down conductor network will be provided around the perimeter of the development, and around the perimeter of the building, and will utilise copper or aluminium down conductors concealed behind the building fagade and cladding, and fixed to the building structure (or the steel structure of the building if present). All down conductors will extend to ground level, where they will connect to the earth termination network via a test link.

Test links will all be located at a point accessible by maintenance staff from ground level, and will be clearly identified.

An earth termination network will be provided, which will allow the lightning protection down conductors to be suitably connected to earth. Every down conductor will be provided with an earth connection.

Additional earthing for the development will also be achieved through the foundations and sub structure.

The whole lightning protection system will be fully bonded to include the following elements: -



Services Engineering Report 4.6 Outline Specification

Item Discussion Action

1.0 Electrical Supply

Budget proposal received from Central Networks dated 27/09/04. HV and LV option outlined. HV route recommended by BH, E29K CN allowance, with E30K to be added for client sub-station.

2.0 Gas Supply

Quotation received from British Gas dated 16/11 /04 for C5k. An allowance for a meter and supply should be made.

Location of meter to be updated to current building layout which may have a minor impact on pipe work price.

3.0 Water Supply

Response from Severn Trent Water, dated 10/01/05, received offering a limited supply of 2.5 l/s (original enquiry was for 10 l/s) with a budget price of about E8.5K. This includes their costs for upgrading local infrastructure.

Due to the low flow rate available on site water storage of about 12 m3 is required along with a booster pump set. A tank room has been incorporated into the first floor layout, adjacent to the main plant room,

4.0 Foul Water Drainage

Drainage statement received from Severn Trent dated 19/11/04. An unrestricted discharge is available.

5.0 Surface Water and Land Drainage

Drainage statement received from Severn Trent dated 19/11/04. Only a severely limited surface water drainage discharge is available. On site attenuation/storage and disposal system needs to be allowed for at this stage, negotiation may change the situation. Sketch proposal for attenuation issued 17/12/04.

6.0 Voice and Data Connections

ICT workshop held on 17/12/04. Requirements to be clarified by Cambridge Associates (CA) as soon as possible. Enquires with BT will be progressed following the receipt of CA report.

Buro Happola Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds



5.0 Structural Engineering Report

Structural & Civil Engineering Stage D Report


• • • •

5.0 Structural Engineering Report

This report has been prepared for the sole benefit, use and information of the Department for Education and Skills and David Samworth CBE DL and The Bishop of Leicester. The liability of Buro Happold Limited, its Partners and Employees in respect of the information contained in the report will not extend to any third party

Author Jenni Wood Approved Approved Steve Fisher

Signed Signed Signed

Date Date Date

0 S t a g e n - as h igh l igh ted .IMW P 4 . 0 1 . 0 5

Rev. Description Issued by • a t e Checked

Fei lden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP Arup Fire Fleming and Barron


5.0 Structural Engineering Report 5.1 Building Description

Phase 2

Phase 3

Phase 1

Sports Hall

Dining Area & Assembly Hall

Main Entrance

Chaplaincy

Overall Building Arrangement and Zones

The building is situated at the northern end of the site with the front facade forming an oblique angle to Trenant Road. This gives the building frontage a presence on the main through road, Saffron Lane. The site slopes gentle up southward away from Trenant Road up to a flatter area beyond were the playing fields are sited.

The architectural concept for the building is of a 'ribbon' that doubles back on itself about a central axis. This snaking of the main building creates a series of open areas in-between which the spaces created are used as circulation routes. These areas are covered to form internal atria spaces with maximum opportunity taken for roof lights and ventilation.

The building is predominately two storeys with maximum plan dimensions of approximately 140m by 70m. The front of the building offers the longest facade to the road providing a buffer to the progressively shorter blocks behind. The snaking of the main building structure behind the front facade produces a series of four wings varying in length from 70m to 35m.

Each of the four wing houses a different function of the school with ancillary spaces located adjacent to the central circulation route. The front wing closest to the corner of Saffron Lane and Trenant Road accommodates the larger volumes that are less noise sensitive. These are the Sports Hall and changing, the Assembly Hall, the Main Entrance and the Chaplaincy centre. The other three wings accommodate the main teaching spaces - one wing for each of the three year groups know as Phase 1, Phase 2 and Phase 3. Phase 1 (for the youngest pupils) is nearest the front of the site and is the only single story volume.

Due to the slope of the site the ground floor steps up through the building, in 500mm increments, providing three different floor levels. This change in floor level is used to help define the four different functional areas - the entrance and large volume spaces are at the lowest level, Phases 1 and 2 are at the intermediate level and Phase 3 is at the highest level towards the back of the building footprint.


5.0 Structural Engineering Report 5.2 Site

5.2.1 Site Description

The site is located approximately 5km south-west of Leicester city centre in the residential area of South Wigston (see Site Location Plan below). At present the site consists of the disused buildings and playing fields of Mary Linwood School. The western boundary is marked by Saffron Lane, the northern boundary by Trenant Road, to the east of the site is a wooded area called Diamond Jubilee Culvert, and the south of the site is defined by the back gardens of houses on Dorset Avenue. On the west of the site is a small privately owned plot that is currently used as a vehicle servicing garage and van hire business, it is understood that this land is to be included in the redevelopment of the site.

The site generally slopes gently down towards the north-west corner of the site with the south-eastern corner of the site being approximately 90m above ordnance datum.

The following points were noted during the walkover survey:

• The north-eastern part of the site has been cut into the natural slope and includes a retaining wall approximately 2m high and an area of over steepened bank.

• The western part of the site around the tennis courts appears to have been built up to create a level area; this is retained by small wall (1m high) along the southern boundary of the garage.

• Various gentle man made slopes and small retaining walls (<1m high) are present around the existing buildings, especially to the south.

• The existing buildings have 1 or 2 storeys, a sub-basement exists beneath the building at the north-east corner.

The proposed topography utilises a series of steps across the site to tie in with existing levels (ie from the north-west corner at approx 82.5m minimum up to the south-east corner at approx 90m). The new building has been positioned and set with stepped levels to suit this proposed topography.

New Building on Proposed Terraced Site


5=0 Structural Engineering Report 5.2 Site

Site History

The available maps document the history of the site from 1886 to 2000 and show that the only development on the site has been the existing school and that these school buildings were mainly constructed between 1955 and 1963 with various extra school buildings are shown on the 1982 map. Major residential developments within 1 km of the site are shown from 1931 and Trenant Road is shown on maps from 1955. On the west of the site is a small privately owned plot that is currently used as a vehicle servicing garage and van hire business. It is understood that this land is to be included in the redevelopment of the site.

Geology

The British Geological Survey publish geological maps, which provide general guidance on the geological sequence beneath the site. Sheet 156, Leicester Solid and Drift shows the site to lie on superficial deposits of Glacial Boulder Clay. The slightly higher ground to the east of the site beyond the Diamond Jubilee Covert is shown to consist of Glacial Sand and Gravel. The southern part of the site is shown as being underlain by Lower Lias Clays and Limestones of the Jurassic whilst the northern part of the site this is underlain by Rhaetic Beds of the Triassic, which in turn are underlain by Triassic Keuper Marl (now known as the Mercia Mudstone Group). This stratigraphy dips down to the south-east at approximately 5 degress. A Guide to British Stratigraphical Nomenclature, 1998, states that the lowermost part of the Lias Group is now considered to be of Late Triassic Age. In order to be consistent with the published map this report will consider the Lower Lias to be part of the Jurassic.

Hydrology

The Groundwater Vulnerability map sheet 23 for Leicestershire shows the site to lie on a Non-Aquifer. The Glacial Sand and Gravel to the east of the site is shown to be a Minor Aquifer.

Wells and Springs of Leicestershire, 1931, states that the sand and gravel, that as a rule is present at the base of the Boulder Clay, is a very useful aquifer. The same reference also indicates that water is not extracted from the Lower Lias stating that the little water encountered here is hard, liable to be saline and/or impregnated with sulphuretted hydrogen from the decomposition of iron pyrites in the beds.

5.2.2 Ground Investigations

Two phases of ground investigation works have been carried out on the site by CJ Associates:

1 .Prior to issue of the Stage C report, on 19 October 2004, four window sample holes were completed in the garage site issue.

2.Since Stage C, on 9 December 2004, the main phase of the ground investigation site work started and was substantially complete by 17 December. However, due to operational problems with the rotary rig, the final borehole was not completed until 13 January 2005.

At the time of writing the ground investigation site work is 95% complete; still to be completed are the two return visits to monitor gas and groundwater conditions in the borehole standpipes and the surveying of the as built positions of each of the exploratory holes. Neither the geotechnical nor the contamination laboratory testing have been completed. As such, all information and any calculations to date are based on limited information from preliminary logs, excluding the rotary holes BH201 and 202.

CJ Associates' final factual report is likely to be available by 18 February 2005.

Buro Happold's geotechnical interpretive report should be available within two weeks of receiving this factual report.

5.2.3 Ground Conditions

Made Ground

The thickness of proven made ground varies across the site up to a maximum of 1.9m below existing ground levels.

Generally the thicker areas of made ground are: • Up to 1.9m in the extreme north-west of the site towards the corner of

Trenant Road and Saffron Lane • Up to 1.4m on the western margin of the existing tennis courts • Up to 1.5m behind existing retaining walls • Up to 1.5m adjacent to existing foundations

Elsewhere over the existing building footprint the made ground is approximately 1 m deep. Generally the existing playing fields have no made ground with 0.2m of topsoil overl ing the Boulder Clay.

The made ground was generally gravelly clay with occasional brick rubble, ash, clinker and rare metal. No obvious visual or olfactory signs of contamination were noted. At the base of the made ground in the north-west corner and western extremity of the site a relict topsoil layer up to 0.55m thick was encountered, this probably represents the original ground surface.

The foundations of the larger 2 storey structure were exposed at two locations. Formation level was found to up to-1,5m deep founding on stiff boulder clay. The width of the existing foundations cannot be inferred as no step out was noted. These foundations will need to be removed and backfilled with suitable compacted structural fill.

Boulder Clay

Glacial Boulder Clay was found to underlie the Made Ground and 6 boreholes around the proposed building footprint prove it to depths of approximately 13m below ground level. This stratum consists of predominantly clay with rare gravel of mixed lithologies and origins. Rare channels of sand were found to exist generally across the playing fields to the south of the existing school buildings and on the garage site. The channels are generally less than 0.5m thick and exist as discrete linear features at depths less than 2m below ground level. The largest sand body was exposed in TP113 to the east of the tennis courts and extended from 2.8m to at least 3.6m below ground level (base unproven). All of the sand bodies contained perched water that seeped into the exploratory hole.


5.0 Structural Engineering Report 5.2 Site

The earlier desk study suggested the possibility of a gravel and sand layer at the base of the boulder clay. However, this layer was not encountered during the recent site investigations, proving that the gravels and sands do not exist on the site. In-situ tests show the Boulder Clay to be stiff below 1,5m below ground level becoming very stiff by 3m below ground level.

Mercia Mudstone

Mercia Mudstone was encountered below the Boulder Clay and cored to 20m depth at two locations. Neither drillers' nor engineering logs of these exploratory holes have been received.

Groundwater

The only groundwater encountered was perched in the sand channels and bodies within the Boulder Clay. As explained above, the expected aquifer at the base of the boulder clay (suggested within the desk study) was not found during the recent investigations, proving that it does not exist within the site.

Groundwater monitoring results will be included within the factual and interpretive reports.

Depth below existing Description ground '

Ground Conditions Summary

5.2.4 Foundation Recommendations

Founding on the Made Ground is not recommended. The Boulder Clay would be suitable for shallow foundations, on the basis of the available information at 1.5m below existing ground level the allowable bearing pressure would be 150kN/m^ giving an estimated long term settlement of less than 25mm. Locally the formation level may be deeper than 1,5m, for example where existing foundations, obstructions are encountered. Existing foundations, service trenches and any soft spots or sand channels below the proposed formation level should be grubbed out and back filled with suitable compacted structural fill. If water bearing sand channels or lenses or areas of deeper fill are encountered above formation level then temporary shoring and pumping out of the excavation may be necessary, the volumes of water are likely to be low given the isolated nature of these small features. Care should be taken such that ground or rain water ingress does not soften the formation level and footings should be immediately blinded on excavation.

The results of Atterberg tests will confirm if a formation depth of 1,5m is sufficient to avoid potential shrinkage and swelling associated with seasonal changes in moisture content and the planting or removal of trees.

Floor slabs

Ground bearing floor slabs are acceptable provided loading is less than 10kN/m2 and any soft spots are removed.

Buried Concrete

The laboratory results required for the design of buried concrete are not yet available, however, gypsum was noted on some of the exploratory hole logs indicating high levels of sulphate, it is therefore likely that the site will have a relatively high ACEC classification. The BRE are to issue new guidelines in spring 2005 that are expected to lead to sites having a higher ACEC classification.

Ground Gas Protection

The proposed building does not require protection against radon as less than 1 % of homes in the area are above the National Radon Protection Board action level.

Gas monitoring of the standpipes installed in all of the boreholes has not yet been carried out; the only likely gas producing stratum encountered was the buried topsoil on the north-west and western margins of the site.

Results will need to be assessed to establish if any passive venting measures or excavation of gassings soils is required.

Pavement Design

The results of the in-situ CBR tests indicate that a CBR value of 2% can be used for pavements founding on natural boulder clay 0.5m below current ground level.

5.2.5 Drainage

Soakaway drainage is unfeasible given the cohesive nature of the Boulder Clay and the size and saturated nature of the sand bodies.

5.2.6 Contamination

On the garage site, made ground typically comprised clay or gravel with occasional brick, concrete or ash. From a visual and olfactory perspective little evidence of significant contamination was encountered at the location of the boreholes. Subsequent laboratory testing of samples of made ground and underlying natural strata generally recorded potential contaminants of concern at concentrations below threshold levels, even for a sensitive land use such as residential housing with private gardens. One exception to this was WS1 (at 0.35m) where elevated concentrations of lead, copper and zinc were recorded. In isolation this result does not give rise to concern as elevated concentrations of copper and zinc are primarily of concern to plant health and not human health. The concentration of lead does exceed the recommended screening value (even for less sensitive commercial/industrial uses) and it is recommended that this cover of made ground is subject to limited remedial action. In this instance excavation and off site disposal is the most likely solution given the small volume of soil.

It is important to recognise that contamination, for example from a small spill of oil, may be very localised and that no investigation, however comprehensive, is capable of finding such occurrences other than by chance. Thus, the possibility of small areas of contamination existing on the site, not found during the investigation, or being present at greater concentrations than found during the investigation, cannot be entirely ruled out.

Across the main school site no obvious visual or olfactory signs of serious contamination were noted during the site work. However, laboratory results still need to be assessed to determine whether the made ground is suitable for re-use on site or if a further cover of clean topsoil is required. If material has to be disposed of offsite it is likely to be classified as inert or non-hazardous waste. However, this is unlikely on the present evidence. Risks to human health and groundwater are considered low and it is likely that construction workers will not require any special PPE beyond standard measures.


5.0 Structural Engineering Report 5.3 Structure

The current proposals are indicated on the structural drawings included within Section 13 and amplified in the following paragraphs:

5.3.1 Main Teaching Wings

The chosen option for the main teaching wings is an in situ reinforced concrete frame. Typically, 300 thick flat slabs are used for the floor and roof structures spanning between reinforced concrete columns on a 7.8m x 7.0m grid (for external bays) and a 7.8m x 7.7m grid (for internal bays).

The grid has been co-ordinated with FCBA with the columns located offset from partition lines. This has the following benefits:

• Optimisation of floor plates, using the same slab thickness throughout

• A balanced ratio of internal to external spans, creating structural efficiencies in the slab design

• Simplified detailing of parttions, since no tying is required between columns and walls

350 high reinforced concrete upstands are used around all roof perimeters and rooflight openings. At movement joints, double upstands are detailed, back-to-back either side of the joint.

Phase 1 Teaching Wing

This single storey wing typically uses 300 diameter reinforced concrete columns. However, either side of the central zone, 1700x250 blade columns have been introduced to support the stepped rooflight lid. This rises up above the general roof level, creating a clerestory window to gain natural lighting within the deep teaching spaces.

Circular rooflights, maximum 2.6m diameter, are punched through the flat roof slab to give daylighting into the central zone.

The general roof slab is flat, but slopes up over half its length by approximately 3.5m to reach the high level flat roof at the movement joint between Phase 1 and the central area.

A reinforced concrete shear wall has been introduced between the Teaching Wing and Phase 1 Hall. For further details, refer to Section 3.5 - Stability.

Phase 2 & 3 Teaching Wings

The columns in these two storey wings are generally 300 diameter reinforced concrete, which support both levels of slab. A line of single storey 225 diamater columns have been introduced to prop the edge of the first floor slab along the atrium voids.


5.0 Structural Engineering Report 5.5 Demolition

Above the concrete roof slab, there are two sloping rooflights, which are framed using steel portals, built off the concrete upstands.

Two circular rooflights, similar to those within Phase 1, are also included within the central zone of the flat roof.

Reinforced concrete shear walls have been introduced at both ends of these Teaching Wings and within the link between Phase 1 and 2. For further details, refer to Section 5.3.6 - Stability.

5.3.2 Chaplaincy

The Chaplaincy has a special geometry with a feature roof due to it prominence both in the frontage of the building and as a space within the school. It is roughly circular in plan, with its roof popping up above the general level to create a drum-like form.

The structural arrangement has been guided by architectural expression. The clear span across the space is approximately 13m and is formed using a 300 thick reinforced concrete slab spanning onto a radial arrangement of three downstand beams. The roof slab and downstands are supported on a system of perimeter rectangular columns within the wall zone of the drum.

Entrance Canopy

The main entrance canopy in front of the Chaplaincy is a lightweight steel-framed structure at the general flat roof level. Architecturally, this reads as one clear span from the Assembly Hall to the Phase 1 Hall with no intermediate columns. However, to keep the depth and deflections to a minimum, we have: -introduced an intermediate support cantilevering off one of the Chaplaincy columns, which in turn picks up the perimeter edge beam, -added an extra trimmer beam to reduce the overall load on the edge beam and hence the cantilever -utilised UC and RHS sections which provide greater stiffness and strength with reduced depth, when compared to UB sections. These have allowed us to keep the overall structural depth down to approximately 360mm.

Deflections under imposed load have been limited to span/500.

Ancillary Spaces

Either side of the main entrance and around the Chaplaincy are single storey ancillary spaces (ie offices, meeting rooms, stores, etc). These are simple extensions of the concrete frame, using 300 thick flat slabs forming a first floor lid within the larger volume of the overall building. For consistency of detailing, columns are typically 300 diameter located in perimeter walls.

Chaplaincy and Main Entrance



Sports Hall Assembly Hall

H I •

— x va » kbi PfS,

• • i p l

• { - f t j : | I

Dining Area

— i I r - SI

5.3.3 Long Span Spaces

The internal planning of the building has led to a number of areas where column grids are stretched beyond the typical 7,8m, resulting in a requirement for a different structural arrangement from the 300 thick flat slab.

Dining Area

This double-height space, predominantly open-plan for flexibility of use, stretches the column grid to approximately 11.0m x 6.9m.

Reinforced concrete has been adopted, as a continuation of the typical 300 thick fat slab, but utilising upstand beams (for architectural reasons) 600 wide x 1400 deep, to span the 11.0m required across the space. Columns have been increased to 450 diameter as required by the double-height condition and higher loads in this area.

Assembly Hall

This double-height rectangular space requires a clear span of 13.8m. Due to its location (i.e. sandwiched between two shorter span more typical zones) we have chosen to continue the reinforced concrete frame solution in this area.

A 300 thick flat slab spans between downstand beams, 600 wide x 1000 deep, which span the 13.8m required across the room, supported on reinforced columns and shear walls, within the perimeter walls

A further requirement is that this hall space can extend into the main dining area, which means that no column is allowed on the central axis between the two spaces. As such, a deep downstand beam has been detailed to transfer this load and span across this 13.8m opening, effectively creating a proscenium arch.

Phase 1 Hall

This double-height trapezoidal shaped hall tucks in between the Phase 1 Teaching Wing and Chaplaincy.

Again clear spans are required to allow full flexibility and uninterrupted views into the Chaplaincy space. The sloping roof structure is a 300 thick reinforced concrete slab which spans up to a maximum ot 7.2m between downstand beams, 500 wide x 750 deep.



Sports Hall

The Sports Hall is a single storey structure approximately 34m x 18.5m on plan, located in the western corner of the site. The height varies from approx 8.5m to 10.0m as a monopitch roof in the longitudinal direction.

Due to the overall unrestrained height, long clear spans required and its 'end of block' location, a steel frame has been adopted for this building. Primary beams, approximately 760mm deep, spanning 18.5m clear, are provided at 8.35m centres, to suit the spacing of the badminton courts. Secondary beams span between these primaries at approximately 6m centres, supporting a 200 deep profiled structural deck and lightweight roof build-up.

Steel columns located within the perimeter walls support the lightweight cladding system. Horizontal rails will be required at the head and cill levels of the protruding curtain walling cladding. An additional allowance should be made for secondary framing members, the exact requirement of which will be dependent on the spanning capabilities of the cladding system.

Braced bays are located within the perimeter walls and will be visible through the cladding system. For further details on stability refer to Section 5.3.6

Changes in level across the site and building are accommodated using perimeter dwarf reinforced concrete retaining walls and steps in the reinforced concrete slab.

The lift pit is formed using 250 thick reinforced concrete walls and base slab, with adjacent foundations lowered to suit.

5.3.5 Movement Joints

Due to the overall length of the building, it is proposed that four expansion joints be introduced to limit the build up of stresses associated with thermal and shrinkage movements.

The proposed locations are shown on the drawings, indicated in the diagram below and summarised as follows:

• at the junction between the Sports Hall and adjacent changing facilities

• between the Assembly Hall and Chaplaincy, running along the circulation spine, through the Dining Area Roof and stepping along the Phase 2 Teaching Wing

Indicative Movement Joint Locations

5.3.4 Foundations

Based on the current available data from the site investigation, we have designed the foundations to a safe bearing pressure of 150kN/m2 at a depth of approx 1,5m below existing ground level. This is based on formation into the underlying boulder clay. Note that an average depth of made ground of approximately 1,0m exists over the building footprint, and therefore foundations need to extend below this level to reach a sound bearing stratum.

The current proposals typically show mass concrete pad foundations for isolated columns and strip footings under shear walls. A system of reinforced concrete ground beams is shown to support the chaplaincy columns and provide sufficient stiffness at foundation level.

Note that care should be taken to protect against any ground or rain water, which may soften the formation. It is therefore recommended that all footings be concrete blinded immediately on excavation.

• at the junction where the Phase 1 sloping roof meets the high level flat roof

• between Phases 2 and 3

At these locations, the roof and floor slabs will be connected across the joint by sliding dowelled shear connectors allowing movement in both horizontal directions, whilst transferring the necessary vertical load. A slight variation to this (for the connection along the Phase 2 Teaching Wing to the Dining Area) is described below.

The ground slab is designed as ground-bearing; 150 thick reinforced concrete on 1200 gauge polythene on 150 minimum sand-blinded compacted granular material.



3.3.6 Stability

Lateral stability of the building is achieved by one of two ways:

Braced Structure Braced bays or shear walls can be located within the building. The floor plates carry the elevational wind loads to these shear walls, which act as cantilevers to transfer the loads to the foundations. This solution gives the minimum column sizes as they typically carry only vertical loads.

Frame Action Alternatively the slabs and columns can be portalised. This leads to increased column sizes as both horizontal and vertical loads have to be considered together with sway deflections. This method is not considered structural efficient for long span and/or high spaces.

Currently the proposed stability systems for the separate elements of the building are indicated within the Stability Systems diagrams included on the next page and summarised in the following paragraphs.

Main Teaching Wings

Due to the long thin plan of the floor plates, a mixture of shear walls and frame action is proposed.

In the long direction (where a greater number of columns can be mobilised) frame action is proposed. Lateral loads are also reduced in this direction by the reduced wind loads due to shorter end elevation.

In the cross direction (with a longer elevation exposed to wind loads) shear walls are proposed. These are located towards the ends of each block - minimum of one each end.

Chaplaincy

Using the structural arrangement of the columns in this area, the whole cylindrical drum has effectively been treated as a single stability element, cantilevering from foundation level to resist horizontal loads.

The surrounding roof slab provides some portal action and acts as a diaphragm to transfer lateral loads into these columns with the Chaplaincy lid acting as a stiff plate to link the columns and share the load amongst them.

Long Span Areas - Assembly Hall, Dining Area and Central Spine

Within the walls of the Assembly Hall, two reinforced concrete sheir walls have been introduced to provide stability in the north-south directisn.

Elsewhere, these roof structures will be stabilised by connection o the adjacent Teaching Wings and Chaplaincy. The concrete slabs art as diaphragms to transfer the lateral loads into the various stabilitysystems; shear walls or portal frames. Lateral shear connection (using th) dowelled connectors) across the movement joint between the Phase 2 "teaching Wing and Dining Area will be necessary to achieve this.

Long Span Areas - Sports Hall

Due to the height of this steel-framed building, it is proposed that it Be stabilised using braced bays within the perimeter walls. Since t'lis bracing will be expressed behind the translucent 'Rodeca' cladding the/ have been designed as stainless steel rods with turnbuckles for tensioning. The profiled structural roof decking acts to provide diaphragm (plate) action to transfer the lateral loads into the braced bays.

Arup Fire Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape ' Feilden Clegg B ' a c .


Phase 2 and 3 w i n g s stabi l ised by f rame act ion

Shear connec t ion required ac ross th is dowel led jo int

Spor ts Hall stabi l ised by braced bays

Dining & Assembly Halls stabi l ised by connec t ion into adjacent s t ructures

E / W WIND (LONGITUDINAL DIRECTION)

Stability Systems E/W Longitudinal Direction

F e i l d e n C l e g g B r a d l e y A r c h i t e c t s L L P A r u p Fire F leming a n d Bar ron

V. I'

Phase 2 and 3 wings stabilised by shear walls

Sports Hall stabilised by braced bays

Phase 1 wing stabilised by frame action N/S WIND

(CROSS DIRECTION)

Stability Systems N/S Cross Direction


5.0 Structural Engineering 5.4 Design

Report Criteria

5.4.1 Dead Loads

Dead loads are calculated in accordance with BS 6399: Pt 1: 1996 and BS648 and the selected form of construction. They include permanent partitions, floors, roofs, finishes, services and all other permanent construction.

In addition to self-weight of structure, the following dead loads have been assumed:

Floor finish 2.00kN/m2

Ceiling, Services 0.25kN/m2

Partitions 1.00kN/m2 (lightweight stud)

5.4.2 Imposed Loads

Imposed loading is in accordance with BS 6399: Part 1: 1996.

Uniformly In

d stributed tJ ,

Point Load

n a s s r n p m s Of f i ces / m 2 ? .7

C i rcu la t ion S p a r e s Sta i rs I a n d i n n s 3 0 0 !m\ ik s Halls f A s s e m h l v Phase 1 Dining) 5 ftft 7m2

3 f i < S n o r t s Hal l w On tm\ 3 fic Chan la innv 5 o f t 7m? Plant R o o m s 7 .50 J/nr- 4 .5 k N Wate r S t o r a g e ( local ised tank) t S M k N A r ^

5.4.3 Snow Loads

Snow loads are calculated in accordance with BS 6399: Part 3: 1988.

Roofs with no access (ie access for cleaning and repair only) Minimum imposed load on the roof to be the greater of: •the uniformly distributed snow load •the redistributed (local drift) snow load •a uniformly distributed load of 0.6kN/m2

•a concentrated load of 0.9kN

Roof with general access Minimum imposed load on the roof to be the greater of: •the uniformly distributed snow load •the redistributed (local drift) snow load •a uniformly distributed load of 1,5kN/m2

•a concentrated load of 1,8kN

Local Drifting Local drifting is considered as exceptional loadcases with no snow elsewhere on the roof.

5.4.4 Wind Loads

Wind loading is calculated in accordance with BS 6399: Part 2: 1995.

Building location: Leicester Building type factor, K^ = 1.0 Basic wind speed, V^ = 21.5m/s Factors, Sa = 1.085 S d , S s , Sd = 1.0 Site wind speed = 21.5 x 1.085 = 23.33m/s Ground roughness category: Town Closest distance to sea: >100km Height of building = 12m, Sb = 1.632 Effective wind speed, Ve = 23.33 x 1.632 = 38.07m/s Design wind speed, qs = 0.613Ve

2 = 0.890kN/m2

5.4.5 Notional Horizontal Load

To allow for the effects of practical imperfections, such as lack of verticality, all structures should be capable of resisting notional horizontal loads (NHL), which are defined as follows for the two structural forms: Concrete Structures

From BS8110: Part 1: Clause 3.1.4.2:

The building should be capable of resisting an ultimate NHL, applied at each floor and roof level, of 1.5% of the characteristic dead weight of the structure (between storey mid heights).

The design ultimate wind load in either direction should be taken as less than this NHL value. Steel Structures

From BS5950: Part 1: Clauses 2.4.2.3 and 2.4.2.4:

The building should be capable of resisting a minimum NHL, applied at each floor and roof level, of 0.5% of the factored vertical dead and imposed loads applied at the same level. This load should be taken as acting simultaneously with the factored vertical dead and imposed loads.

The design ultimate wind load in either direction should not be taken as less than 1.0% of the factored dead load applied horizontally.

5.4.6 Fire Resistance

All elements of structure are designed for a fire resistance period of 60 minutes.



The development of the site involves the demolition of the existing school building which are currently deserted. The new school is sited in a similar position to the existing. Therefore, all existing structures and associated foundations will require demolition and removal.

The existing school has two distinct phases - the original 1960's load bearing masonry areas and the later prefabricated steel framed areas. The key features of each are listed below:

Original School Buildings

The original school buildings on the site are typically two storey structures with pitched tiled roofs with some limited areas of single storey construction.

Long span structures are found in both the entrance area and main hall.

Elevations are masonry and are considered to be load-bearing with cross walls providing stability.

First floor (and single story flat roofs) are precast beams with narrow cross planks (say 250mm wide) plus in situ topping.

The roof structure (other than flat roofs) is typically steel roof trusses at regular centres spanning on to the perimeter walls and supporting a secondary timber structure.

The ground floor has various service trenches - generally along corridors coming from boiler room at far end of gym. . The gym has a suspended timber floor supported by dwarf walls. . A large masonry chimney is present over boiler room (coal fired).

Prefabricated panelised buildings

One and two storey constructions. Pre-cast concrete panelised elevations. Structural steel frames with braced bays in strategic locations -evidence of bracing at some stair well locations. Pre-cast concrete suspended floors. Structural steel trusses, timber joists, plydeck roof. Localised pop-up roof (to water tanks) in structural steel and woodwool panels for roof and elevations. Structural steel staircases.

5.5.1 Re-use of demolition material

A considerable volume of hard material will be generated by the demolition of the existing buildings. It may be possible to crush and re-grade this material on site for reuse as hardcore beneath paved areas, car parking and ground bearing slabs.

The feasibility of this will be dependent on: room available on site for storage, crushing, grading potential noise and vibration restrictions contractor's chosen method of working and sequencing

Aerial View of existing buildings

Original (masonry) Buildings

Prefabricated (steel frame) Buildings


5.0 Structural Engineering Report 5.6 Earthworks

5.6.1 Building Works

Because of the slope across the site, two options for the finished floor levels for the Academy have been examined. The options are shown on sketch CSK003, included within Section 12

Option 1 is to step the floor levels across the site, reflecting the fact that the site rises away from the roads. The ground floor level of the block closest to Trenant Road (Sports Hall, Dining, Main Entrance & Chaplaincy) would be at 85.0m AOD, the eastern and western wings (Phases 1 and 2) would be at 85.5 and the science block (Phase 3) would be at 86.0m. The volume of material to be excavated and removed off-site to accommodate this option is approximately 2,000 m^. Because of the change in site levels a short length of retaining wall is needed, approximately 30m at an average height of 1,5m, (with a maximum of 1.8m).

Option 2 is to have a constant floor level throughout buildings. This level is constrained by the need for access from Trenant Road, thereby setting the whole of the ground floor at 85.0m AOD. The volume of material to be excavated and removed off-site to accommodate this option is approximately 13,000 rrfl. This option requires the construction of additional retaining walls at the rear of the excavations. The total length of wall required is approximately 180m with an average height of 1,3m, (with a maximum of 3.0m).

Based on cost advice from Davis Langdon, we are proceeding with Option 1, which gives an overall saving in terms of material excavation, removal off site and retaining wall requirements.

The existing buildings extend over a wider area than the proposed so there will be locations where the areas of demolished buildings will be landscaped over.

5.6.2 Playing Fields

It will be necessary to improve the drainage of the playing fields to enable them to be used throughout the winter. Severn Trent Water will not allow groundwater to be drained to the surface water sewers - this is a standard requirement across the water companies. As described previously, in Section 5.2.5, soakaways are not a viable option, due to the cohesive nature of the underlying Boulder Clay.

The site is completely land-locked by suburban development and there are no ditches or streams to which ground water could be discharged. It will therefore not be possible to provide conventional land drainage.

It is proposed to re-profile the playing fields so that the playing surface is slightly raised and surface water is shed off the playing surface to swales around the perimeter. The swales will be very shallow depressions that would normally be fully accessible, but they would be 'out of bounds' during wet weather as the inverts will remain too wet. Topsoil would have to be stripped over the whole area of the playing fields. It would have to be stored carefully, not more than 2m high and un-compacted. The sub-soil would then be re-graded to a depth of up to 600mm and the topsoil carefully re-spread and seeded.

Arup Fire Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape AichiU-c-K . Fei lden Clegg Bra r ' e ;


5.7.1 Foul Sewerage

There are existing Severn Trent Water public foul sewers in Trenant Road and Saffron Lane. The existing Mary Linwood school drains to the sewer at the junction of Trenant Road and Pen Close and it is proposed to drain the Academy to the same point. Severn Trent Water has confirmed that there is adequate capacity to accommodate the flow, by letter of 22 November 2004. Conventional gravity drainage will be provided within the site, adequate falls can be obtained as the site itself rises slightly away from the roads. The preliminary drainage layout is shown on sketch CSK004, included within Section 12.

5.7.2 Surface Water Drainage

There are existing Severn Trent Water surface water sewers in Trenant Road and Saffron Lane. We have been advised by Severn Trent Water, by letter of 22 November 2004, that these do not have adequate capacity to accept an unrestricted flow from the Academy.

As explained in Section 5.2.5, soakaways are not a viable option, due to the cohesive nature of the underlying Boulder Clay.

It is therefore proposed to provide attenuation of surface water flows by means of underground storage and by restricting the outflow to the sewer. It is proposed to provide storage in the form of proprietary plastic media with high voids ratio. The current proposals show this water storage to be located under hard-landscaped paving (for pedestrian use) in the north-west corner of the site. This storage system is also suited to soft-landscaped areas, but would need to be positioned well clear of any tree roots. A higher grade of plastic would need to be adopted if it was relocated into a heavily trafficked area. Water that is stored during heavy rainfall will have to pumped out of the storage. This will be done automatically when the flows subside. A small package pumping station will be required containing duty and standby pumps with a capacity of 15l/s and automatic controls to start the pumps when the water level in the drain falls.

The MUGA can also be drained to the surface water drainage system. The volume of storm water storage will be designed to include flows from the MUGA. The preliminary drainage layout is shown on sketch CSK 004, included within Section 12.



6.0 Landscape Report 6.1 Response to Site and Curriculum

The following text describes the aims and objectives that underpin the landscape proposals for the academy site.

6.1 Changes since the preparation of the Stage C document include: -

Reduction in areas of hard landscape to reflect requirements of BB82.

Locations of Phase 2 and Phase 3 playgrounds reversed to avoid adjacency of Phase 1 and Phase 3 external play.

Development of strategy for soft landscape with specific emphasis on food technology.

Provision of cycle compound with space for 126 bikes adjacent to car park.

Reduction in size of Muga from 60 x 40 metres to 50 x 35 metres

6.2.1 The Academy site

The following opportunities and constraints have been identified by Churchman Landscape Architects for consideration in the development of the landscape proposals.

The site is located within an area that is dominated by two storey residential accommodation.

It is bounded to the west by the busy dual carriageway Saffron Lane, this feature forms a physical barrier to pedestrian movement and detracts from the site in terms of noise and security. The north of the Academy will face on to the quieter Trenant Road and the adjacent housing estate. The site is located on the outside of a bend and is therefore clearly visible when approaching from the north along Saffron Lane.

Open green space and mature woodland to the south and east provide an established landscape setting.

The ground plane falls from a high point on the southern municipal playing fields to a low point some 8 metres below at the junction of Saffron Lane and Trenant Road. In addition the site falls along its southern edge from east to west by approximately 5 metres.

The existing school buildings are set on a low terrace approximating to a point midway along the Trenant Road boundary. As a result a significant change of level of some 2-3 metres occurs to the rear of the school separating it from the adjacent playing fields. This has

the effect of cutting off the school grounds from the open green space to the south.

Apart from the dominant Jubilee Covert Woodland and a row of mature poplars, there are few significant trees on site which could not be replaced with better specimens as part of a more cohesive landscape structure.

6.2.2 Design Philosophy

The external elements of the three phases will be designed in a coherent manner, addressing the following objectives which relate to the site, the curriculum and the architectural philosophy for the building:-

6.2.3 Site Response The layout needs to respond to the 8 metre level change, allowing easy access for all students between the academic space, the areas of hard play and the sports pitches.

The line of poplars defining the site's southern boundary represents a significant visual feature, providing a sense of structure and orientation.

The site has an active frontage along Saffron Lane while the eastern edge is more sheltered due to the presence of Diamond Jubilee Covert. This generates different issues in terms of access and security.

6.2.4 Curriculum Response

To provide distinct but related external spaces for all key stages which meet the different demands of the various age groups while fostering a coherent sense of identity for the whole academy.

To maximise the educational value of the site through the provision of positive and interesting spaces with particular reference to food technology and moral development.

To maximise the apparent volume of useable space.

To provide diversity and flexibility in the character of external areas..

To comply with guidelines set down by the DFES (BB 82), Sport England and the Youth Sport Trust. In particular this relates to the minimum space standards for hard and soft play given by BB82.

To ensure proposals support the principles of sustainability.


6.0 Landscape Report 6.2 The Proposals

To ensure proposals support social inclusion and are fully accessible to all.

6.2.5 Architectural Response

Reflect the concept of the building which takes the form of a ribbon which doubles back on itself about a central axis.

To reflect the changes of level within the building through the establishment of a series of ascending terraces that relate the phased zones of academic accommodation to associated external play space.

To integrate the building with the main features of the existing landscape, particularly the line of poplars along the southern boundary

To exploit the openness of the site, specifically the views over green space to the south.

6.3.1 Landscape Structure

The external areas are structured around a landscape framework which responds to the 3 sets of issues described above.

From Trenant Road the new Academy building and external areas step up in a series of ascending terraces which are designed to reflect the natural slope across the site, so that the external level at the front of the school relates to Trenant Road while the rear is connected as closely as possible with the open playing fields.

In order to maximise spatial efficiency the new buildings are located to the north giving a generous volume of secure external space to the south. The existing playing fields are retained for active sport, while the area between these fields and the school buildings is developed as informal hard and soft play space and habitat area.

Each phase of the building has a dedicated zone of open space accommodating areas for informal hard and soft play plus curricular activities. Access into the three zones of the school will be defined by the changes of level, external walls defining legible routes into the respective zones of the building.

Phase 1 is located at the eastern end of the school and fronts onto Trenant Road. It is accessed via the car park from which it is separated by a 1 metre high retaining wall, access being provided down a 1:20 ramp. The external space includes dedicated secure play spaces for the nursery, reception and years 1 -4 inclusive.

The play areas between the classrooms and the Trenant Road frontage are screened by perimeter planting, proving a sense of enclosure and avoiding problems of overlooking.

Phase 2 is located on the upper terrace at the eastern end of the site thereby avoiding direct contact between the Phase 1 and the Phase B pupils. Phase 2 is also accessed from the car park by a ramp taking pupils from the parking level at 86.50 AOD down to the internal level for Phase 2 of 85.50 AOD. The external space includes areas of contrasting paving, changes of level, a large sloping triangle of grass and timber benching. From this end of the site it is also possible to gain access to Diamond Jubilee Covert.

The Phase 3 area has been accommodated at the western end of the school, closest to Saffron Lane. As with Phase 2 this areas is dominated by informal hard paving which is interspersed by benching and raised planters. However, the area provided for informal play is slightly lower than that required by BB82 as it is envisaged that the adjacent MUGA will be available for use by Phase 3 pupils during break times. An upper terrace and ramp provides access from the Phase 3 play space to the MUGA and the playing fields beyond.

In addition to the dedicated play spaces there are several areas that serve communal facilities. The main entrance and chaplaincy are accessed via a generous site frontage of hard paving. This sweeps up to the main doors from the junction of Trenant Road and Saffron Lane, the line of security drawing back from the academy boundary to provide a large space which is accessible to the public at all times. A triangular grass bank then leads down to the corner of Saffron Lane / Trenant Road providing the opportunity to hold summer fetes or other public events.

On the eastern boundary the car park has been designed to accommodate 80 vehicles with a dedicated drop off lane to avoid kerb side parking along Trenant Road. The car park will have a cross fall of 1:20 in order to retain two large trees on the eastern boundary. In addition to the cars this area will contain space for 126 bikes. Cyclists will enter the bicycle compound via a seperate gateway leading for Trenant Road, thereby avoiding the need for cars and bikes to use the entrance point. Cyclists will make their was south along a dedicated route, entering the cycle compound which is located along the eastern edge of the Phase 2 area. Phase 3 pupils will then access their playground area via a linking footpath.

6.3.2 Sports Facilities

The southern half of the site is dominated by the grass pitches, providing space for formal games. Various arrangements have been explored to achieve the most efficient layout with a view to reducing the requirement for

use of the municipal land south of the Poplars. However, some use of this land is essential to achieve the necessary level of sport provision. The inclusion of an artificial pitch was considered in order to reduce the number of senior pitches required off site, artificial pitches being counted twice for the purposes of the DFeS recommendations. However, if a full size artificial soccer pitch is provided then it is not possible to accommodate either a 400m running track or a cricket square on site. The adopted strategy involves locating 1 senior and 1 junior pitch on site together with a 50 x 35m Multi Use Games Area (MUGA). In the summer the grassed pitch area can accommodate a 400 metre running track and a cricket wicket. Four senior grass pitches would then need to be made available on the municipal playing fields to the south.

At present the existing site profiles make it difficult to use the grassed area for athletics. In order to achieve acceptable falls it will be necessary to raise the north eastern corner of the games area by 1 -1.5 metres. The cost of such a major earthwork exercise cannot be met within the current budget.

6.3.3 Diamond Jubilee Covert

This block of existing woodland which is located on the school's eastern boundary represents a valuable resource in terms of its educational value. The Covert was surveyed by arboriculturalists Symbiosis in January 2005. It is understood that the Covert was made the subject of a blanket Tree Preservation Order in 2004. In its present state the Covert is not usable by the academy due to years of neglect and abuse which has affected the quality of the trees and generated measures including the clearance of trees that are dead or dieing, the addition of new planting and the installation of a secure boundary it will be possible to bring this area back into active use at a relatively modest of cost.

6.3.4 Existing Features

All existing features that make a positive contribution to the character of the site have been retained. In particular this relates to the row of Italian poplars which form mark the southern edge of the school grounds. These which has been used to provided a baseline to new landscape being replicated across the site in the form of new tree lines. Although these trees are to be kept they do require extensive surgery in order to return them to a healthy condition. Other trees to be kept include a mature London Plane at the corner of Trenant Road with Saffron Lane, two mature trees close to the eastern boundary and two further specimens close to the proposed location for the bike stand.



6.3.5 Access

Access points are kept to a minimum in order to deliver a secure site boundary. Pedestrian access is either via the main entrance or the car park. Vehicular access is limited to just two entrance points, a gateway in the north east corner seiving the car park and a second gateway on Saffron Lane which provides access for service vehicles. The school's frontage is kept clear of vehicles and associated clutter. A second vehicular entrance has been provided on the Saffron Lane boundary for the purposes of maintaining the playing fields.

6.3.6 Security

The site is enclosed with a 2.4 metre high mesh type fence. This is upgraded along Trenant Road where a 3.0 metre high bespoke fence is provided.

6.3.7 External Area Provision

Within the basic structure set out by the terracing and structure planting the external areas have been designed to provide different types of spaces for all age groups which aim to meet the demands of the formal curriculum and the need for informal play.

The following general external space categories are provided;

Outdoor PE space for games, other sports and adventurous play, this consists of both sports pitches and a hard surfaced court in the form of the MUGA.

Informal and habitat areas which can be developed to provide a series of spaces including seating areas, informal play, garden areas and wildlife habitats. These have been designed to meet the spatial recommendations set down in BB82.

6.3.8 Educational value of the site

All external spaces will be designed to encourage a positive response from the students and to allow for adaptability of use, depending on preferred student usage. The use of quality materials, adaptable features, pattern, colour and planting will enliven the external spaces helping to foster a sense of responsibility and ownership. Accessibility to all will support a sense of inclusion.

Throughout the external areas there will be an emphasis on the school's specialism of food technology. Allotment spaces and gardens will not be provided, although a dedicated herb garden will be created close to the

dining room and kitchen area of the building. It is anticipated that a site wide strategy will be developed around the cultivation of edible or fruit bearing plants. On a basic level this will involve the establishment of simple features such as a small orchard incorporating a variety of fruit trees. The trees will be planted as juvenile stock providing the younger children the opportunity to experience their growth and development during their residency at the school. More interesting ideas would involve the growing of plants which produce edible or fruits such as sweet chestnut, fig, mulberry or hazel nuts. Another possibility is to have a small demonstration bed for the growing of crocus sativa, the stamens of which are the source of saffron.

A diverse range of plants will be established on site with a view to achieving a varied and stimulating learning environment. Plants will be used that give seasonal interest, such as bulbs, catkin bearing bushes, trees that produce strong autumn colour and shrubs that bear winter berries. Clipped hedges of Rosemary, Quince, Beech and Escallonia will provide a strong visual structure to the external spaces either through their flower colour or their leaf form. Plants will be chosen that have a distinctive habit, express movement, produce a strong scent or exhibit pronounced changes under certain weather conditions.

In order to increase the biodiversity status of the site it is proposed that areas which cannot be used for pitches will be established as wild flower areas rather than being sown with a standard amenity grassland. The development of a species rich sward will be encouraged by the sparing use of topsoil as this restricts encroachment by more invasive species. Further variations in growing conditions may be achieved by simple techniques of rainwater retention, creating zones that exhibit wetland characteristics, thereby allowing species such as willow, hazel and alder to be successfully grown. These plants could then be coppiced with the cut twigs used to build outdoor shelters.

Habitat and wildlife areas will be incorporated into the outdoor spaces thereby encouraging an awareness of ecology and stimulating an interest in nature amongst the students. The Diamond Jubilee Covert will provide a valuable habitat resource for use as part of the curriculum. However, in order to maintain its current status, access will be restricted, with pupils gaining entry only during lesson time and on a supervised basis. Proposals will not only retain this feature but allow for the ongoing management of the area in order to ensure that its ecological value is maintained.

Where possible, safe secure enclosures will be provided adjacent to the academic accommodation enabling the teaching space to extend beyond the confines of the classroom.



6.3.9 Diversity and flexibility in the character of informal external areas

Informal areas will encourage creative play and social development, their adaptability allowing students to stamp their own identity in terms of usage. Robust hard and soft spaces will be created that allow a variety of uses throughout the day, or through the school year. Intimate secure areas will be provided for seating and quiet play including areas of shelter. Flexible open areas will be created for more informal activities and energetic play.

The arrangement of the external areas will provide flexibility in terms of scale, orientation and shelter, creating a sense of diversity in the character and use of individual areas.

6.3.10 Area of usable space

The terraced arrangement of the school buildings and adjacent external spaces maximises usable space ensuring that all areas can used positively. Excessive banking or buffer zones will be avoided.

6.3.11 Sustainability

All detailed proposals will be developed in the spirit of sustainability with the following objectives supported;

The specification of sustainable materials.

Construction of external areas and pitches to balance cut and fill and remove the need to export material to landfill.

Development of sustainable urban drainage .

Retention of valuable existing features.

Provision of cycle parks to encourage cycling and walking to school.


7.0 Specialist Reports 7.1 Fire

7.1.1 Introduction

Arup Fire has been appointed by Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects to develop the outline fire strategy for Leicester City Academy. The report is intended to act as a focus for discussion with the design team and to obtain principle agreement with the Approving Authority. The report contains information relevant to many aspects of the design and should be read by all members of the design team. The fre safety recommendations referred to in this report are taken from Approved Document B (ADB) to the Building Regulations 2000 and associated British Standards.

This strategy will cover the general fire safety issues, with separate specific details given for where the design varies away from the recommended guidance. Where this occurs a Fire Engineered design solution will be offered to compliment the standard prescriptive recommendations. Typically, the adoption of a fire engineering approach can result in a greater degree of design freedom and reduced project and building lifetime costs whilst maintaining or often exceeding the level of fire safety provided by an ADB approach. It should be noted that where the design departs from the standard guidance presented in ADB and British Standards, the acceptance of the Approving Authorities will be required in order to gain Building Regulations approval.

The report addresses life safety issues only, and does not address property protection or business protection, or any other fire safety issue that is not within the scope of Building Regulations.

7.1.2 Construction, Design and Management Regulations

Projects undertaken within the UK are subject to the requirements of the Construction, Design and Management Regulations (CDM), or within the European Union, that particular country's interpretation of the European Union Directive. This report defines the strategy for meeting the functional and performance requirements for fire safety in the finished building. It is intended to form part of the submission for Building Regulation Part B approval. Where any conclusions or recommendations have been arrived at which specify particular materials, products or forms of construction these will have been assessed, in accordance with CDM Regulation 13. In the event that these involve significant residual risks or health and safety critical assumptions, this information will be made available, to the planning supervisor. Where the architect or other consultants use the standards put forward in this report to specify works, they are understood to be competent in alerting the Client, Planning Supervisor, Contractors and Building Occupier of CDM issues.

7.1.3 Building Description

The Academy is split into 3 teaching phases. Phase 1 is located in the single storey wing with Phase 2 and 3 located in the 2 storey main teaching zone. The design intent is to maintain an open feeling of space in the building, which is facilitated by floor voids and the central dining hall. In addition, the Academy will have a Chaplaincy open to the public after hours, as well as sports hall facilities. The Academy is a purpose group 5 - Assembly and Recreation.

7.1.4 Active Fire Safety Systems

The academy will be provided with an addressable alarm and detection system designed to BS 5839 Part 1, Category M L2. This will provide coverage to all escape routes, those rooms opening onto the escape route and rooms of special fire hazard. This will effectively be L1 coverage due to the layout of the building. Innovative methods will be sought in order to avoid malicious activation of the alarm system and the associated disruption that this can cause.

7.1.5 Means of Escape

General On activation of the alarm all occupants will leave the building by the nearest exit and assemble in a designated assembly point away from the building, the location of which will be identified by the Academy. Appendix A contains sketches indicating travel distances and egress capacity for the Academy.

Horizontal Escape Travel distances will predominantly be in accordance with Table 3 of ADB, which recommends the following:

Use of part of premises

Maximum travel in one direction

Maximum travel distance, in more than one direction

Assembly and Recreation - Schools

18m 45m

Place of special fire hazard

9 (Within the room/ area)

18 (Within the room/ area)

Travel distances will be measured to protected enclosures, compartment walls and direct to outside.

There are currently some extended travel distances from the first floor to the escape stairs, (Approximately 53m instead of 45m), however the accommodation stairs will be available and will assist in taking occupants away from any build-up of smoke at the first floor. Furthermore it is recognised that the travel time to an exit is only a proportion of the overall exit time (a 1 m increase is equivalent to approximately 1.25 sec1), queue times are seen as being the dominant factor when assessing evacuation. Initial discussions with the Approved Inspector indicate that the use of the accommodation stairs to evacuate the first foor will be acceptable (see minutes of meeting on 25 t h Nov 2004). Additionally the classrooms in Phase 2 and 3 will have acoustic separation, which is considered to provide a level of smoke and fire resistance sufficient to provide protection to occupants during escape. Consequently, classroom doors facing the corridor will be provided with self-closing mechanisms and will compensate for the small increase in travel distances.

The minimum number of escape routes and exits from a room, tier or storey will be in accordance with Table 4 of ADB.

Any room containing more than 60 people will have an alternative exit. Doors in these rooms and on means of escape will open in the direction of escape.

Egress width Calculation The width of escape routes and exits will be calculated using Table 5 of ADB, based on 5mm per person after discounting the largest exit. The required exit widths have been calculated for three main area, Dining hall, First floor and ground floor of Phase 2 & 3. These are indicated on the sketches in Appendix A.

Dining Hall The egress capacity has been based on an occupancy of 233 people, using 1m2 per person, in accordance with ADB. The exit capacity after discounting the largest exit is 1165mm and is easily achieved.



30 minute fire rated construction with FD30S doors

Fire and smoke retarding construction (Doors to these rooms to have self-

closing devices)

60 Minute Compartment Wall (Doors to be FD60S)

Means of Escape (Doors to open in direction of escape)

Leicester City Academy

Fire Strategy Sketches - Level 0

ArupFJre

Fire Strategy - Ground Floor



30 minute fire rated construction with FD30S doors

Fire and smoke retarding construction (Doors to these rooms to have self-

closing devices)

60 Minute Compartment Wall (Doors to be FD60S)

Means of Escape (Doors to open in direction of escape)


Fire Strategy Sketches - Level 1

AmpHre

Fire Strategy - First Floor



First Floor (Phase 2 & 3) The occupancy of the first floor has been taken to be 30 pupils plus one staff member per classroom. This gives an occupancy of approximately 620 at first floor.

If the accommodation stairs were not considered for evacuation, the required exit width of the two protected exits would be in excess of 3000 mm in accordance with ADB. Therefore in order to reduce the widths of these exits the approach that will be used will take into account the use of the accommodation stairs, as these are familiar routes that will be used by occupants and will assist in removing occupants away from any build-up of smoke at higher levels. After discounting one of the two 1700mm accommodation stairs, the exit widths of the remaining 2 protected exits and the LRC stair exit is 1100mm, giving a total exit width of 5000 mm.

Ground Floor (Phase 2 & 3) The egress widths of the first floor will take into account occupants evacuating down one of the accommodation stairs from first floor, i.e. 420 +340(from upstairs)= 760 The exit widths will require the two 1600mm double doors opening to outside and two remaining 1100mm final exit doors. This does not take into account the significant exit capacity into the dining hall that would be available if required. This gives a total of 3800mm(760 people) after discounting one 1600 mm exit.

Vertical Escape The two external escape stairs at Level 1 are 1500mm wide each with a capacity of 300 occupants in accordance with Table 7 of ADB. In addition, the internal stair from the LRC provides 1800mm along with the two 1700 mm accommodation stairs.

Mobility Impaired Occupants Means of escape for mobility impaired occupants will be designed in accordance with BS 5588 Part 8. This calls for each stair without direct level access to outside to have a refuge area at each level, of suitable size to accommodate a person in a wheel chair. In addition, a means of two-way communication should be provided at each refuge. Two refuge spaces are provided to the two external escape stairs. It will be important that the Academy develop a management strategy for assisting in the evacuation of not only mobility impaired, but also sensory impaired occupants. This is expanded in Section 12.

Emergency Escape Lighting and Signage Emergency escape lighting will be provided in accordance with Table 9 of ADB and BS 5266 Part 1. Exit signage will be provided in accordance with BS 5499 Part 1, Fire Safety

Signs, Notices and Graphic Symbols, Specification for Fire Safety Signs, in locations to be between the architect and Approved Inspector.

7.1.6 Internal fire spread (linings)

Internal buildings linings will be in accordance with ADB, summarised below:

Location Class

Small rooms of area not more than 30m 2

3 (or D-s3. d2)

Other rooms 1 (or C-s3. d2)

Other circulation spaces 0 (or B-S3. d2)

7.1.7 Internal fire spread (structure) The academy will have a concrete structure designed to have 60 minutes fire resistance, in accordance with Table A2 of ADB. The structure of the sports hall is steel and will not require fire protection where it only supports the roof.

7.1.8 Compartmentation and Enclosure of Special Fire Hazards

Compartmentation The academy will be split into four maincompartments using 60 minute compartment walls.

The compartments will consist of the following:

• Phase one hall and central worship space which has out of hours access

• The phase one single storey teaching area

• The Sports hall and changing rooms

• The dining atrium, hall and phase 2 and 3 teaching areas.

This last compartment will be over the 800m2 compartment sizes recommended for schools in Table 12 of ADB. However the area of any one storey in this compartment is less than the 2000m2 limit for assembly and recreation purpose groups, of which schools belong. Additionally the plant rooms will be enclosed in 60 minutes construction. All doors in the compartment walls will be FD60S doors.

Places of Special Fire Hazard Places of special fire hazard, as defined in ADB, will be enclosed in 30 minutes fire rated construction. All doors to places of special fire hazard will be FD30S with self-closing mechanisms. In addition to the places of special fire hazard, the approved inspector at the meeting of 25'^ Nov 2004, indicated that the acoustic glazing and partitions surrounding the other classrooms are likely to be of sound enough construction to resist the passage of smoke long enough for occupants to escape, thereby providing an additional level of protection to the occupants during escape in Phase 2 and 3, consequently the doors to these classrooms will be provided with self-closing mechanisms.

Dining Hall The dining hall will be connected at ground floor to Phase 2 and 3 accommodation and will be in the same compartment. Additionally the means of escape from this area will be in accordance with ADB, and it will therefore not require smoke control.

The possibility of providing fire service control of the natural ventilation in the dining hall and phase 2 and 3, to give smoke clearance from these areas will be discussed with the fire service and Approved Inspector. The space will be provided with smoke detection and the acoustic glazing at Level 1 to the class rooms is likely to provide adequate integrity during escape for occupants in these rooms, therefore negating the need for a Smoke Temperature Control system.

7.1.9 Concealed Spaces The provision of cavity barriers in concealed spaces will be in accordance with Section 10, ADB.

7.1.10 Protection of Openings and Fire Stopping Where services breach the compartmentation and are bigger than the maximum dimensions in Table 15 of ADB, the openings will be fire stopped in accordance with Section 11 of ADB.

7.1.11 External Fire Spread The building does not have any external fire spread issues.


7.1.12 Access and Facilities for the Fire Service There is no requirement for fire-fighting shafts. Fire fighting activities will be via the building perimeter, in accordance with Table 20 and 21 of ADB. This requires that 50% of the building perimeter is suitable for a pump appliance.

The suitability of the off-site fire hydrant needs to be assessed in accordance with BS 5306 Part 1 and discussed with the Local Fire Authority to determine if it will be suitable. Alternatively a private fire hydrant will be provided.

The possibility of providing fire service control of the natural ventilation in the dining hall and phase 2 and 3 to give smoke clearance from these areas will be discussed with the fire service and Approved Inspector.

7.1.13 Fire Safety Management For most buildings the management of the building is a key aspect of the fire strategy in order for the overall fire safety package to function when required. Statements and management procedures will need to be developed as part of the design and approval process for the building.

The developed fire safety strategy relies on management procedure for a number of aspects. Specific provision for the management issues is the subject of a separate report produced by the client. To assist in the formulation of a management strategy the following is a summary of the points to be borne in mind in relation to fire safety:

• A minimum staffing level should be considered for occupant evacuation assistance and the giving of adequate information during escape (such as routes to use and not to use).

• Adequate staff training in relation to above.

• Effective system of communication between staff and control/fire co-ordination point.

• Training of responsible person in relation to evacuation sequence and control.

• Duties of staff relating to evacuation of mobility impaired users.

• Maintenance of escape routes as clear of obstruction.

• Maintenance program for safety related equipment.

BS 5588 Part 12 'Fire precautions in design, construction and use of buildings - Managing fire safety' provides further guidance and advice to



7.0 7.1

Specialist Reports Fire

A1. TRAVEL DISTANCES AND EGRESS WIDTHS

The following sketches indicate the travel distances and egress widths:

Fe i lden C legg Brad ley Architects LLP Arup Fire Fleming and Barron

| Exit Min 1100 mm

Note 1m increase in travel distance equates to approximately a 1.25 second increase in the overall evacuation time (SFPE handbook) and is therefore not a significant contribution to the overall egress time.


7.0 Specialist Reports 7.2 Acoustics

7.2.1 Introduction

Fleming & Barron are appointed by Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects to advise on acoustic issues with regards to the proposed Leicester Academy, and in particular relating to compliance with Building Bulletin 93 and the Building Regulations part E.

This reports considers: • Fagade sound insulation to meet internal noise targets • Internal sound insulation • Impact sound insulation • Room acoustics • Control of reverberation in common areas • Rain Noise • Noise in external areas

A noise survey has been carried out to determine noise levels across the site which have been presented in our report B147/R02.

7.2.2 The Building

North of the site is Trenant Road and to the West is Saffron Lane. East and South of the site are fields and housing. The northeast wing of the building will be used by primary school children (Phase 1) and consists of a single storey. The southwest and southeast wings will be used by Phase 2 and Phase 3 students and consist of two stories.

7.2.3 Criteria

Acoustics of school buildings comes under the Building Regulations Part E, for which the requirements are documented in DfES Building Bulletin BB93 "Acoustic Design of Schools".

BB93 contains mandatory requirements for acoustic design, as follows: 1. Internal noise limits for the control of environmental noise

transmission from the exterior and for building services (noise from normal activity, playgrounds and rainfall is excluded from the numerical limits)

2. Airborne and Impact sound insulation internally between teaching spaces

3. Airborne and Impact sound insulation between circulation and teaching spaces

4. Room acoustics and minimum acoustic absorption in teaching spaces

5. Minimum acoustic absorption in corridors, stairwells and entrance lobbies adjacent to teaching rooms.

6. Roof designs to control noise from rainfall (numerical targets not stipulated)

Instances where BB93 acoustics standards are not appropriate or not achievable, and for which a relaxation or waiver should be sought from DfES, include:

• conflict with other DfES aspirations such as natural ventilation via open windows

• conflict with particular teaching practices of recognised educational merit

• stipulations which in some circumstances are technically inconsistent and would impose unreasonable and costly construction needs.

BB93 contains mandatory stipulations for teaching spaces and adjacent areas and non-mandatory recommendations for non-teaching spaces in schools, such as offices, or for external areas such as sports pitches.

The appropriate targets for sound insulation, RTs, absorption in corridors and internal noise levels are given on the target drawings.

Relaxation of Targets

Due to the conflict between natural ventilation and low internal noise targets the team have asked the DfES to allow for a relaxation of the internal noise target by 5 dB for rapid ventilation (see letter in Appendix F). We have now been informed that this strategy has been accepted by the DfES and the design is based on this.

7.2.4 Fagade Sound Insulation

The fagade sound insulation depends on the type of wall and glazing but is mostly influenced by any openings such as vents or open windows. For further details see Fleming & Barron Report B147/R02b "Noise Survey".

General Glazing

For most classrooms, teaching rooms etc the sound insulation of standard thermal double glazing (R^, 31 dB) is adequate to meet internal when windows are shut.

Drama Hall

The proposed fagade of the drama studio contains 35m2 glazing. To meet the internal noise level target of 30 dB L^gq the glazing must have Rw 35 dB which can be met either by 10mm single glazing or 6/12/10mm double glazing. Ventilation is provided by mechanical means and there is no need to open windows for ventilation.

Sports Hall (exam use)

We are advised that the Sports Hall will also be used for exam purposes. Although BB93 does not stipulate an internal noise target for exam halls the Sports Hall target of 40 dB L^gq would be too high for exam use. A target similar to that of a classroom is more appropriate in that case and hence we set an internal noise target of 35 dB L^ eq.

The fagade construction consists of pre-cast concrete panels and glazing at the bottom, a 3.75m high strip of glazing in the middle and a render system at the top. Thermal double glazing with Rw 31 dB will be adequate to meet 35 dB La^q internally.



7.2.5 Internal Sound Insulation

Between Teaching Spaces

The sound insulation targets are given in BB93 Table 1.2 which must be read in conjunction with Table 1.3. The targets are dependent on the activity noise in the source room and the noise tolerance in the receiving room. Drawings B147/D01/A and B147/D01/B show the BB93 targets in terms of DnT,mFmax,w a n d L 'nTmFmax,w a n d drawings B147/D02/A and B147/ D02/B'show trie sound insulation 'requirements for each partition in terms of Rw values. For the remainder of this report, for simplicity, we refer to '-'nT.mFmax.w a s " w

Most partitions have two Dw targets since each room can be considered as a source and a receiver room dependent on direction. The more stringent of the two targets applies in each case.

Table 1 below shows construction options. This is to meet the Rw targets given in Drawings B147/D02/A and B147/D02/B based on the architect's advice that they wish to use lightweight partitions.

Table 1 - Construction Options Rw

Target Partition Option Overall

Thickness

63 dB

2 x 15mm SoundBloc on both sides of 146mm staggered studs with 50mm mineral wool in cavity (Practice Rooms only)

206 mm

63 dB 2 x 12.5mm SoundBloc linings on independent frames with minimum cavity of 200mm containing 50mm mineral wool (Recording Studio)

250 mm

56 dB 2 x 15mm SoundBloc on both sides of 70mm stud, 50mm GvoDtas1200

130 mm

50 dB

2 x 12.5 SourtdBbc on both sides of 46mm studs with 25mm mineral wool in cavity

98 mm

50 dB 2 x 12.5mm Wallboard on both sides of 70mm studs with 50mm Isowool 1200 in cavity

122 mm 50 dB

2 x 15mm SoundBloc on both sides of 70mm studs 132 mm

45 dB 12.5mm SoundBloc on both sides of 70mm studs • 25mm Isowool in cavity

95 mm 45 dB

2 x 12.5mm wallboard on both sides of 70mm studs 120 mm

40 dB 12.5mm WaDboard on both sides of 70mm studs + 25mm Isowool in cavity

95 mm

The constructions above have been derived from British Gypsum laboratory tests using SoundBloc plasterboard (density 840 kg/m3) and Wallboard (density 680 kg/m3). Equivalent constructions by Knauf or others will also be acceptable providing that laboratory test data can be obtained.

Special Cases

The following are special cases where the sound insulation must be considered differently.

• Phase 1 - Phase 1

It is proposed to have store rooms between Phase 1 classrooms which can be accessed from classrooms either side. To achieve the sound insulation target of Dw 45 dB between the classrooms the doors to the store must have Rw 30 dB and acoustic absorption must be installed in the stores to cover the ceiling - this should have absorption w > 0.6.

• LRC - SEN classroom

Libraries have two BB93 sound insulation requirement depending on whether they are used as a quiet study area or a resource area. If the LRC is defined as the former, the sound insulation requirement to the SEN room is Dw 45 dB, if it is the latter the requirement is Dw 50 dB.

The two spaces are linked by a door which is the weakest point in terms of sound insulation. To meet the Dw 45 dB target the following construction is needed:

• Rw 53 dB partition (2x12.5 mm SoundBloc both sides of 70 mm studs with 50 mm Gypglass in cavity) and Rw 37 dB doorset tested in a laboratory.

To meet the Dw 50 dB target the following construction is needed: • Rw 56 dB partition (2x15 mm SoundBloc both sides of 70 mm

studs with 50 mm Gypglass in cavity) and Rw 48 dB doorset.

• Recording Studio

We understand that the recording studio could be used to record music from the music classroom (ie as a control room) and from within the studio itself. It will be accessed from the corridor and have a glazed vision panel to the music classroom. The BB93 sound insulation targets to the corridor are the same as for all music spaces, ie Rw 45dB for walls and Rw 35dB for doors. However, the sound insulation target between the studio and the music classroom is Dw 60 dB. This can be achieved using an Rw 63 dB partition and we recommend the same twin frame construction around the room for all walls. An independent or resiliency suspended 25mm thick plasterboard (17 kg/m2) ceiling below a minimum 100 mm cavity is required in the recording studio. Assuming a 4 m2 glazed area, the vision panel glazing would require Rw 59 dB which can be achieved using 13mm/ 250mm/6mm (both panes laminated) double leaf glazing on separate frames and with absorption in the cavity. The glazing on the recording studio side should be angled by 7° to reduce disturbing reflection.

Normally a recording studio would have a lobbied door entry. In the absence of such here, it would be beneficial to increase the SI of the door by installing a door with Rw 38 dB.

• Music Practice Rooms

The sound insulation target between two music practice rooms is Dw

55 dB. To meet the target an Rw 63 dB partition is required and an independent or resiliency suspended 25 mm plasterboard (17 kg/m2) ceiling on 100 mm cavity must be installed in one of the two practice rooms. We recommend the twin frame construction as for 5.2.1.

High Performance Glazed Elements

• First Floor Rooms to Dining Hall

The partitions between the dining hall and first floor classrooms and SEN room overlooking the dining hall are proposed to be 40% glazed. These partitions have a BB93 target of Dw 55 dB.

Calculations for the classroom show that the target can just be met using 13mm/250mm/6mm (both panes laminated) secondary glazing on separate frames. However, this requires a slightly smaller construction tolerance than we would normally apply.

If standard secondary glazing was used, eg 10mm/200mm/6mm, Dw

52dB could be achieved. This does not include any construction tolerance. This is slightly below the BB93 target of Dw 55 dB but may be considered acceptable by the users. This would have to be approved by Building Control.

• Food Technology to Dining Hall

The BB93 target for this partition is Rw 40dB. This can be achieved by the following types of glazing:

• 17mm Optilam laminated single glazing by Pilkington • 4/16/8.8 CLIMAPLUS SILENCE acoustic double glazing by Saint

Gobain • 6/100/4 Secondary glazing



Sliding Folding Partitions

Sliding folding partitions are proposed between the following rooms at the Leicester Academy:

• Assembly Hall / Drama Studio • Assembly Hall / Dining Hall • Primary Hall / Chapel

Although laboratory test data of sliding folding partitions shows sound insulation performances of up to Rw 59 dB they tend to perform significantly worse in situ. The reasons are not immediately apparent, but are thought to relate to the seals between the panels. The German VDI standard suggests a variance of 6-10 dB between the laboratory test and field results. Hence a 10 dB construction tolerance should be included to reliably meet the BB93 targets. A construction tolerance of 3 dB is typical for other partition constructions.

• Assembly Hall / Drama Studio

The BB93 sound level difference target between these two spaces is Dw

55 dB. For this partition a composite sound insulation index of R ' w 56 dB is required to meet the target. The partition consists of two elements: plasterboard construction at high level and a sliding folding partition. The plasterboard construction specification is Rw 59 dB and the sliding folding partition Rw 66 dB (ie R ' w 56 dB + 10 dB tolerance). To our knowledge no partition with this specification is available and to meet the acoustic criterion it would be necessary to install two folding partitions with a minimum cavity of 500mm. These should have a sound insulation of Rw 50 dB each with acoustic absorption either on the ceiling and reveals between the two or on the invert face of one partition.

• Assembly Hall / Dining Hall

We have been advised by Feilden Clegg Bradley (e-mail 26/11/2004) that these two spaces will not be used individually at the same time. The reason is that the assembly hall is needed for dining, and as a result is never in use (for other activities) at the same time as dining. Hence we suggest relaxing the sound insulation target from Dw 55 dB to Dw 45 dB. This gives enough sound insulation to protect the assembly hall when minor activity is occurring in the dining hall (eg tables being moved etc). To meet this relaxed target a composite sound insulation index of R ' w 48 dB is required*. The partition consists of a plasterboard construction at the top and a sliding folding partition at the bottom. The target can be achieved by installing a plasterboard partition with Rw 51 dB and a sliding folding partition with Rw

58 dB.

Examples of such folding partitions are:

• Rw 59 dB rated partition by Alco Beldan (Tel: 01932 246600) • Rw 58 dB rated partition by London Wall (Tel: 020 8391 8750) • Series 600 (Rw 59 dB rated) by Brockhouse (Tel: 01905 33 234)

• Primary Hall / Chapel

BB93 does not specify targets for worship spaces but since it is used similarly to an assembly hall (one person talking to a group, singing, etc.) there is logic in treating it in the same way. However, we have been advised by Feilden Clegg Bradley that the two spaces will not be used simultaneously during the school day, and hence a lower target would apply. We would suggest no less than Dw 45 dB requiring a composite sound insulation index of R ' w 50 dB and hence sliding folding partition with F^ 60 dB. The best sound insulation performance of such a partition known to us is Rw 59 dB, which is very close and likely to meet the target (9 dB tolerance).

• Between Classrooms

To meet the sound insulation target of Dw 45 dB as sliding folding partition with minimum Rw 57 dB is required. Any of the screens mentioned for the Assembly Hall / Dining Hall section would be suitable for this partition also.

General

The following design points apply to sliding folding partitions:

• All sliding folding partitions must be well sealed around all edges. • The floating screed must not be continuous under the partition. • Perimeter flanking details must be the same as specified earlier for

fixed partitions (see Section 5.5 in report B147/R03). • Correct installation and maintenance is important. • All seals must be fully operable.

Separating Floors

The following floor build up has been proposed: 300mm dense concrete slab (min 2400 kg/m3) with a floating screed (total thickness 400mm). The resilient layer could for example be one of the following:

• 6mm Isorubber Base by Thermal Economics (Tel: 01582 450814) • 25mm mineral fibre with density 36 kg/m^

This will be sufficient to meet all vertical airborne sound insulation targets and all impact sound insulation targets (calculation attached).

The screed must be broken at each partition with the partition sitting directly on the structural slab to control horizontal flanking sound via the floor, see Section 5.5.3.

Corridor to Teaching Spaces

• Walls

BB93 states that all partitions between corridors and teaching spaces require sound insulation Rw 40 dB except for partitions between corridors and music rooms which require sound insulation Rw 45 dB. See Table 1 for construction options.

Vision panels of 1.9 m^ are proposed for all classrooms. The composite sound insulation of the glazing and the wall structure have to meet the above requirement, eg R^ 40 dB for standard classrooms. There are two ways of dealing with the issue:

1. Increase the sound insulation of the partition to compensate for the lower sound insulation of the glazing, i.e. Rw 45 dB partition with Rw

30dB glazing (6mm single glazing)

2. Provide high standard glazing (Rw 35 dB, 8.8mm single pvb glazing or 10/12/4 double glazing) to allow for a Rw 41 dB partition.

• Doors

BB93 further states that a door from a corridor to a teaching space requires Rw 30 dB except to music rooms where R^, 35 dB is required. A 44mm solid core timber or metal door with acoustic perimeter seals can achieve Rw 30 dB. To achieve Rw 35 dB a heavier acoustic door will be required. Typically this could be a proprietary door set and examples include:

1. SAL 42 dB Door, timber 2. CW Fields, Fields FD60 XA

Also see Section 3.13.1 in BB93 for further construction details. To achieve both targets the doors must have perimeter seals including threshold, and no perforations such as vents, cuts in seals etc. Vision panels are permissible but must have adequate SI.



General

Flanking transmission - plasterboard partitions

If a plasterboard partition is built against a continuous plasterboard flanking wall the sound insulation of the partition can be seriously undermined by sound flanking through the continuous partition. Hence all perpendicular plasterboard joints must be broken either side of the joint including external walls. See Figure 2 below.

For these reasons, floating floors are likely to be a compromise and if they are used, it will be important to identify which compromises have been made in favour of recognised benefits.

Alternatively, the partition could sit on the floating screed but then the screed must be broken along the line of the partition and the gap filled with resilient material. An appropriate grade of perimeter resilient strip below the partition will be required. See Figure 3 below:

25255?

I ^ I

j &00I&.1 |

I ^ I

Ittml |

I ^ I [ 7.2.6 Gaps and soft joints Gaps can seriously degrade sound insulation. Forms of construction which are difficult to seal must be avoided in the early design, such as:

• profiled soffits with trapezoidal voids over partition heads • exposed deflection heads of plasterboard partitions

In particular this causes a potential problem for deflection heads where plasterboard partitions are installed with no plasterboard ceilings in the room. Typically for this situation, detailing to achieve adequate acoustics are required as follows:

• seal all joints with mastic • provide steel angles at partition head

Figure 2: Plasterboard Joint - indicative plan section

Floating floors and plasterboard partitions

As a rule, plasterboard partitions should not be built on floating floors or floating screeds, for two reasons: a) sound insulation is degraded by flanking sound transmission horizontally

through the floating floor, b) a conflict arises at the perimeter of partitions, where the base is on a

resilient footing and the side meets a fixed construction such as the inner leaf of a cavity wall.

However, the recommendation in BB93 Fig 3.7 that partitions be built on the structural floor with the floating floor terminated in soft joints on both sides of the partition, is subject to the following: c) If fixtures and fittings are attached to the partition and are in contact

with the floating floor, this will reduce the impact sound insulation, d) Waterproofing of the partition/floating floor junction is less secure than if

the partition is built on the floating floor, e) The construction sequence would require partitions to be built before

floating floors are laid but could be circumvented by building the partitions on concrete upstands,

f) Subsequent stripping out of partitions to enlarge rooms would require reinstatement of strips of floating floor: the construction of new partitions on the structural floor would be impractical.

Figure 3 : Section showing broken screed at

See Section 3.10.2 of BB93 for further discussion of the topic.

The possibility of omitting a floating screed has been discussed. Should the floating screed be omitted the following points have to be considered:

• To control impact sound insulation the concrete slab must either have a soft floor covering (eg carpet, foam backed vinyl, rubber flooring) or an alternative floating floor (eg proprietary timber floor with tongue and grove chipboard on a thin resilient layer).

• Music classroom, Music practice rooms and music control room must have a floating screed or timber floor with cavity for sound insulation purposes.

• The partition between the Primary Hall and the Reception classroom would have to be upgraded from Rw 56 dB to Rw 63 dB. Figure 3: Deflection head detail for plasterboard partitions



7.2.6 Rain Noise

Control of rain noise is a requirement of BB93, although there is no specific target for rain noise and it is excluded from the internal ambient noise target. It can cause noise levels internally of up to 70 dB(A) inside and hence be a major disturbance. This must be taken into account when designing roofs for schools.

300 mm thick concrete roofs are proposed throughout most of the school and do not cause a problem. Lightweight roofs such as profiled metal cladding (proposed for the Sports Hall only) tend to radiate rain noise into the space below. To control noise from rainfall on the metal roofing, experience indicates that for classrooms and other teaching and office spaces the roof construction must achieve Rw 40 dB.

Hence if insufficiently massive lightweight roofs are used an independent or resiliently hung ceiling is needed below.

In our experience glass rooflights do not cause a problem regarding rainfall noise, although rain noise is often audible.

7.2.7 Room Acoustics

Areas of additionally required acoustic absorption given in this section are for a class C absorber (w 0.65 - 0.7) or better.

Teaching Spaces

The only room acoustic target stated in BB93 is for the reverberation time (RT). This depends on the volume of a space and the total acoustic absorption within it. The larger the volume the more acoustic absorption is needed to achieve a given RT. Most rooms in Leicester Academy require extra acoustic absorption.

Drawings B147/D01/A and B147/D01/B show the BB93 reverberation time targets that apply throughout the school and drawings B147/D02/A and B147/D02/B show the amount of absorption required in each room as a percentage of the floor area. Means of achieving this are now discussed.

We understand that due to thermal reasons soffits must remain largely exposed, hence a suspended acoustic ceiling or direct fix panels are not an option. It is proposed to suspend acoustically absorbing panels from the soffit which would hang above the lights, 345mm below the soffit. The effective absorbing area of these panels 1.5 times their actual area, as some absorption is also provided by the top surface. This assumes long strips of absorbing panels, approximately 0.6 m and approximate^ 2 m space between the panels. Hence, if this system is adopted the percentage area shown in the drawings should be multiplied by a factor of 0.66. 1.2

Corridors and Circulation Spaces

For the acoustic treatment of corridors and circulation spaces, BB93 refers to methods A or B of the Approved Document E 2003 to the Building Regs

Method A states that in corridors or halh/vays an area equal to or greater than the floor area must be covered with a Class C absorber. The most straightforward way of doing this is to install an acoustically absorbing ceiling.

For this Academy, the circulation areas are larger than straightforward corridors, and have partially glazed soffits. To introduce sufficient absorption will require treatment to more than the non-glazed areas of the soffit, and it is likely that additional areas on walls or perhaps as suspended elements will be required. Means of achieving this are now discussed:

• Cover all non-glazed areas of the soffit with a direct fix acoustically absorbing panel (w 0.6 - 0.75) and distribute further absorbing panels along the upper reaches of the wall (this must make up a total area equal to or larger than that of rooflights.

• Cover all non-glazed areas of the soffit with a direct fix acoustically absorbing panel (w 0.6 - 0.75) and vertically suspend further absorbing panels with a total area of half that of the rooflights. Suspended panels must be absorbing on both sides.

Method B requires the provision of a minimum of 0.25 m^ total absorption per cubic metre of volume. This method takes the acoustic absorption of walls and floor into account. It states that the additionally required absorption should be distributed over one or more surfaces. The required absorption area should be calculated for each octave band between 250 Hz and 4000 Hz.

We have carried out an example calculation of Phase 2 corridor and found that using method A requires less additional absorption than method B. We hence propose to apply method A to all corridors. Class C absorbers have w 0.6 - 0.75 and include:

• Sonar G, 22mm suspension, w 0.7, gridless by Rockfon (Tel:01656 864696)

• Scholar A24 (40mm), direct fix, w 0.9, grid system, impact resistant, by Rockfon

• Boxer (40mm), direct fix, w 0.9, grid system, high impact resistance, by Rockfon

• Claro (27mm), direct fix, w 0.6, gridless, by Decoustics (Tel:01223 257701)

• Master A/beta, 50mm overall depth of system. Class C abs, grid system, by Ecophon (Tel: 01256 850977)

Other Spaces

• Drama Studio

Drama studios have an RT target of 1.0 seconds. Due to the large height of the space, 60m^ of acoustic absorption is required. We recommend installing a 1.2 m high strip of absorption at head height along the backwall and along the partition to the hall store. The remaining 42m^ of required absorption should be placed on the ceiling. The strips on the walls are necessary to control flutter echoes.

• Dining Hall

The BB93 RT target for a dining hall is <1.0 seconds. To achieve this target 520m2 0j acoustically absorbing material is required. We suggest covering the total available ceiling area in absorptive material and distributing the rest on the walls, ideally out of reach of the students. For example, the Decoustics Claro panel or the Rockfon Scholar panel could be used for this.

• Sports Hall

The Sports Hall has a BB93 RT target of 1.5 seconds. This can be met if an area equivalent to 65% of the floor area is treated with a minimum class C absorber. The most straight forward way is to apply all absorption to the ceiling. It is however also possible to distribute it over some of the ceiling and the upper reaches of the walls.

• Assembly Hall

Due to its large volume, the Assembly Hall requires acoustic absorption of an area of 90% of the floor area to meet the target RT of 0.8-1.2 seconds. This absorption is best applied to the ceiling in form of a suspended acoustically absorbing ceiling or absorbing panels which can be directly fitted to the soffit. An alternative solution would be to make 80% of the ceiling absorbing and to add heavy curtains. These must occupy an area of 40m2 when deployed in 50% folds and have a minimum mass of 0.5 kg/ m2.

• Music Practice Rooms

The music practice rooms are small enough not to need any extra acoustic absorption to meet the BB93 reverberation time target. However, there are two reasons for provision of absorption: 1. Without added absorption it can get very loud inside music rooms when

live instruments are played. 2. Flutter echoes will occur where there are parallel reflective walls. The

design includes angled walls which is helpful. We recommend applyln strips of acoustically absorbing material on parallel walls.

A total absorption area of 2 m2 in each room with a minimum absorption



coefficient of w 0.6 is sufficient. The strips of absorption should reach from sitting head height to standing head height and must be equally distributed along one wall of each pair of parallel walls.

• Recording Studio

The reverberation time target for a recording studio is 0.6 - 1.2 seconds, a relatively wide range. We recommend designing the space towards the lower end of the range for the following reasons:

• Acoustic absorption is needed on the parallel walls to reduce flutter echoes.

• It is a small room and live instruments would cause high noise levels • It is easier to artificially add reverberation to a recording than it is to

remove it. Hence acoustic absorption should be applied in strips along the parallel walls, similar to the music practice rooms. A total area of acoustic absorption of 5 m2 is required.

• Chapel

There is no BB93 target for a worship space. However Figure 5.1 gives reverberation times in relation to the volume of a room, depending on whether it is used for speech or music. As the chapel will be used for both, the appropriate target range for the room (Volume 1200m3) is 0.9 - 1.5 seconds. The design would be towards the higher end, as churches traditionally have a longer RT and hence that is what people would expect. To achieve this target a total area of 100 m2 of acoustic absorption is required.

The proposed plan geometry is almost round which makes for bad acoustics due to sound focusing. A circular plan results in reflected sound being concentrated in small areas and creates particularly strange conditions when people stand and make a sound close to the centre of the space.

The only ways to overcome this problem are to: • Change the plan geometry to avoid focussing • Change geometry locally at surfaces

Install convex wall panels to counterbalance the general concave plan Install diffusing wall panels, at least at heights between seating and standing head height, to reduce the focussing effect

However, after discussion with the architects we have been advised that these options will not be incorporated into the design and that the only acceptable acoustic treatment is to add absorption to the space.

The focussing effect can be mitigated by introducing absorptive finishes in critical locations, but this will only partially address the acoustic problem. Adding absorbing material also runs the risk of the space becoming too dead acoustically.

We recommend that absorbing treatment uses an efficient sound absorber, which implies a material with reasonable depth, such as 50mm mineral wool with some form of perforated covering. In terms of location, an absorbing strip at typical head heights is proposed, such as from 0.2 to 2.0m above the floor. The treatment could extend all the way round the perimeter or be alternatively absorbing and reflective round the perimeter.

Additional absorption should be applied to surfaces above 2m over floor level in order to control the reverberation time. The simplest solution may be to just treat the ceiling.

Please note, that this not the ideal solution and that our recommendation is a change in plan geometry to provide good acoustics.



7.0 Specialist Reports 7.3 ICT

Issue and Revision Record

Rev Date Originator Description

1 24/01/05 Stephen Thomas Copy for Stage D Report First Draft

This document has been prepared for the titled project or named part thereof and should not be relied upon or used for any other project without an independent check being carried out as to its suitability and prior written authority of Mott MacDonald being obtained. Mott MacDonald accepts no responsibility or liability for the consequence of this document being used for a purpose other than the purposes for which it was commissioned. Any person using or relying on the document for such other purpose agrees, and will by such use or reliance be taken to confirm his agreement to indemnify Mott MacDonald for all loss or damage resulting there from. Mott MacDonald accepts no responsibility or liability for this document to any party other than the person by whom it was commissioned.

Please Note:

The following document has been provided before it has been fully verified by Cambridge Education internal Quality Assurance, in order to meet the Draft Stage D report deadline.



ICT Vision

The last five years have seen an unprecedented move towards greater access to ICT both in the home and in school. The uses of ICT have also changed from simple productivity tasks such as word processing towards multimedia manipulation and global communication. Hardware developments continue to provide increased convergence of functionality within smaller and more portable devices.

The following vision assumes that such trends will continue, but provides the flexibility to accommodate today's technologies within a frame work of contemporary educational thinking, in the following ways;

Students Students will emerge from the Academy with the skills necessary to be self-supported lifelong learners in the 21 s t Century. The Academy will have provided them with opportunities to use ICT collaboratively and creatively. It will have enhanced their self esteem and motivation by allowing them to use visual, auditory and kinaesthetic expression and communication even if their literacy and academic abilities were below average. They will have experience of working on more extended projects which connect with their own community and provide opportunity for self reflection and evaluation as well as assessment by online mentors, national and international peers.

The ICT infrastructure at Leicester Academy will provide Students with the following;

• Increased flexibility to study where, when and in ways best suited to individual needs and preferences, within the Academy campus as well as outside of traditional school hours.

• Learning resources, processes and systems that are differentiated, customised and consequently more personalised to the students' individual needs and preferred learning styles.

• Alternative means of access to learning and improved participation, particularly for learners with special educational needs and those disaffected with traditional teaching methods.

• Increased motivation through learning that stimulates, challenges and takes into account prior and concurrent experience in and out of school.

• Real-time and personalised feedback on attainment and progress through the use of interactive assessment tools and the ability to present and share achievement with others.

Staff ICT provides teaching staff with increased opportunities to develop innovative ways of supporting pupils' learning, by creating environments in which students can engage in cognitive partnerships with technology, to actively seek and generate relationships between lesson content and prior knowledge. It should help them to develop and manage learning beyond the classroom and outside of the school day, reinforcing synergies between home, community and the school.

Teachers will further their career at the Academy through effective use of ICT. They will share good practice across the school and with the wider online community and in doing so, be empowered to review the effectiveness of the learning gains made by the students they work with. They will use ICT to communicate, assess, record, track, analyse and report the performance of students and consequently play an active role in developing the new role of teachers within the context of workforce remodelling and the personalisation of learning.

The ICT infrastructure at Leicester Academy will provide Teachers with the following;

• Improved access to a wide range of on-line and pre-prepared digital learning resources and schemes of work, to streamline the preparation and delivery of lessons, and the means by which to present them interactively to students.

• Improved electronic communication to promote collegiality between staff, across the phases within the Academy itself as well as between staff in affiliated or Feeder Primary schools, to allow the sharing of resources and best practice.

• More proactive and analytical use of MIS and pupil data, based on a core management database, with a common mode of entry for raw data, which can subsequently be processed automatically to generate a wide range of information outputs such as performance data, reports to parents and the setting and tracking of individual learning goals.

• Reduced workload through the automation of routine administrative tasks, such as Pupil Registration and Attendance monitoring, and the availability of dedicated support staff to develop ICT based learning resources and provide real-time hands-on support.

School Leaders and Governors ICT will be used to support Leadership and Management at an institutional level through the sophisticated use of Management Information Systems. This will lead to better informed decision-making and more efficient information flow within the Academy, between staff as well as between staff, students and their parents. The leadership team at Leicester Academy

should expect ICT provide the following;

• More effective and efficient monitoring and tracking of pupils' performance, attendance and behaviour.

• Improved communication in matters such as pupil transfer, liaison on pupils with special needs, supporting continuity across phases, and curriculum planning and tracking

• Extended reach to excellent teaching (particularly in shortage subjects) and the maintenance of a normal curriculum even when qualified teachers are absent.

• An enhanced community learning presence and more dynamic communications with parents.

• Networking that supports specialisation and enhanced professional collaboration with other school leaders across the country.

Parents and Local Community Parents and the wider community will consider the Academy as a local resource, as much for them as for their children. Parents will be well informed of their child's performance through online information facilities and able to use the internet to engage with their child's learning to understand what is needed for progression.

The Academy's ICT systems should provide the following opportunities for Parents;

• To become better informed active participants in their children's education through improved access to information about the Academy and its performance, both generally as well as specifically in relation to their own children.

• Easier and alternative means of communication with school staff, governors and other parents allowing them to become more involved members of the school community.

• Improved community access to local ICT facilities for lifelong learning opportunities.

Turning the vision in to reality There have been many attempts to understand patterns of ICT adoption in education. The following model, developed by Simon Hooper and Lloyd Reiber, is used here to illustrate in simplified form, both traditional and contemporary applications of technology in education. The model has five steps or phases: Familiarisation, Utilisation, Integration, Reorientation, and Evolution and suggests that the full potential of any educational technology can only be realised when teachers progress through all five phases, otherwise, the technology is likely to be misused or discarded.



Familiarisation The Familiarisation phase starts with a Teacher's initial exposure to and experience with a technology e.g. by participating in an INSET session covering the "how to's" of a technology, such as word processing, spreadsheets, etc. In this phase, the teacher simply becomes acquainted with a technology.

Utilisation The Utilisation phase occurs when the teacher tries out the technology in the classroom for the first time. There is the inherent danger that they may discard the technology if they encounter technical problems, and resort to the traditional way of doing things, which the technology is likely to have simply replaced, rather than extended or enhanced.

Integration Integration represents the "break through" phase. This occurs when a teacher consciously decides to designate certain tasks and responsibilities to the technology, so, if the technology is suddenly removed or is unavailable, resorting to the traditional approach would no longer allow the same objectives to be achieved - they are committed to the technology.

Some teachers are likely to be satisfied with Integration as the end of the adoption process, although for others it marks the true beginning of understanding educational technology and the potential for professional "metamorphosis".

Reorientation Teachers who reach the Reorientation phase do not view good teaching as the act of 'delivering content'. Instead, the teacher's role is to establish a learning environment that supports and facilitates students as they construct and shape their own knowledge.

Teachers in the Reorientation phase are open to technologies that enable this knowledge construction process and are not threatened by being "replaced" by technology. In fact, these teachers will probably include technology in their classrooms without necessarily feeling the need to be an "expert" with it themselves. Their interest is on how technology allows their students to engage the subject matter. It would not be unusual for the students to be more competent than their teachers with the technology. Rather than view a technology as something that must be mastered beforehand and presented to students in a controlled and systematic way, a teacher at the Reorientation phase will encourage and expect students to appropriate the technology in ways that could not be anticipated.

Evolution The final phase, Evolution, serves as a reminder that the educational system must continue to evolve and adapt to remain effective. There will

never be a final solution or conclusion and to be searching for one means that one is missing the point. The classroom learning environment should constantly change to meet the challenge and potential provided by new understandings of how people learn as well as to accommodate changes in society and new initiatives and approaches to education, such as Personalised Learning, as a whole.

Conclusion The ultimate goal for Leicester Academy is to create a student-focussed, re-oriented and continually evolving learning environment that unites the technological capability of ICT with pedagogical necessity - balancing what can be done with what should be done - so that the ICT infrastructure encourages students to engage in deeper cognitive activity than they would have done without it.

Following discussions with Tribal Educational Consultant and existing Head Teachers at Southfields Infant and Newry Junior Schools, it is evident that teaching staff are at varying levels on the Hooper and Reiber continuum and that it is therefore essential to design and implement an ICT system that can 'grow' with the teachers as their confidence and philosophy for the use of ICT develops.

The technology needs to be ubiquitous, accessible and approachable - to ensure that is it available to both staff and students, and meets their needs, when they want to use it.

In practice, this is likely to be achieved in the following ways;

All teachers will have a Laptop computer - for professional productivity, communication and the preparation of digital learning resources.

Each teaching room will have a data projector and interactive whole class teaching system, to which the teacher can quickly and easily connect their laptop. All teaching rooms will be capable of allowing whole-class wireless use of laptops, with the potential for up to half the class having access to power and data sockets at any one time.

The target computer-to-student ratio is likely to exceed the Becta model of 1:4. This will be achieved through a combination of mobile, classroom-based and centralised ICT resources.

• Each teaching area will have access to networked computers of a specification appropriate to the task, either via class-sets of laptops on trolleys being brought to the classroom, or fixed PCs in or adjacent to the classroom, to allow ICT to be used at the point of learning.

• These will be linked to appropriate peripherals, both generic and subject specific, with corresponding power and data sockets together wrth surrounding functional space.

• LRC and ICT Resource Clusters will provide centralised and strategically placed learning resource areas, allowing a flexible combination of structured use for teacher-led lessons as well as more informal use by individuals and small groups, to promote independence and interdependence for learners.

Video Streaming and Broadcast: There will be the facility to deliver video based learning resources across the network, to distribute live or pre-recorded content to all, or selected, classrooms.

In addition to a high quality LAN infrastructure, there will be a background wireless network, covering all key areas of the Academy, to allow mobility and freedom to use ICT where required.

MLEA/LE: There will be a Managed Virtual Learning Environment to simplify the development, structure and organisation of digital resources for staff, allowing them to create a personalised learning environment for students to enable them to become interdependent learners.

MIS: The teachers' laptops should facilitate 'real time' access to the Academy MIS systems to provide important student related information, including registration data, as well as generic Academy information and policies.



The following section explains in more detail, the rationale behind the proposed design and specification of the ICT provision at Leicester Academy. It will define how the various technologies available have been chosen to meet the varying needs of teachers as they increasingly integrate ICT in to their students' learning, and allow them to eventually re-orient, all in the context of the proposed design parameters of the building, so that the equipment can be used effectively as an integral part of the building fabric, rather than appearing to be bolted on retrospectively.

Specifying the 'right' combination of technologies is clearly very important, but equally so, is the mode in which they are deployed i.e. are they to be 'integrated' in to existing practice or as a vehicle to re-orient the learning environment.

The following list of equipment has been identified as the key building blocks for the ICT solution at the Academy, which can be deployed in various combination and permutations to meet the various needs of the staff and students, and each will be explored in more detail below;

1. Teacher Laptop 2. Docking station 3. Data Projectors 4. Interactive Technologies

a. Interactive Whiteboards b. Interactive Slates

5. Document Visualiser Cameras 6. Teacher Multimedia lectern 7. Student laptops 8. Laptop Trolleys 9. Student PCs 10. Subject specific Peripherals


Project Nr. 42980

File Ref: 42980\06\01 \Stage D

(Rev H)

QA checked YES Approved By

DAVIS LANGDON

Leicester Academy

Stage D Cost Plan (Rev H)

6 April 2005 (Rev 2)

Leicester Academy



DAVIS LANGDON

Contents

Sectionl

Executive Summary

Section 2 Summary of Estimated Project Costs and Comparison to Cash Limit Cost Options for Consideration Cost Tracking Log (Stage D)

Section 3

Reconciliation with Stage C Cost Plan

Section 4 Basis, Assumptions and Key Exclusions

Section 5 Schedule of Areas

Section 6 Detailed Build Up to Cost Plan

Appendices

Appendix A -

Appendix B -

Copy of Space Planning Drawings

Summary of Chaplaincy Centre Costs

SECTION 1

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Leicester Academy

Stage 0 Cost Plan (Rev H)


Section 1.0 - Executive Summary Based on the information that the Team have produced as part of the Stage D design report, the Anticipated Funding Requirement for the project is currently £19,501,915 as the Funding Agreement, including allowances for Abnormal Costs, Professional Fees, Furniture , IT installation and VAT.

The approved budget for the project currently stands at £19,501,915 including £443,496 of confirmed funding from the Bishop of Leicester. A build up to the Funding Requirement can be found in the left hand column in the table below. Based on the project receiving full funding for the abnormal items identified within this report and discussed with the DfES over the last few months, the project will proceed in line with the approved capital funding. A tracking log of the changes since the first Stage D Cost Plan was issued and can be found within Section 2 of this report but the main changes have been with regard to the agreement of abnormals rather than reducing the specification or scope of the project.

Current Costs (price date 4Q05) VAT Total £ £ £

1. Construction Cost (inc ICT & Ext Wks) 10,991,000 13,072 11,004,072 2. Fixed FF&E 472,627 27,570 500,197

3. Loose FF&E 1,583,073 277,038 1,860,111

3. ICT Equipment 1,269,200 222,110 1,491,310

4. Professional Fees 1,607,000 281,225 1,888,225

5. VAT 821,015 - -

Sub Total 'Greenfield' Site Development 16,743,915 821,015 16,743,915

6. Abnormal Items 2,758,000 inc 2,758,000

Total Anticipated Funding Requirement 19,501,915 821,015 19,501,915

Less Total Available Funding (inc Abnormals) (19,501,915)

Current Project Overspend/Underspend

13 New Build

• Fixed FF&E

• Loose FF&E

13 ICT Equipment

• VAT

• Abnormal Items

Key Notes and Assumptions (See also Section 4.0 for further details)

Following direction from the DfES, a number of items that may normally be considered as part of the construction costs have been funded f rom other project budgets. The pertinent i tems funded from budgets outside of the Construction Costs include, data and AV containment (from FF&E), C C T V cameras (iT Installations) and folding/sliding partitions (FF&E budget). Once funding approval is obtained, to aid the management of the costs and the scope of the project, it is the intention to transfer the value of these i tems into the construction budget. The Cost Plan has been based on the project being procured using a Single Stage Traditional Procurement Route with 100% of the design competit ively tendered prior to entering into a Contract with the successful contractor. The programme produced by C S P M identifies in more detail the procurement process.

The Design Team are in discussions with the Project Sponsors regarding the VAT liability on the project and are committed to deliver the project within the allowances and assumptions made within the Capital Cash Limit.

SECTION 2

SUMMARY OF ESTIMATED PROJECT COSTS AND COMPARISON TO DfES CASH LIMIT

Leicester Academy



Section 2.0 - Summary of Estimated Project Costs and Comparison to Cash Limit

Based on the information that the Team have produced as part of the Stage D design report, the Funding Requirement for the project is £19,501,915, including allowances for Abnormal Costs, Professional Fees, IT and furniture.

Making allowance for additional funding being made available to cover the cost of incorporating abnormals into the project and the confirmed funding received from the Bishop of Leicester, totalling £443,496 and the 1.2% for the BB93 abnormal, the available budget for the project currently stands at £19,501,915.

As part of the Stage D design review, the level of Design Development contingency has been reduced from £281,000 to £224,000 and it is the intention that during Stage E, the design is reviewed and the original Design Development Contingency reinstated. This will include reviewing further the scope and specification of the design with both the Design Team and the project Sponsors throughout Stage E.

A summary of the project costs can be found with a detailed build up contained within Section 6 of the report (full copy only)

Approved Stage D Cash Limit Cost Plan (Rev H) Difference

(Rev 4) (April 2005)

£ £ £ New Build 9,224,564 9,363,000 138,436

Chaplaincy Centre (net cost) 359,715 inc (359,715)

ICT Infrastructure 205,006 205,000 (6)

External Works 1,105,197 918,000 (187,197)

Design Reserve to end of Detailed Design Inc 224,000 224,000

Construction Contingency Inc 281,000 281,000

Additional funding for BB93 (not abnormal) 126,417 inc (126,417)

Sub Total for Construction Works (4Q05) 11,020,899 10,991,000 (29,899)

Fixed FF&E 472,627 472,627 -

Loose FF&E (l) 1,583,073 1,583,073 -

ICT Equipment 1,269,200 1,269,200 -

Professional Fees ,"> 1,557,924 1,607,000 49,076 Additional Professional Fees on BB93 funding 16,434 inc (16,434)

VAT ( i i i ) 810,758 821,015 10,257

Total Funding Required 'Greenfield* Site 16,730,915 16,743,915 -

Allowance for Abnormal Items l'v) 2,771,000 2,758,000 (13,000)

Total Funding Required 'Brownfield' Site, say 19,501,915 19,501,915 -

Notes:-10 The allowance for Loose FF&E includes an allowance of £40,000 (inc fees and VAT) for loose furniture to the Chaplaincy

Centre; (ll) The allowance for professional fees is to include any specialist fees that may not be covered by the scope of the

Consultant Framework appointments. A breakdown to the Professional Fees allowance can be found within Section 6 (full report only);

<m) The build up to the allowance for VAT payable on the project can be found in Section 6 of the report (full report only); <IV) A build up to the abnormal items can be found in Section 6 of this report. Abnormal costs include Contractors

Preliminaries, Professional Fees and allowances for VAT where applicable.

Leicester Academy



Section 2.1 - Cost Options for Consideration

At the Funding Agreement review meeting held at the DfES on 4 April 2005, a number of potential savings were discussed to remove the previously reported overspend of £135,424. The table below sets out the result of the discussion that took place to remove the reported overspend and the savings that were discussed.

Overspend £

Previously Reported Ovespend (Rev G) 135,424

omit clerk of works from scheme (35,000) increase funding for Chaplaincy Centre (43,496) reduce design contingency (56,928)

nil

At the meeting on 4 April, a number of potential savings were discussed ahead of taking the decision to reduce the design contingency to allow the project to proceed to Funding Agreement. It is recommended that contingencies at Stage D are held at 6% to provide funding for unknowns, both design development and construction and only reduced once the risk of these unkowns has been mitigated either through further design development or construction on site.

It is therefore a recommendation from the Team that the design contingency is reinstated through Stage E design either through making savings to the current scheme (listed below) or through design development.

In total, the Team have been tasked with achieving £56,928 worth of savings to reinstate the design contingency. The savings that were discussed on 4 April (and have been discussed previously with both the DfES and the Sponsors) include:-

Target savings to be achieved £ 56,928

Omit external shrubs and replace with (27,000) grass Omit extra over for feature fencing to (11,000) main entrance

Reduce extent of internal glazing by (41,000) 80m

Reduce extent of curtain walling by 1/3rd (57,000)

Leicester Academy



DAVIS LANGDON

Section 2.2 - Cost Tracking Log (Stage D) The below summary provides an overview of the movement of the Draft Stage D Cost Plan costs from the Project Steering Group Meeting held on 19 January 2005 to the Cost Plan (Rev H), dated 6 April 2005.

All figures stated are Gross and inclusive of Preliminaries, Contingencies and Professional Fees.

Reported Overspend £

1. Project Steering Group Meeting (19 January 2005) 365,000

add abnormal rejected by the DfES at 24/1/05 meeting below slab drainage 116,000 forming lift pits in ground slab 8,000 plant bases on ground floor slab 7,000

Finalisation of frame scope of works 24,000 Finalisation of rooflights scope of works 20,000

2.Sponsor Review Meeting (26 January 2005) 540,000

The cost of providing an Academy with a single vision for the (375,000) 3 Phases has been identified and applied for as an abnormal.

Works to the Diamond Jubilee Covert (clearance, tree surgery, 28,000 fencing) rejected by the DfES as an abnormal

Review of M&E Stage D information substation quote increased from Stage C 27,000 boiler size confirmed (30,000) BMS controls to atria vents reduced (23,000)

Extent of fire protection to steelwork reduced (16,000)

Specification of internal stairs agreed with FCBA (15,000)

Confirmation of specification requirements to meet the acoustic 110,000 requirements of BB93. The

Review of External Works Scope extent of hard landscaping reviewed (86,000) size of MUGA reduced (26,000) topsoil to be reclaimed not imported for grass areas (31,000) around sports pitches extent of shrub planting reduced (12,000) target rate for feature fencing to frontage reduced (5,000) extent of drainage to hard landscaping reduced (10,000)

Identification of additional costs for 'Very Good' BREEAM assessment (abnormal) 68,000

3.Stage D Cost Plan (Rev A), 2 February 2005 144,000

2/3

Leicester Academy

Stage D Cost Plan (Rev H) DAVIS LANGDON


Section 2.2 - Cost Tracking Log (Stage D)

external and internal CCTV cameras to be funded through ICT budget (78,000)

additional costs claimed as an abnormal for creating a through school with a single vision rejected by the DfES

Cranking the roof structure to allow Phase 1 to be visually linked the remainder of the Academy 30,000 Additional external facade costs to allow the Phase 1 facade to be sloped to be visually linked with the 70,000 remainder of the Academy Additional cost of rooflights as Phase 1 is required to be a single storey rather than a more efficient 2 storey building 50,000

4.Stage D Cost Plan (Rev B), 9 February 2005 216,000

Section 2.2 - Cost Tracking Log (Stage F)

4.Stage D Cost Plan (Rev B), 9 February 2005 216,000

revised Capital Cash Limit Sheet issued (increase in funding) (298,376)

The costs for the additional area due to incorporating internal acces ramps has been moved above the line following the issue of the revised CCL sheet 124,000

Following the meeting on 25 February 2005, the following abnormals have been rejected

additional works to construct the internal ramps 43,000 Additional height of internal walls due to the stepped design of the building 35,000 Allowance for forming trenches and service runs in the slab 29,000 Specialist fee for Clerk of Works 42,000 Upgrading Sports Hall specification of external wall due to road noise along Trennant Rd 108,000 BREEAM works to obtain very good rating - controls to lighting 65,000

Bike shelter to be funded from FF&E budget (15,000)

Works to decontaminate the Diamond Jubilee Covert to be treated (4,000) as an abnormal

4.Stage D Cost Plan (Rev C), 25 February 2005 344,624

2 / 4

Leicester Academy



Section 2.2 - Cost Tracking Log (Stage D)

Omit lighting controls throughout (advised by DfES on 7 (65,000) March 2005)

Omit service trenches in substructure (25,000)

Add allowance for 26,000

5.Stage D Cost Plan (Rev D), 10 March 2005 280,624

Increase in Section 106 traffic works 14,639

Acceptance of Section 106 traffic works as abnormal (14,639)

6.Stage D Cost Plan (Rev E), 11 March 2005 280,624

No Cost Changes

7.Stage D Cost Plan (Rev F), 17 March 2005

Add internal ramps into abnormals (44,000) Add additional height of internal partitions into (37,000) abnormals Add timber panelling to stairs into abnormals (43,000) Add timber panelling to main entrance into abnormals (21,200)

8.Stage D Cost Plan (Rev G), 30 March 2005 135,424

omit clerk of works (35,000) increase Chaplaincy Centre funding (43,496) reduce design contingency (56,928)

9 Stage D Cost Plan (Rev H) 6 April 2005 0

SECTION 3

RECONCILIATION WITH STAGE C COST PLAN

Leicester Academy



Section 3 - Reconciliation with Stage C Cost Plan The below summary aims to show the movement in the costs since the last reported Cost Plan issued in November 2004.

Element Stage C Nov 2004

Stage D March 2005

Difference +/(-)

Comments

Substructure 562,000 693,000 131,000 Area of the building has increased. Previous allowances for drainage, lift pits and service trenches assumed to be abnormals have been rejected by the DfES.

Frame 509,000 326,000 (183,000) Additional information made available at Stage D. The scheme proposed makes efficient use of a flat slab. The project benefits from having a large proportion of the area on the ground floor so the frame costs have reduced.

Upper Floors 277,000 299,000 22,000 Area of the project has increased. Depth of floor reduced by 50mm.

Roof 1,359,000 1,423,000 64,000 Area of building has increased. Extent of rooflights has reduced. Additional roof areas/external lids included within the scheme.

Stairs and Balustrades 110,000 101,000 (9,000) Steps to food technology included. Specification reviewed.

External Walls 1,339,000 1,399,000 60,000 Area of building has increased. Vertical rooflights have been included in this element. Specification of external walls has reduced overall. Phasing abnormal claimed. Abnormals rejected by the DfES.

Internal Walls 449,000 441,000 (8,000) Sliding partitions now funded from FFE budge. Extent of glass partitions increased. BB93 included.

Internal Doors 239,000 206,000 (33,000) Specification of internal doors reduced following meeting with DfES. BB93 included.

Wall Finishes 102,000 86,000 (16,000) Timber lining to atria included Floor Finishes 428,000 382,000 (46,000) Area of the building has increased. More

information made available regarding the specification of the floor finishes.

Ceiling Finishes 132,000 218,000 86,000 Area has increased. More information made available regarding the specification of the finishes. BB93 included.

Fittings and Furnishings 4,000 3,000 (1,000) Allowance revised

M&E Services 2,622,000 2,381,000 (241,000) Area of the building has increased. Water storage tank included. All containment now funded through ICT infrastructure budget as advised by the DfES on 21 December 2004.

Builders Work 78,000 78,000 -

External Services & Utilities included 176,000 176,000 Included in M&E previously. External Works 720,000 918,000 198,000 MUGA not considered to be an abnormal .

Imported topsoil excluded. ICT Infrastructure 205,000 205,000 -

Preliminaries 1,149,000 1,151,000 2,000 Contingencies 561,006 505,000 (56,006) Design contingency reduced at 4/4 meeting

Sub Total Construction Costs 10,845,006 10,991,000 145,994 2/1

SECTION 4

BASIS, ASSUMPTIONS AND KEY EXCLUSIONS

Leicester Academy



Section 4.0 - Basis, Assumptions and Key Exclusions

Basis

1. The Cost Plan has been prepared from the following information received by the Team:-

Stage D Design Report, including appraisal of Brief, design drawings and specification notes.

2. The Cost Plan assumes that a Single Stage Traditional Procurement route will be adopted by the project and recognises that a fully designed approach prior to entering into a Contract will be adopted.

Assumptions

In preparing the Cost Plan a number of assumptions have been made and these are listed below for consideration by the Client:-

1. The Cost Plan is based at 4Q 2005 price levels. No allowance has been made for any costs associated with delay to the agreed programme;

2. Contractors will be selected to tender for the projects through the OJEU procedure;

3. The Cost Plan includes for the DfES Capital Cash Limit figures for Fixed Furniture, Fittings and Equipment and ICT.

4. £443,496 will be made available by the Bishop of Leicester. Refer to confirmation letter from Keith Panes.

5. The Cost Plan is based on the following items being sourced from budgets outside of the Construction Budget:-

(i) IT containment and AV Equipment - funded from ICT Infrastructure (ii) CCTV Installation - funded from IT Equipment (iii) Sliding / folding partitions- funded from the FFE budget (iv) Whiteboards & pinboards - funded from the FFE budget (v) WC fittings, including dryers etc - funded from the FFE budget (vi) All fume cupboards - funded from the FFE budget (vii) Roller shutters - funded from FFE budget (viii) Blinds, including blackout blinds - funded from the FFE budget (ix) Bike store - FFE budget

6. The specialist consultant fees included within the abnormals section has been based on information provided by CSPM;

7. All abnormal items related to the Traffic calming measures are agreed with LCC. 8. There is no allowance in our Cost Plan for a 6th Form. 9. As advised by Buro Happold, 20% of the steelwork to the Sports Hall will be fire protected.

Intumescent paint has been allowed for within the Cost Plan 10. No trimming steelwork is required to form the openings for the rooflights 11. Internal single storey areas within the double height spaces (kitchen, chaplaincy offices etc) will receive

a lightweight 'lid' as opposed to a concrete slab. The areas will not be loadbearing. 12. The roof parapet will be a nominal height. No allowance has been made to increase the height of the roof

parapet to 1.2m. 13. The cost of upgrading the base specification to meet BB93 have been based on the information provided

by Fleming & Barron and the Design Team as part of the Stage D Design Report. 14. All works to the play areas south of the Poplar Trees will be undertaken by the Local Authority. No

allowance has been included within the Cost Plan for any works to these areas.

Leicester Academy



Section 4.0 - Basis, Assumptions and Key Exclusions

15. The demolition enabling works will remove all existing hardstanding areas and foundations. All excavations will be backfilled to the existing ground level.

Exclusions The following items are excluded from the Cost Plan:-1. Any costs arising from delay to the agreed Master Programme; 2. Site acquisition costs including stamp duty, associated expenses, and fees; 3. Credits for capital taxation allowances (if applicable); 4. Out of hours working; 5. Standby generation; 6. Renewal or increased capacity to incoming services - adaptation to existing only (allowance only); 7. Financing charges; 8. Satellite/TV aerial installations; 9. AV Equipment and associated cabling & equipment; 10. Artwork; 11. Any maintenance costs, including the preparation of an asset register; 12. Auditorium performance production lighting rigs and sound systems (deemed to be included within

F.F&E budgets); 13. Hand held fire fighting appliances; 14. School start up capital cash limit and annual grants (eg consumables for books, test tubes etc); 15. Any costs incurred by the DfES; 16. Public relations, opening events, marketing etc; 17. Interactive CD presentations; 18. Independent Commissioning Managers Fees; 19. Window cleaning equipment - all funded through the running cost budgets for the project; 20. Irrigation installation to external works; 21. Public address system; 22. As agreed at the design meeting on 31 January, no concrete screed will be applied to the upper floors. 23. Glass balustrades 24. As agreed at the design meeting on 31 January, no allowance has been made for any imported topsoil

SECTION 5

SCHEDULE OF AREAS

L e i c e s t e r A c a d e m y

S t a g e D C o s t P l a n ( R e v H ) D A V I S l a n g d o n

6 A p r i l 2 0 0 5 ( R e v 2 )

S e c t i o n 5 - S c h e d u l e of A r e a s

Floor Level

Chapla incy Chap la incy Supor t Areas

Teach ing LRC/

S E N

Plant Spor ts

Hall Cater ing Halls

ICT Rooms

Store Rooms

Din ing Hall

Off ices W C ' s

Changing

Circ Duc ts

Risers / St ruc ture

G I A

m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 2 m 1 m 2 m 2

Ground 138 101 1,754 311 34 593 71 342 98 168 200 8 209 1,555 108 5 ,690

1st - • 1,208 223 130 " - - 10 - 33 56 451 113 2 ,224

Tota l 138 101 2 ,962 534 164 593 71 342 98 178 200 41 265 2,006 221 7 ,914

Notes

1.The information on the above area schedule is based on Feilden Clegg Bradley Drawings (please see basis of estimate)

2. Areas are measured in accordance with RICS/ISVA Code of Practice, Fifth Edition, 2001

3. All areas have been digitised from Feilden Clegg Bradley Drawings 1:500; and have been prepared for the purpose of the preparation of this area schedule only.

They should not be used for any other purpose.

4. Additional area allowance of 120mJ incorporated in CCL spreadsheet 004 (reference DfES email dated, 23rd Feb 2005) to reflect BB98. This increased the total CCL area to 7,795m2;

in addition a further 239m2 has been allowed for the chaplaincy centre.

5 / 1

SECTION 6

DETAILED BUILD UP TO COST PLAN

Leicester Academy i Stage 0 Cost Plan - Section 6 i April 2005

Summary Total

£

1) New Building Works 9,868,000

2) ICT Infrastructure to Building (as DfES capital cash limit) 205,000

3) External Works & Services 918,000

4) Design Reserve during Pre-Contract Stage -Included in 1) above

5) On Site Construction Contingency - Included in 1) above

Sub Total for Construction assuminq 4Q05 Start on Site 10,991,000

6) Allowance for Tender Price Inflation to 4Q05 -included

Anticipated Construction Cost for Start on Site 4Q05 and Completion 2Q07 10.991.000

7) Fixed Furniture, Fittings & Equipment (DfES figure) 472,627

8) Loose Furniture, Fittings & Equipment (DfES figure) 1,583,073

9) ICT Infrastructure, Cabling, Networks, Hardware and Software (DfES figure) 1,269,200

10) Professional Fees 1,607,000

11) VAT @17.5% taken on Proportion of Fixed FF&E (DfES figure) 27,570

12) VAT @17.5% taken on Loose FF&E and ICT 499,148

13) VAT @17.5% taken on Professional Fees 281,225

14) VAT @17.5% taken on Carpeted Areas 13,072

Anticipated Total Fundinq Requirement (Greenfield Site) 16.743.915

15) Add Schedule of Abnormals 2,758,000

Anticipated Total Fundino Requirement (Brownfield Site) 19,501.915

Carried forward 19,501,915

Davis Langdon LLP 6/1

Leicester Academy Stage D Cost Plan - Section 6 April 2005

Summary

Brought forward

Total £

19,501,915

Total 19,501,915



1) New Building Works GIA 7914m2

Element

I

% Cost £/m2

Total £ Notes

1 SUBSTRUCTURE

I I

7.02

I

88

I I

693,000

I

2 SUPERSTRUCTURE

I I I

I I I

2A Frame 3.30 41 326,000

2B Upper Floors 3.03 38 299,000

2C Roof 14.42 180 1,423,000

2D Stairs & Balustrades 1.02 13 101,000

2E External Walls, Cladding, Windows & External Doors

I

14.18 177

I

1,399,000

2G Internal Walls & Partitions 4.47 56 441,000

2H Internal Doors 2.09

I

26 206,000

I

3 FINISHES

I I j

I I !

3A Wall Finishes 0.87 j 11 86,000 j

3B Floor Finishes 3.87 48 382,000

3C Ceiling Finishes 2.22

I

28 219,000

I

4 FITTINGS & FURNISHINGS

I

0.03

I

I

3,000

I

5 SERVICES

I I I

I I I

5A Sanitary Appliances 0.62 8 61,000

5C Disposal Installation 1.25 16 123,000

5D Water Installation 1.35 17 133,000

5E Heat Source 0.92 11 91,000

5F Space Heating and Air Treatment 4.16 52 411,000

5G Ventilation Installation 2.89 36 285,000

5H Electrical Services 8.57

I

107 846,000

I

Carried forward 76.28 953 7,528,000




Element % Cost £/mJ

Total £ Notes

Brought forward 76.28 953 7,528,000

51 Gas Installation I 0.28 4 28,000

5J Lift Installation 0.52 6 51,000

5K Protective Installation i 0.23 3 23,000

5L Communications Installation 1 1.53 19 151,000

5M Special Installation i 1.81 23 179,000

5N Builder's Work in Connection with Services Installations (5%) 0.79 10 78,000

External Services and Utilites i 1.77 22 175,000

Main Contractor's Overheads, Profit & Preliminaries [14%] 11.65 145 1,150,000

Design Reserve 2.27 28 224,000 Reduced as part of Funding Agreement discussions on 4 April 2005

On Site Construction Contingency (3%) 2.85 36 281,000

Total Carried to Summary 100.00 1249 9,868,000




1 SUBSTRUCTURE

Ref I

Description Rate

Quantity Unit £ Total

£ Notes

Note:-See Abnormals section for other substructure costs

I I I I I I I I I I I I

Academv I I I I I I I I

1 Allowance for substructure as DfES Capital Cash Limit (£65/m2 on GIA adjusted for Location Factor and Tender Inflation)

I I I I I I I I

7675 m2 73 560,000

Based on strip foundations

2 Excavation for pad foundations, including disposal on site

I I I I m3

See Abnormals section

3 Mass concrete pad foundations, C30 concrete 3.5m x 3.5m x 1.6m, including formwork and blinding

I I I I m3


4 Mass concrete pad foundations, C30 concrete, 2.6m x 2.6m x 1.5m, including formwork and blinding

I I I I m3


5 Mass concrete pad foundations, C30 concrete, 1.8m x 1.8m x 1.3m, including formwork and blinding

I I I I m3


6 Mass concrete foundations, C30 concrete, 4m x 5m x 1.8m, including formwork and blinding

I I I I m3


7 Mass concete strip foundations, including formwork and blinding

I I I I m3


8 Allowance for column starter bars in mass concrete pad foundations, 15kg/m3

I I I I

t See Abnormals section

9 Concrete ground bearing slab, 150mm thick including 150mm compacted hardcore, insulation, DPM and reinforcement (1 layer A193 mesh)

I I I I I I I I

m2


10 Concrete ground beams

I

m

I I I I


11 Allowance for plant room plinths, mass concrete 1 item 5000 5,000

12 Allowance for 300mm edge thickenings to ground slab, 80kg/m3, including formwork

I I I I | m |


13 Below slab drainage 5497 m2 15 82,000

14 Allowance for forming lift pit, say 1 nr 5500 6,000

15 Internal ramps to address DDA requirements due to ' stepped' construction

I I

ChaDlaincv Centre

I I I I nr

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

See abnormals

16 Allowance for Chaplaincy centre substructure using above formula

I I I I

m I

Excluded. Not treated as an abnormal

Carried forward I I I I I I I I

653,000

Davis Langdon LLP 6/5 |



1 SUBSTRUCTURE

Ref Description Quantity Unit Rate

£ Total

£ Notes

17

18

19

20

Brought forward

Below slab drainage to Chaplaincy Centre

100mm screed to ground floor slab

Mass concete strip foundations, including formwork and blinding

Concrete ground bearing slab, 150mm thick including 150mm compacted hardcore, insulation, DPM and reinforcement (1 layer A193 mesh)

Total Carried to Summary

239

239

75

239

m '

nr

mJ

n r

15

25

190

65

653,000

4,000

6,000

14,000

16,000

693,000




2A Frame

1

Ref Description

I I I

Quantity Unit Rate

£ Total

£ Notes

Note:-See Abnormals section for other Frame costs

I I I I I I I I I

I I I

Concrete Frame I I I I I I

I I

1 300mm diameter reinforced concrete columns, including 400kg/m3 reinforcement, circular

I I I 52 m3

I 755 39,000

2 450mm diameter reinforced concrete columns, including 400kg/m3 reinforcement, circular

I I I 78 m3

I

765 60,000

3 Reinforced concrete shear walls, 200mm thick including 150kg/m3 reinforcement

I I I 428 m2

I

150 64,000

4 Allowance for downstands/upstands in slabs,

I

181 m

I I I

410

I

74,000

I Steel Frame to Sports Hall

I I I I I I I I I

I I I

5 Steel columns, 305x305 x 137 UC 20 t 1800 36,000 137kg/m

6 Steel beams, 762 x 267 x 147 UB 6 t 1800 11,000 147kg/m

7 Steel beams, 356x171 x 51 UB 3 t 1800 5,000 51 kg/m i

8 Steel beams, 203 x 203 x 60 UC 3 ! 1800 • 5,000 60kg/m

9 Allowance for conections to steel frame (15%) 5 t 1800 9,000

10 Allowance for secondary steel, including channels and bracing (15%)

I I I

5 t

I

1800 9,000

11 Fire protection to steelwork, say 20% of steel

I I I I

8 t


350

I I I I

3,000 As advised by Buro Happold at 31 January design meeting i

I

ChaDlaincv Centre

I I I I I I I I I

I I I

12 300 x 900mm reinforced concrete columns to Chaplaincy Centre, including 200kg/m3 reinforcement

I I I

7 m3

I

500 4,000

13 250 x 600mm reinforced concrere columns to Chaplaincy centre, including 325kg/m3 reinforcement

I

I I I

11 m3

I I I

I

665

L

7,000

Total Carried to Summary I I I I I I

I I.

326,000

I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I

Davis Langdon LLP 6/7 [



2B Upper Floors

Ref Description

I I I Quantity Unit

Rate £

Total £ Notes

1 Reinforced concrete suspended slab, 300mm thick, including 175kg/m3 reinforcement

I I I

2224 m2

I

125 278,000

2 Holorib upper floors to plant area, including 200mm concrete and reinforcement at 45kg/m2

I I

I I I

m2

I I I I I I

I I I I I

Excluded. Plant rooms to be insitu concrete slab as above

3 Allowance for movement joints 1 item 10000 10,000

4 Lightweight 'lids' to single storey internal areas fronting main atria, plywood and timber construction, non loadbearing, supported off internal walls

I I I I I I

60 m2

I I

60 4,000

Risk Item

5 Allowance for mezzanine floor/plant platforms and other floors not shown

I I I m2

I I I

Excluded

6 Allowance for forming openings in concrete slab for rooflights

I I

I I I nr

I I I I I I

I I I I I

No trimming steel or reinforcement required. Upstands m/s

7 100mm concrete screed to upper floors

I I I

2224 m2

I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I

Excluded at 31 January 2005 design meeting

I

ChaDlaincv Centre

I I I I I I I I I

I I I

8 Lightweight 'lids' to single storey internal areas fronting main atria, plywood and timber construction, non loadbearing, supported off internal walls

I

I I I I I I

120 m2

I I I

I I

60

I

7,000


I I

299,000


I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I




2C Roof

Ref Description Quantity I

Unit Rate

£ Total

£ Notes

Academy I I

1 Reinforced concrete suspended slab, 300mm thick, including 175kg/m3 reinforcement 4498

I m2 130 585,000

Excludes screed topping

2 Holorib decking with concrete infill, 175mm thick, 40kg/m2 to sports hall

I

m2 Excluded. See item 3 below

3 Lightweight roof structure to main entrance 66 m2 100 7,000

4 Rigid profiled sheet roofing to Sports Hall, including insulation, vapour barrier and upstands 594

I m2 60 36,000

5 Sarnafil roof finish to roof areas, including vapour barrier and insulation 4752

I m2 80 380,000

6 Extra over roof finish for walkways, paving slabs etc, say 5% 250

I

m2 30 8,000 5% of concrete roof

area

7 Horizontal fixed lights to atria/circulation area, including secondary support structure. 406

I

m2 450 183,000

8 Large fixed roof lights to roof cut outs (forming cut outs measured elsewhere), including concrete upstand to perimeter 135

I I

m2 600 81,000

9m2 each in area. Glazing laid to falls

9 Small roof light to roof cut outs (forming cut outs measured elsewhere) 15

! nr 2500 j 38,000

Proprietry roof light system

10 Allowance for cantilevered roof structure to nursery play areas

I

m2 Excluded

11 Roof parapet insulated pressing / copings

I I

1 item

I I

20000 20,000 External facade drawings detail height of parapet

12 Allowance for gutterings and flashings generally

I

5736 m2

I

5 29,000 Based on total roof area

13 Allowance for roof access hatches and cat ladders 1 item 5000 5,000 Scope to be defined

14 Allowance for mansafe system 1 item 10000 10,000 Scope to be defined

15 Allowance for concrete upstands to rooflights 1 item 15000 15,000

16 Increase in height of parapet above nominal allowance in item 11

ChaDlaincv Centre

I

item

I I

Excluded. Assumes mansafe

17 Reinforced concrete suspended slab, 300mm thick, including 175kg/m3 reinforcement

I I I

120

I m2

I I I

130 16,000 Note remaining area of Chaplaincy centre does not have a roof but a internal lid

Carried forward I I

1,413,000



1) New Building Works GIA 7914mJ

2C Roof


£ Total

£ Notes

18

Brought forward

Sarnafil roof finish to roof areas, including vapour barrier and insulation 1 2 0 n v 80

1,413,000

10,000

Total Carried to Summary 1,423,000




2D Stairs & Balustrades


£ Total

£ Notes

Note:-

See Abnormals section for other Stair costs

Academy Allowance for stairs between change in levels (0.5m rise each)

Allowance for main internal stairs, rising from Ground to First Floor, concrete with timber handrail and balustrade.

Allowance for stair to sports hall viewing area (previously stair to plant room)

Allowance for external fire escape stairs, rising from Ground to First floor, basic specification

Internal balustrading to voids, timber handrail

Allowance for ramps between change in levels

Steps from food technology to Phase 2, Including handrail

Allowance for other stairs and ramps not shown (not associated with change in level)


nr

2

80 m

nr

item

Excluded. Ramps included in lieu.

15000

10000

10000

275

45,000

10,000

20,000

22,000

2000 4,000

Rate agreed at Stage C Design review meeting on 15 November 2004

Proprietry staircases only

Glass balustrade excluded


Excluded

101,000


Leicester Academy Stage 0 Cost Plan - Section 6 April 2005


2E External Walls, Cladding, Windows & External

Ref

I

Description Quantity I

Unit Rate

£ Total

£ Notes

Note:-See Abnormals section for other External Wall costs

I I I

Academy I I

1 Lightweight external facade including, including plasterboard inner leaf, insulation, vapour barrier and rendered external facing 1479

I I

m2 210 311,000

Blockwork external leaf excluded

2 Precast concrete panels including plasterboard inner leaf, insulation, vapour barrier and architectural finish. Assumes 10kg/m2 secondary support for precast I panels 1016

I I I

m2 365 371,000

Details of structural support required

3 Powder coated aluminium stick curtain walling system 662 m2 400 265,000

4 Fixed window lights to facade, Velfac syytem or similar 312 m2 400 125,000

5 Opening lights to facade, Velfac system or similar 209 m2 450 94,000

6 Night ventilation fixed blade louvres; 50% free area 160 m2 550 88,000

7 Allowance for updgrading acoustic perfomance of the facade to meet along along Trenant Road to meet BB93 requirements

I I

m2

Included within the list of Abnormals

8 Vertical glazed lights to atria/circulation, including secondary steelwork, opening vents assumed to be 60% of glazed area 343

I I

m2 490 168,000

Allowance for mechanised controls made elsewhere

9 Allowance for specialist external wall finishes item Excluded

10 Allowance for brise soleil to South facades m Excluded

11 Main double entrance doors, glazed, manually I operated

I I

3

I

nr

I I

3000 9,000 Doors only. Screens to entrance included in curtain walling allowance.

12 Main double entrance door, motorised 1 nr 8000 8,000

13 Single doors, timber 17 nr 1000 17,000

14 Secondary access timber doors, double 5 nr 1800 9,000

15 Extra over external doors for fire rated doors

I

item

I

FCBA confirm not required

16 Allowance for external doors not shown 1 item 15000 15,000

17 Additional external elevation area due to increase in storey as a result of adopting a stepped building solution in lieu of leveling the site area

I I

325

I I

m2

I

-350 -114,000

Based on average rate of facade. See abnormals for corresponding inclusion

Carried forward 1,366,000



1) New Building Works i GIA 7914m2

2E External Walls, Cladding, Windows & External

Ref Description

I I I

Quantity Unit Rate

£ Total

£ Notes

Brought forward I I I I I I

1,366,000

18 Additional louvres to Trenant Road due to 50% included dampers

I I I 12 m2 -550 -7,000

SeeAbnormls Section i

19 Additional items over and above standard external wall specification to comply with BB93

I I I item

not applicable

20 Upgrading sports hall specification from Rodecca to curtain walling to allow the space to be used for exams. This is required due to the requirement for phase and a half dining in the dining area/assembly hall whcih would otherwise be used for exams


item

Included in item 3

21 Individual entrances for the 3 Phases

I I I

1 item

I I I I I I I I I

-15000 -15,000 Assumes 1 main entrance is always required i

I

ChaDlaincv Centre

I I I I I I I I I

22 Vertical opening lights to Chaplaincy Centre

I

70 m2

I I I

450 32,000 Secondary steelwork not required.

23 Faceted Timber cladding to Chaplaincy centre, including support structure (excluding interna! finishes]

I I I I I I I

I I I 90 m2


250 23 000


1,399,000


I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I




2G Internal Walls & Partitions

1

Ref Description

I I I

Quantity Unit Rate

£ Total

£ Notes

Note:-See Abnormals section for other Internal Wall costs

I I I I I I I I I

I I I

Academy I I I I I I

I I

1 Internal stud partitons, 140mm thick including 1 layer of plasterboard each side and 50mm rockwool non acoustic insulation

I I I I I I

1176 m

I I

245 288,000

2 Extra over item 1 for upgrading acoustic partitions to meet BB93 requirements

I I I 350 m

I 35 12,000

3 Extra over item 1 for glass partitions, non acoustically rated

I I I

164 m

I

375 62,000

4 Extra over glass partitions for acoustically rated

I

80 m

I I I

300

I

24,000 Based on F&B Stage D report

5 Glass screens to Sports Hall viewing gallery (non acoustic)

I I I

nr

I I I

Excluded

6 Balustrade to Sports Hall viewing gallery 18 m 275 5,000

7 Allowance for folding/sliding partitions, non motorised

I I

m2

I I I I I I

I I I I

Included as part of the Fixed FF&E budget

8 Allowance for curtain/screening to Sports Hall

I I I

item

I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I

Excluded. As agreed at Stage C design review meeting on 15 November

9 WC cubicles, including doors

I I I

50 nr

I I I I I I I I I

750

I I I

38,000 Rate agreed at 31 January 2005 design meeting. Excludes single WCs.

10 Allowance for fire rated partitions/screens

I

item

I I I

I I I

Included within scope of item 1.

11 Additional height of internal partitions due to building stepping

I

I I I

item

I I I

I I I I

See abnormals

I

ChaDlaincv Centre

I I I I I I I I I

I I I

12 Folding screen to Chaplaincy Centre, acoustically rated

I

item

I I I

I I I

Included with F.F&E budget

13 Internal stud partitons, 140mm thick including 1 layer of plasterboard each side and 50mm rockwool non acoustic insulation

I

I I I I I I

50 m

I I I

I I

245

I

12,000


I I

441,000

i I I I I




2H Internal Doors

1

Ref Description

I I I

Quantity Unit Rate

£ Total

£ Notes |

Academv I I I I I I

I I

1 Single internal doors, including ironmongery 151 nr 750 113,000

2 Extra over single doors for glass doors nr I I

Excluded

3 Double internal doors, including ironmongery 11 nr 1200 13,000

4 Double internal glass doors, including ironmongery 5 nr 2000 10,000

5 Extra over doors generally for fire doors to escape routes/plant rooms

I I I 10 nr

I

1000 10,000

6 Allowance for riser cupboard doors

I I

1 item

I I I I I I

25000

I I

25,000 Scope to be i confirmed by FCBA during Stage E i

7 Feature internal doors to Main Entrance area

I I

item

I I I I I I

I I I I

Excluded. Assumed double glass doors as above

8 Allowance for doors not shown on plans item I I

Excluded

9 Allowance for roller shutters to store areas etc item I I

Included as FF&E

10 Allowance for upgrading doors to meet BB93 installation

I

I I I ! Rtlnr !

I I I

I

500

I

32 000 Based on F&B Stage D report

I

ChaDlaincv Centre

I I I I I I I I I

I I I

11 Single internal doors, including ironmongery 3 nr 750 2,000

12 Double internal doors, including ironmongery

I

1 nr

I I I

1200

I.

1,000


I I-

206,000

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I





3C Ceiling Finishes


£ Total

£ Notes

Academy

Allowance for emulsion paint finish to internal walls

Timber panelling to South side of Phase 2 & 3 atria only, assumed to be 4m high

Allowance for ceramic tiling to kitchens and WCs, half height only, emulsion paint above

Allowance for specialist finishes over and above emulsion paint

Acoustic absorption wall lining to Drama Studio

10343

359

18

nr

rcr

i r r

52,000

See abnormals

item

75

25

27,000

Excluded

Included. Based on F&B Stage D report. Rockfon Scholar direct fix

Chaplaincy Centre

Acoustic wall finishes to Chaplaincy Centre 100 m " 65 7,000 Stud partition measured elsewhere

Total Carried to Summary 86,000




3C Ceiling Finishes

Ref Description Quantity

T~ Unit

Rate £

Total £ Notes

Academy

Screed topping to floors, non structural

Floor finishes generally,including skirtings

Timber floor to assembly hall, Phase 1 hall and Sports hall

Paint to plant rooms, applied to concrete/screed finish

Matwells to main and Phase 1 - 3 entrances

Raised floors to form stages in assembly and performance halls

Allowance for specialist finishes

6mm Isorubber Base underlay to upper floors to comply with requirements of BB93

Chaplaincy Centre

Floor finishes generally,including skirtings


6550

925

160

40

2224

m'

m 2

m 2

m 2

m 2

item

m 2

239 r r r

40

70

12

250

15

40

Included in ground and upper floors rate

262,000

65,000

2,000

10,000

Excluded

Excluded

33,000 Based on quote received from Thermal Economics

10,000

382,000




3C Ceiling Finishes

1

Ref Description Rate


£ Notes

Academv I I I I I I

I I

1 Paint to exposed concrete soffits, Keim paint or similar

I I

6744 m2

I I I I I I

10

I I

67,000 Excludes sports hall soffit, assumed self finished

2 Suspended ceiling to kitchen, WCs and changing areas

I I I 337 m2

I 45 15,000

3 Allowance for bulkheads 1 item 15000 15,000

4 Painted soffits to entrance canopies/roof overhangs 161 m2 15 2,000

5 Allowance for specialist ceiling finishes

I

item

I I I

I I I

No specialist ceiling finishes required

6 Acoustic absorption ceiling lining to Drama Studio

I

42 m2

I I I

60

I

3,000 Based on F&B Stage D report

7 Acoustic absorption ceiling lining to Dining area

I I I

520 m2

I I I I I I I I I

25

I I I

13,000 Based on F&B Stage D report. Rockfon Scholar direct fix system

8 Acoustic absorption ceiling lining to Sports Hall, based on 65% of floor area

I I

I I I

356 m2

I I I I I I

I

25

I I


9 Acoustic absorption ceiling lining to Assembly Hall, based on 90% of floor area

I I

I I I

180 m2

I I I I I I

I

25

I I


10 .Acoustic absorption ceiling lining to Music prcatice rooms

I I I

4 m2

I

45 Based on F&B Stage D report

11 .Acoustic suspended ceilings to classrooms

I I I

1399 m2

I I I I I I I I I

45

I I I

63,000 Included. Based on F&B Stage D report. Rockfon Sonar system

12 .Allowance for suspended ceiling finishes to areas outside of item 2 (previously excluded)

I I

I I I I

1 item 22000

I I I I I I I I

22,000 Extent to be agreed with FCBA within cost plan allowance

I

.ChaD la i ncv Centre I I I I I I I I I

I I I

13 | Paint to exposed concrete soffits, Keim paint or similar 239 m2 10 2,000

14 .Suspended plasterboard ceiling to Chaplaincy centre, say

I

I I I 80 m2

I I I

I 40

I

3,000 Non acoustic

Carried forward I I I I I I

I I

219,000




3C Ceiling Finishes


£ Total

£ Notes

Brought forward 219,000





4 FITTINGS & FURNISHINGS


£ Total

£ Notes

Allowance for internal fixed statutory signage


item 3000 3,000 All other signage assumed included in FF&E

3,000


Leicester Academy Stage O Cost Plan - Section 6 April 2005


5A Sanitary Appliances


£ Total

£ Notes

Academy

Sanitary appliances

Sub-contractor prelims @ 10%

Chaplaincy Centre

7675 n r

item

54,000

5,000

Sanitary appliances

Sub-contractor prelims @ 10%

239 m'

item

2,000

Included




1) New Building Works GIA 7914m* 5C Disposal Installation

Ref I

Description I

Quantity I

Unit Rate

£ I I I

Total £ Notes

Academy I I

I I

I I

1 Syphonic rainwater outlets and downpipes 7675 m2 4 27,000

2 Soil waste and ventilation system to sanitary appliances

I

7675

I

m2

I

5 38,000

3 Insulation to rainwater and soil waste and vent pipes 7675 m2 1 8,000

4 Laboratory waste, vulcathene type chemical resistant pipework

I

7675 I

m2

I

3 23,000

5 Pumped drainage system I I

item I I

Excluded

6 Overflow system I I

item I I

Included

7 Rainwater harvesting system I I

item I I

Excluded

8 Kitchen work installations I I

item I I

10,000

9 Testing & Commissioning @ 3% I I

item I I

3,000

10 Sub-contractor preliminaries @ 10%

I I

Chaplaincy Centre

I I I I I I

item

I I I I

I I I I I I

11,000

11 Syphonic rainwater outlets and downpipes 239 m2 4 1,000

12 Soil waste and ventilation system to sanitary appliances

I

239 I

m2

I

5 1,000

13 I Insulation to rainwater and soil waste and vent pipes 239 m2 1 Included

14 I Laboratory waste, vulcathene type chemical resistant pipework

I

239

I

m2

I

3 1,000

15 Testing & Commissioning @ 3% I I

item I I

Included


I

I I I

item

I

I I I

Included

i Total Carried to Summary I I

I I

I I

123,000

I I I I I I I

I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I






5D Water Installation

Ref Description Quantity Rate

Unit £ I I I

Total £ Notes

Academv I I

I I

1 Incoming cold water service 7675 m2 I I

1,900

2 Cold water services sectional tank and booster set (12M3)

I

item

I I I

See abnormals

3 Cold water services to sanitary appliances 7675 m2 4 26,900

4 Cold water services to teaching area sinks including additional break tanks to laboratory and dark room facilities 7675

I I

m2

I I

2 11,500

5 Hot water services central gas fired or LTHW water heaters and pumps x2 serving kitchen and sanitary appliances 7914

I I

m2

I I

2 19,800

6 Hot water services flow and return pipework to sanitary appliances 7675

I m2

I

3 23,000

7 Hot water services to teaching area sinks 7675 m2 2 15,400

8 Hot & cold water services to main kitchen 7914 m2 1 7,900

9 Local electric water heaters to isolated labs item I I

Included

10 Trace heating to HW8 item j i

7,500

11 Solar panelling for pre-heating of hot water system item I I

Excluded

12 Testing & Commissioning @ 3% item I I

3,400


Chaplaincy Centre

item

I I I I

I I I I I I

11,700

14 Incoming cold water service 239 m2 4 1,000

15 Cold water services to sanitary appliances 239 m2 4 1,000

16 Cold water services to teaching area sinks including additional break tanks to laboratory and dark room facilities 239

I I

m2

I I

2 500

17 I Hot water services flow and return pipework to sanitary appliances 239

I

m2

I

3 700

18 Testing & Commissioning @ 3% item I I

100

19 Sub-contractor preliminaries @ 10% item

I

I I I

200

Total Carried to Summary I I

I I

132,500

I I

I I



1) New Building Works GIA 7914mJ

5E Heat Source


£ Total

£ Notes

Academy

Gas fired boiler plant, low nox (25ppm) with lead condenser boiler, flue system, header pipework, primary and secondary pumpsets, valves and insulation in plantroom

Testing & Commissioning @ 3%

Sub-contractor preliminaries @ 10%

Chaplaincy Centre

776 kW

item

item

100

Gas fired boiler plant, low nox (25ppm) with lead condenser boiler, flue system, header pipework, primary and secondary pumpsets, valves and insulation in plantroom




24 kW

item

item

1 0 0

As advised by Buro Happols 24 January 2005

77,600

2,300

8,000

Total loading = 800KW. Pro rata on an area basis

2,400

1 0 0

300

90,700




5F Space Heating and Air Treatment


£ Total

£ Notes

5

6

7

8

9

10

12

13

14

15

16

17

Academy

LTHW distribution to AHU's

LTHW distribution heating system generally including pipework distribution, radiators and underfloor heating to general areas

Overdoor type LTHW heating or LL trench to reception entrance doors

Allowance for cooling to IT rooms and other high heat gain areas

External plant acoustic and visual screening

Acoustic treatment of ventilation systems

Ductwork and pipework insulation complete

Air transfer grilles in doors

Fire and smoke dampers

Testing and commissioning @ 3%

Sub contractor Preliminaries @ 10%

Chaplaincy Centre

LTHW distribution to AHU's

LTHW distribution heating system generally including pipework distribution, radiators and underfloor heating to general areas

Acoustic treatment of ventilation systems

Ductwork and pipework insulation complete


Sub contractor Preliminaries @ 10%


7675

7675

nr

7675

7675

7914

7914

item

item

item

m 2

m 2

m 2

m 2

item

item

239

239

239

239

nr

m 2

m 2

m 2

item

item

28

20000

1

5

1

1

28

1

5

46,100

214,900

10,000

20,000

7,700

38,400

7,900

7,900

10,600

o c ^ n n

Excludes central chiller plant

Excluded

1,400

6,700

200

1,200

300

1,100

410,800


Leicester Academy 1) New Building Works Stage D Cost Plan - Section 6 GIA 7914m2

April 2005 5G Ventilation Installation

Ref I


Unit Rate

£ Total

£ Notes

Academv I I

I I

1 Mechanical extract system to toilet areas 7914 m2 3 23,700

2 Mechanicalextract ventilation to changing rooms item I I

15,000

3 Mechanical supply air handling unit and ductwork to dining area (4.5m3/sec)

I

I item

I

I I I I

Excluded. Agreed at 31 January 2005 design team meeting

4 Mechanical extract unit and fire rated ductwork to kitchen area

I item

I I I

15,000 Excludes hoods

5 Mechanical extract from wash-up area item I I

5,000 Excludes hoods

6 Laboratory type fume extract systems, recirculation type

I

item

I

I I I

Included as part of FFE budget

7 Mechanical extract from Food technology (1m3/sec each) 2

I nr

I

5000 10,000 Excludes hoods

8 Mechanical supply to Food technology (1m3/sec each) 2 nr 5000 10,000 See abnormals

9 Mechanical extract to vocational food areas item I I

Excluded

10 Smoke extract fans to atrium areas item I I

Excluded

11 Dust filtration system to CAM rooms (limited to single fan with 2 or 3 fixed extract points)

I

I

item

I

I I I I

7,500 Most have self contained extract units

12 Darkroom, kiln and heat bay extract systems item I I

7,500

13 Allowance for mechanical extract to science labs

I I

item

I I

I I I I

20,000 Buro Happold to confirm if this is required

14 Allowance for mechancial extract to sports hall item I I

See Abnormals

15 Allowance for mechanical extract to ICT/LRC item I I

10,000

16 Allowance for mechanical extract to 1st floor plantroom only

I item

I I I

5,000 Assumed local fan set and exhaust

17 Allowance for supply ventilation including AHU (3m3.s), heat recovery, attenuation, DW grilles to Phase 1 Hall

I item

I I I

20,000

18 Allowance for mechanical supply and extract ventilation to internal office spaces and support spaces 75

I m2

I 100 7,500

19 Allowance for mechanical supply and extract ventilation including AHU ( 1.5m3/s) heat recovery, attenuation, DW grilles to Studio

I I

I I

item

I I

I I I I I I

15,000

Carried forward I I

I I

171,200




5G Ventilation Installation


£ Total

£ Notes

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

Brought forward

Allowance for mechanical supply AHU (2.7m3/s) heater battery , DW grilles to Assembly hall

Allowance for mechanical supply AHU (7m3/s) heater battery. DW grilles, attenuation to Sports Hall

Allowance for mechanical supply inc AHU, attenuation, DW grilles to internal class bases

Allowance for mechanical supply and extract to music rooms



Chaplaincy Centre

Allowance for mechanical supply ventliation inc AHU (2m3/s) heater battery, attenuation DW grilles to Central worship area




item

item

item

item

item

item

item

item

item

171,200

20,000

See abnormals

30,000

15,000

7,100

24,300

15,000

500

1,600

284,700




5H Electrical Services

Ref Description Rate


£ Notes

Academy I I I I I I

I l

1 LV switchpanels

I I I 7675 m2

I 5 38,400

2 LV distribution cabling and boards 7675 m2 8 61,400

3 General containment 7675 m2 7 53,700

4 Power supplies to mechanical plant 7675 m2 3 23,000

5 Standby generator installation item I I

Excluded

6 General lighting installation including cabling conduit and switching

I I I

1919 nr I

60 115,100

7 General lighting and luminaires based on a medium quality up / downlighter fitting with HF ballasts to all areas (1 nr fitting per4m2)

I I I I I I

1919 nr

I I

120 230,300

PC Cost£100/fitting

8 Emergency lighting installation including self contained battery packs plus any lit exit signage (1:6)

I I I

315 nr I

100 31,500

9 Auditorium production lighting item I I

Excluded

10 Extra for feature lighting and luminaires 7914 m2 1 9,100

11 Lighting control system for daylight linking of luminaires

I I I

m2

I I I

See Abnormals sections

12 General power installation including cabling and accessories

I I I 7675m2

I 15 115,100

13 Associated Dado trunking / grommets / floor boxes m2

I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I

As advised by the DfES, these works form part of the ICT infrastructure budget

14 Power to electrically operated actuators to atria vents 7675 m2 2 15,400

15 Manual override to atria vents (above) item I I

5,000

16 Three phase power for technology equipment 7914 m2 1 7,900

17 Emergency knock off facilities to workshop power 7914 m2 I I

4,000

18 UPS power item I I

Excluded

19 Power to security and fire alarm systems item I I

5,000

20 Earthing and bonding item I I

10,000

21 Daylight controls sensors m2 I I

Excluded

22 Testing and Commissioning @ 3% item

I I I

I I I

21,700


I I

746,600




5H Electrical Services

Ref Description I I Quantity Unit

Rate £

Total £ Notes

Brought forward I I I I

I I

746,600


Chaplaincy Centre

item

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I

74,700

I I I I

23 LV switchpanels 239 m2 5 1,200

24 LV distribution cabling and boards 239 m2 8 1,900

25 General containment 239 m2 7 1,700

26 Power supplies to mechanical plant 239 m2 3 700

27 Power to electrically operated actuators to atria vents 239 m2 2 500

28 General lighting installation including cabling conduit and switching

I I 60 nr

I 60

I 3,600

29 General lighting and luminaires based on a medium quality up / downlighter fitting with HF ballasts to all areas (1nr fitting per4m2)

I I I I

60 nr

I I

120

PC £100/fitting

7,200

30 Emergency lighting installation including self contained battery packs plus any lit exit signage (1:6)

I I 10 nr

I 100'

I 1,000

31 General power installation including cabling and accessories

I I 239 m2

1 15

1 3,600

32 .Testing and Commissioning @ 3% I I I I

I I

600

33 Sub-contractor preliminaries @ 10% I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I

2,200

1 1 1

Total Carried to Summary I I I I

I I

845,500 1

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1






£ Total

£ Notes

Acadmev

Incoming gas services to boiler plant

Gas service to kitchen

Gas service to science laboratories



Chaplaincy

item

item

item

item

item

4,000

5,000

15,000

700

2,500

Incoming gas services to boiler plant



item

item

item

1,000


Included

Included






£ Total

£ Notes

Academv

Passenger lifts, 13 persons, standard mono space type serving 2 levels, 1.0m/s




nr

item

item

45000 45,000

1,000

5,000

51,000


Leicester Academy 1) New Building Works Stage D Cost Plan - Section 6 GIA 7914m2

April 2005 5K Protective Installation

i Rate Total Ref Description Quantity Unit £ £ Notes

Academv I I I I I I I I

1 Dry riser installation j jitem j Excluded

2 Hand-held fire fighting appliances item Excluded

3 Lightning protection system including tape and pits 7675m2 2 19,200

4 Sprinkler installation item Excluded

5 Testing and commissioning @ 3% item 600

6 Sub-Contractor preliminaries @ 10%

I

item

I I I I

2,000

I

ChaDlaincv Centre


7 Lightning protection system including tape and pits 239 m2 3 700

8 Testing and commissioning @ 3% item Included

9 Sub-Contractor preliminaries @ 10% I

item

I I I I

100

I Total Carried to Summary

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

22,600




5L Communications Installation

Ref Description

I I I

Quantity Unit Rate

£ Total

£ Notes |

Academy I I I I I I

I I

1 Containment only for specialist IT, AV and security installation

I I

I I I m2

I I I I I I

I I I I I

As advised by the DfES, included within ICT infrastructure budget

2 Fire alarm and sounder system

I

7675 m2

I I I

10

I

76,800 No PA or voice facility; by FF&E

3 Intruder alarm system 7675 m2 2 15,400

4 Internal and External CCTV installation

I I

nr

I I I I I I

I I I I

To be funded from ICT budget as instructed by the DfES

5 Access control system 10 nr 2000 20,000

6 Disabled alarm system/disabled refuge 7914 m2 1 7,900

7 Induction loops to reception / entrance area item I I

10,000

8 Testing and commissioning @ 3% item I I

3,900

9 Sub-contractors preliminaries @ 10%

I

item

I I I

I I I

13,400

I

Chaplaincy Centre

I i i I I I I I I

I I I

10 Fire alarm and sounder system 239 m2 10 2,400

11 Intruder alarm system 239 m2 2 500

12 Testing and commissioning @ 3% item I I

100

13 Sub-contractors preliminaries @ 10%

I I I

item

I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I

200


I I-

150,600

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I


I I






£ Total

£ Notes

Academy

BMS control to atrium at high and low level

BMS installation, generally to plant and equipment

Specialist gases including compressed air


Sub Contractor preliminaries @ 10%

Chaplaincy Centre

7675

7914

m '

m 2

item

item

item

15

38,400

118,700

4,700

16,200

As Buro Happold email 24 January 2005

Excluded

BMS control to atrium at high and low level


Sub Contractor preliminaries @ 10%

239 n r r

item

item

1,200

1 0 0

Included





5N Builder's Work in Connection with Services


£ Total

£ Notes

Academy

Builderswork in connection with M&E services installations

Chaplaincy Centre

item 75644 76,000 Based on a pro rata basis

Builderswork in connection with M&E services installations


item 2356 2,000

78,000




External Services and Utilites

Ref Description

I

Quantity I

Unit Rate

£ Total

£ Notes

Academy I I

I I

I I

1 New electrical sub station and 800kVA transformer, including builders work in connection

I I

I 1

I I

I

item

I I

I

70000

I I

70,000 As quote dated 27 Sept 2004 and as advised by BH at 31 Jan design meeting

2 Sewage connection charges 1 item 45000 45,000

3 Telecoms - ducts only 1 item 10000 10,000

4 Water connections

I I

1

I I

item

I I

10000

I I

10,000 As Buro Happold quote in Stage D i document

5 Gas connections

I

1

I

item

I

5000

I

5,000 As quote dated 16 November 2004

6 Fire Hydrant 1 item 20000 20,000

7 Sub station enclosure

I I I I I

1

I I I I |

item

I I I I I

15000

I I I I I

15,000

I I I I I

builders work in connection

I

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I I

I I I I I I I L


I I

I I -

175,000

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I




I I



2) ICT Infrastructure to Building (as DfES capital cash limit) GIA 7914m2

Element % Cost £/m2

Total £ Notes

ICT Infrastructure to Building 100.00 26 205,000

Total Carried to Summary 100.00 26 205,000



2) ICT Infrastructure to Building (as DfES capital cash limit) GIA 7914m2

ICT Infrastructure to Building


£ Total

£ Notes

Allowance for ICT infrastructure to building, including containment and wiring as advised by the DfES item 205000 205,000

As DfES capital cash limit




3) External Works & Services GIA 7914m2

Element Cost £/m2

Total £ Notes

Externals 100.00 116 918,000

Total Carried to Summary 100.00 116 918,000




Externals

Ref Description Quantity I

Unit Rate

£ Total

£ Notes

Note:-See Abnormal Costs for other External Works

1

I I I I

I I I I

I I I I

1 External SDorts Facilites

I I I

I I I

I I I

1 Allowance for minimal works to existing grass play areas between school and Poplar Trees, including making good grass surface and line painting 15141

I I

m2

I I

3

Excludes regrading and drainage works.

45,000 See abnormals

2 Allowance for markings for grass running track m2 I I Included above

3 Allowance for cricket pitch, including wicket and all ancillary markings

I item

I I I

Included above

I 4 Allowance for long jump pitch, including excavation and

drainage 1

I item

I 5000

I 5,000

5 Allowance for MUGA, including all earthworks, drainage, fencing and lighting

I I

1925

I m2

I I

I 50

I I

Quote received from 96,000 Tact Enviro Ltd,

assumes 150mm granular base

6 Allowance for drainage improvement works to sports pitches South of the Poplar trees

I I

I m2

I I

I I I I I

Excluded; works undertaken by Local Authority

I I Soft LandscaDina and Fencina

I I I

I I I

I I I

7 Allowance for Semi mature trees (20-25mm girth) 5 nr 500 3,000 As advised by CLA

8 Allowance for Semi mature trees (16-18mm girth)

I I

20 nr

I I

250

I I

5,000 Target allowance as part of Stage D cost savings'

9 .Allowance for works to protected trees (TPO) item I I See abnormal items

10 |Allowance for hedging material

I 341 m

I 20

I 7,000 Target rate as agreed

with CLA

11 .Allowance for irrigation to soft landscaping areas m2 I I Excluded

12 Allowance for grassed areas, including 150mm imported topsoil

I I I

6841

I m2

I I I

I 7

I I I

Includes additional 48,000 390m2 following

reduction of Phase 1 play areas. Agreed 31/1

13 Allowance for grassed areas surrounding pitches and MUGA, including 150mm reclaimed top soil from earthworks

I 11357

I I

m2

I

I I

4

Imported topsolil excluded as agreed

45,000 at 31/1 design meeting

Carried forward I I

I I 254,000 j




Externals

Ref I


Unit Rate

£ Total

£ Notes

Brought forward I I

I I

254,000

14 Allowance for bulb planting item I I

Excluded

15 Allowance for shrub areas, including 450mm imported topsoil 1016

I m2

I 25 25,000

Target rate for shrub planting

16 Allowance for trees/shrubs/grass areas not shown item I I

Excluded

17 Allowance for works to Diamond Jubilee Covert item I I

See abnormals

18 Feature fencing, 2.4m high 77 m 200 15,000 Specification required

19 Perimeter security fence, 2.4m high 1085 m 90 98,000

20 Provisional allowance for renewal of NE Boundary Fence, say

I m

I I I

Included in 19 above

21 2.4m high timber screen 4 m I I

See Abnormals

22 1.8m high timber screen m I I

See Abnormals

23 1.5m high timber screen m I I

See Abnormals

24 Vehicle gates; 2.4m high x 3m wide; mechanically operated 3

I nr

I 10000 30,000

25 Pedestrian gates; 2.4m high; manually operated I 3 nr 2500 8,000

26 Pedestrian gates; 2.4m high x 1.05mm wide; manually operated; self closing with padlock system 2

I nr

I 2000 4,000

27 Allowance for Habitat pond item I I

Excluded

28 Retaining walls; 200mm wide reinforced concrete core with 105mm brickwork skin

I m2

I I I

See Abnormals

29 Retaining walls; 200mm wide reinforced concrete core with 105mm brickwork skin; with 1.2m balustrade

I m2

I I I

See Abnormals

30 Allowance for Earth banks at 1.25m high; soft grade; seeded with meadow grass

I m2

I I I

See abnormals

31 Allowance for works to the Diamond Jubilee Covert -removal of contamination

I

I item

I

I I I I

Included as an abnormal 25 February 2004

32 Allowance for works to the existing trees/shrubs etc within the Diamond Jubilee Covert 1

I item

I 15000 15,000

33 Allowance for timber fence to Diamond Jubilee Covert, 1.5m high

I I I

150

I m

I I I

I 50

I I I

8,000

Carried forward I I

I I 457,000




Externals


£ Total

£ Notes

Brought forward

Hard Landscaping

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

Site drainage, generally

Allowance for carpark and main entrance roadway

Allowance for black top Macadam; generally

Allowance for coloured Macadam to play areas

Allowance for modular paving slabs; 80mm thick

Allowance for specialist hard/play finish to Phase 1 covered play

Allowance for kerbs and edgings

Precast Concrete Steps

Precast Concrete Steps including handrails

Metal edge restraints to form kerbing

Balustrade to retaining walls, 1.1m high

Fixed external furniture

Precast concrete benches/walls; 3.5m long with hardwood timber board cushion to top surface only

External signage

Bike racks, including canopy/enclosure

Additional paths/hard paving to facilitate separate entrances for the phases

External Services

50 External access and security lighting

Carried forward

10018

2477

3382

2251

1374

144

item

nr

nr

341

item

item

item

item

item

item

4

50

20

30

40

50

10000

25

-10000

30000

457,000

40,000

124,000

68,000

68,000

55,000

7,000

10,000

9,000

To hard surfaces only

Works to public highway excluded.

Rate revised from £40/m2 following design review on 15 November 2004

Includes a reduction of 390m2 to Phase 1 play areas as agreed at 31/1 meeting

Specification to be confirmed. Rubberised surface?

See Abnormals

See Abnormals

See Abnormals

Included within F.F&E allowance

Included within F.F&E

Included within F.F&E allowance

See abnormals for BREEAM rating

See abnormals -10,000

30,000

858,000




Externals


£ Total

£ Notes

51

52

53

Brought forward

Carpark lighting

External feature lighting

Allowance for access control, power and intercom to main reception and perimeter gates


item

item

item

50000

10000

858,000

50,000

10,000

Excluded

918,000


Leicester Academy 7) Fixed Furniture, Fittings & Equipment (DfES figure) Stage D Cost Plan - Section 6 GIA 7914m2

April 2005

J { Cost Element % £/m2

Total £ Notes

Fixed Furniture, Fittings & Equipment 100.00 60

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Total Carried to Summary 100.00 60

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

472,627

472,627



7) Fixed Furniture, Fittings & Equipment (DfES figure) GIA 7914m2

Fixed Furniture, Fittings & Equipment


£ Total

£ Notes

Allowance for fixed furniture, fittings & equipment; to cover all the requirements of the Academy internally and externally

Allowance for Chaplaincy Centre fixed furniture, fittings and equipment


item

item

4 7 2 6 2 7 4 7 2 , 6 2 7

As DfES capital cash limit

Excluded

472,627



8) Loose Furniture, Fittings & Equipment (DfES figure) GIA 7914m2


Total £ Notes

Loose furniture and fittings 100.00 200 1,583,073




8) Loose Furniture, Fittings & Equipment (DfES figure) GIA 7914m2

Loose furniture and fittings


£ Total

£ Notes

Loose furniture and fittings to Academy

Loose furniture and fittings to Chaplaincy Centre

item

item

1543073

40000

1,543,073

40,000

As DfES Capital Cash Limit sheet




9) ICT Infrastructure, Cabling, Networks, Hardware and GIA 7914mJ

Element Cost Total

% £/m2 £ Notes

ICT Infrastruture and Cabling, Networks and Hardware

I I I 100.00 160 1,269,200

I I I I I I I I I

Total Carried to Summary 100.00 | 160 j 1,269,200 j

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I



9) ICT Infrastructure, Cabling, Networks, Hardware and GIA 7914m2

ICT Infrastruture and Cabling, Networks and Hardware


£ Total

£ Notes

Allowance for ICT infrastructure and cabling, networks and hardware

Allowance for ICT infrastructure and cabling to Chaplaincy centre


item

item

1269200 1,269,200 As DfES capital cash limit

Included in main constuction costs

1,269,200


Leicester Academy 10) Professional Fees Stage D Cost Plan - Section 6 GIA 7914m2

April 2005


Total £ Notes

Professional Fees 100.00 203 1,607,000




10) Professional Fees GIA 7914m2

Professional Fees


£ Total

£ Notes

Professional Fees on Construction Works @ 13%

Allowance for professional fees on Fixed furniture

Allowance for Professional Fees on Loose FF&E

Allowance for Professional Fees on Fixed FF&E

Allowance for Professional Fees on Chaplaincy Loose FF&E@ 13%

Allowance for specialist Professional Fees

Allowance for Clerk of Works

item

item

item

item

item

item

1436240

61442

30000

75000

5000

1,436,000

61,000

30,000

75,000

5,000

as DfES Cash limit Sheet

as DfES Cash Limit Sheet

as DfES Cash Limit Sheet

Included in item 1

See list of abnormals

Excluded




15) Add Schedule of Abnormals GIA 7914m2


Total £ Notes

Abnormals Associated with the Marv Linwood School Site

Abnormals 63.34 221 1,747,000

Main Contractor's Preliminaries, Overheads & Profit (14%) 8.88 31 245,000

Design Reserve (3%) 2.18 8 60,000

On Site Construction Contingency (3%) 2.18 8 60,000

Allowance for Tender Price Inflation to start on site - included

Professional Fees 9.93 35 274,000

VAT on Professional Fees (17.5%) 1.74 6 48,000

VAT on Demolition Phase 3.05 11 84,000 Partly funding VAT on Carpets

Specialist Fee Abnormals 7.40 26 204,000

VAT on Specialist Fees 1.31 5 36,000

Total Carried to Summary 100.00 351 2,758,000 J




Abnormals

1 Ref Description

I Quantity

I Unit

Rate £

Total £ Notes |

Abnormals connected with Site toDoaraDhv I I

I I

I I

1 Earthmoving to reduce levels; assumes building is built to exsiting ground contours, spoil disposed off site

I I

1902

I I

m 3

I I

25 47,550

Based on calcualtions provided by Buro Happold.

2 Allowance for reducing levels across site

I

I I I

item

I

I I I

See site wide abnormals

3 Concretre retaining walls to form 'step' foundations

I

188

I

m 2

I

250

I

47,000 Includes drainage behing wall

4 Additional shear walls due to increased storey heights to Phases 2 & 3

I 25

I m2

I 150 3,750

5 Additional external facade due to increased storey heights to Phases 2 & 3

I 325

I m2

I 350 113,750

Average rate

6 Additonal funding for the additional areas taken up by the ramps (included as a result of stepping the building)

I

I I I I I

I I

m2

I

I I I I I

Included within construction costs following revised CCL 25 February 2005

7 Allowance for additional below ground drainage works 1 item 25000 25,000

8 Internal ramps to address DDA requirements due to ' stepped' construction

I 3

I n r I

I 10000 30,000

9 Additional height of internal partitions due to building stepping

I

I 1

I

I item

I

I 25000

I

25,000

I Demolition and Decontamination Works

I I I

I I I

I I I

10 Demolition of existing school and buildings on site, including backfilling excavations. Asbestos removal based on Type 2 survey (risk item)

I I

1

I I

item

I I

425000 425,000

11 Removal of existing below ground services including isolations at the perimeter of the site

I 1

I item

I 35000 35,000

12 Removal of existing trees, shrubs and the like 1 item 10000 10,000

13 Treatment to deal with Radon gas I I

item I I

Excluded

14 Provision of providing new Bat roost following survey by FPCR

I I

j 1

I I

I item

I I

I 25000

I I

25,000 Confirmation required from CSPM. Phasing of demos excluded.

I Substructure Works (excludes ChaDlaincv Centre)

I I I

I I I

I I I

15 Omit base allowance for substructure -7675 m2 73 -560,275

Carried forward I I

I I

I I 226,775




Abnormals

Ref I

Description I I I Quantity Unit

Rate £

Total £ Notes

Brought forward I I I I I I

226,775

16 Excavation for pad foundations, including disposal on site

I I I m3

Included in foundation rate

17 Mass concrete pad foundations, C30 concrete 3.5m x 3.5m x 1.6m, including formwork and blinding

I I I 608 m3 190 115,520

18 Mass concrete pad foundations, C30 concrete, 2.6m x 2.6m x 1.5m, including formwork and blinding 639 m3 190 121,410

19 Mass concrete pad foundations, C30 concrete, 1.8m x 1,8m x 1.3m, including formwork and blinding

I I I 202 m3 190 38,380

20 Mass concrete foundations, C30 concrete, 4m x 5m x 1.8m, including formwork and blinding

I I I 180 m3 190 34,200

21 Mass concete strip foundations, including formwork and blinding

I

I I I 125 m3

I I I

190 23,750 See also chaplaincy split in measured works

22 Allowance for column starter bars in mass concrete pad foundations, 15kg/m3

I

I I I 23 t

I I I

1200 27,600 Based on Buro Happold calculation of 15kg/m3

23 Concrete ground bearing slab, 150mm thick including 150mm compacted hardcore, insulation, DPM and reinforcement (1 layer A193 mesh)

I I I I I I

5497 m2 65 357,305

24 Allowance for 300mm edge thickenings to ground slab, 80kg/m3, including formwork

I I I 565 m 75 42,375

25 Allowance for forming trenches and service runs within ground slab

I I I 1 item 20000 20,000

26 100mm screed to ground floor slab 5497 m2 25 137,425

27 Allowance for soft spots 1 item 25000 25,000

28 Allowance for removing obstructions

I I Other Site Works

1 item


25000 25,000

29 Concrete retaining walls 300 m 250 75,000

30 Balustrade to retaining walls, 1.1 m high

I

26 m

I I I

350 9,100 Not to total length of wall

31 Allowance for Earth banks at 1.25m high; soft grade; seeded with meadow grass

I I I

I I I 942 m2

I I I I I I I I I

20 18,840 Spoil arising from site cut


1,297,680




Abnormals I

1 Ref Description Quantity

I Unit

Rate £

Total £ Notes

Brought forward I I

1,297,680

32 Allowance for works to the Diamond Jubilee Covert -removal of contamination

1 1

1

I item

I I

3500 3,500 Based on survey information received, i 2 men for 1 week plus disposal

33 Works to existing play areas beyond site area m2 Excluded

34 Allowance for regrading existing areas to allow pitches, running track and cricket pitch to meet required

standards, minimal drainage upgrading

1

15141

I I

m2

I

5 75,705

Grass and line marking included in building costs. Using spoil arising from cut i

35 Allowance for external ramps 4 nr 10000 40,000

36 Allowance for external steps

1 1

3 nr

I I

5000 15,000

1 1 Other Buildinq Abnormals

I I I I

37 Requirements due to compliance with BB93

1 i 1

item

I I I

Included within main construction costs. Additonal funding of 1.2% confirmed i

38 Formation of the drainage interception swale due to resterictions connecting into existing sewer system, including manholes, drainage, grated drainage channels, excavation, geotextile wrapping, backfill and planting 200

I I I I

m3 225 45,000

Based on Buro Happold scope of works received 14 i January 2005

39 Inclusion of a water storage tank in lieu of using mains pressure supply. The local Water Authority have placed restrictions on the supply. 1

I I

item 15000 15,000

40 Allowance for treatment of external facades to cover compliance with BB93 due to onerous external noise conditions - additonal louvres 13

I I

m2 550 7,150

41 Ditto above but acoustic baffles to total of louvres on elevation 26

I m2 350 9,100

42 Timber panelling to South side of Phase 2 3 atria only, assumed to be 4m high 290

I m2 100 29,000

Stud partitions i measured elsewhere

43 Faceted timber panelling to entrance walls of Cntral Worship space

I

139

I m2

I

100 13,900

I Local Authoritv Traffic Improvement Works

I I I

Carried forward I I

1,551,035



15) Add Schedule of Abnormals i GIA 7914m2

Abnormals i

Ref

I

Description

I

Quantity

I

Unit Rate

£ Total

£ Notes

Brought forward I I

I I

1,551,035

44 Allowance for Section 106 Works (10 March 2005), including £5000 allowance for legal fees

I I I I

Maintainina Educational Vision for the Droiect (refer to

I

1

I I I I I l

I

item

I I I I I l

104500 Scope as agreed with

104,500 LCC.

I I I I I I I I I I I i

jFCBAdesiqn notes, dated 1 Februarv 2005) I I

I I

I I I I

45 Allowance for supply to food technology rooms, (1m3/s) This allows the food technology rooms to be located centrally and to be made a feature in keeping with the Educational vision for the project

I I I

1

I I I

item 10000

I I I I I I

10,000

46 2.4m high timber screen to separate play areas 24 m 90 2,160

47 1,8m high timber screen to separate play areas 32 m 65 2,080

48 1,5m high timber screen to separate play areas 45 m 55 2,475

49 Allowance for mechanical supply and extract ventilation to the Sports Hall to allow it to be used for exams. Natural ventialtion cannot be used due to the higher than acceptable noise level along Trenant Road

I I I

1

I I I

item 50000

See M&E for details of loading

50,000

50 Individual entrances for the 3 Phases 3 nr 5000 15,000

51 Additional paths/hard paving to facilitate separate entrances for the phases

I

I

1

I

I

item

I

10000

I

10,000

I


I I

1,747,250 j

I I I I I I I I I I I I I i I I I I I I I I







Specialist Fee Abnormals

1

Ref Description

I I I

Quantity Unit Rate

£ Total

£ Notes |

Specialist Surveys I I I I I I

I I

1 Asbestos (Level 3) 1 item 3900 3,900

2 Topographical / Utlilites 1 item 21605 21,605

3 Traffic 1 item 2325 2,325

4 Bat & Habitat 1 item 4000 4,000

5 Valuation of existing schools 1 item 3000 3,000

6 Site investigation (VHC) 1 item 900 900

7 Site investigation (Main works) 1 item 25007 25,007

8 Noise

I

1 item

I I I

2300

I

2,300

I

Statuatorv Fees

I I I I I I I I I

I I I

9 Outline Planning Permission

I

1 item

I I I

5500

I

5,500 Based on LA fee schedules

10 Detailed Planning Permission

i

1 item

i i I

11000

I

11,000 Based on LA fee schedules j

11 DEFRA licence 1 item 1500 1,500

12 BRE BREEAM Certificate

I

1 item

I I I

720

I

720

I

Other Specialist Fees

I I I I I I I I I

I I I

13 Acoustic consultants 1 item 17843 17,843

14 Building control

I I

1 item

I I I I I I

13355

I I

13,355 Based on AISL fee, which was cheaper than LA's fee

15 Fire Consultancy 1 item 9600 9,600

16 Transport Consultancy 1 item 20229 20,229

17 Security Consultancy 1 item 24200 24,200

18 BREEAM Consultancy 1 item 4715 4,715

19 Catering Consutlancy

I

1 item

I I I

I I I

To be funded from FFE budget

20 Access audit

I

1 item

I I I

2000

I

2,000

Carried forward i i i I I

173,699




Specialist Fee Abnormals


£ Total

£ Notes

21 Legal advice

Brought forward


item 30000

173,699

30,000

203,699


APPENDIX A

COPY OF SPACE PLANNING DRAWINGS

APPENDIX B

SUMMARY OF CHAPLAINCY CENTRE COSTS

APPENDIX B Leicester Academy

Stage D Cost Plan (Rev H) Summary


Summary of Chaplaincy Centre Costs

Based on the information contained within the Stage D Design Report, the below summary aims to identify the project cost of incorporating the Chaplaincy Centre into the Academy project. Full details of the split of the construction costs can be found in the detailed build up to the Stage D Cost Plan.

Element of Work £ % £/m2

Substructure 40,000 16% 167

Frame 11,000 4% 46 Upper Floors 7,000 3% 29 Roof 26,000 11% 109 Stairs nil nil nil

External Walls and Windows 55,000 23% 230

Internal Walls 12,000 5% 50

Internal Doors 3,000 1% 13

Wall finishes 7,000 3% 29

Floor finishes 10,000 4% 42 Ceiling finishes 5,000 2% 21 Fixed Furniture nil nil nil Sanitary Appliances 2,000 1% 8 Disposal Installation 3,000 1% 13

Water Installation 3,500 1% 15

Heat Source 2,800 1% 12

Space Heating and Air Treatment 10,900 4% 46

Ventilation Installation 17,100 7% 72

Electrical Services 24,200 10% 101

Gas Installation 1,000 0% 4

Lift Installation nil nil nil

Protective Installation 800 0% 3

Communications Installation 3,200 1% 13

Special Installation 1,300 1% 5

BWIC with services installation 2,000 1% 8 Sub Total 247,800 100% 1,037

Allowance for Main Contractor Preliminaries, say 14% 34,692

Total Construction Cost 282,492

Allowance for Contingencies, say 6% 16,950

Allowance for professional fees, say 13% 38,927

Allowance for loose furniture (inc Fees) 40,000

Allowance for VAT on Professional Fees 6,812

Allowance for abnormals (see attached matrix for review 58,315 by DfES) Total Project Cost of Chaplaincy Centre 443,496

Notes:-

(i) All costs are based on the Chaplaincy Centre being incorporated within the Academy project and do not reflect the cost of

building a 'stand alone' scheme.

(ii) Total GIA = 239 n f .


9.0 Project 9.1 General Issues/

Manager's Reports Project Delivery Plan

9.01 This section of the report sets out key management aspects relating to the design and construction of the project, including:

• the establishment of project monitoring, reporting and control procedures

• Master Programme to achieve the Academy opening date of September 2007

• procurement recommendations • risk / value management

Recommended next steps in developing the project beyond RIBA Stage D are also stated.

9.1 Project Execution Plan

9.1.1 The Project Execution Plan (PEP) is the core document for the management and delivery of the Leicester Academy project, defining:

• procedures for monitoring, reporting and controlling progress; • roles and responsibilities of all project participants to ensure

that everyone understands, accepts and carries out their responsibilities;

• mechanisms for audit, review and feedback, by establishing the reporting and meetings structure.


9.0 Project Manager's Reports 9.2 Programme

9.2.1 The CPM has developed a Master Programme during the feasibility stage of the project, in consultation with DfES, the Sponsors, the OPM and the Design Team. The current version of the Master Programme (rev. 06) is included in Appendix B of this report, and is based upon a single-stage 'Full Traditional' procurement route for the Main Contract, with a separate advance Demolitions Works Contract (ref. sections 9.4.2 and 9.4.3 below).

9.2.2 The Master Programme is based upon the Design Team initially preparing Production Information (RIBA Stage F) for works packages up to 80% of the total Contract value. The Cost Consultant will then progress the Tender Documentation (RIBA Stage G) for these works packages, in parallel with the Design Team completing Production Information for the remaining works packages (ie. 20% of the Contract value). As such, the tender documents submitted to tenderers will be on the basis of a full works package (except for agreed Contractor-designed works packages).

Activity 1 Milestone Key Date Staqe D Report Approval 10 February 2005 Submit Detailed Plannin&Application 11 February 2005 Complete Final Proposals {RIBA Stage E) 7 April 2005 Detailed Planninq Approval 13 May 2005 Award Demolition Contract 16 May 2005 Complete Production Information {RIBA Staqe F) 7 July 2005 Invitation to Tender (Main Construction) 5 August 2005 Contract Award (Main Construction) 7 October 2005 Contract Commencement Date (Main Construction) 7 November 2005 Practical Completion 4 May 2007 Academy Opening early September 2007

9.2.2 The key milestone dates for 'critical path' activities, as set out in the Master Programme, are summarised as follows:

9.2.3 A fundamental assumption in the Master Programme is that the Academy will be completed within a single-stage construction period. DfES had previously questioned whether there is potential for a staged handover of the Academy, given that Phase 3 would initially be unoccupied. However, it has since been confirmed that Year 9 pupils (ie. the first year of Phase 3) will occupy the new building in the first academic year (2007-8). As such, there would no benefit in adopting a phased approach to the Academy construction. Davis Langdon estimate that the reduction in operating costs could be in the order of £???. However, it is likely that the Academy's revenue budget would also be reduced accordingly during this period.

9.2.4 It is therefore recommended that the Academy is constructed as a single-stage building operation, accepting that part of the Phase 3 element of the building will remain unoccupied during the initial two years (2007-8 and 2008-9). However, timescales relating to the provision of ICT and FF&E equipment for Phase 3 will need to be reviewed closely with the Principal (once appointed), to ensure that risks to the Academy (eg. security of equipment, potential for ICT equipment to become obsolete) are minimised.

9.2.5 In educational terms, there would also be significant disadvantages with such an approach, namely:

• problems with access to outdoor sports facilities

• increased duties for school keeper and cleaning staff in the occupied part of the building

• lack of access to specialist areas for Phase 2 pupils particularly (ie. one of the main advantages educationally for Phase 2 pupils).

• specialist resources would have to be purchased to offer the full curriculum to Phase 2 pupils in 2007, and a phased approach would require siting, storing and re-siting of such equipment and fixtures.

• increased noise and disruption in the early operational stages of the new Academy, when it will be most important for the Principal and staff to develop and establish systems and processes to support a successful start for pupils and staff.

9.2.6 In reviewing the advantages and disadvantages of this approach, the Design Team and educational consultants have concluded that such proposals would not be viable, and the potential savings in initial operating costs would be outweighed by the additional capital costs, notwithstanding the significant health and safety risks to pupils and other users of the Academy whilst the second phase of construction is completed in such close proximity. It is therefore recommended that the Academy is constructed as a single-stage building operation, accepting that the Phase 3 element of the building will remain unoccupied for two academic years (2007-8 and 2008-9). However, timescales relating to the provision of ICT and FF&E equipment for Phase 3 will need to be reviewed closely with the Principal (once appointed), to ensure that risks to the Academy (eg. security of equipment, potential for ICT equipment to become obsolete) are minimised.

9.2.7 The Master Programme will be developed further during the implementation phase, to take into account any emerging project issues. However, given the current scope of project requirements, the target Academy opening date in early September 2007 remains achievable.


9.0 Project Manager's Reports 9.2 Programme


9.0 Project Manager's Reports 9.3 Procurement options/ recommendations

9.3.1. Selection of an appropriate procurement process for implementation of the Leicester Academy project requires a careful assessment of client priorities with regards to the following considerations:

• constraints on delivering the project within a stipulated period • required level of cost certainty at the point of Contract award • ability to control costs arising from project changes during

construction • requirement to retain control over design and construction

quality • allocation of risks between the contract parties (ie. Trust and

Contractor).

9.3.2 During the early part of the feasibility phase, project team members set out their perception of the relative priorities of quality, cost and programme for this project. Overall, the project team placed equal priority on these three criteria, and this has served to inform the decision on an appropriate procurement process.

In consideration of the equal priority weightings given to quality, cost certainty and programme by the project team, it is proposed that a Full Traditional procurement route is adopted. The CPM and Design Team have reviewed the project timescales, and consider that such an approach is viable with no overlap between the main design and construction periods, accepting that there will be some design elements under the Contractor's responsibility.

A two-stage approach would be possible to allow an earlier start-on-site and to enable the selected Contractor to advise the design team on construction issues, however this would not provide the same degree of cost certainty as a single-stage approach prior to commencement of the works.

9.3.3 A number of procurement routes are available, each of which offer advantages and disadvantages, as summarised below:

Procurement Route

Advantages Disadvantages

Full Tradi t ional

Provides greatest level of cost certainty, with a completed design scheme before Contract is awarded.

Sufficient time must be allowed in the programme for completing the full design in advance of the mein construction works.

Accelerated Tradit ional

Overlapping part of the design work with the start of construction serves to reduce the overall programme, whilst still providing a high level of cost certainty before the Contract is awarded. Also provides a higher degree of post-Contract cost control.

Cost certainty to the same level as the Full Traditional approach is not established until approximately 20% into the construction programme.

Design & Bui ld

Transfers significant risks to the Contractor.

Costs of post-Contract changes can be significant. Requirement to establish detailed and robust Employer's Requirements to minimise risks of change later. Novation of design team to Contractor reduces level of control over design team and quality.

Const ruct ion Management

Allows earlier start-on-site, with the client appointingi trade contractors directly as opposed to their appointment' via a Main Contractor.

Significant workload for client team. Construction Manager makes no commitment to a price or programme at any lime in the process, and thus financial risks fall to the Client throughout the construction period.


9.0 Project Manager's Reports 9.4 Performance specified and specialist packages

9.4.1 It is anticipated that the Main Contractor will manage the delivery of the scheme through the appointment of several specialist sub-contractors, who in turn will be responsible for delivering particular construction packages including:

9.4.2 Performance Specified and Specialist may include:

9.4.3 Performance Specified Works requiring an element of Contractors Design:

• Demolition • Detailing of gas impermeable membrane • Connection design in structural steel frames • Fire protection • Corrosion protection to steel frame • Proprietary pre-cast concrete floor units • Pre-cast concrete and proprietary stairs • Purlins, sheeting rails and connections • Secondary support steelwork supporting cladding systems and

their fixings back to primary structure • Profiled structural roof deck • Secondary steelwork items and their fixings back to primary

structure, as follows: balustrading and handrails, shading screens, building services supports, aerials, signage and signboards, lift guides, partition frames, access walkways, ladders, cleaning gantries, fall arrest systems, lighting grids, cooker hoods, ceiling systems, sports equipment, roller shutters

• Wind and parapet posts for masonry restraint • Brickwork support angles • Underground surface water installations • Guttering • Access controls • Intruder alarms • Builders' work information including access points and risers • Selection of antivibration mountings • Selection of thermal expansion provision • Temporary facilities for flushing/commissioning etc • Trace heating

9.4.4 Contractor Design Works

• Reinforcement detailing to in situ concrete • Piling - not likely to be required on this project • Landscaping works, Permeable block paving • Finishing of fair-faced concrete surfaces • Finishing of pre-cast concrete floor units and stairs in exposed

areas

• Curtain walling / windows • Metal stud external wall systems and other cladding systems and

their fixings back to the primary structure • Guard rails and their fixings back to primary structure • Temporary works, including any temporary embedded retaining

walls • All weather pitches MUGA • Contamination remediation • Metal fabrication elements, including gates, Balustrading and

fencing • Lightning protection • CCTV • Fire alarms • Flues and chimneys • Underfloor heating systems • BMS systems, including interconnecting wiring and final sensor

locations

• Intruder alarm • Access Control • Lighting control • Lightning protection

9.4.5 During the feasibility stage, DfES questioned whether the proposed demolition works package could be incorporated within the main construction contract, in order to reduce overall capital costs by avoiding VAT payments. DL estimate that the overall demolition works package is likely to be in the order of £550k in value including asbestos removal, with associated VAT costs being approximately £96k.

9.4.6 The Design Team has reviewed the potential for combining the demolition works package with the Main Construction Contract, and the following disadvantages are foreseen:

• requirement to appoint the Main Contractor under a two-Stage procurement process, frstly to manage and oversee the demolition works and provide input during finalisation of the design, to be followed by the formal Contract Award. DL estimate that the first-stage pre-construction fee incurred would be in the order of £200k, assuming a 2% fee is payable, which could be avoided under the proposed single-stage procurement route.

• any project delays incurred during the demolition works, which are outside the control of the Main Contractor, could lead to signifcant cost risks through extensions of time and claims on the entire Contract. Separate procurement of the demolition works would limit such risks by separating out the two packages.

In conclusion, the proposal to combine the demolitions works with the Main Contract is not recommended. Although capital cost savings may be achieved through reduced VAT payments, there would be additional costs incurred due to the first-stage pre-construction fee, in addition to the significant additional risks of project delays during demolition affecting the Main Contract.


9.0 Project Manager's Reports 9.5 Risk and Value Management

9.5.1 Strategic, tactical and operational risks to the project are being managed jointly by the OPM and CPM. In particular, the OPM is managing risks related to the overall project strategy (eg. risks related to stakeholder input, political implications, community consultation, land transfer), whereas the CPM is more concerned specifically with delivery-related quality / cost / programme risks associated with the design and construction process. This section relates only to those risks being managed by the CPM.

9.5.2 The approach to Risk Management is set out in detail in the current version of the Project Execution Plan (Section 12) accompanying this Stage D Report, and is in accordance with the latest DfES Risk Management procedures applicable to the Academies Programme-

9.5.3 The Project Risk Register was prepared to record the output from an initial Risk Workshop in September 2004, including confirmation of risk owners. Several risk review meetings have since taken place with DfES and the Design Team to update the Register and to monitor progress with risk mitigation measures. Project risks will continue to be monitored through the implementation phase and updated versions of the Risk Register will be included in future CPM Progress Reports. The current version of the Project Risk Register is included in Appendix C of this report.

9.5.4 A key project objective is to deliver an Academy that offers value for money by optimising the use of available resources to deliver the Sponsors' vision, ethos and functional requirements.

9.5.5 The approach to Value Management is set out in detail in the current version of the Project Execution Plan (Section 13) accompanying this Stage D Report.

9.5.6 A value management workshop was held in October 2004, and a Value Improvement Register (VIR) was prepared to the record the output, including action owners. The ideas recorded within the VIR have provided a focus for the Design Team as it has worked towards delivering a best value scheme within the available budget. The VIR prepared following this workshop is included in Appendix D of this report. Since then, discussions on value improvement have taken place at both Design Team Meetings and Client Briefing Meetings to ensure that the Design Team remain focused upon safeguarding the key aims and objectives underpinning the project. The VIR will continue to be used to monitor and control the achievement of best value throughout the implementation phase.




9.0 Project Manager's Reports 9.6 Recommended Next Steps

9.6.1 On the basis that the RIBA Stage D Report is approved at the Project Steering Group Meeting on 10 t f l February 2005, it is envisaged that the document will be submitted, along with the other Annexes, during mid-February 2005 for Funding Approval. The Design Team will then immediately commence RIBA Stage E (Final Proposals). In parallel with this process, the scope of Demolition Works will be developed to enable tender invitations to be issued in early March 2005.

9.6.2 An Outline Planning Application was submitted to Leicester City Council's Planners at the end of October 2004, and approval was secured (with conditions) at the Planning Committee Meeting on 18'h January 2005. At a meeting with the Planners on 20'^ January 2005 it was noted that a 13-week period was required for processing the Detailed Planning Application. As such, the Detailed Planning Application will need to be submitted in mid-February 2005, albeit that the statutory period is only 8 weeks. Nevertheless, the required 13-week period should enable a formal decision by the Planners to be confirmed by mid-May 2005, after which the Demolition Works Contract can be awarded.




10.0 Statutory Authorities 10.1 Planning

Outline Planning Approval was obtained at the Leicester City Council Planning Committee meeting on 18th January 2005. The proposals were for use and access (Academy development and chaplaincy Centre and alterations to vehicular access).

The following conditions which require details to be submitted to and approved by the Local Planning Authority before developments commences on the relevant part of the development or before the use first commences.

Planning Conditions:

1. Application of approval of reserved matters within 3 years of Outline Planning.

2. Details of siting, design, external appearance of building and site landscaping.

3. The Academy buildings shall not be sited on the existing playing fields or green area, and generally will be restricted to the area of existing buildings and playgrounds.

4. Approval of a Transport Plan incorporating cycle / pedestrian proposals

5. Details of improvement to the highway junctions at Saffron Lane/ Sturdee Road, Saffron lane/ Trenant Road and Stonesby Avenue/ Trenant Road.

6. Details of off-site traffic calming measures, including mini-roundabouts and footway extensions.

7. Details of service access off Saffron Lane and amendments to vehicular access to Trenant Road.

8. School not to be occupied before redundant vehicular access on Trenant Road is blocked and footway crossings, damaged or altered areas of footway have been reinstated.

9. Uses and opening hours of Chaplaincy Centre.

NOTE: No permission is granted for the level of parking indicated and this will be considered as part of the Travel Plan.

A Reserved Matters Planning Application dealing with the above conditions will be submitted on 11 February 2005, to enable a formal decision by mid-May 2005.

A regular series of meetings have been held with the planners to update them on the design of the Academy. In general the only comments have been on the visibility of the service yard, issues on highways and the environmental credentials of the scheme. The proposal is to meet with the planners once more prior to planning to table a drat set of the final planning drawings and associated drawings.


10.0 Statutory Authorities 10.2 Transport Plan

Denis Wilson Partnership submitted their DRAFT Traffic Impact Assessment and Green Travel Plan as part of the Outline Planning Application on 29 October 2004. The proposals detailed in these reports are as follows:

« Traffic calming to Trenant Road including pedestrian crossings and raised junctions

• Modification of Saffron Lane / Trenant Road Junction incorporating a right turn lane into Trenant Road

• Modifications to Saffron Lane / Sturdee Road junction -slightly widening the road to incorporate two lanes joining Saffron Lane [one right and one left turn]

The Highways Department (Local Authority] has expressed a desire that all Academy traffic and drop-off is dealt with within the site. As a result Denis Wilson are proposing using the existing access point off Trenant Road to access a parking and drop-off area with a one-way loop road. This allows for

separate Phase 1 and 2 drop-offs 60 staff parking 24 visitors parking 12 drop-off spaces 6 disabled cycle storage for 180 cycles to the south accessed via a separate cycle path and gate

Denis Wilson Partnership was initially appointed only to prepare the above reports. Capita Symonds are currently negotiating with them to extend their appointment to work up these off-site highways works and liaise with the LCC to decide on the extent of these works. It should be noted that this process can run parallel with the Detail Planning Application due to be submitted 11 February 2005.

The public consultation to date has not been that thorough and there is an increasing negative feeling amongst the local communities. The feeling is that the existing primary schools in the area will suffer at the expense of the Academy. There has been some discrepancies as to the catchment areas for the Academy.

Subsequently Denis Wilson, FCBA and Capita Symonds have met with LCC Highways Department on 20 January 2005 where these proposals were discussed in further detail. Outline Planning Approval was granted with a number of conditions detailed in Section 10.1.

• Agreement of the scope of any supplementary analysis with LCC

• A site photo survey to review all the LCC suggested improvements

• The production of supplementary analysis report for discussion with LCC outlining our findings and detailing relevant improvements.

• Obtain initial information on the statutory services plant locations at the junctions which are to be improved.

• Offer initial cost estimates for the each of the improvement schemes put forward.

• Meeting / negotiation with LCC to agree scope of works.



1.0 CDSVt Report & Risk Assessments 11.1 Report by Planning Supervisor

Design Stage D Health and Safety Statement


11.0 CDM Report & Risk Assessments 11.1 Report by Planning Supervisor

1. Introduction

Buro Happold Ltd are appointed by Department for Education & Skills to act as the Planning Supervisors for the City Academy, Leicester project.

As Planning Supervisors for this Project, Buro Happold are required by Regulation 15(1) of the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 1994, to produce a Health and Safety Plan during the design or pre-tender period. This Health and Safety Plan brings together Health and Safety information from the Client, Designers (Direct or Novated) and where appropriate the Planning Supervisor.

2. Notification to the HSE

Initial notification to the HSE as required by Regulation 7 of the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations was issued on 17 t h August 2004.

3. Health and Safety Hazard Inventory

During the design development stage of the project, a hazard inventory will be developed which records residual health and safety issues that have been considered during the design process but may still represent a risk at construction and post-construction stages of the project. This will form the basis for the Design Stage Health & Safety Plan.

At present the following potential hazards have been identified which will be considered in the design process:

• Restricted site access from residential areas, potential for making transportation of large loads difficult.

• Phasing of works creating potential for conflict on access/egress routes for occupiers and construction works.

• Segregation of the public from goods delivery.

• Demolition of existing buildings and presence of asbestos.

• Changes of level of the site.

• Existing buried services.

• Possible contamination of existing school building drains.

• Possible ground contamination and presence of radon

• Safe access at leading edges of roof and high level services for construction, cleaning and maintenance.

• Safe access to high level services for construction, cleaning and maintenance.

• Safe access to roof lights for construction, cleaning and maintenance

• Construction noise and dust with regard to the close proximity of residential areas.

• Traffic hazards and management plan

• Erection of steel frame structures - falls from height, necessity to use safety nets.

• Site security generally

• Hazards associated with the Covert

4. Design Team Liaison

Buro Happold has initiated discussions with the design team to encourage and facilitate the process of hazard and risk identification, assessment and avoidance. This will be further complimented by CDM design workshops to be held during the remainder of the design period. Further issues such as construction techniques, materials and programming will also be considered as the design progresses.

5. Maintenance Access Strategy

Buro Happold will liaise with the design team throughout the remainder of the design period to establish maintenance access strategy requirements particularly to those issues relating to working at height.

6. Works to date

Health & Safety Plan has been prepared for the Ground Investigation works and risk assessments provided for the Bat & Habitat surveys. Work has been undertaken giving due consideration for the existing presence of asbestos. Health & Safety documentation will be prepared for the demolition works at commencement of Design Stage C.


12=0 Drawings and Drawing Register

Architectural Drawings Structural Drawings Landscape Drawings

1242/SU/100 Topograhical Survey Met Surveys S/SK/100 Foundation Plan 198/D/01 External Layout 1242/P/100 Existing Site Plan S/SK/101 Ground Floor Plan 198/D/02 External Layout 1242/P/102 Proposed Overall Site Plan S/SK/102 First Floor Plan 198/D/03 External Phasing 1242/P/103 Site Security Diagram S/SK/103 Roof Layout 198/D/04 External layout 1242/P/105 Area Schedule S/SK/104 Upper Roof Layout 1242/P/110* Ground Floor Plan S/SK/200 Sections and Details Acoustic Drawings 1242/P/111 First Floor Plan S/SK/300 Elevations and Details

Acoustic Drawings

1242/P/112 Roof Plan B147/D01/A Ground Floor Plan 1242/P/113 Security Plan Ground Floor Plan Mechanical & Electrical Drawings B147/D01/B First Floor Plan 1242/P/114 Seating Plan First Floor Plans B147/D02/A Ground Floor Plan 1242/P/120 Site Sections CSK003 Cut and Fill Quantities B147/D02/B First Floor Plan 1242/P/121 Site Sections CSK004 Preliminary Drainage Layout 1242/P/123 Sections - Through Phase 2 - Through Circulations

Preliminary Drainage Layout

1242/P/124 Sections - Through Phase 1 - Through Dining 1242/P/125 Sections -1242/P/126 Sections - Through Phase 2 1242/P/130 Site Elevations - North West and South East 1242/P/131 Site Elevations 2 - North West and South East 1242/P/131 Site Elevations 3 - North West and South East 1242/P/140 Typical bay Study - Phase 1 1242/P/141 Typical bay Study - Phase 3



fir

Br

fir

fir fir B E Z Z 3 Q

w fir fir fir Re

sa.

B S . Wm

rrr

BBJ sotABMajtBaaw

SXi, QDt»

PHASE 3

fSxTt SCi LABUCLASaMK

fJfJi ?S«?i

OEHOAMMK

Qifi fin. KlIAIMCUMMt SOI

H Rffln J9T fir

• a n i i o u .

sw tlfiR

• a n i i o u .

lifn

| trows j

p w « I M rtwu.

C A T E R I N G A N D A D M I N I S T R A T I O N

ESS-..

SK

rompoyy

ar-ras. rsr r t sn

C E N T R A L R E S O U R C E S

Kfrma

R E M A I N I N G N O N - N E T A R E A S

GENERALTEACHING SPACES

SPECIALIST TEACHING

LARGE FLEXIBLE TEACHING 8MCES

GENERAL CORE SPACES

SUPPORT SPACES FOR TEACHING

REMAN NO NON-NET AREAS

1242/ P/105 A k » tjOOttM

O t ^ K p i W a A l

MhBmwy ToN BnOo* noa9 M h BA1 7DE

LBCWTVR CRY ACAOCMY JoWDwbWq No 1 2 4 2 / P / 1 2 0

1 2DO (1 400 O AS)

V d M M M t M m d H i r

Ortgmtf ptnMd «A1

1 M i B n w y Tod Bndps Road MtBA17DE

1 2 4 2 / P / 1 2 1

1200 (1:4000 AS)

z .

iflcesmi cmr ACAOEwr

•CC1KM IMtOUOH PHMS •

1 2 4 2 / P / 1 2 3 A

Sca» 1:100(1:200 Q AS) DM

LEICESTER CfTY ACADEMY 1242/P/124 A

r 1S2/P/125

UWUIStCfTY ACADEMY ^ 2 4 2 / P / 1 2 6 A

NORTH WEST ELEVATION 1 - PHASE I AND HALLS ^ i H ^ S v ^

M B A 1 7 D E

f OUSHBB

* M » W K * N O A M M M L A U U I U C N V A C A O A R R 1242/P/130 B STECLFFVATKMS SEA* 1200(1 :400 QA3) NORTH M T AND TOUTM BAST OM* DEC2004

D O N N A

OTPML P T * 0 BA1

1242/P/131

NORTH WMT AND SOUTH CAST

SOUTH WEST ELEVATION - SPORTS HALL AND PHASE II

LBUmWgTY ACADEMY

STY ELBVATOM 1

1242/P/132

Or uier»«d«Ai

JeMkwftvNo < m r f f « l L D C C M X cm ACADEMY 1242/ P/140 A RMCAL BAY STUDY

Soli 1 JO OAS M JANUS

TENETKTF* Al taw « b* d * M I M Mi

eon Donatio

JoMhantig No *nw* iw«

1242/P/141 A

I I I I I I I I I I

J" — J" — J" — \ r 11 I T 1 11

i U I— I —LI —L

t r t r i

REF. SIZE GRADE

C1 225* {C60) C2 300* (CM) C3 <50* (CM) C4 600x250 (CM) C5 900)300 (CM) C6 1350x250 (CM)

STEEL

REF. SIZE GRADE SI 305*305x137 JC (S275) S2 2Q3i203«71 UC (S275)

NOTFS: 1. ALL REWFORCED CONCRETE TO BE GRADE MO, EXCEPT COLUMNS WHICH ARE TO BE GRACE C60. 2. All MASS CONCRETE TO K GRADE C30 3. ALLOW FOR DOWELLED SHEAR COWCCTORS AT AU. JUNCTDNS BETWEEN R.C. SJfiS AT MOVEMENT JOINTS (ANCON DSDQ7S 0 300 CRS OR SNILAR APPROVED)

ROOF BEAM SCHEDULE

STEEL

REF. SIZE GRADE

RA 762x267*147 UB (S275) RB 356x171(51 UB (S?75) RC 203x203xW UC (S275) RD 350x250x12.5 RKS (S275) RE 356*366x129 UC (S275) RF 203x203x71 UC (S275)

MOTES: 1. ALL REINFORCED CONCRETE TO BE GRADE 040. EXCEPT COLUMNS WHICH ARE TO BE GRADE C60.

"STJS Buro Happold ^ ^ ^ Oonaitlng D iy tH i i

U^BFWLqal GtaMoll

008946 "S/SK/104

SECTION 0 5 - 0 5 . SECTION 0 6 - 0 6 . , SECTION 07 -07 , ,

(CHD) (Cffl

+85,900 ^ aMMS ÂAAAAAAOTPgJ —[

SECTION 0 9 - 0 9 , .

Ht MC OF KI. INI

CMUM M1BWL

FGL-500 A80SC m.

i y t i H S

J , — a s — | — i a — ]

SECTION 04 -04 . .

SECTION 0 8 - 0 8 , .

Buro Happold 1 OonttriQ Enêere

008946 S/SK/200

i i > i n i » a m n n f B M A H & U A Ml

- •»— POLL/SOIL DRAIN 150«> AV. DEPTH 2.0M •>• SURFACE WATER DRAIN

1S0y EXCEPT WHERE SHOWN AV. DEPTH 17SM RAIN WATER DOWNPIPfc

S WATER PUMPING STATION (TO DRAIN SURFACE WATER STORAGE) CAPACITY 15L/5 5MHEAD PACKAGED INSTALLATION 2 PUMPS - DUTV/STANDBY FULLY AUTOMAIC a SUMP CAPACITY 1M* UNDERGROUND St WAT EH STORAGE 330M* 3.0M DEEP H6PWORTH -G6CXJ1E 200' OR SIMILAR COMPLETE WITH GEO TEXTILE SURROUNO, PERFORATED INLET AND CUTLET

BASE MAP BY CHURCHMAN LANDSCAPES

m

s r J K f t > s i s i s Buro Happold Corwtttng £nginMf»

Leicestm C<y Acedem» Pra/T»ri»y Dtwnase Layout

SUM 1 400QAI

// ! S c

/ / / fi^'Y

C> O / / C ? n

r : °n

Title: External Layout Plan

Project: Leicester Academy

Client: DfES

DwgNo. 198/D/01

Scale: not to scale

Date: 01/2005

o / - ^ D '

o'

Churchman landscape architects

Kings Woile, Kings Road, Teddington, London, TW11 OQB

Tel: 020 8977 4549 Fax: 020 8977 7974 Email: [email protected]

mailto:[email protected]

• • • • • •

Buro Happold

008946 Leicester City Academy Leicester City Academy Stage D daylighting report Stage D Job no 008946 February 2005

Revision 00

Buro Happold

Revision Description Issued by Date Checked

00 Stage D APW 07-02-05 MJE

This report has been prepared for the sole benefit, use and information of DfES, David

Samworth and the Bishop of Leicester for the purposes set out in the report or instructions

commissioning it. The liability of Buro Happold Limited in respect of the information

contained in the report will not extend to any third party.

Leicester City Academy Stage D daylighting report BH_daylighting analysis

• • • • • •

author Andrew Williams

signature

date 07-02-05

approved Mike Entwisle

signature

date 07-02-05

Report Revision 00 February 2005

Page 2 of 11

Buro Happold

Contents

1 Daylighting - the requirements 4

2 Classrooms 5

2.1 Phase 1 5

2.2 Phases II and III 6

3 Communal spaces and Atria 8

Leicester City Academy Stage D day lighting report BH_daylighting analysis


Page 3 of 11

Buro Happold

1 Daylighting - the requirements

This report has been compiled to outline the initial daylighting modelling carried out for the

RIBA stage D submission for Leicester City Academy. The Software used was IES, and a

selection of rooms were modelled based on Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects drawing

numbers 1242/P/110D, 111D, 112D, 120 A, 121A, 123 A, 125 A, 126A, 131A and 132A

DfES BB87's summary of the requirements for daylighting in schools is as follows;

Where possible, priority should be given to design for daylight as the main source of light in

working areas. The uniformity ratio (minimum/average daylight factor} of the daylight should

be in the range 0.3 to 0.4 for side-lit rooms. Where spaces are top-lit, eg atria, then higher

uniformities should be expected of the order of 0.7. The uniformity ratio (minimum/average

maintained illuminancej of the electric lighting in teaching areas should be not less than 0.8

over the task area. Teaching spaces should have views out except in special circumstances. A

minimum glazed area of 20% of the internal elevation of the exterior wall is recommended to

provide adequate views out.

The daylight factor is the ratio between internal and external lighting levels, expressed as a

percentage. For instance, the external daylight level on a typical overcast day is typically

6000 lux. The required working light level for a classroom is 300 lux, which equates to a

daylight factor of 300/6000=5% if the space is to be daylit.

Areas that have a daylight factor of >5% are unlikely to require artificial lighting for much of

the year. Daylight factors of between 2 and 5% enable areas to be daylit for a substantial part

of the year. In both cases these assume a normal school day.

We have modelled a series of classrooms as indicative of the general areas in the schools, and

in addition a selection of the main atrium spaces. The results are contained on the following

pages.

At this stage we have not investigated the uniformity of the daylighting, as this depends

primarily on where the working plane occurs in the room and corner effects can give results

which prove not to be applicable.

All models assume clear double glazing to classrooms, and atrium glazing with a daylight

transmission factor of approximately 50%. Surface reflectances are assumed to be 0.90


(ceiling), 0.718 (walls) and 0.5B2 (floor). These values are high, and we will investigate how to

achieve them during stage E with the architects.


Page 4 of 11

• • • • •

Buro Happold

2 Classrooms

2.1 P h a s e 1

Two classrooms have been modelled in phase 1. These are a typical north facing room and

the room at the north eastern extremity of the building. The former of these has a linear roof

light at the rear of the room, whereas the latter is principally lit from a corner glazed section,

with limited borrowed daylight from the Phase 1 communal area.

The diagrams showing daylight level follow, but the summary table is as follows;

Room Average Daylight

factor (DF)

Approximate % of

classroom >5% DF

Approximate % of

classroom >2% DF

%Typical classroom 5.22 37% 90%

End classroom 4.53 25% 55%

It is clear that the rooflights at the corridor end of the classroom are increasing the average

daylight level but also aiding uniformity (see diagrams). Uniformity in the end classroom

would be increased by the addition of a rooflight or window close to the corridor.

Leicester City Academy Stage D daylighting report BH_daylighting analysis

Figure 2.1 North Facing Room Figure 2,2 North Eastern Corner Room


Page 5 of 11

Buro Happold

Phases It and III

Two classrooms have been modelled in each of phases II and III. These are the year 4 corner

classroom, a typical phase 2 ground floor room and a phase III corner art classroom. These

spaces are all fundamentally side lit, although the corner art class room receives additional

daylight from windows on one end.

Perspective images and false colour plans follow, but the summary table is as follows;


factor (DF)

Approximate % of

classroom >5% DF

Approximate % of

classroom >2% DF

Year 4 corner room 3.94 30% 60%

Typical phase III ground

floor classroom

2.32 20% 50%

Phase III comer art

classroom

3.71 20% 65%

It is clear that these rooms are well daylit near the windows, but that daylight levels at the rear

of the classrooms are insufficient to provide a well daylit environment for much of the year.

This is not uncommon in schools, particularly on lower floors. The use of rooflights in the first

floor classrooms was considered during stage D but rejected on ground of cost.


• • • • • •

Figure 2.3 - Comer Class Room

Figure 2.4 - Comer Class Room Glare Perspective


Page 6 of 11

Buro Happold



Page 7 of 11

Buro Happold

3 Communal spaces and Atria

The communal and atrium spaces form the hubs around which the school will work , acting as

breakout informal working spaces, ICT zones, circulation, assembly and dining areas. The

characteristics of the spaces vary markedly between the phase I area, with its horizontal

rooflights, through the double height dining area to the Phase II and III atria with the sloping

rooflights with vertical glazing. Daylighting levels of 5 -10% can "lift" the feeling of atrium

spaces, but they are often subject to solar overheating and this must be borne in mind.

Uniformity is less important and contrast can often heighten visual interest. Please note that

these areas have been modelled assuming a daylight transmission factor of 50%.

Perspective images and false colour plans follow, but the summary table is as follows;


factor (DF)

Approximate % of

space >5% DF

Approximate % of

space >2% DF

Phase I communal space 5.98 45% B5%

Dining atrium 1.62 5% 60%

Phase II atrium - ground

floor

2.07 25% 55%

Phase II atrium - first floor 4.9 65% 90%


Figure 3.1 - Phase 1 Communal Space

Figure 3.2 - Phase 1 Communal Space Glare Perspective


Page 8 of 11

Buro Happold

Figure 3.4 - Dining Area Glare Perspective



Page 9 of 11

Buro Happold


Report Revision 00 February 2005 Page 10 of 11

DESIGN NOTE 1

Project

Subject

Author

Signed

Date

008946 Leicester City Academy

Preliminary Study of A Typical Classroom - Single Sided Ventilation

S Wright

S Wright

07.02.05

Approved

Signed

Date

Buro Happold C o S A

1 Introduction

This Design Note summarises the results of our analysis of a typical upper floor classroom and compares those results to the criteria set out in DfES document BB87. DfES guide BB87 identifies a requirement for air temperatures within the classrooms not to exceed 28°C for more than 80 hours during the occupation of the school. Specific issues addressed are the openable area of windows and louvers and the specification of the glazing system.

The analysis software uses 'real' weather data, in this case the Test Reference Year' (TRY) prepared by the CIBSE and identified in BB87 as the weather set to be used in the analysis of summer-time temperatures in school buildings. This includes short periods of very hot weather during what would be term time in schools.

The weather set includes a week at the end of June which experiences peak daily temperatures between 25.9 degC and 30.1 degC. A summary of the number of hours 28 degC is exceeded (during normal school days) throughout the summer is provided, which can be compared directly with the criteria set out in BB87.

2 Executive Summary

Results show that the current configuration of openable windows and louvers combined with non-solar control glazing on a southerly orientation falls outside of BB87 requirements. Also the external dry bulb to internal peak temperature difference is above what we would consider good practice (2.5 degC compared to a preferred limit of about 2 degC). The use of a solar control glazing brings these rooms within BB87 requirements (solar control glazing has been modelled as Guardian Luxguard SN63). Alternatively, non-solar control glazing when combined with an increased openable area of windows brings these classrooms within BB87 requirements (by a small margin). The analysis assumes that night-time ventilation will be possible through the louver section (windows are assumed to be shut outside of normal hours) The effect of blinds has been included in the analysis as it is assumed these will be required at times for glare control. The model includes a 60% reduction in free area to allow for the effect of the blinds (assumed to be a roller blind) which reduces airflow through openable windows. Analysis indicates a reduction of approximately 40% in airflow through openable windows with blinds down.

008946 Leicester City Academy DN1 Preliminary Study of a Typical Classroom - Single Sided Ventilation

Revision 00 Page 1 of 1

T February 2005

Buro Happold CoSA

3 General Classroom Ventilation Strategy

• It is assumed that openable windows on the fa9ade are not available at night or at weekends to facilitate a night cooling strategy.

• Instead louvers are provided in the elevation.

3.1 Construction Details

Construction is assumed to be medium to heavyweight (masonry walls, concrete floors, roofs ...etc), with the exception of internal partitions which are modelled as studwork filled with dense mineral fibre (for acoustic separation).

3.2 Internal Gains - classrooms

Occupancy 1 person /1,9m2 (variable with classroom size - approximately 32 people) Occupancy Gains 53W (SH) 53W (LH) Occupancy gains assume adult teachers plus 30 children (75% of adult male heat gain) at 26 degC. Small Power 13.3 W/m2 Lighting 12.0 W/m2

Small power loads assume 5 desktop PC's with TFT screens to a total of approximately 800 W per classroom (including a printer and projector/whiteboard).

Note that these are maximum values during the day (9.00am-12.00pm and 1,00pm-4.00pm). 30% of small power and occupancy gains are applied over the lunch hour and 100% of lighting gains. Lighting gains begin 1 hour earlier at 8.00 am to reflect teacher prep time before classes begin.

008946 Leicester City Academy Revision 00 DN1 Preliminary Study of a Typical Classroom - Single Sided Ventilation Page 2 of 2

f February 2005

Buro Happold CoSA

3.3 Ventilation Openings

The initial disposition of ventilation openings has been modelled as follows, based on FCBA elevations (referred to below as 'Option 1').

a non-opening window

b opening window, 0.75 x 1,70m x 30% free area (250mm opening) = 0.38m2 each (daytime only)

C louver 1.50 x 1,70m x 50% free area = 1,28m2 (daytime and night ventilation)

Additional openings were modelled as follows (Referred to below as 'Option 2').

a non-opening window

b opening window, 0.75 x 1.70m x 30% free area (250mm opening) = 0.38m2 each (daytime only)

C louver 1.50 x 1,70m x 50% free area = 1,28m2 (daytime and night ventilation)

Note that the application of blinds reduces the effective free area of windows by 60%.



71" February 2005

Buro Happold CoSA

4 Results

DfES guide BB87 identifies a requirement for air temperatures within the classrooms not to exceed 28°C for more than 80 hours during the occupation of the school. Results refer to 'Option 1' and 'Option 2' as defined above.

Air temperature (C) - hours in range > 28.00

Model Hours Peak Predicted Temperature degC *

Option 1 plus low-e glazing 95 32.1 Option 1 plus solar control glazing 60 31.4

Option 2 plus low-e glazing 78 31.8 Option 2 plus solar control glazing 53 31.2

"These temperatures occur on 28th June at 3.30pm (BST) and compare to an external dry-bulb temperature of 29.6 degC.

Option 1 is above DfES BB87 criteria. In addition the external dry bulb to internal peak temperature difference is above what we would consider good practice (2.5 degC compared to a preferred limit of about 2 degC).



71" February 2005

Title: External Layout Plan Dwg No. 198/D/02 Kings Works, Kings Road, Teddington, London, TW11 0Q6

Project: Leicester Academy Scale: not to scale Tel: 020 8977 4549

Client: DfES Date: 01/2005 Fax: 020 8977 7974 Email: [email protected]


Phase 1 Hard landscape

Phase 1 Soft landscape


Phase 2 Soft landscape


Title: External Phasing Plan Dwg No. 198/D/03

Project: Leicester Academy Scale: not to scale

Client: DfES Date: 01/2005

Kings Works, Kings Road, Teddington, London, TW11 OQB

Tel: 020 8977 4549 Fax: 020 8977 7974 Email: [email protected]


• • • • • • • • • • •

jjl1 ST" [ f e j f

V c s j V ! V fep V }

o isJ o ' U X 1 r© & t j ^ — - • - -TV © - 1 1 ^ u . ; ^ w i f

a ,Pi r -M

m ^ - f & ^ - m ^ m - ®

^ V j S . J p?6b 3

Fleming & Barron Ground Floor Plan - B147/D01/A

20 January 2005

Architects: Feilden Clegg Bradley

Leicester Academy - BB93 Targets

© Reverberation Time (seconds) J~r f DnT(Tmf,max),w, Sound Level Difference, dB, Roor

L'nT(Tmf,max),w, Impact Sound INsulation, dB DnT(Tmf,max),w, Sound Level Difference, dB, Wall

Fleming & Barron Ground Floor Plan - B147/D02/A

20 January 2005

Architects: Feilden Clegg Bradley

Leicester Academy - Acoustic Requirements

Amount of acoustic absorption required given In % of floor area Rw Door requirement, dB

fx"! Rw Wail requirement, dB

Fleming & Barron Leicester Academy - BB93 Targets 1st Floor Plan - B147/D01/B

20 January 2005 O Bsverberation Time (seconds) J-7-f DnTfTmf,max),w, Sound Level Difference, dB, Floor

Architects: Feilden Ciegg Bradley LYiT(rmf,max),w, Impact Sound INsulation, dB ^ DnTp"mf,max),w, Sound Level Difference, dB, Wall

Fleming & Barron 1st Floor Plan • B147/D02/B 20 January 2006

A r c h i t e c t s : F M c l e n C l a g g B r a d t o y

Leicester Academy - Acoustic Requirements

(3 Amount of acoustic absorption required given In * of Door area <x> Rw Door requirement, dB

I x | Rw Wal requirement, dB

• • • •

Bath Brewery Toll Bridge Road Bath BA1 7DE

t 01225 852545 f 01225 852528 e [email protected]

www. fe i l denc legg .com

Circus House 21 Great Titchfield Street London W1W 8BA

t 020 7323 5737 f 020 7323 5720 e [email protected]

Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP


http://www.feildenclegg.com



13.0 Appendix

Appendix A - Room Data Sheets Appendix B - Minutes of Briefing Meeting No.1

Minutes of Briefing Meeting No.2 Appendix C - Elevational Rules Appendix D - Project Risk Register Appendix E - Value Improvement Register Appendix F - Acoustic Relaxation letter

Additional calculations Appendix G - DfEE Security Questionare Appendix H - ICT Initial Report Appendix J - Breeam Assessment Appendix K - Performance Specified Work/ Contractor Designed Portions


Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds Fei lden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP


Date: {CREATEDATE \® "d MMMM yyyy" V MERGEFORMAT} Ref: I FILENAME \* MERGEFORMAT }


Minutes of Briefing Meeting No. 2

Held on

At

Present

Wednesday 15 December at 2:00pm

FCBA office, Circus House

For Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP For the Diocese of Leicester For David Samworth CBE DL For Tribal Education

Andy Theobald Vanessa Warnes Peter Taylor Caroline Whitty David Jenkins

Apologises: : For DfES Distributed For Tribal Education

Davis Langdon Capita Symonds Buro Happold: Structures

Buro Happold: M&E

Fleming & Barron Attached : 'Brief Issues' {FILENAME

MERGEFORMAT) Chaplaincy Brief (initial thoughts)

Paul Sandford Justin Wilson Chris Boyce Michael Lytrides Steve Fisher / Rob Amplett / Jenni Wood Mike Entwisle / Chris Fenton / Jason Cox David O'Neill / Anna Meister

FCBA issued the paper 'Brief Issues' (1242-Brief-017-VWRev A) on 14.12.04 to Peter Taylor, Caroline Whitty, Paul Sandford and Justin Wilson in preparation for Brief Meeting No 2.

The following minutes record feedback from: • PT, CW and DJ provided at the briefing meeting, 15.12.04 • JW on the 17.12.04 FCBA are awaiting feedback from the DfES

1. Administration

1.1 Staff Offices

The DfES have identified the need for a workspace adjacent to each group of teaching spaces (for preparation, storage of materials and records).

• Decisions: Are workspaces required in addition to the 2 staff offices per phase? II YES, what size and number? Does there need to be a staff office on each floor for phase II & III Can Phase II & III staff offices be combined?


PT/CW: Additional workspaces are not required, due to the number of interview rooms and group rooms. The phase staff offices should be amended to:

Phase I: 1 no. office 8m Phase II: 2 no. office 16m Phase III: 2 no. office 16m

Phase II and III staff offices cannot be combined, as staff will not use the central staff area. JW: In agreement with above

1.2 Senior Management

The DfES have advised that one room for the principal and one for the phase heads does not seem enough. • Decision: Is additional staff area required on top of the 5 interview rooms and 6 staff offices? • If YES, what size and number?

PT/CW: An office is required for the principal and a room for his PA, which both need to be centrally located with the staff room. There is no requirement for a room for all three phase heads. The heads will be located within each phase. There is no additional requirement for rooms for the senior management.

JW: In agreement with above

1.3 Conference / interview rooms

The DfES have advised that conference rooms and interview rooms are used greatly by schools. • The Brief Document identifies 5 interview rooms located across the phases and the LRC. In addition

there is a 20m meeting room as part of the Chaplaincy Centre. • Assumption: The school will be able to access the Chaplaincy meeting room, during school hours. • Decision: Based on the above assumption, do we need additional conference or interview rooms?

If YES, what size and number? Do tfcey need to be centrally located or phase specific?

PT/CW: There are sufficient meeting rooms, as an additional meeting room has been identified in the administrative area and the Chaplaincy meeting room can be used during school hours.


1.4 Office - reception

The DIES have identified the common requirement to have separate reception desks for pupils and visitors / adults.

• Assumption. There will be one reception desk with two windows / openings. One for visitors, which opens into the entrance lobby and one for pupils, which opens into the central atrium.

PT/CW: Correct assumption JW: Ok

1.5 Brief Review.

It has been noted that the administrative / staff support provision appears to be low. Please confirm if any additional spaces are required (and what area).

PT/CW/JW: Required: • Head teachers PA • Meeting room (Open plan in administrative area, 20m*) • Community office: (Area to be added to open plan administration for use by local police) • Caretaker/site manager: (Area to be added to open plan administration) • Phase printing area (Phase I & II, with a printer per class for Phase I and ICT) . Cleaners store (One per level)


• Facilities Manager: (Area required. May be a senior member of staff, could be in Phase II or II • FM store:

PT/CW/JW: Not required • Secure store (To be provided for in heads office) • Exam office • Stockroom / Exam store (To be provided In administrative area)

* " f * v f f l k » ® § l i S M S !

Reception Area 20 20 General Office 30 30 General Office Store 4 4 Reprographics Area 10 10 Reprographics Store 3 3 Medical Room 10 • 10 Community office: Facilities Manager: TBC TBC FM store: TBC TBC

Principal's Office 12 1 12 Principal's PA Office TBC TBC Shared Phase Heads Office Omit 0 Omit Staff Social Room 90 1 90 Staff Work Room 35 1 35

Staff Office (phase based) 8 5 40 Interview Room (phase based) 6 2 12 Interview Room (LRC) 6 2 12

Total Administration Area 316

2. Phase I

2.1 Nursery classrooms

• Question: Is the classroom to be used for both work and play? (effects acoustic requirement of walls)

• BB82 does not allow for a secure covered outdoor play area for the nursery area. • Decision: is it to be required? How is it provided?

PT/CW: Nursery is to be called Foundation 1 and the classroom is to be used for both work and play. JW: Covered area required. Note: FCBA have identified a covered outdoor area in the latest scheme.

2.2 Phase I classrooms

Assumptions: • All pupils are delivered by their parents via the phase entrance (east elevation), but may eventually

be delivered to teacher outside classroom door. • Pupils coats are stored in individual class based, just inside the door • Pupils initially gather in the Phase I hall for assembly / morning service • Each classroom has a door directly out to their play space which is used through the day. • Pupils are collected by their parents via the central space and the phase entrance


Questions. • What is the central space to be used for? • LRC. Can it be open plan with the ICT spage? • Group rooms. Are the rooms to be used for teaching or as a resource base?

PT/CW: The central space to be used as resource areas, which needs to be themed The Phase I LRC can be open plan with the ICT space The group rooms are Intended as both a teaching and resource space.


3. SEN provision

SEN Staff

• Tribal Education has raised a concern that there is not sufficient support space for SEN staff. • It has been suggested that a classroom is dedicated as an SEN teaching base (56sqm) which then

can not be used as a general classbase. • Assumption: All the Year II classbases are now located in the Science labs in phase III.

PT/CW: Confirmation required from JW on the nature of the SEN teaching base. It appears to be very large, in addition to the class bases.

JW: 'SEN teaching base' is to be used by teaching assistants, mentors and staff as a teaching space and staff workroom. The small group room(s) in the LRC could be integrated with the main space.

Small Group Room Phase 1 10 Small Group Room Phase II 10 Small Group Room Phase III 10 Small Group Room LRC 10 Resource Base LRC (Integrated in LRC) 20 Resource Base Store 5 Teaching base 56

Total Administration Area 121

4. Mechanical and Electrical Issues

Are floor boxes required? If so, a floating screed is required. PT/CW/DJ: Ideally no, particularly not to Phase I as concerns about durability. JW: Floor boxes are good for flexibility, but not for durability.

5. Curriculum

• In order to develop the fire strategy for the academy a clear understand of how the academy works on a day lo day basis is required.

• Requirement: Tribal to provide'a Day in the Life of the Academy' Is there a 'bell' at the end of lessons? Do all classes finish at the same time or are there staggered breaks?

PT/CW: Staggered breaks, no bell at end of lessons. JW: ACTION: To complete 'A Day in the life of a teacher'

{ CREATEDATE \@ "d MMMM yyyy" \* MERGEFORMAT ) Ref: { FILENAME V MERGEFORMAT}

6. Chaplaincy Brief

The Brief Document identifies the required chaplaincy spaces: • Decision: is this the finalised brief?

PT provided a further document on the brief as attached. Further clarifications made in the meeting by PT are as follows:

• The dais ideally is a permanent step • The altar needs to be removable (but not on a regular basis) • Power needs to be distributed around the chaplaincy worship space. • The PA ideally needs to be built in, Buro Happold to advise. • A digital projector and screen needs to be housed in the worship space. • Additional lighting is required for the dais, with the option to dim. • The line of security between the chaplaincy and the rest ot the school needs to be considered for

the out of hours option. • It would be beneficial to have direct access and a window out to a chaplaincy garden • The sacristy is not required, if the office area is Increased to allow safe storage within the room • Floor to be timber, as a continuity of Phase I hall. • PT expressed concern about under floor heating with regarding potential damage to the system and

maintenance

Amended brief Is as follows:

mm Central Worship Space Office Sacristy Meeting Room Store

Corridors / Circulation Internal Partitions

120 25 0

20 20

48 6

7 . A n y o t h e r B u s i n e s s

Changing Rooms

PT/CW: FCBA questioned the area provided for changing, it appears to be very low Potentially 120 pupils using the changing facilities at one time.

JW: Urinals are not to be used in the changing rooms, to allow flexibility in changing room use ACTION: to review and reconfirm changing room sizes

Exams

PT/CW: Exams to be held in the sports hall Need to swap .viewing gallery trom assembly hall to sports hall

JW: The propose location ot the exams is a school management issue


(PAGE


Minutes of Brief Meeting No. 1

Date

Attended

Distribution

30 November 2004

For Mr David Samworth CBE DL For Diocese of Leicester For DfES For Tribal Education For Feilden Clegg Bradley

As Above and For Capita Symonds

2:00pm, Bishops Lodge, Leicester

• Caroline Whitty • Peter Taylor • Paul Sanford • Justin Wilson • Andy Theobald • Nicola du Pisanie

Michael Lytrides

• on by e-mail/fax/post by

NOTE: the above attendees were issued with: • DRAFT of the current ground and first floor plans, 1242/P/110 rev A and

1242/P/111 rev A. • Paper prepared by FCBA on dining studies • Paper prepared by FCBA on Assembly Hall performance options

1.0 Classroom Sizes

1.1 PS noted the minimum sizes of classrooms from BB82 as being 51m2

JW noted that with the addition of additional ICT within (he classrooms, the area of a standard classroom increases to 56m2. It was noted that the trend is to increase classroom size as is being demonstrated through BB98/99.

PT was very keen to retain the room sizes as set in the brief.

Post-Meeting Note: JW has produced a written statement regarding the rationale behind the brief classroom sizes. See attached

2.0 Dining

2.1 FCBA tabled various options demonstrating how the brief requirement of silting a phase arid a half could be accommodated into the dining area. This involves using the Assembly Hall to extend the seating area over the lunchtime period. An additional approx 30m2 will be required tar the general dining space to allow for the 1.5 phases

Date; ( CREATEDATE \@ "d MMMM yyyy" \* MERGEFORMAT ) (PAGE } Ref: (FILENAME \* MERGEFORMAT}

CW pointed out that there needs to be an allowance for staff and any visitors to dine with the pupils at the same time. This is critical to the dining ethos.

PT felt that In reality there will never be a 100% take-up of all the seating for 1.5 phases, which would allow space for staff and visitors.

CW keen to ensure that this is not compromised by under-provision of dining area. FCBA FCBA to investigate implications.

2.2 Additional storage will be required if the dining relies on the Assembly Hall. An initial additional 10m2 has been included in the plans. This is currently not shown in the brief.

3.0 Exams

3.1 Dedicated space for exams was discussed.

If the Assembly Hall is used for dining, exams can only be held if the lunch sittings are re-timetabled while exams are running. The timetable needs to be tested to ascertain whether the two can happen independantly [never have dining happening Tribal while exams are under way In the Assembly Hall] If the lunch period is extended there is a strong possibility that exams and dining will need to overlap in time. This in turn sets up very stringent acoustic requirement for the folding partition to the Assembly Hall that is almost unachievable

3.2 The Sports Hall being used for exams was discussed.

JW recommended identifying other facilities within the Academy as the 'Healthy Body, Mind and Spirit' concept is potentially compromised if the Sports Hall is out of use 3 months of the year. This would also restrict community access during the exam periods

3.3 No overall conclusion was reached, although PT noted that the Sports Hall could be the official dedicated exam space - the management of the school will influence this discussion and may well use smaller facilities around the school for the majority of the exams [e.g. classbases, Phase 1 hall, studio, and even the Chaplaincy) to reduce the time the Sports Hall is out of action

FCBA need a formal decision on this to instruct the acoustic consultants

4.0 Hall Study 4.1 Following an action from the previous SRM, FCBA have investigated turning the

Assembly Hall 90 degrees, but considered this inefficient.

Possible layouts of the Assembly Hall for performances were tabled by FCBA

4.2 The Assembly Hall will be used (or separate Phase 2 and 3 assemblies, possible larger gatherings breaking out into dining area

4.3 PT recommended folding doors down the length of the hall rather than concertina doors at entrance. This will help sightlines for the larger gatherings.

PT and CW expressed the desire that as many performance options need to be catered for if possible [e.g. stage on either side of the hall, stage in the round etc]

4.4 PT confirmed there was no bleacher seating required in the Assembly Hall

Date: {CREATEDATE \® 'd MMMM yyyy' V MERGEFORMAT} {PAGE } Ref: { FILENAME \* MERGEFORMAT}

4.5 PT/CW were both enthusiastic about balconies above the assembly hall, but realised that this might not be possible with the tight area restrictions on the scheme - this should be reviewed at the later stages

4.6 PT confirmed it was acceptable to have a solid wall between the studio and the Phase 1 Hall as the Phase 1 Hall already links to the Chaplaincy

5.0 General Comments

5.1 PT confirmed the heads office needs to be associated with general office at the entrance admin hub, The Phase heads office was acceptable as shown adjacent to the staff room

5.2 The positioning of the reprographics was discussed. It was decided there was no need for a pupil counter to this space.- phase-specific printing facilities will replace this demand.

5.3 A multi-media facility [recording studio] to be located adjacent to the music room. 17m2 to take the place of the 10m2music store and one 7m2 practise room. This will need to be accessed by all pupils - not just for music requirements


Project Risk Register



•b

Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds F e i l d e n C legg Brad ley Architects LLP

Risk Register Confidential Page 1

Project Name: Leicester Academy CPM Name: Michael Lytrides

n th ID NO Risk Description Cost Impact £K

Urn* Reputation Cost Itaw RapuMkn

Risk Owner Action n th ID NO Risk Description

M n MIL Mix Severity Severity

Utah RMc lUnMno

Risk Owner Owner

1.01 Lack of clarity in requrements for Spots facilities (ind joint use of playing fields)

Open 30,000 50,000 75,000 2 2 2 Low Low Nil Low

Architect Arrange workshops wrth Sponsors / Project Lead Tribal Education representatives to clearly establish vision, Directives and functional requirements (eg. sports facility areas and range of sports to be accommodated)

Churchman Landscape Architects have developed the Stage D design for the layout of external sports facilities in conjunction with DfES, Sponsors and Sport England

1 02 Lack <* clarity in timetabling for joint use of playing fields in conjunction with Leicester CC

Open 2 7 Nit Nl) Low

OPM Early consultation and agreement of heads of terms with Leicester CC, including pnnciples for apportioning costs of any upgrade works and likely extent of playing fields use by the Academy

Consultations with Leicester CC in progress. OPM met wrth LCC on 25/01/05 to discuss joint use agreement.

1 03 .orts Brief does net comply with Sport England/Youth Sport Trust requirements

Open 50,000 100,000 150,000 2 2 2 Low Low HH Low

Architect Earty consultation with Sport EnglancVYouth Sport Trust to explain proposals and gain buy-in.

Review cost/programme implications of any 'extra over' requirements

FCB have been liaising wrth Sport England / Youth Sport Trust to establish views. Layout of external sports facilities to be discussed further with Sport England as scheme develops into Stage E.

1 04 Lack of clarity in requirements fa Chaplaincy Centre

Open 2 2 Nil Low Nil Low

Diocese of Leicester/ Architect

Establish St Christopher's Church vision and functional requirements, and reconcile wrth Sponsors' overall vision.

Canon Peter Taylor has provided a paper giving further clarification on the Chaplaincy brief. No significant issues at this stage.

1.05 Lack of clarity on uses of Academy by local community Open 4 1 4 NH Low Hn|ti Hn |ti

OPM Research existing gaps in available local community facilities and arrange community consultation on preferred options.

OPM to propose strategy

1.06 Potential change in specialist subjects within community adul learning programme poor to Academy opening Open 4 < 4 Nil Low Hl-Jh

Architect Flexibility in design to accommodate likely community use facilities.

OPM to propose strategy.

1.07 Potential conflict between client vehicle parking requirements and Leicester CC Midways requirements

Open 50,000 100,000 200,000 2 3 3 Mm — Nil —

Architect Reconcile highway authority parking requirements against client brief and negotiate down any 'extra-over' requirements wrth Leicester CC planners.

No conditions attached to Outline Planning Permission, but issue may arise in Detailed Planning process. Design Team to consider how parking will be managed by the Academy to ensure efficient flow of vehicles

1.06 Conflict between allowance In Brief requirements fcr SEN and Leicester CC LEA requirements

Closed NH M ' . NH1 .'.<•. M

Tribal Education Establish required Academy SEN facilities through liaison with LEA and either negotiate contributions for any 'extra-over* requirements or establish additional DfES funding as appropnate.

SEN Funding «included within the' Caprtal Cash Umit - DfES havev > stated-thai no'additionat funding will be made available

109 mpad erf Sponsor Brief requirements on other stakeholders' vision for Academy

Open 30,000 50,000 76,000 2 2 2 - Low Nil -

CPM Arrange workshops with Sponsors / Project Lead representatives to ensure vision / objectives / brie continue to be shared by all

Familiarisation & Briefing Workshops held regularly to date to develop vision and ethos - no significant differences evident at this time. FCB presented the scheme to the Stakeholder Reference Group on 30/11/04 -positive feedback received.

1 10 Changes to agreed Brief due to design development

Op«n 50,000 100,000 150,000 3 3 3 — Madkan Nil I M k n

CPM

CPM

All key changes resulting from design development to be assessed at Sponsor Review Meetings to determine quality/cost/time implications.

Establish clear change control procedure to ensure that the cost / programme /quality implications of brief changes are fully understood and authorised.

Change control procedures incorporated as part of draft PEP -Capita Symonds to gain buy-in from project team

1 11 Changes to agreed Brief due to change in client objectives / requirements

Open 100,000 250,000 500,000 3 •

I

3 I — Nil

| Architect

CPM

Approval of strategic brief will provide 'baseline' against which future brief changes are assessed.

Establish clear change control procedure to ensure that the cost / programme /quality implications of brief changes are fully understood and authorised. !

Change control procedures incorporated as part of draft PEP -Capita Symonds to gain buy-in from project team

Appendix D_Progress Report #10_Pro)ect Risk Regtster_Rev G_050203 04f02/2005

Risk Register Confidential P a 9 e 2


N * B N » Wak DMCrtpdon Coat Impact £K

U n a mil Cost Severity Time Severity

Reputrflon Severity

Coat -ComMnotf (Urtdng Risk Owner Mttgrttan Action 1

Action Owner Action Date Comments N * B N » Wak DMCrtpdon

Mta M L I Max

U n a mil Cost Severity Time Severity

Reputrflon Severity

Mali Ranitog

Oak tanking

nm Ranking

ComMnotf (Urtdng Risk Owner Mttgrttan Action 1 Action Owner Action Date Comments

112 Changes to apeed Brief due to change in end user requirements

Open 50,000 100,000 150,000 3 3 3 — — Mil —

OPM/Trust

CPM

Timely appointment of Principal and Deputy Principals.

Establish clear change control procedure to ensure that the cost / programme /quality implications of brief changes are fully understood and authorised.

Principal likely to be appointed 4-5 terms before Academy opening.

201 Failure of design to respond to operational requirements / timetabSng constraints

Open 2 3 NU M M Nil — CPM

Tribal Education

Arrange workshops with Sponsors / Tribal Education to understand timetabling issues

Academic Curriculum Analysis and 'Day in the Life of. . " papers to be prepared.

Curriculum Analysis and "Day in the Life of. " paper being finalised by Tribal Education.

2 02 Failure of design to respond to curriculum focus on Food Open 50,000 100,000 150,000 3 3 3 — Nil

CPM Arrange workshops with Caroline Whitty to develop how the curriculum focus will be addressed through the design.

FCB to liaise with Caroline Wiit ty on strategy and design proposals.

2.03 Failure of desist to achieve best value balance between capital costs and costs in use

Open 50,000 100,000 150,000 3 3 3 — — Nil I M n

OS

QS/CPM

Develop whole-life cost model to identify projecte< running/maintenance costs over design life, and reconcile against Cost Plan to identify items of plant / equipment that are not delivering best value.

Apply value management principles to establish alternative solutions taking into account capital costs and costs in use.

DL to advise on key design elements to be rationalised in conjunction with Design Team / Sponsors / DfES.

204 Failure of design to address particular Academy security requirements In respect of bullying Open 10,000 30,000 50,000 1 2 2 2 l e w Low Low Lew

Architect Liaise with Tribal Education on proposed measures (eg. avoid linear arrangements with 'dead-end' corridors).

Subject to ongoing design development. Security Workshop held on 17th January 2005.

2.06 Failure ol dest(p to address particular Academy security requirements in respect of boundary control (eg across Diamond Jubilee Covert)

Open 10,000 25,000 50,000 1 1 1 Lew Lew Nil Low

Architect

Architect

Architect

Review likely educational value of Covert for Academy (eg. wildlife/nature studies) and existing security arrangements

Consider existing sight lines/requirements for CCTV.

Complete DfES securrty questionnaire to determine level of security risk for the Academy site and, if appropriate, procure specialist security consultant.

Subject to ongoing design development. FCB have completed the DfES security questionnaire (ref Stage D Report). Arboricultural survey of Diamond Jubilee Covert carried out on 5th January 2005

2.06 cailure to achieve buildability in design

Open 50,000 100,000 150,000 2 3 _ Ml Nil MoAm

Design Team

CPM

Raise significant buildability issues within CDM Designer Risk Assessments.

Consider early appointment of Contractor (eg. through two-stage procurement strategy)

To be addressed as part of design development. Planning Supervisor to co-ordinate risk assessments

Single-stage full Traditional Procurement route proposed m Stage D Report.

2.07 Failure to consider sustainabiity/environmental issues in design

Open 50,000 100,000 150,000 3 3 3 I M M M t a n Nil H a i t i

CPM Arrange workshop to establish strategy for sustainability and energy use / conservation

Workshop held on 18/10/04 - FCB to include output in Stage D Report. BREEAM Assessment currently being carried out Bat & Habitat survey carried out on 25th January 2005.

2.08 Changes in OfES Design Standards Open 15,000 30,000 50,000 1 2 2 Low Low Nil Lew

DfES SCDT Monitor potential changes to Standards currently undergoing development and inform design team accordingly.

DfES to advise on any relevant issues

2.09 Changes to Buiding Regulations Open 15,000 30,000 50,000 1 2 2 Low Low Nil Low

Architect Liaise with building control specialist to identify any forthcoming changes that may significantly affect design

AISL to advise on any relevant issues

2.10 Design Team n on-performance Open 1,000 5,000 30,000 2 2 2 Low Low Nil Lew

CPM Monitor and address any performance-related issues with design team and OPM/DfES as appropriate

No particular concerns at this time

2.11 Lack of effective team working /focus Open 1,000 5,000 30,000 1 2 2 Low Lew Nil Low

CPM Promote collaborative approach / team working and open communications within design team

No particular concerns at this time

212 Lack of design coordination


CPM

Architect

Ensure sufficient time is allowed within Master Programme for co-ordination between disciplines

Arrange co-ordination workshops

CPM/Design Team to ensure robust co-ordination during Stage E and beyond.

I Appendix D.Progress Report *10_Project Risk Register_Rev G 060203 04/02/2005


Project Name: CPM Name:

Leicester Academy Michael Lytrides

RMclDNo I t M Description Cost Impact £K

— Cost Severity Ttme Severity

Repirtatton Severity

Cost Time RapUatfor Risk Owner MMgtfon Action 1 Actton

Owner RMclDNo I t M Description

M n Mil. Max

— Cost Severity Ttme Severity

Repirtatton Severity

Rtofc Ranting

Msk RanMng

Rtafc RanMng

Risk Owner MMgtfon Action 1 Actton Owner

2.13 Amendments to masterpian design due to failure to complete purchase of Van Hire Centre site Closed NH NH NH Ml OPM Exchange of Contracts confirmed • risk

eliminated. 2.14 Failure to appoint consultants to provide specialist expertise

to design team Open 50,000 100,000 150,000 2 2 Low Low Nil Low CPM / Architect Consult with DfES (SCDT) to identify gaps in

design consortium's expertise and agree scope of services for each specialist consultant

FCB/CPM to continue liaising with SCDT

215 Failure to consider fire strategy in early design development

Open 10,000 25,000 50,000 < 2 2 Low Low Nil Low

Architect

Architect/ CPM

Review preferred masterplan option to determine particular fire protection/emergency escape issues

Consider need for appointment of fire consultant to provide specialist advice and to secure fire certification

FCB to liaise with Building Control consultant to determine strategy.

Arup Fire appointed to provide specialist fire engineering advice

216 Proceeding with design without securing client approvals at key stages

Open 5,000 20,000 50,000 2 Low Low Nil Low

Sponsors / DfES

CPM

Sponsors / Project Lead to provide dedicated representatives with decision-making authority to ensure timely approvals

Clarify DfES posrtion on underwriting of design fees for proceeding into Stage E in advance of Funding Agreement

Sponsor representatives appointed and actively participating in decisior making/approvals process.

Stage D Report to be approved by PSG before proceeding to Funding Agreement.

2 17 Delays in securing client approvals to proceed to next design stage.

Open 5,000 20,000 50,000 < 2 2 Low Low Nil Low

CPM

CPM

Set out key milestones in Master Programme and provide adequate time for client representatives tc review proposals prior to approval date.

Establish strategy for approvals, including notice periods, approval dates and key client representatives required to provide approval

Approvals strategy included in draft PEP and key dates shown in Maste Programme.

Stage D Report to be approved by PSG before proceeding to Funding Agreement.

2.18 Stage D Report net sufficiently comprehensive lor Funding Agreement

Open 3 3 Nil — Nil —

CPM

Architect

Allow sufficient time in Master Programme for development of design through Stages C and D that will lead to a robust Stage D report

Review exemplar Stage Reports from other Academy projects to establish report structure

Funding Agreement submission date extended to mid-February 05 to ensure design development to Stage D+.

2.19 Failure to consider ICT strategy in earty design development


CPM Arrange initial ICT workshop with BECTA to agree strategy and determine whether an Educational ICT consultant will need to be procured pre-Funding Agreement.

Cambridge Education Associates (CEA) appointed and working with the Design Team / Tribal Education to develop the ICT vision.

2.20 Specification of unprcven technology as part ICT facilities

Open 10,000 25,000 50,000 2 2 2 Low Low NH Low

Design Team ICT strategy to be based primarily on tried and tested' ICT equipment with flexibility for accommodating short-term technological developments

To be reviewed at ICT Workshops in conjunction with appointed Educational ICT consultant, CEA.

2 21 Failure to consider FF&E strategy in earty design development

- 50,000 15,000 500,000 3 3 3 3 — — Hodten Medfcm

CPM Arrange initial FF&E workshop to agree strategy and determine whether an FF&E consultant will need to be procured pre-Funding Agreement

FF&E scope of services agreed and tender returns now received. Tender interviews arranged for 9th February 2005, with a view to appointing a consultant once FA is approved

2.22 mpad erf BB93 Standards on acoustic performance requirements Open 25,000 50,000 100,000 3 3 2 _ — Nil — Architect Procure specialist acoustic consultant to carry out

noise surveys and advise on implications of BB93 on the design

Acoustic survey undertaken - key issues included in Stage D Report

2.23 Failure to define extent of site / boundaries

Closed Ml Ml Ml NN

CPM Liaise with Leicester CC to establish legal site boundary and art/ existing covenants/legal responsibilities to be undertaken by the Academy Trust

Site Boundary Drawing provided by Letoeeter CC.

2 24 Additional area provision - "deep plan* versus linear" arrangement Open 5,000 20,000 50,000 2 2 2 Low Low Nil Low

Architect Consider use of areas as part of the options appraisal and agree best value solution in conjunction with clients.

Consider space efficiency in design through Stage E and beyond.

3.01 mpact of site approach routes and site access/egress points on local community

Open 5,000 20,000 50,000 • 2 2 M n — Nil — Architect Agreement of access routes and site entry/exit

points with local highways authority. FCB/DWP liaising with Leicester CC on site access issues Details of service access point required as a Planning Condition.

3.02 Failure to provide suitable emergency vehicle access pants pre- and post-construction) Open 1,000 10,000 25,000 1 1 - Low Law Nil Low Architect Liaise with local emergency services to agree on

suitable access arrangements. FCB to advise on any concerns. Fire consultant to advise.

3.03 Effects of time restrictions on site access (eg. due to proximty ot local cemetery) Oped 5,000 20,000 50,000 2 2 2 Low Low Nil Low

Planning Supervisor Establish site access constraints/risks within Pre-Construction Health & Safety Plan.

Planning Supervisor to advise on any concerns.




MM DM* Mak Doocriptton Cost Impact £K

1 Mull I I Cost Severity Time Severity

Reputtfion Severity

Cast - R^natar CooMnad Ranking Risk Owner MWgtfton Action 1 Action

Owner Action Data — MM DM* Mak Doocriptton

Mht M L M m

1 Mull I I Cost Severity Time Severity

Reputtfion Severity

M KM CooMnad Ranking Risk Owner MWgtfton Action 1 Action

Owner Action Data —

304 Failure to define detailed scope of demolition works

Open 5,000 25,000 75,000 2 2 3 Low mim i Nil —

Structural / Civil Engineer

Structural / Civil Engineer

Site Investigation to identify nature and extent of building foundations

Consider stockpile of suitable materials on site for use as hardcore etc.

Scope development for demolition works is progressing during February 2005 Site visit with potential demolition contractors helc on 25th January 2005 Note potential sequencing constraints due to bat survey.

306 Effects of delayed demolition works on Main Contract

- 5,000 10,000 25,000 2 1 1 Low Low Nil Low

CPM Prepare Master Programme to ensure early commencement of procurement activities for demolition works

Asbestos survey and Site Investigation will inform Master Programme development for demolition works. Delay demolition works contract award until Planning Permission is secured

3.oel Unforeseen physical obstructions in ground (eg hard rock)

Open 25,000 75,000 500,000 2 3 3 — — Nil — Structural Engineer Carry out initial Desk Study and Site Investigation

to confirm ground conditions and nature of any obstructions.

Desk Study complete Site Investigation completed in mid-January 05. Interpretative report to be included in Stage D Report.

3 07 Failure to identify contamination on site (eg. asbestos, oil waste in Van Hire Centre site)


Architect & Structural/Civil

Engineer

Carry out 'Level 3' asbestos survey in all existing buildings and determine nature and extent of ground contamination through Site Investigation.

Asbestos survey and Site Investigation works carried out - no significant issues at present

308 Unknown buried services in ground Open 25,000 75,000 500,000 2 4 _ H i Nil • l i i B i

M&E Engineer Obtain record utility drawings from Statutory Authorities and carry out utility survey to verify routes of buried services.

Utility drawings now obtained and utilities survey carried out - no serious concerns raised

309 Lack of performance by Statutory Authorities (eg. delays to services connections) Open 2 3 Nil — Nil — M&E Engineer Early consultation with Statutory Authorities to

provide adequate notice of key dates for services connections and other input.

Buro Happold to report any concerns

3.10 Lack of availabHty of local building materials Open 10,000 30,000 50,000 2 2 2 Low Low Nil Low

OS Investigate availability of materials with local contractors and review any constraints on design

DLto report on findings.

3.11 Lack of avaMabilty of local labour Open 10,000 30,000 50,000 2 2 2 Low Low Nil Low

OS Investigate availability of labour with local contractors and review any constraints on design

DL to report on findings.

3.12 Ncn-perfbnrtance by Main Contractor

Open 50,000 100,000 250,000 2 3 3 — Nil — CPM Thorough pre-qualification and tender

assessment process to ensure that selected Contractor is fully committed and has suitable resources for successful delivery.

PEP defines selection procedures

3.13 Nonperformance by sub-contractors Open 50,000 100,000 250,000 2 3 3 M . NH Wm+m CPM Contractor to propose all key sub-contractors for

approval by Employer prior to appointment. Contract Documents to reflect requirements.

3.14 Poor wortcmanship /quality of construction

Open 10,000 25,000 75,000 2 3 3 — — Nil

CPM/Architect

CPM/Architect

Set up site monitoring process to ensure early reporting and addressing of defects

Consider appointment of Clerk of Works.

FCB/CS to review strategy prior to Contract award.

3 15 Poor information flow between design team and Main Contractor Open 2 3 Nil Nil — CPM Establish site communications regime (eg. RFI's,

inspection reporting) and agree with design team and Contractor.

PEP defines communications regime.

3.16 Damage to (Wed-out ICT/FF&E equipment poor to Academy opening

Open 5,000 10,000 50,000 3 2 2 — Nil rntum CPM Master Programme to be based upon ICT/FF&E

fit-out commencing after Practical Completion Certificate is released.

To be reviewed in development of Master Programme. Condition surveys to be carried out as required

3.17 Lack of Contract Administration Open 5,000 15,000 30,000 1 2 2 Low LOW Nil Low

CPM/Architect Contract Administration roles/responsibilities to tx confirmed once procurement strategy Is established.

FCB / CS to arrange meeting to review roles and responsibilities (post-Funding Agreement).

4.01 Failure to agree 'Abnormal' costs wrth DfES

Open 100,000 500,000 2,000,000 3 3 Mi ami Ml Nil — OS Prepare schedule of project Abnormals and reach

agreement in principle with SBDU before agreeing appropriate costs

DL has submitted a schedule of proposed abnormals and principles have been agreed with DfES at meetings held on 21/12/04, 11/01/05, 25/01/05 and 02/02/05

4.02 VAT payments on project costs due to community use of Academy fcr "non-charitable' purposes

Open 100,000 500,000 800,000 2 3 — Ml Nil —

OS Review anticipated level of use of Academy facilities by community and reconcile against Customs & Excise (C&E) VAT regulations to achieve zero-rated scheme Seek specialist legal advice as appropnate to establish constraints on community use of facilities.

Obtain C&E ruling/guidance on VAT position prior to Funding Agreement submission

DfES AD to advise on approach to be adopted for achieving a zero-rated scheme Sponsors to consider appointment of specialist VAT adviser



Project Name*. Leicester Academy CPM Name: Michael Lytrides

Risk ID No Risk Description Cost Impact £K

Likelihood Cost Sevsrtty Time Reputation Cost Time deputation

Risk Owner Mitigation Action 1 Action Action Data Commertts Risk ID No Risk Description

Mid IWL Max

Likelihood Cost Sevsrtty Severity Severity Risk

Ranking Risk

Ranking Risk

Ranking

Risk Owner Mitigation Action 1 Ovmer Action Data Commertts

403 VAT payments on Octroition costs if separate to Main Contract

Open 100,000 100,000 125,000 2 4 Medium Ml Nil Medium

OS Consider cost/benefit of incorporating demolition works as part of the Stage 1 appointment if a two-stage procurement strategy is adopted.

Demolitions accepted in principle as an 'Abnormal' cost. CS/DL advice is to procure demolition works separately - any VAT saved would De negated by payment of pre-construction fee under a two-stage approach (ref Stage D Report).

4.04 Effects of programme acceleration open 10,000 25,000 50,000 2 2 2 Low Low NU Low

CPM Prepare Master Programme to avoid need for acceleration.

No concerns at present.

4.05 Late production of design information Open 3 2 Nil Medium Nil Medum

CPM Master Programme to clearly show periods for preparation/submission for review/approval of design information at each Stage.

CS to monitor closely with Design Team and take corrective action as appropriate.

4.06 Actual inflation costs higher than allowances in Capia \ Cash Limit Open 25,000 50,000 100,000 2 3 Medum Nil Nil Madlum

OS Monitor current and projected inflation levels and report significant chanqes to DfES.

DL to advise any concerns.

4.07 Tender returns exceed allowances in Captal Cash Limt

- 25,000 50,000 150,000 3 3 Medium Ml Nil Medium

CPM/QS Adopt value management principles in conjunction with preferred contractor to achieve Capital Cash Limit.

DfES to consider increase in location factor if high tender prices are demonstrated to be due to market forces.

DL / CS to keep under close review with DfES.

4.08 Inappropriate procurement route leads to increased costs

Open 10,000 25,000 50,000 2 2 Low Ml Nil Low

CPM/QS Establish best value procurement strategy to ensure appropriate. - risk allocation between Contractor/Employer - cost certainty - control over design quality.

Single-stage Full Traditional procurement route is currently proposed - subject to formal agreement ty DfES / Sponsors.

4.09 Premium payable on Contract costs due to lack of interest n projed by Main Contractor Open 25,000 50,000 75,000 < 3 Low Ml Nil Low

OS Investigate local contractor interest in advance of OJEU process and report on any concerns arising.

DL to advise any concerns.

4.10 Academy building cannot be insured due to inappropnate materials specification Open 10,000 25,000 50,000 3 Low Ml Nil Low

Architect Review any specific insurance requirements and report on how this may affect the desiqn.

FCB to advise any concerns.

4.11 inadequate Sponsor contributions for elements not allowed as part of Abnormal costs (ie. Chaplaincy Centre) Open 10,000 30,000 50,000 2 2 Low NU Nit Low

OS Agree reporting mechanism for determining affordability of Chaplaincy Centre.

DL to report separately on costs for Chaplaincy Centre.

5.01 Inappropriate specification of standards Open 5,000 15,000 25,000 < 1 Low Low Nil Low

Architect Review specifications to be adopted and review with DfES SCDT.

FCB to advise any concerns in desiqn development

5 02 Overall 'Quality' of design

Open 25,000 50,000 75,000 2 3 3 Medium Medium Nil Medium

Architect Visits to other Academies/schools to develop a common understanding between Sponsors/Design Team as to the overall design quality expected.

Visits to Hellerup (Denmark) and Mossbourne Academy (Hackney) carried out to date.

6.01 Effects of Planners' requtements on design Open 30,000 100,000 200,000 3 3 Madum Medium Mil Matikon

Architect Early consultation with Planners to establish nature and extent of Section 106 Works etc.

Further meeting arranged for mid-February 05.

6 02 Compliance with Unitary Development Ran (le. contribution of 1% of capital costs fcr public arts) Open 5,000 10,000 15,000 2 2 2 LOW Low Nil Low

OPM/CPM Negotiate with Planners on alternative ways of contributing to public arts (eg. displays to be created by Academy Art Department)

Ref minutes of Planners' meeting on 14/10/04.

6.03 Delays in providing Planners'Letter of Comfort Closed Nil Nil Nil Nll>

Architect Establish specific Planners' requirements and timescales for release of a letter of comfort.

Outline Planning Permission confirmed at 18/01/05 LCC. Planninq Committee Meetinq. *

6.04 Delays in granting Planning Permission

Open 3 3 Nil Madlum Nil Medium

Architect

Architect

Early consultation with Planners.

Allow adequate time in Master Programme for Planning process.

Detailed Planning Application to be submitted upon completion of Stage D. Delays may have a knock-on effect on start of demolition.

6.05 Planning Penmsion refusal 1 referral Open 50,000 100,000 250.000 1 3 Low Ml Nit Low Architect Early consultation with Planners to establish and

address key concerns. Ongoing consultation required.

606 Restrictions on surface water dsposal by Environment Agency (EA) / Water Authonty (WA) Open 20,000 50,000 100,000 3 3 Medium Ml Nil Medium

M&E Engineer Early consultation with EA / WA to identify constraints and take into account in desiqn.

Buro Happold to advise any concerns

6.07 Retirement (or En vt on mental Icrpact Analysis Open 10,000' 25,000 75,000 . Nil Ml Nil Nil

• Architect Liaise with Leicester CC Planners to establish requirements.

Not required - ref minutes of Planners' meeting on 14/10/04.

7.0 Unauthorised access to ste (dump construction)

Open < 3 Nil Nil

Planning Supervisor Include site security issues as part of pre-Construction Health & Safety Plan,

Review site security arrangements with Contractor.

Planning Supervisor to advise any concerns. Consider responsibilities for site security in any interim perioc between transfer of land ownership and works commencement.

7 02 Unauthorised access to site (during operation) Open 4 3 Nil Ml

' Architect Develop Academy site security strategy (possibly led by specialist security consultant)

Planning Supervisor / Tribal Education to advise any operational security concerns

Appendix D_Progress Report #10_ProjecI Risk Register_Rev G_050203

Risk Register Conf ident ia l Page 6

P ro jec t Name: Le icester A c a d e m y C P M Name: M c h a e l Ly t r i des

• M U D M NMOMeripUan

C o s t I m p a c t £ K

U M M a i Cost Severity Time Severity

Reputation Severity

Coat I fcM Rapid ât CamMnod ftartdng R isk O w n e r Mtlgrtton Action 1

Action Owawr Action Data Comments • M U D M NMOMeripUan

M n M I L M M

U M M a i Cost Severity Time Severity

Reputation Severity

Mak M M IbnHng

Msfc CamMnod ftartdng R isk O w n e r Mtlgrtton Action 1

Action Owawr Action Data Comments

703 Arbcme pollution Open 5,000 10,000 25,000 2 2 Low Low NH Low M&E Engineer Carry out site monitoring and adoprt reasonably

practicable protection measures Buro Happold to advise strategy

m ... Ctoaarf ; MM Ml Ntt Ml O P M Monitor progress with school closure strategy and

report any concerns. Prepare for adjudication process in case of rejection.

Adjudicator has now ruled in favour of the closure of the two schools.

802 Lack ot local community buy-in to protect

Open 3 3 3 Nil — — I M n

OPM Undertake public consultation process and arrange public meetings to establish support/concerns. Keep local community informed on progress and initiatives to address concerns during site works and in operation (eg. traffic, security).

OPM to liaise with Sponsors on strategy and report progress. FCB presented scheme to Stakeholder Reference Group on 30/11/04 -generally positive feedback received

6.03 Failure to gain Leicester CC LEA buy-in

Open 1 2 Nil Low Nil Low

CPM/Architect Early negotiations with Leicester CC LEA to identify and address key issues of concern. Leicester CC LEA represented on Project Steering Group

No major concerns reported at this t ime

804 Changes in legislation Open 1 2 Nil Low Nil Low DfES AD Monitor potential effects on project due to any

forthcoming legislation changes DfES to keep team informed.

8.05 Change in Gwemment Policy Open - 2 Nil Low Nil Low DfES AD Monitor potential effects on project due to any

forthcoming policy changes DfES to keep team informed.

901 Restrictions on Contractor waking on religious holidays Open 1 2 Nil Low Nil Low Diocese of Leicester Establish constraints due to local rel igious

holidays/events. Sponsors to advise team.


tf

Fei lden C legg Brad ley Architects LLP Arup Fire Fleming and Barron

• • • • • •

Appendix E Value Improvement Register




™ LEICESTER ACADEMY - VALUE IMPROVEMENT REGISTER

Project Title Leicester Academy

Revision 2 Issued on 24-Jan-04

Value Assessment | Improved: £ Current Status | Accepted: A No Change: O Rejected: R

Worse: X Developing: D

No. Value Improvement Idea No. of Votes Value Assessment Current Status Comments Action by

I Quality 1 Performance Capital Cost Cost in Use

1.00 DESIGN |

1.01 zmphasis on Major / Minor "Hearts" of building (eg. through enhanced specification) 4 S X O D

Design Team have considered relative levels of specification between major / minor hearts and other parts of the building to optimise costs associated with different levels of materials specification.

FCB

1.02 Expression of curriculum focus on food in design 3 S X o D Design Team have undertaken specific design studies to explore curriculum focus on food in detail to determine functional requirements and optimise nternal space layout.

FCB

1.03 Expression of Chaplaincy Centre in design 2 S X 0 D

Canon Peter Taylor has developed Chaplaincy Centre brief with St Christopher's representatives Design Team has undertaken specific design studies to determine functional requirements and optimise internal space layout.

PT/FCB

1.04 Building design / ICT integration 2 5 0 £ D

AD approved a £10k budget limit for appointment of an Educational ICT Consultant (up to Funding Agreement). Tribal Education appointed Cambridge Education Associates, who have worked in conjunction with FCB, BECTA and Tnbal Education to develop the ICT Vision.

CEA/FCB

1.05 Maintain individuality of Phases whilst creating coherent "whole' Academy

1 S X o D

Design Team have considered cost-effective methods for defining the identity of each phase (eg. stepping of building), whilst creating a smooth flow through the Academy from one Phase to the next. Stepped building solution is being dealt with as an Abnormal cost.

FCB

1.06 Presence on Saffron Lane / Trennant Road < 0 X D Final building location has taken account of potential presence of new building and visual impact from two roads.

FCB

1 07 Circulation areas not to be overstated 1 £ £ 0 D Design Team have aimed to maximise usage of circulation areas for other activities. FCB

1.08 Internal rights of passage (including entry points) 1 £ 0 o D Separate entrances proposed for each Phase. Long corridors to be avoidec FCB 1 1.09 Enhanced sightlines 1 £ X o D Ongoing consideration as part of developing secunty strategy. FCB

1.10 Building security strategy appropriate to Academy vision / ethos S o 0 D FCB have completed DfES Security Questionnaire to determine project-specific risk and requirements - ref. commentary in Stage D Report FCB

1.11 Optimise linkage of single-storey / two-storey elements to reduce additional cladding faces

4 O £ 0 D

Design Team have reviewed layout of facilities to minimise introduction of additional cladding faces as far as possible, however the Phase I part of the building needs to be single-storey, whilst Phases 11 & III need to be two-storey.

FCB

1.12 Maintain "strength" of architectural design 3 £ X 0 D To be monitored in conjunction with DfES/Sponsors as design develops. FCB

1.13 Optimise building levels to reduce cut & fill (flat site vs stepped scheme) 0 £ o D Design Team has undertaken studies of relative costs of excavating to achieve a flat site vs a stepped building scheme, and this is being dealt with1

as an Abnormal cost. FCB/BH

1.14 Achievement of acoustic requirements (BB93) S o o D Fleming & Barron appointed to provide specialist acoustic advice, including compliance with BB93 - proposed part-relaxation of Standard using the Carl Hopkins method has been accepted by DfES.

FSB

1.15 Optimise orientation of building (eg. solar path, visual impact of building, views from building) 1 S o o D Site Constraints study carried out to optimise preferred building ortentation

for best value solution. FCB

1.16 Opportunities for use of Diamond Jubilee Covert for educational purposes vs associated security costs

3 * X X D Churchman Landscape Architects' proposals included in Stage D Report. CLA

1.17 influence of pitches on building location £ o o D Churchman Landscape Architects' proposals included in Stage D Report. CLA to continue to consult with Sport England / Youth Sport Trust.

CLA

1.18 All weather pitch vs grass pitch 1 £ 0 £ D Churchman Landscape Architects" proposals included in Stage D Report -all-weather pitch now excluded from scheme however a MUGA will be provided.

CLA

1 19 Deal with potential contamination in Van Hire Centre £ 0 0 D Specific Site Investigation undertaken to determine levels of contamination and remediation requirements in Van Hire Centre - ref. Stage D Report.

BH |

V:\1200-1249\1242 LEICESTER ACADEMY\1242 REPORT\Stage D\14 appendices\Appendix_E




• • • • • •

Value Assessment | Improved: £ Current Status | Accepted: A No Change: 0 Rejected: R

Worse: X Developing: 0

NO. Value Improvement Idea No. of Votes Value Assessment Current Status Comments Action by

1 Quality / Performance Capital Cost Cost in Use

2.00 INTEGRATION WITH COMMUNITY

2.01 Early engagement and consultation witn local community 4 £ O o D FCB presented scheme to Stakeholder Reference Group on 30/11/04. FCB

2.02 Maintain openness / inclusive feel througn soft boundaries (ie. landscaping treatment) £ X X D Churchman Landscape Architects' proposals included in Stage D Report. CLA

2.03 Keep car access points away from local housing £ X o D

Denis Wlson Partnership have assessed Academy access requirements as part of Traffic Impact Assessment / Green Travel Plan - final reports included in Outline Planning Application and will be developed for the Detailed Planning Application.

DWP

2.04 Secure walking routes away from local housing O X o D

Denis Wlson Partnership have assessed access requirements in prepahng Green Travel Plan - final report included in Outline Planning Application. Realistic targets for pedestrian / cycling access can only be set once the Academy becomes operational

CMP

2.05 Use of Leicester CC playing fields £ 0 X D Proposals for use by Academy to be determined through joint-use agreement with Leicester CC Tribal Education to review usage requirements through timetabling analysis.

OPM /Tribal Education

2.06 Uncertainty over LIFT Health Centre N/A N/A N/A R PSG Meeting of 22/10/04 confirmed that the Health Centre is not required tc form part of the scheme.

N/A

2.07 Evening Classes - Maintain Easy Access / inclusiveness/Adult Feel £ X O D Part of ongoing design development FCB

3.00 PLANNING REQUIREMENTS - S106

3.01 Alternative design solutions for S106 requirements 4 £ 0 O D

DV\P to review highway infrastructure requirements and provide reasonably practicable best-value design solutions in response to Outline Planning Permission conditions DL to review costs of proposals and report as part o Cost Plan Confirm abnormal costs are acceptable to DfES.

DL/DWP

3.02 Alternatives to traffic calming measures required by Planners (eg. Valking bus") £ 0 O 0 To be included as part of D W s assessment and discussed further with the

Leicester CC Highways Dept. Also ref. item 2.04 above. DWP

3.03 Pedestrian Crossings £ o O D To be included as part of OVWs assessment and discussed further with the Leicester CC Highways Dept. DWP

3.04 Public Arts - Engage Community £ O O D Not included as a condition of the Outline Planning Permission. FCB

4.00 SERVICING 1 DROP-OFF POINTS / ACCESS ROUTES

4.01 Servicing (Kitchen / Food Specialism) access routes 5 £ X X D Key concern raised by Planners - FCB need to reconcile preferred kitchen location with access requirements / constraints and also minimise visual impact through external landscaping.

FCB

402 Single loading pay / delivery points £ £ £ D FCB have reviewed all required delivery access points and reconciled against internal space layout requirements to derive best value solution.

FCB/DWP

4.03 Provide suitable dropoff points / walking routes to avoid on-site / off-site traffic problems 2 £ X 0 D

Aiming to minimise off-site parking for pupils dropoff - includedaspartof Traffic Impact Assessment report. Further discussions to be held with Leicester CC Highways Dept

OWP

4.04 Align buildings to optimise walking routes £ o 0 D Establish desire lines and ohentate building to suit (subject to other site constraints). FCB/DWP

4.05 Incorporate walking routes as part of landscaping strategy £ X X D Churchman Landscape Architects' proposals included in Stage D Report. CLA

4.06 Drop-off area for SEN / School Bus £ X o D Access requirements reviewed and appropriate drop-off points identified dose to building entrance.

FCB / DWP

4.07 Provide adequate storage facilities £ X 0 D Design Team continuing to review types of deliveries requiring storage and will provide adequate storage area (eg. food deliveries)

FCB

4.08 Maintenance equipment & vehicles (Storage / Access) £ X O D Design Team continuing to review types of materials requiring storage and provide adequate storage area (eg. landscape maintenance).

FCB

4.09 Emergency Vehicle access O X 0 D Consult with local emergency seivices (eg. Fire Officer) to develop emergency access strategy and provide appropriate access routes

FCB/CWP

4 10 Consider adjacencies in designing internal / external space layout and circulation areas £ o o D Design Team have reviewed all key adjacencies with Sponsors / Tribal

Education - ret. Stage D Report drawings FCB



Project Title Leicester Academy Value Assessment Improved: s Current Status Accepted: A Revision 2 No Change: 0 Rejected: R

Issued on 24-Jan-04 Worse: X Developing: D

No. Value Improvement idea No. of Votes Value Assessment Current Status Comments Action by Quality 1 Performance Capital Cost Cost in Use

4.11 Provide adequate external lighting £ X X D FCB to review external lighting strategy with Planners FC8/BH





Value Assessment j Improved: s Current Status | Accepted: A No Change: O Rejected: R

Worse: X Developing: D

NO. Value Improvement Idea No. of Votes Value Assessment Current Status Comments Action by

I Qualitv / Performance Capital Cost Cost In Use

5.00 MAJOR / MINOR HEARTS

5.01 Address lighting issues for internalised spaces to provide more natural light

4 £ X X D Design Team to optimise natural lighting requirements • ref Stage D Report for details on provision of rooflights. FCB / BH

5,02 Provision of central atrium roof S X X D Design Team to optimise natural lighting requirements • ref. Stage D Report FCB / BH

5.03 Create appropriate perception / visual connection between "hearts" of building £ X o D Continues to be addressed as part of ongoing design development. FCB

5.04 Potential for art space to be opened out into major "heart" < O o O Continues to be addressed as part of ongoing design development. FCB

5 05 Different building levels between Phases vs additional costs of changing levels £ X O D

Design Team has reconciled the educational value of distinguishing between Phases against extra-over costs for 'cut & fill' works to create a stepped scheme, To be treated as an Abnormal cost,

F C B / B H / D L

6.00 STANDARDS

6.01 BB93 requirements - effects on location, planning, materials and cost 2 £ X O D Fleming & Barron appointed to provide specialist acoustic advice, induding compliance with BB93 - proposed part-relaxation of Standard using the Carl Hopkins method has been accepted by DfES.

FCB/F&B

6.02 B898 requirements for external covered area for nursery £ O X D Currently under review. FCB 1 DL

6.03 BB82 {primary / secondary vs 3 Phases) - opportunities for dual use / optimise use of shared facilities £ £ 0 D

Opportunities for improving value through shared use of spaces between Phases - part of ongoing design development Detailed review of proposed timetable against area schedule to be carried out.

FCB/TE

6.04 8887 requirements - daylighting / maintenance of summer temperatures {including effects of fayade, ventilation, security, fabric, shape) 5 £ X £ D BH / FCB to review Standard requirements to provide best value solution. BH / FCB

6.05 Optimise natural ventilation provision in accordance with Standards £ X £ D BH / FCB to review Standard requirements to provide best value solution. BH / FCB

6.06 Optimise thermal mass provision in accordance with Standards £ X £ D BH / FCB to review Standard requirements to provide best value solution. BH/FC8

6.07 Optimise natural lighting provision in accordance with Standards £ X £ D BH / FCB to review Standard requirements to provide best value solution BH / FCB

6.08 Optimise airtightness of building in accordance with Standards £ X £ D BH / FCB to review Standard requirements to provide best value solution (including requirements for simple detailing). BH / FCB

6.09 DDA compliance (particularly for any variations in building levels in a stepped scheme) 1 £ X X D Statutory requirements to be met (eg. provision of ramps, lifts). FCB

6 10 Building Regs - Part B (Fire) 1 £ X o D Statutory requirements to be met - AISL to provide advice on best value solutions. Arup Fire appointed to provide detailed fire assessment calculations.

FCB/AISL/AF

6.11 Comply with Secure by Design document (local implications / police input) £ X o D

FCB have completed DfES security questionnaire to determine risk level and have met with the Police to discuss security requirements - ref. Stage D Report.

FCB

MISCELLANEOUS

7.01 Best value through appropriate procurement route 3 £ O o D

DL / CS to determine appropriate procurement strategy to achieve best value in respect of providing cost certainty, retaining control over design quality and flexibility for client changes. Full Traditional procurement route proposed in PEP.

DL /CS

7.02 SEN provision to meet local requirements £ X 0 D Local SEN requirements to be met however no additional funding available from DfES - deemed to be included within CCL FCB / Tribal Education

7.03 Possibility of pre-fabricating external envelope £ £ £ D Design Team aiming to optimise installation time and therefore overall construction programme.

FCB / BH

7.04 Maintain simplicity and consistency in detailing < £ < D Deign Team aiming for consistency and simplicity in materials specification and detailing. FCB / BH



Project Title Leicester Academy Value Assessment Improved: £ Current Status Accepted: A

Revision 2 No Change: 0 Rejected: R

issued on 24-Jan-04 Worse: X Developing: D

No. Value Improvement Idea No. of Votes Value Assessment Current Status Comments Action by

Quality 1 Performance Capital Cost Cost In Use

7.05 Susta inability through design X S D BREEAM assessment to be carried out. Reasonably practicable sustainability proposals set out in Stage D Report. FCB



Appendix F Acoustic Relaxation Letter

Additional Calculations

Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds



Fleming & Barron Consultants in building acoustics, noise and vibration control

Please reply to Bath

11 January 2005

Vanessa Warnes Feilden Clegg Bradley Bath Brewery Toll Bridge Road Bath BA1 7DE

Dear Vanessa

LEICESTER ACADEMY - Internal Noise Umlts and Ventilation

I write in respect of acoustics issues far the proposed Leicester Academy and specifically in relation to internal noise levels with openable windows. We propose to utilise a suggested strategy put forward by Carl Hopkins of BRE' as Option 3 in a paper commissioned by the DfES with regard to encouraging the use of naturally ventilated schools where there may appear to be a conflict with the BB93 internal noise targets. Specifically Option 3 states:

"Require the BB93 performance standards for the indoor ambient noise level to be satisfied at the minimum ventilation rate of 3 lls/person and allow the LAn3M„ values in Table 1.1 to increase by SdB when the ventilation rate is 8 l/s/person (excluding classrooms designed specifically for use by hearing impaired students and speech, therapy rooms)."

Fleming & Barron have carried out a noise survey and assessment of noise conditions at the site, see report B147/R02b dated 20/12/04. This has identified that the typical noise levels around the site away from main noise sources are between 45 and 48 dB, rising to L^ 59 dB on the west fagade and L-M, 55 dB to the north. Typically an open window will give sound insulation of around 10-15dB(A). As site noise levels, even away from the nearby roads, do not fall below L^ 45 dB it would not be possible to reliably meet the typical BB93 internal noise target of L^ 35 dB in classrooms with fully opened windows.

Therefore to avoid the need for mechanical ventilation we propose to follow the Option 3 strategy suggested by Carl Hopkins. Adopting this strategy will allow most of the school site to meet the BB93 internal noise targets with external noise levels of up to La,, 50 dB. Such a strategy is not sought for SEN accommodation nor for other rooms with internal noise targets of LAm 30 dB.

The school accommodation has been arranged as far as possible to place less sensitive accommodation (sports halls, craft rooms etc) near the facades with noise levels exceeding L^ 50 dB. For teaching accommodation in the Phase II block, the noise level on the end fa;ade facing Saffron Land is L-Ajq 54 dB, but it is proposed that sufficient ventilation will b6 providsd for thsse

1 Carl Hopkins 31/03/04 "Aligning the aims of the new DfES Building Bulletin, on natural ventilation with those of Building Bulletin 93 'Acoustic design of schools'".

B147/L02a page 1 of 2

David Fleming BSc MSc PhD, Mike Barron MA PhD MIOA. Associate; David O'Neill BEng MSc CEng MlOA

15 Gay Street, Bath BA1 2PH,T: 01225 32G360, F. 01225 311362, E: [email protected]

Unit A2 4in Floor, Linton House, 39-51 Highgate Road, London NW5 1RT, T: 020 7482 4030, F: 020 7284 1239

Member of The Association of Noise Consultants www.flemingbarron.co.uk


http://www.flemingbarron.co.uk

Fleming & Barron

teaching rooms (first and ground floor) through the side facades, where levels are less than L^ 50 dB.

For rooms with external levels of L ,^ 50 dB or less, the 3 l/s/person ventilation can be provided by means of either attenuated (south fagade of Phase II) or unattenuated vents (all other facades) to achieve L^ 35 dB internally. Open windows can achieve L ^ , 40 dB internally for these cases.

The remaining teaching spaces where external levels are predicted to exceed L , , , 50 dB are on the north fagade of the Primary block facing Trenant Lane; free field external levels of 55 dB are expected. Here cross-ventilation is to be provided which allows for slightly smaller opening areas to meet the ventilation requirements. In order to avoid the need for mechanical ventilation the design team are considering two options, both of which would rely on acceptance of the Option 3 strategy as follows:

• Reduce noise levels incident on the outside of the classrooms to Lw 50 dB or less by provision of a barrier along the site boundary with Trenant Road to the North

• Provide attenuated natural ventilation in the fagade adjustable to achieve L^ 35 dB with a free area of 0.2m* (3 l/s/person) and LA K 40 dB with 1.0m® (8 l/s/person). This could for example be achieved with 150mm deep acoustic louvres.

We now seek acceptance from the client and the DfES to pursue this ventilation strategy. The current scheme is dependent upon this strategy, and if not approved the development will incur additional costs and an adverse environmental impact relating to the provision of mechanical ventilation.

Yours sincerely

David O'Neill

cc: Mike Entwistle • Buro Happold

B147/L02a page 2 of 2

Fleming & Barron

Example Internal Sound Insulation Calculations:

Appendix A

Classroom - Classroom Octave Band Centre Frequency. Hz 125 250 600 1000 2000 4000 Rw

DS EN 12354 Calculation INPUT DATA

element area length mass S Partition 21 40 17 25 43 52 58 58 49 F1 Floor 300 conc 7.5 600 33 42 52 59 67 73 72 F2 Ceiling 300 conc 7.5 600 33 42 52 59 67 73 72 F3 Int Partition 2xgypsum 3 40 15 23 40 47 54 56 51 F4 - Ext Partition 2xgypsum 3 40 15 23 40 47 54 66 51

JUNCTION ATTENUATION K11 Jnct of Igt dbl leaf wall & homg elemt -5.7 -5.7 -5.7 -5.7 •5.7 -5.7 -5.7 K1d 18.8 19.8 20.8 21.8 22.8 23.7 24.7 KD1 18.8 19.6 20.8 21.8 22.8 23.7 24.7 K22 Jnct of Igl dbf leaf wail & homg elemt -5.7 -5.7 -5.7 -5.7 -5.7 -5,7 -5.7 K2d 16.8 19.8 20.8 21.B 22.8 23.7 24.7 KD2 18.8 19.8 20.8 21.8 22.B 23.7 24.7 K33 Jnct of Igt coupled dbl leaf walls 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 K3d 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 KD3 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 K44 Jnct of Igt coupled dblleaf wails 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 K4d 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 K04 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 89.0 99.0 99.0 ADDITIONAL LAYERS .+F1 -1 3 5 5 5 5 5 •HI . -1 3 5 5 5 5 5 +F2 RESULTS

RDd 17.0 25.0 43.0 52.0 58.0 58.0 49.0 R11 29.5 47.1 60.4 68.3 75.5 81.8 81.3 R1d 47.1 60.9 77.6 87.0 94.6 . 96.7 95.0 RD1 47.1 60.9 77.6 87.0 94.6 98.7 95.0 R22 31.5 41.1 50.4 58.3 65.5 71.8 71.3 R2d 48.1 57.9 72.6 82.0 89.6 93.7 90.0 RD2 48.1 57.9 72.6 62.0 89.6 93.7 90.0 R33 122.5 130.5 147.6 164.5 161.5 163.5 158.5 R3cf 123.6 131.5 149.0 157.0 163.5 164.5 157.5 RD3 123.5 131£ 149.0 157.0 163.5 164.5 157.5 R44 122.5 130.5 147.5 154.5 161.5 163.5 158.5 R*d 123.5 131.5 149.0 157.0 163.5 164.5 157.5 RD4 123.5 131.5 149.0 157.0 163.5 164.5 157.5

R' 16.6 24.9 42.2 S1.0 57.2 57.B 49.0

Dw = Rw - 10log S/A S 21.0 21.0 21.0 21.0 21.0 21.0 21.0 A l-l 1? ?0 .10 39 •13 53

!>.'. 13 M •i:; 53 60 r, 1 Tolerance 3 J 3 3 3 3 3

Total Dw 12 21 39 50 57 58 50

' 50.0 62.0 62.0

47.0 47.0

Page A3

Fleming & Barron

Appendix A

Music Practice - Music Practice Octave Band Centre Frequency, Hz 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 Rw

BS EN 12354 Calcutition INPUT DATA

element area length mass S Partition 21 40 22 42 53 66 72 . 67 65 63.0 F1 Floor 300 conc 2.4 600 33 42 52 59. 87 73 .72 62.0 F2 Ceiling 300 cone 2.4 600 33 42 62 59 67 73 72 ' 62.0 F3 Int Partition 2xgypsum 3.5 40 15 23 40 47 54 • 56 51 47.0 F4 Ext Partition 2xgypsum 3.5 40 15 23 40 47 54 56 51 47.0

JUNCTION ATTENUATION •K11 Jnct of Igt dbl leaf wait & homg elemt -5.7 -5,7 -5.7 -5.7 -5.7 -5.7 -5.7 K1d 18.8 19.8 20.8 21.8 22.8 23.7 24.7 KD1 18.8 19.8 20.8 21.8 22.8 23.7 24.7 K22 Jnct of Igt dbl leaf wall & homg elemt -5.7 -5.7 -5.7 -5.7 -5.7 -5.7 -5.7 K2d 18.8 19.8 20.8 21.8 22.8 23.7 24.7 KD2 18.8 19.8 20.8 21.8 22.8 23.7 24.7 K3d Jnct of Igt coupled dbl loaf wads 13.0 12.0 11.0 10.0 9.0 8.0 7.0 K3d 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 KD3 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 K4d Jnct of Igt coupled dbl leaf walls 13.0 12.0 11.0 10.0 9.0 6.0 7.0 K4d 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 KD4 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 99.0 ADDITIONAL LAYERS <-F1 -1 3 5 S 5 5 5 +f1 -1 3 5 5 6 5 6 +F2 25mm res ceiling on 100mm cavity + fibre 5 9 14 15 17 20 20 RESULTS

RDd 22.0 42.0 53.0 66.0 72.0 67.0 65.0 R11 34.5 52.1 65.4 73.2 80.5 86.7 86.2 R1d 54.6 74.4 87.6 3 8 4 106.6 108.2 107.9 RD1 54.6 74.4 87.5 98.9 106.6 108.2 107.9 R22 41.5 55.1 69.4 78.2 87.5 96.7 96.2 R2d 60.6 80.4 96.5 108.9 118.6 123.2 122.9 RD2 55.6 71.4 82.5 93.9 101.6 103.2 102.9 R33 35.8 42.8 50.8 64.6 70.8 71.8 65.8 R3d 125.3 139.3 153.3 163.3 169.8 168.3 164.8 RD3 125.3 139.3 153 J 163.3 169.8 168.3 164.8 R44 35.8 42.8 58.8 64.8 70.8 71.8 65.8 R4d 125.3 139.3 153.3 163.3 169.6 168.3 164.8 RD4 125.3 139.3 153.3- 163.3 169.8 16B.3 164.8

R' 21.4 37.5 50.9 60.1 66.2 64.8 60.7 60.0

Dw o Rw - 10log S/A S 8.4 8.4 8.4 8.4 8.4 8.4 8.4

A 5 6 5 6 6 7 8 (approx.) Dw 19 36 49 59 65 64 60 56.0

Tolerance 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Tola! Dw 1E 33 • 40 56 62 61 57 55,0

Page A4

Fleming & Barron

Appendix A

Example Room Acoustic Calculations:

Reverberation Time Calculation

Volume

t Z S H i ZSOHz 5Q0Hl i K H r 2 K H i . 4KHz Element Absorpt ion data Area Code a Sa a Sa a Sa a S a a Sa a Sa

'' -^Concrete 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.02 1 0.02 1 0.02 1 0.02 1

<Mm • Docoustlcs. Claro. direct fa ... 0.04 1 0.34 10 0.81 2.1 1.00 28 1.00 28 0.99 28

' Dccousdcs, Claro. direct fix 0.04 1 0.34 5 0.61 11 1.00 14 1.00 14 0.99 14

mil V • Gypsum plasterboard 0.15 15 0.12 12 0.10 10 O.OG S 0.07 7 0.06 6 F l o o r " Lino on concrete -• • -.••flcf-^65^- 0.04 •4 0.03 3 0.03 3 0.03 3 0.03 3 0.02 2 V W n d ^ s ' '. Heavy Glass 0.18 2 O.OG 1 0.04 0 0.03 0 0.02 0 0.02 0

PPBT? •' '. Umber panel • :2 • -t£j&; 0.25 1 0.15 0 0.10 0 0.09 0 O.OS 0 0.07 0 V/flllAbS

Air Air Abs at 20C 50% RH 270 m J 0 0 0.00 1 0.00 1 0.01 2 0.03 7

Total Absorpt fon TZSHz tSQHz 600Hz 1KHi ZKHz 4 KHz

Unoccupied 24 31 49 56 56 Sa

Sabino RT 12SHz ZSOHz 500Hz av. 1KHz 2 KHz 4 KHz Unoccupied 1.83 1.41 0.88 0.6 0.79 0.77 0.74 Low Occupancy 1.83 1.41 0.68 0.8 0.78 0.77 0.74 High Occupancy 1.83 1.41 0.S8 o.a o.7a 0.77 0.74 Target o.a

Prefect: Space: Height

Leicester Academy Year7 Classroom

Job: B147 Osto: 29/11 AM

Volume ; 180 re1

125 Hz 250Hz SOOHz 1KHz 2 KHz 4KHz Element Absorp t ion data Area Coda a S a a S a a Sa a So: a Sa a S a Maki.CcBIng Concrete so no' 0.01 1 0.01 1 0.02 1 0.02 1 4.02 1 0.02 1 Ceiling Abs Dacoustics, Claro. direct fix 1b it 09 0.04 0 0.34 3 0.81 8 1.00 10 1.00 10 0.99 10 Abs perimeter ' Decousifcs, Claro. direct Rx 5 109 0.04 0 0.34 2 0.81 4 1.00 5 1JOO 5 0.99 5 Walts Gypsum plasterboard 84 p03 0.15 13 0.12 10 0.10 8 0.08 7 0.07 8 0.08 S Floor , Thin Carpet on Concrete 60 . c02 0.02 1 0.04 2 0.08 5 0.20 12 055 21 0.40 24 Windows Heavy GJass 7 gOi 0.18 1 0.06 0 0.04 0 0.03 0 0X>2 0 0.02 0 odors Timber panel 2 ffl^ 0.25 1 0.15 0 0.10 0 0.09 0 0 5 8 0 0.Q7 0 W in Abs X09

'

Air Air Abs M 20C 50% RM 180 m J 0 0 0.00 0 0.00 1 0.01 2 0.03 $

T o t t l Absorpt ion 125Hz ZSoHt SOOHz 1KHr 2KHz 4 KHz Un occupied 17 19 27 36 45 so

Sabine RT 125 Hz ZSOHl SOOHz av. 1 KH Z ZKHr 4KHj-Unoccupied 1.13 1.53 1.06 o.e 0.80 0.64 0.58 J 'H-.' n r r i i f vv,' V I n I 'H i ru; 0.8 r> M o r..i r, )fii|Ji>).:..(i|>.in Y ) :•••: I .••-.< 1 til. 0.1! tl.Iv.l

' r a i a H L 0 . 2

P a g e A1

Fleming & Barron

Appendix A

Project: Space: Height:

voiume g f l S S K

12Sltz 2 50Hz 5001 Iz 1KH* 2K HZ 4KHl Element Absorption data - Area Codo a Sa a Sa a Sa ft Set a Sa a Sa foaTffi&Sinfa'* "Concrete ' t m 0.01 0 0.01 •0 0.02 1 0.02 1 0,02 1 0,02 1

-Decoustics, Claro, direct fix i ® .m. 0.04 6 0.34 54 .0,81 130 1.00 160 1.00 160 0.99 158

. f i f e . Gypsum plasterboard l i s ;p<?3. 0.15 62 0.12 50 0.10 42 0.08 33 0.07 29 0.06 25

. f i f e . Wood, stage floor, 2 layers, 27 : : 0.10 20 0.07 14 o.oc 12 0.06 12 0.06 12 0.06 12 rWrncjows • Heavy Glass 2(J 0.18 4 0.06 1 0.04 1 0.03 1 0.02 0 0.02 0 BoSrs' Timber panel . d trts- 0.25 -1 0.15 1 0.10 0 0.09 0 0.08 0 0.07 0 ftlllAbs

Timber panel

Dftftes ' • Medium Velour Curtain 50% Fc So o.os Z 0.25 10 0.40 16 0.50 20 O.GO 24 0.50 20

Air Air Abs at 20C 50% RH 1S00 m' 0 0 0.00 4 0.00 6 0.01 13 0.03 39

Total Abs<?rption IZSHi ZSOHj SOOHt 1 KHz 2KHz <mz Unoccupied 96 130 205 233 240 256

Sabine RT 125 Hz ZSOHi SOOHx ev. 1KHz 2KHI 4KHz Unoccupied 2.51 1.84 1.17 1.1 1.03 1.00 054 Low Occupancy 2.5 T 1.34 1,17 1 .1 1.03 1.00 034 High Occupancy 2.51 1.84 1.17 1.1 1.03 1.00 0.94

Target 0.8-1.2

P n q o A 2


Appendix G DfEE Security Questionnaire




0 1 2 3 4 5

Low Risk High Risk

Part 1 : I n c i d e n c e o f C r i m e in last 12 m o n t h s

1. Trespass No cases of trespassers in school grounds

2. Vandalism No cases of vandalism reported

3. Theft/burglary No cases of theft or burglary

4. Fire No arson attacks in the locality

5- Safety - attacks on staff or pupils No attacks or threats reported

6. Drug/solvent abuse No problems reported

13

a

Trespassers commonly present in school grounds

Frequent and costly vandalism of school buildings

Frequent theft or burglary

I p t

Schools in locality have suffered from arson attacks

Attacks inside school or in vicinity of school

School or locality problem with drugs or solvent abuse

Part 2: Environment and buildings

1. Incidence of crime in surrounding area. Locality has a low crime j j j | rate

2. School overlooked from roads and/or housing Grounds clearly visible to public

3. Boundaries, fences and gates Boundaries well defined f with fences and gates ~ to grounds preventing all but determined intruders

H I

M

locality has high crime rate as reported to police

Unobserved grounds

No fences or gates preventing unauthorised access

Appendix Improving Security in Schools

DfEE Publication

4. Clearly de f ined entrances Clear entrances wi th signs directing visitors

5. Wel l organised recept ion area and visitors' cont ro l Pass system in operation wi th badges issued to all visitors

6. Car park ing Car parks well lit and overlooked

7. Cond i t ion and appearance of bui ld ings Buildings well kept and in good repair with no graffiti and not vandalised

8. Detached and tempora ry bui ld ings No buildings detached from main block

9. Recesses and in ternal cour tyards. No places for intruders to hide and break in unobserved

10. Secure exit doors Doors secure against all but most determined intruders

11. Secure w i n d o w s and roo f l igh ts Windows and rooflights j

protected against burglars

B

EL

E L

JxE

EL

M

No clear entrances or multiple entrances

No system of recording visitors

No safe place to park, car parks unlit and not overlooked or surrounded by trees

Buildings badly kept and in state of disrepair, graffiti covered and vandalised

Many detached buildings including temporary huts

I Numerous places for — intruders to hide and break

•a:

E I

in unobserved

Fire exit doors easily forced, inadequate locks

Windows and rooflights provide easy access

0 1 2 3 4 5

Low Risk | 1 1 1 1 1 | High Risk

12. Va l uab l e e q u i p m e n t

that is easily s to len

a n d d i spo sed o f

Few computers, TVs ] r and video cassette recorders

13. Fire p recaut ions

Buildings have r r j ~ adequate fire compart mentation, fire/smoke barriers and fire doors

14. C o m m u n i t y ethos a n d

s u p p o r t f o r s choo l

Strong community and I T parent support benefits — security eg, active PTA

15. O u t of hou r s use of

school facilities

No reported problems | r and/or security benefit — from out of hours use

Part 3: Security measures

Many computers, keyboards, FAXs, camcorders, etc.

Over-large fire compart-ments and lack of fire/smoke barriers and doors.

Insignificant parent or community involvement or negative attitudes

Many security problems due to out of hours use, special risks eg, bars, social clubs

1. Schoolwatch scheme Efficient system of reporting suspicious incidents eg, paging via satellite link

2. Pupi l involvement Successful youth action I I I I I r r j No involvement in security group or school council — — — ' — —

3. Waste Bins Waste and recycling | I Irt-I" I I "| Unlocked mobile bins left bins locked up every ' — ^ — 1 — ' — 1 around school night

No scheme in operation

0 1 2 3 4 5

Low Risk M I M T 1 High Risk

Security l i gh t ing

Lighting of all entrances, footpaths and building facades

Survei l lance

Efficient surveillance eg, CCTV covering perimeter or security patrols

Intruder a larms

System using passive infra-red detectors in a l l 1 — — ' — 1 — 1 — 1

ground floor perimeter and other vulnerable rooms

Fire detection/

spr inkler systems

Automatic system rcn i — i — i — i — i No automatic detection linked to fire brigade 1 1 0 1 I I I I I

Property m a r k i n g

Ail valuable property i r r a — i i—i—i No markings on property marked and kept in 1 1 1 1 I I I I secure store or secured locally

Cash hand l i n g

p rocedures

Secure methods in l y j i — > — i — i — i — i Procedures lacking operation ^ — L - 1 — 1 — ' — 1

f !)> | M i l N o lighting

I II/.; I M I I NOSYS,EM

No system


Appendix H ICT Initial Report


F e i l d e n C l e g g Brad ley Architects LLP Arup Fire Fleming and Barron


) > ) ) » >

Leicester Academy

letcsster Academy ICT Dnft Sope O Repuirvl iinc Pagi 23 of 23

Q7/02/J005

) )

Issue and Revision Record

Rev Date Originator Description

1 24/01/05 Stephen Thomas Copy for Stage D Report First Draft

This document has been prepared for the titled project or named part thereof and should not be relied upon or used for any other project without an independent check being carried out as to its suitability and prior written authority of Mott MacDonald being obtained. Mott MacDonald accepts no responsibility or liability for the consequence of this document being used for a purpose other than the purposes for which it was commissioned. Any person using or relying on the document for such other purpose agrees, and will by such use or reliance be taken to confirm his agreement to indemnify Mott MacDonald for all loss or damage resulting there from. Mott MacDonald accepts no responsibility or liability for this document to any party other than the person by whom it was commissioned.

Ttie following document has been provided before it has been fully verified by Cambridge Education internal Quality Assurance, in order to meet the Draft Stage D report deadline.

Please Note:

Loeester Acadtrny ICT Dnlt Stage D fitpcr&l. doc Pagt 2J of 23

07/01/XXS

ICT Vision.

The last five years have seen an unprecedented move towards greater access to ICT both in the home and in school. The uses of ICT have also changed from simple productivity tasks such as word processing towards multimedia manipulation and global communication. Hardware developments continue to provide increased convergence of functionality within smaller and more portable devices.

The following vision assumes that such trends will continue, but provides the flexibility to accommodate today's technologies within a frame work of contemporary educational thinking, In the following ways;

Students Students will emerge from the Academy with the skills necessary to be self-supported lifelong learners in the 21st Century. The Academy will have provided them with opportunities to use ICT collaboratively and creatively. It will have enhanced their self esteem and motivation by allowing them to use visual, auditory and kinaesthetic expression and communication even if their literacy and academic abilities were below average. They will have experience of working on more extended projects which connect with their own community and provide opportunity for self reflection and evaluation as well as assessment by online mentors, national and international peers.

The ICT infrastructure at Leicester Academy will provide Students with the following;

• Increased flexibility to study where, when and in ways best suited to individual needs and preferences, within the Academy campus as well as outside of traditional school hours.

• Learning resources, processes and systems that are differentiated, customised and consequently more personalised to the students' individual needs and preferred teaming styles.

• Alternative means of access to learning and improved participation, particularly for learners with special educational needs and those disaffected with traditional teaching methods.

• Increased motivation through learning that stimulates, challenges and takes Into account prior and concurrent experience in and out of school.

• Real-time and personalised feedback on attainment and progress through the use of Interactive assessment tools and the ability to present and share achievement with others.

Staff ICT provides teaching staff with increased opportunities to develop innovative ways of supporting pupils' learning, by creating environments in which students can engage In cognitive partnerships with technology, to actively seek and generate relationships between lesson content and prior knowledge. It should help them to develop and manage learning beyond the classroom and outside of the school day, reinforcing synergies between home, community and the school.

Teachers will further their career at the Academy through effective use of ICT. They will share good practice across the school and with the wider online community and in doing so, be empowered to review the effectiveness of the learning gains made by the students they work with. They will use ICT to communicate, assess, record, track, analyse and report the performance of students and consequently play an active role in developing the new role of teachers within the context of workforce remodelling and the personalisation of learning.

The ICT infrastructure at Leicester Academy will provide Teachers with the following;

• Improved access to a wide range of on-line and pre-prepared digital learning resources and schemes of work, to streamline the preparation and delivery of lessons, and the means by which to present them interactively to students.

• Improved electronic communication to promote collegiality between staff, across the phases within the Academy Itself as well as between staff in affiliated or Feeder Primary schools, to allow the sharing of resources and best practice.

Leicester Academy ICT DnA Stage D Repoitvl.doc 07/01/2005

• More proactive and analytical use of MIS and pupil data, based on a core management database, with a common mode of entry for raw data, which can subsequently be processed automatically to generate a wide range of Information outputs such as performance data, reports to parents and the setting and tracking of individual learning goals.

• Reduced workload through the automation of routine administrative tasks, such as Pupil Registration and Attendance monitoring, and the availability of dedicated support staff to develop ICT based learning resources and provide real-time hands-on support.

School Leaders and Governors ICT will be used to support Leadership and Management at an institutional level through the sophisticated use of Management Information Systems. This will lead to better informed decision-making and more efficient information flow within the Academy, between staff as well as between staff, students and their parents. The leadership team at Leicester Academy should expect ICT provide the following;

• More effective and efficient monitoring and tracking of pupils' performance, attendance and behaviour.

• Improved communication In matters such as pupil transfer, liaison on pupils with special needs, supporting continuity across phases, and curriculum planning and tracking

• Extended reach to excellent teaching (particularly in shortage subjects) and the maintenance of a normal curriculum even when qualified teachers are absent.

• An enhanced community learning presence and more dynamic communications with parents.

• Networking that supports specialisation and enhanced professional collaboration with other school leaders across the country.

Parents and Local CommMnity Parents and the wider community will consider the Academy as a local resource, as much for them as for their children. Parents will be well informed of their child's performance through online information facilities and able to use the internet to engage with their child's learning to understand what is needed for progression.

The Academy's ICT systems should provide the following opportunities for Parents;

• To become better informed active participants in their children's education through Improved access to information about the Academy and Its performance, both generally as well as specifically in relation to their own children.

• Easier and alternative means of communication with school staff, governors and other parents allowing them to become more involved members of the school community.

• Improved community access to local ICT facilities for lifelong learning opportunities.

Turning the vision in to reality There have been many attempts to understand patterns of ICT adoption in education. Hie following model, developed by Simon Hooper and Lloyd Reiber, is used here to illustrate in simplified form, both traditional and contemporary applications of technology in education. Tfie model has five steps or phases: Familiarisation, Utilisation, Integration, Reorientation, and Evolution and suggests that the full potential of any educational technology can only be realised when teachers progress through all five phases, otherwise, the technology is likely to be misused or discarded.

Minster Aca&rny ICT Draft Stags D Haportvl.doc Pagall of 23

B7/O2/2Q0S

Teaching with Technology

Tile Contenqioraiy perspective of educational tedinology focuses on a learner's active construction of knowledge, and can reach all tne way Lo Uie Evolution stage.

Familiarisation The Familiarisation phase starts with a Teacher's initial exposure to and experience with a technology e.g. by participating in an INSET session covering the "how to's" of a technology, such as word processing, spreadsheets, etc. In this phase, the teacher simply becomes acquainted with a technology.

Utilisation The Utilisation phase occurs when the teacher tries out the technology in the classroom for the first time. There is the inherent danger that they may discard the technology if they encounter technical problems, and resort to the traditional way of doing things, which the technology is likely to have simply replaced, rather than extended or enhanced.

Integration Integration represents the "break through" phase. This occurs when a teacher consciously decides to designate certain tasks and responsibilities to the technology, so, if the technology is suddenly removed or is unavailable, resorting to the traditional approach would no longer allow the same objectives to be achieved - they are committed to the technology.

Some teachers are likely to be satisfied with Integration as the end of the adoption process, although for others it marks the true beginning of understanding educational technology and the potential for professional "metamorphosis".

Reorientation Teachers who reach the Reorientation phase do not view good teaching as the act of 'delivering content'. Instead, the teacher's role is to establish a learning environment that supports and facilitates students as they construct and shape their own knowledge.

Teachers in the Reorientation phase are open to technologies that enable this knowledge construction process and are not threatened by being "replaced" by technology. In fact, these teachers will probably include technology in their classrooms without necessarily feeling the need to be an "expert" with it themselves. Their interest is on how technology allows their students to engage the subject matter. It would not be unusual for the students to be more competent than their teachers with the technology. Rathe r t h a n v i e w a t e c h n o l o g y as s o m e t h i n g t h a t m u s t be m a s t e r e d b e f o r e h a n d a n d p r e s e n t e d t o s t u d e n t s in a c o n t r o l l e d a n d s y s t e m a t i c w a y , a t e a c h e r a t t h e R e o r i e n t a t i o n p h a s e w i l l e n c o u r a g e a n d e x p e c t s t u d e n t s t o a p p r o p r i a t e the t e c h n o l o g y i n w a y s t ha t c o u l d n o t b e a n t i c i p a t e d .

LetariW Academy !CTDraft Stage U KeeorTvl.doc PiSe 13 sf2J

07/02/1005

Evolution The final phase. Evolution, serves as a reminder that the educational system must continue to evolve and adapt to remain effective. There will never be a final solution or conclusion and to be searching for one means that one is missing the point. The classroom learning environment should constantly change to meet the challenge and potential provided by new understandings of how people leam as well as to accommodate changes in society and new initiatives and approaches to education, such as Personalised Learning, as a whole.

Conclusion The ultimate goal for Leicester Academy is to create a student-focussed, re-oriented and continually evolving learning environment that unites the technological capability of ICT with pedagogical necessity -balancing what can be done with what should be done - so that the ICT infrastructure encourages students to engage in deeper cognitive activity than they would have done without it.

Following discussions with Tribal Educational Consultant and existing Head Teachers at Southfields Infant and Newry Junior Schools, It is evident that teaching staff are at varying levels on the Hooper and Reiber continuum and that it is therefore essential to design and implement an ICT system that can 'grow' with the teachers as their confidence and philosophy for the use of ICT develops.

Hie technology needs to be ubiquitous, accessible and approachable - to ensure that is it available to both staff and students, and meets their needs, when they want to use it.

In practice, this is likely to be achieved in the following ways;

• All teachers will have a Laptop computer - for professional productivity, communication and the preparation of digital learning resources.

• Each teaching room will have a data projector and interactive whole class teaching system, to which the teacher can quickly and easily connect their laptop.

• All teaching rooms will be capable of allowing whole-class wireless use of laptops, with the potential for up to half the class having access to power and data sockets at any one time.

• The target computer^M-student ratio is likely to exceed the Becta model of 1:4. This will be achieved through a combination of mobile, classroom-based and centralised ICF resources.

o Each teaching area will have access to networked computers of a specification appropriate tcrthe task, either via class-sets of laptops on trolleys being brought to the classroom, or fixed PCs in or adjacent to the classroom, to allow ICT to be used at the point of learning.

o These will be linked to appropriate peripherals, both generic and subject specific, with corresponding power and data sockets together with surrounding functional space.

o LRC and ICT Resource Clusters will provide centralised and strategically placed learning resource areas, allowing a flexible combination of structured use for teacher-led lessons as well as more informal use by Individuals and small groups, to promote independence and interdependence for learners.

• Video Streaming and Broadcast: There will be the facility to deliver video based learning resources across the network, to distribute live or pre-recorded content to all, or selected, classrooms.

• In addition to a high quality LAN infrastructure, there will be a background wireless network, covering all key areas of the Academy, to allow mobility and freedom to use ICT where required.

• MLE/VLE: There will be a Managed Virtual Learning Environment to simplify the development, structure and organisation of digital resources for staff, allowing them to create a personalised learning environment for students to enable them to become interdependent learners.

MIS: The teachers ' laptops should faci l i tate ' real t ime ' access to the Academy MIS systems to prov ide impor tan t s tudent re la ted in fo rmat ion , inc luding regist rat ion data, as well as gener ic Academy information and policies.

lekesier Academy ICT Oraft Stag* D ftepom-l.doc Paye 21 of 23

{17/02/2005

The building bloeksdf the ICT solution

The following section explains in more detail, the rationale behind the proposed design and specification of the ICT provision at Leicester Academy. It will define how the various technologies available have been chosen to meet the varying needs of teachers as they increasingly integrate ICT in to their students' learning, and allow them to eventually re-orient, all in the context of the proposed design parameters of the building, so that the equipment can be used effectively as an integral part of the building fabric, rather than appearing to be bolted on retrospectively.

Specifying the 'right1 combination of technologies is clearly very Important, but equally so, is the mode in which they are deployed i.e. are they to be 'integrated' in to existing practice or as a vehicle to re-orient the learning environment.

The following list of equipment has been identified as the key building blocks for the ICT solution at the Academy, which can be deployed in various combination and permutations to meet the various needs of the staff and students, and each will be explored in more detail below;

1. Teacher Laptop 2. Docking station 3. Data Projectors 4. Interactive Technologies

a. Interactive Whiteboards b. Interactive Slates

5. Document Visualiser Cameras 6. Teacher Multimedia lectern 7. Student laptops 8. Laptop Trolleys 9. Student PCs 10. Subject specific Peripherals

Leicester Academy ICT Draft Stage D Reportvi.doc Page 23 of 23

07/S2/200S

• • • • •

Teacher Laptop There is a wealth of evidence, such as the Laptop for Teachers Initiative Evaluation Report, on the real benefits that personal access brings in terms of building teachers' confidence In the technology and their belief in its potential.

Consequently, each full time member of the teaching staff, and an appropriate selection of support staff, will be provided with a laptop which will be an essential part of their everyday equipment for teaching and administration purposes, which will include;

• Planning, preparing and sharing teaching resources and digital learning activities • Teaching and publishing lesson content and on-line courses for students • Communicating - typically via email, both internally and externally • Accessing central school Information e.g. calendars, policy documents, meeting schedules etc. • Recording and analysing student performance data on the school Managed Learning Environment

and MIS Systems

Initial consultation suggests that it is also most likely that teachers will also use their laptops to take an electronically assisted registration on a lesson by lesson basis, on the grounds that it is more personal than the alternative systems such as "swipe cards, although further discussion and consultation in both educational and technical terms may be appropriate.

To simplify the process of connecting and disconnecting from the network and other peripherals for the itinerant teacher moving between different teaching rooms and staff areas, some form of docking station or port replicator is required for their laptop, as defined in the following section. This will allow staff to connect to the Academy network in a variety of different ways;

• Wirelessly via a fixed 'background' floodlit wireless envelope covering key areas of the campus. • Hardwired via direct connection to an available RJ45 data outlet using an appropriate flylead. • Hardwired via Docking Station/Port Replicator - to simplify to process of connecting and

disconnecting from the network for the mobile teacher.

The laptop will have internal tri-band wireless capability (I.e. 802.11 a, b and g) to provide maximum compatibility with a variety of wireless networks.

The laptops will be specified with an internal DVD/CD-RW combo drive, as well as plenty of connectivity options, particularly USB ports, which should be easily accessible for connecting peripherals such as digital cameras, data-logging devices etc. A Firewlre port for digital video editing and Bluetooth wireless capability will also be specified.

Because Teachers will need to carry their laptop around the Academy, as well as to and from home, the size and weight of the laptop will be an important consideration, hence a target weight of less than 2.7Kg. An appropriate bag or rucksack will also be provided. The laptop also needs to be robust, meaning that the quality of construction and materials will also be an important factor.

A range of backup parts, including spare batteries and external battery chargers, will be specified to allow the Academy Technical Team to offer first line support for staff to overcome day-to-day problems.

Leicester Academy ICT Draft Stage D Pepettv!. doc Page 23 of 23

07/V7/200S

Docking Station The phiiosophy for this device is that it should allow the teacher to make their laptop fully connected, as described below, with a single operation to avoid the need to connect multiple individual cables, many of which are relatively delicate, at the beginning and end of a lesson.

The docking station or port replicator will provide, in a single operation, full connectivity to;

• The network infrastructure - for general access to the server based resources • Data projector (VGA) • The interactive whiteboard and/or interactive slate. (USB) • Document Visualise!" • Amplified speakers • Mouse • Resident power supply - to ensure that the teacher's battery never runs flat during a lesson!

The facility to subsequently connect other peripherals, especially via USB, once the laptop is In the docking station is also an important consideration e.g. for digital cameras, USB memory keys etc.

Docking stations will also be provided in staff work areas, to allow teachers to connect to the network and other peripherals with the same ease during their non-contact time.

Although the docking station approach implies that the Academy will need to standardise on a particular make and model of laptop to ensure that the docking stations are compatible with every teacher's laptop, the benefits of such an approach are considered to out weigh this potential downside. The impact of this situation can be minimised by selecting a laptop supplier with a long term policy of making their docking stations compatible with other laptops in their range, or those purchased in the future.

Data Projectors Overview Although in the future, large LCD display screens may become a viable alternative, the data projector is currently the heart of any presentational technology system and hence one is required in every teaching room.

The projector provides scale, clarity and collective focus with the image it creates. It allows multiple media to be displayed simultaneously from the teacher's laptop to deliver a multi-sensory approach that is appealing to a wide range of students with different preferred learning styles.

The projector will be specified to create a dear, bright and high contrast image in normal ambient lighting conditions, so that a variety of other audio-visual or interactive devices (described later) can be used in conjunction with it, to create a truly flexible and multi purpose teaching tool.

To ensure that projector is accessible and available for use as quickly and easily as possible, it will be fully installed on a ceiling mount, with all the associated AV connections terminated on an access plate in a position adjacent to the teacher's other ICT equipment.

The security of the projector is also paramount - hence a security cage is specified to protect it from both accidental or malicious damage as well as theft.

Leicester Academy ICT Draft Stage U Report'!. doc Page 2j cr->

{17/01/2005

Interactive Technologies Interactive devices provide the teacher with the option to control their laptop and the image it creates via the projector, without necessarily having to stand adjacent to their laptop using a mouse.

Various devices have been considered to provide this functionality, as illustrated above, however the two main forms of interactive technology that will be deployed across the Academy in various combinations will be;

1. Interactive Slates 2. Interactive whiteboards.

Some of the alternative solutions, such as wireless projectors and Tablet PCs may become a more viable solution in the future, and will not be precluded by the overall design of the ICT solution or building fabric.

Interactive Whiteboards: An interactive whiteboard is a large touch-sensitive board, which depending on the model, can be used to control the teacher's laptop either directly with a finger or with a special pen. Typically the whiteboard should be mounted at right angles to the windows, to avoid sunlight 'bleaching' the image from the projector, and there must be dear space around the Interactive Whiteboard at the front of the dass, allowing students and staff to approach it and interact with it easily (i.e. not behind the teachers desk, or mounted above a work surface or storage facility which would be difficult to reach over).

Broadly, an interactive whiteboard can provide benefits at three levels; • to increase efficiency, enabling teachers to draw upon a variety of ICT-based resources without

disruption or loss of pace • to extend teaching, using more engaging materials to explain concepts

to transform learning, creating new learning styles stimulated by interaction with the whiteboard.

However, it is only when used to extend and transform learning, rather than potentially perpetuating the teacher 'instruction' model discussed previously, that the cost of an interactive whiteboard relative to cheaper solutions, such as data.projectors alone or conventional whiteboards, can be fully justified. Research indicates that while some teachers are making full use of interactive whiteboards, this is not yet generally the case. There are also difficulties to overcome relating to the height at which the board is mounted and Issues for the user needing to stand in the light of the projector.

Interactive Slates: Consequently, an Interactive slate will be specified as the baseline 'Interactive teaching tool' for every classroom, with interactive whiteboards only in selected rooms. The interactive slate is effectively an A4-sized wireless graphics tablet that provides an interactive surface and pen that is used to control the PC or Laptop to which it is connected, just like a miniature interactive whiteboard.

This provides teachers with the facility to use interactive whiteboard software and teaching techniques, as well as the flexibility to move around the room and pass it to students for maximum interaction and student involvement, with minimal disruption to the classroom setup and at a fraction of the cost of an interactive whiteboard.

Leicester Academy ICf Draft Stage D RcDortvl.&c Page 23 of 23

07/VJ/2W5

Document Visualiser Cameras A document camera (or Visualiser') is proposed as an integral part of the ICT solution in every teaching room.

This is a versatile devioe that can be used to project a variety of high resolution images via the data projector including paper-based resources such as text, diagrams and photographs, as well as 3-D or microscopic objects that might constitute part of a practical demonstration by a teacher.

It is also an engaging way In which students can share work that they have produced on paper with their peers.

Additionally, it provides the teacher with an alternative to writing on a whiteboard - they can simply write on a normal sheet of paper with a normal pen, under the visualiser camera, and the whole class will be able to see it via the projector.

Teacher Multimedia Lectern

In order to provide a practical and well-organised location for the all of the above equipment e.g. teacher's laptop, docking station, visuallser, interactive slate, speakers and amplifier etc. some form of "multimedia lectern' or presentation desk will be provided.

This item of furniture will be specified so that it not only provides cable management for the associated connections to the laptop and visualiser, but also a secure location for the laptop when the teacher leaves the room, either temporarily between lessons or during breaks.

It will be designed so that it is ergonomicaliy comfortable when used in a standing teaching position, allowing the teacher to interact seamlessly with their class i.e. without stooping or turning their back on the students.

As this functionality is likely to be required in most rooms, laboratories and workshops, it will be designed so as not to dominate or have significant implications on the layout of the room. The recommendation is for a relatively compact piece of furniture that fixes to the front wall, adjacent to the projection surface/whiteboard, as this a common element in every room.

Laketttr Acatfamy ICT Draft Stage D tteportvl. the Page 23 of 23

07/V2/2005

• • # • •

Student laptops In general classroom environments, where the use of space needs to be adaptable and flexible rather than predominantly dedicated to the use of ICT, general purpose laptop computers, with wireless LAN connections, will be the typical form factor for student computers.

The student laptops will not have individual docking stations to connect to in the classrooms and will therefore need to run predominantly from battery power and connect wirelessly to the network. It is these two aspects that will be given highest priority when specifying the most appropriate student laptop.

A minimum number of power and data outlets will be available in all rooms (described In more detail later) to allow a proportion of students to plug in at full bandwidth and power, if required.

A selection of external battery chargers and spare batteries will also be specified to allow the teacher to provide a fully charged battery to a student at short notice, if required during a lesson.

The latest 'power saving' processors and wireless chipsets e.g. Intel Centrino will be required as well as being able to accommodate an additional 'secondary' battery - in place of, say, the CDROM or Floppy Drive.

The laptops will be specified with plenty of connectivity options, particularly USB ports, which should be easily accessible for connecting peripherals such as digital cameras, data-logging devices etc. A Firewire port for digital video editing, and Bluetooth wireless capability will also be considered.

Leicester/tcadem/ ICTDtat Stage D ZteportvI.doc Page 23 ot 23

{17/07/2005

Laptop Trolleys Models of partial 'personal ownership' of laptops, whereby students in a particular year group might 'own' the laptop for a day and carry it around with them, were considered. However, after discussion, it was decided to allocate the laptops on a 'Phase' basis, meaning that their deployment and use will be coordinated by the staff in a given phase or subject area.

To provide the flexibility to use ICT at the point of learning in any lesson, specialist trolleys will be specified to transport, protect, re-charge and store the multiple class-sets of student laptops and other associated peripherals e.g. a printer and wireless access point.

The trolley will contain everything required to create a 'mobile ICT suite' that can be used to introduce ICT in to a normal classroom environment as quickly and easily as possible.

Laptops trolleys are available in a range of shapes and sizes; typically hold either 15 or 30 laptops. A combination of the two sizes will be specified, to allow maximum flexibility of deployment with in each Phase e.g. in lessons where the requirement is for a laptop to be shared between two students, rather than tie up a full set of 30 laptops, a 15 trolley can be used instead.

Storage areas will be provided within each Phase, with power and data outlets, to allow the trolleys to be stored securely overnight and when charging.

Leicester Aceoemy iCTDraft Siege D fteoo:tvl-dec Page 23 sf 23

{17/07/2005

Student PCs In dedicated ICT areas, such as the library area, Art, Music, ICT and business the recommendation is reversed in favour of more fully featured, fixed desktop computers. These will use either a 15" or 17" LCD Flat screen, depending on application, with the CPU case having the minimum possible foot print to allow them to be integrated within the furniture as dosely as possible. All-in-one PC designs and furniture with integral computers will be considered to ensure that the work surfaces where PCs are used can still be used flexibly for other complementary activities.

Apple computers will be considered for use in Graphics and Art, to reflect the role they play in these niche areas of business.

In specialist subject areas, a combination of both fixed PC's and Laptops is likely to be dictated by the individual demands of the subject curriculum.

In the Phase 1 area of the Academy it is proposed that all classrooms will have two computers permanently available within the room for students to use individually or as part of small group activities. Whilst these could be traditional PC's there is potential for them to be Tablet PC's with docking stations instead, to provide even greater flexibility and functionality.

In wireless mode the Tablet PC can be passed between students, and used in a variety of locations around the room, either as part of a whole class teaching activity or for individual use, making use of the pen-based input device and handwriting recognition functionality.

When there is a need to play high bandwidth content, or to use a more traditional mouse and keyboard, the tablet can be placed in docking station for direct wired connection to both the LAN and other peripherals.

Differences between phases Initial consultation with the existing head teachers at Southfields Infant and Newry Junior Schools, as well discussion and collaboration with the Tribal Education consultants, have confirmed the requirements for ICT equipment are broadly In line across all the phases I.e. laptops for teachers, projectors in classrooms and a mixture of Laptops and PC's for students, although ultimately the software applications and the overall mode of use may be vary. The key differences anticipated are as follows;

• Interactive whiteboards to be installed in all Phase L Classrooms. • 2 PC's (or Tablet PC's) available permanently in all dassrooms up to Yr6.

ICT provision in different Classroom ^types' In terms of their ICT prov is ion, the teaching rooms in the Academy have been classi f ied in 4 main ' types;

1. Standard Classroom 2. ICT Enhanced Classroom

Leicester Academy ICTDraft Suge O Report* i. do; Q7/02/2CO5 Pag* 23 of 23

3. Specialist Room 4. ICT Suite or Ouster

All with have a baseline ICT provision for the teacher, made up from a combination of the equipment described above e.g. data projector and docking station. The key differences are in the range of options available to support student use of ICT at a number of different levels, as described below;

1. Standard classroom A Standard classroom is capable of accommodating a lesson in which all students are using low bandwidth applications on laptops via wireless networking, an internet connection and 'Office' tools. For some students, who need to access to content which requires them to download and upload a large quantity of data thai there are also 12 data points around the room for them to plug Into. Consideration needs to be given to the position of these power and data outlets, and how the respective cables, might pass through the adjacent furniture so that flexibility can be maintained. Power sockets will also be provided alongside the data outlet for laptops whose battery power has not been well managed, so that they can be plugged in to recharge whilst the students are wording. The proposed equipment list for a Standard Classroom is as follows;

• Ceiling mounted data projector • Large projection screen • Teacher laptop docking station • Teacher multimedia lectern • Bluetooth wireless interactive slate • Visualiser • Amplified computer speakers • Capability to bring a laptop trolley in to the room for individual student use, powered by battery

and using wireless networking. There needs to be space for a 30 trolley or two 15 trolleys to be parked conveniently just in side the dassroom door - with power and data connections nearby to allow the wireless access polnt(s), printer and data switch to be powered up and connected to the cabling infrastructure.

• Alternative power and data locations for laptop use on mains power and 'wired' networking for up to 12 students (or fixed Classroom PCs if required). These will be distributed around the room, adjacent to appropriate work surfaces.

• Flexibility of furniture layout is of high Importance I.e. not fixed to locations adjacent to power and data connections.

2. ICT Enhanced ICT Room Approximately one in every three rooms will be enhanced to allow high bandwidth use of laptops for the whole class. These ICT Enhanced Rooms are similar to the above in that they are 'normal' classrooms to which laptops are brought in a trolley, except that it has enough power and data sockets for one per student and additional ICT peripherals. Teachers can swap into such rooms if they wish to use complex or high bandwidth content The ICT Enhanced Rooms will also have interactive whiteboards as well as interactive slates. The proposed equipment list for a Standard Classroom is as follows;

• Ceiling mounted Data Projector • Interactive Whiteboard • Teacher laptop Docking station • Teacher Multimedia Lectern • Bluetooth Wireless Interactive Slate • Visualiser • Amplified computer speakers • Capability to bring a Laptop trolley in to the room for individual student use, powered by battery

and using wireless networking. • Alternative power and data for whole class Laptop use on mains power and 'wired' networking.

These will be distributed around the room, adjacent to appropriate work surfaces. • Although some var ie ty of fu rn i tu re layouts is stil l desirable, it can become increasingly f ixed to

provide robust access to p o w e r and da ta for lap top use. This does n o t necessari ly mean tha t tables should be laid out in rows like a traditional classroom layout; rather it should be possible to i: arrange them in groups to facilitate a more collaborative approach to student learning, perhaps

Leicester Academy ICT Ocatt Stage D Reportvl.dx Page 23 of 23

07/02/2005

even tending towards more of an office environment with power and data connections being presented at desk level.

3. Specialist Rooms Specialist rooms. I.e. Food Technology, Resistant Materials, Electronics, Graphics, Textiles, Music, Art and Science will contain a number of power and data points designed specifically for each area to maximise the effective use of ICT, in addition to the baseline provision for the teacher. In specialist classrooms, such as Science and Technology, it is envisaged that these additional outlets will be integrated in to the furniture or benching, alongside other specialist services, such as gas or compressed air.

The specialist requirements on the hardware In these areas will often demand fully featured computers, along with appropriate furniture to accommodate the associated subject specific peripherals e.g. MIDI keyboards In Music, digital microscopes In Food Technology and Science, cutting and milling machines in Graphics and technology etc. The proposed equipment list for the Specialist Rooms is as follows;

• Ceiling mounted data projector • Large projection screen • Teacher laptop docking station • Teacher multimedia lectern

Bluetooth wireless interactive slate Visualiser

• Amplified computer speakers • 5 Student PC or Apple computers, with flat screen monitor, specification according to use. • The capability to bring a laptop trolley in to the room for individual student use, powered by

battery and using wireless networking should still be maintained, although this may not be the predominant mode of use in some of these areas. There needs to be space for 1 x 30 trolley or 2 x 15 trolleys to be parked conveniently just In side the door - with power and data connections nearby to allow the wireless access polnt(s), printer and data switch to be powered up and connected to the cabling infrastructure.

ICT Equipment, Power and Data Layout Guidelines

Leicester AcMsmy ICT Draft Stage D Reportvl.doc P#>e 23 of 23

{17/518/2005

RJ45 Cat6 Outlet Requirements; Location Standard Enhanced Specialist Suite Teacher Workstation (e.g. Laptop, telephone etc.) 2 2 2 2 Classroom Printer or other network device 2 2 4 2 Data Projector / Wireless Projector Server 2 2 2 2 Mobile Wireless Access Point on Laptop Trolley 2 2 2 2? Alternative data locations for either fixed Classroom PCs or full bandwidth Laptop use around the room.

12 30 X, Varies 32

Total 20 38 1 0 + x 40

Power Socket requirements; Location Standard Enhanced Specialist Suite Teacher Workstation (e.g. Laptop, telephone etc.) 2* 2* 2* 2* Classroom Printer or other device (e.g. scanner, digital camera etc.)

2 2 6 6

Data Projector / Wireless Projection Server 2 2 2 2 Laptop Trolley /Mobile Wireless Access Point(s) in use

2 2 2 2?

Laptop Trolley recharging while stored in the classroom - inside secure storaqe cupboard?

1 ? 1? 1? 1?

Alternative data locations for either fixed Classroom PCs or mains powered Laptop use around the room.

12 30 Y, varies** 30**

Total 20 38 12 + y 40

* See notes on diagram re: 4-way extension in Teacher Presentation Desk to accommodate multiple devices inside e.g. Visualiser, VCR/DVD Player, Amplified speake'rs etc. Otherwise 4 additional power outlets should be provided)

** Assumes PC and monitor are powered from a single T' cable - otherwise double this quantity. Some ICT furniture e.g. Intellidesks, allow up to 3 desks to be daisy-chain powered from one power socket, which may reduce the overall quantity required.

Quantities of Computers and Ratios Leicester Acad&ny iCTCnfi Sti*je D Repartvi.doc 07/02/200S

Pa;e 23 of 22

• • # •

If we are to ensure that ICT provides accelerated learning gains in a wide range of subjects and contexts, students need to have access to ICT when ever they need it - suggesting that we should be working towards an effective 1:1 ratio.

However, as the Academy ICT funding is based on the Becta 1:4 ratio, the ICT deployment must attempt to provide a compromise between 1:1 and entitlement, with an expectation that the infrastructure will expand to 1:1 access at some future time - assuming funds become available, prices continue to decrease at the same rate as in recent years and that the 'personal digital devices' that become available in the corresponding timeframe, will be smaller and more portable as well as having significantly better battery life and wireless networking capabilities.

Initial aspirations are targeted on a 1:3 ratio, achieved by giving 1:4 access In each phase (based on the final predicted number of students), and treating specialist and central ICT resources, such as ICT Suites and LRC's, as additional whole school resources, as follows;

Phase Area No. Students

Qty of Computers at 1:4 ratio

Proposed Allocation

Phase 1 Nursery 26 7 Total= 82 15 in ICT Resources 22 in Rooms (11 rooms @ 2 per room) 45Laptops (3 x 15laptop trolleys)

Phase 1 Foundation - Yr4 300 75 Total= 82 15 in ICT Resources 22 in Rooms (11 rooms @ 2 per room) 45Laptops (3 x 15laptop trolleys)

Phase 2 Yr5 - Yr6 120 30 Total= 98 15 in ICT Resources 8 in Rooms (4 Yr5&6 rooms @ 2 per room) 75Laptops(1 x30 laptop trolley &3x 15 laptop trolleys)

Phase 2 Yr7 - Yr8 240 60 Total= 98 15 in ICT Resources 8 in Rooms (4 Yr5&6 rooms @ 2 per room) 75Laptops(1 x30 laptop trolley &3x 15 laptop trolleys)

Phase 3 Yr9 - Yrl l 360 90 Total= 90 15 in ICT Resources 75 Laptops (1 x 30 laptop trolley &3x 15 laptop trolleys)

Total 1046 262 270

Additional Whole School and Specialist Resources Phase Location Proposed Allocation Phase 1 LRC 5 PC's Phase 2 LRC 5 PCs Phase 2 SEN 2 PC's Phase 2 Food Technoloqy 5 PC's Phase 2 Business Studies 30 PC'S Phase 2 Electronics 5 PC's Phase 2 Resistant materials 5 PC's Phase 2 Graphics 5 Apple Mac Phase 2 Textiles 5 PC's Phase 2 Music 5 PC's Phase 2 Recordinq Room 3 PC's Phase 3 Art 5 Apple Mac Phase 3 ICT Teaching 30 PC's Total 110

This provides an overall total of approximately 370 computers which, budget permitting, would result in a ra t io o f 1 c o m p u t e r to e v e r y 2 .8 s t u d e n t s .

Internet Connectivity

Leicester AciMmy ICT Draft Stage 0 ftCDOftvf.#c 23 of 23

07/02/203S

The Internet and web-technology will be a fundamental teaching & learning resource and as such a reliable, high bandwidth broadband connection to the internet is an essential requirement.

The Becta reference specification of a 45Mbps connection should be considered as the starting point, with a view to investigating any other high bandwidth connection that might be accessible in the local area from Telecom's providers or existing local 'Grids for Learning' e.g. perhaps at 100Mbps.

Automatic backup connections, probably in the form of'spare' ISDN or ADSL lines, will be installed to provide a minimal connection to the internet for core communications services, such as email, in the event that the main leased line fails.

Telephony Initial consultation suggests that whilst sophisticated call routing and diversion options are required, such as individual direct dial numbers and volcemail for all staff, a physical telephone in each individual classroom is not required at this stage and that they will primarily be provided in staff work rooms and offices.

Consequently, a hybrid Digital PBX and IP Telephony solution is being anticipated and planned for as the most likely solution. This will provide a cost effective system that fulfils today voice communication needs via the Academy's structure cabling system whilst providing a migration path to IP Telephony in the future as the technology matures.

Currently, an IP Telephony system is initially more expensive to setup, although there are potential savings in the total cost of ownership, through the use of a shared infrastructure and associated maintenance and support costs. It would also provide greater potential for a fully integrated and unified communications and messaging system across the Academy. Therefore, whilst this technology is relatively still in its infancy, it is regarded as the future of the telecommunications systems, therefore deserving serious consideration and should be regularly re-vlsited as the project progresses.

AV Display System Celebrating and sharing achievement is integral element of the Academy ethos and as such a number of large scale displays, such as Plasma or LCD Screens should be positioned at key locations round the Academy, e.g.

• Academy entrance and reception area. • Transition entrances and exits to each of the Phases • Dining Hall

The ability to have all screens displaying the same image and audio on all screens, or individual images and audio on each according to the 'zone' it is in, will be provided from a central PC(s) in the server room, with the feed to the screen being converted and distributed via the Cat6 UTP cabling infrastructure.

A connection to terrestrial TV or cable provider will also be wired to the main data communication room where It can be relayed around the network either directly or via a media server for recording / distribution.

Leicester Academy ICT Draft Stage D Heportvl.drtc Page Z3dt23

{17/521/2005

Access Control and Security Systehis . Although the Access Control and Security systems do not fall directiy into the remit of ICT consultancy there a number of important areas where the choice of such systems can potentially overlap or impinge on the curriculum related systems. An Integrated approach will be followed to ensure that one coherent system, rather than a number of disparate systems, are implemented to support a 'one card fits air philosophy for the various functions listed below;

• Cashless Catering e.g. The point of sale unit (til!) Is pre-programmed with every item that the catering department sell. Once a pupil has selected their meal they present their card to the cashier who swipes it through the integral reader. This will help to reduce the 'stigma' of students on free school meals, as well as leading to Improved efficiency with the average transaction time likely to be 5 0 % less than the avwage cash transaction time, as well as parents being able to top up and interrogate their children's accounts on-line.

• Photocopier and Network Printing Control e.g. For monitoring/charging Staff and Students for use of photocopying and network printing equipment

• Library Control e.g. for recording book issues to individual staff and students

• Registration (optional) Moving the Initial responsibility to students to 'swipe' their cards across an appropriately positioned reader to capture either lesson or session attendance. The data should be accessible to any authorised person on the network to allow exception reports to be drawn from the system to highlight those who are absent at a particular time.

• ICT Network Access Control (optional) e.g. via card readers on keyboards, either for all staff and students, or as an extra layer of security for Staff when requiring access to MIS systems

• • Locker Control (optional) e.g. to provide students with simplified access to a secure location for their books and belonging, as well as reducing the administrative overhead for staff.

Leicester Academy ICT Dr»ft SO?e D Repsrtvi.doc Ptffe 23 of 23

{17/07/2005

• • • • •

Essential Accommodation for critical ICT related equipment and Services

Main Server Room Tfie various servers and data switches at the core of the network are critical to the overall operation of the 'end-user' ICT equipment that staff and students will be using as.an integral part of the learning process, and henoe their environment needs careful consideration to ensure that they perform reliably and consistently.

The Server Room will be; • Secure - allowing only authorised network managers to have access. • Air Conditioned - to remove the significant amount of heat that the equipment will generate. • On its own clean power supply - to avoid problems associated with power outages and surges or

interference from other nearby devices.

The actual number of servers, and hence the number of cabinets to accommodate them, will only be finally determined by solution proposed by the company that wins the tender for the equipment supply and installation.

At this stage, the diagram below illustrates the anticipated need for 8 cabinets and requirements for this space.

Concepts for Server Room Size and Layout (5m x 4m)

Lexesttr Academy ICT Craft Stife D Aepcrti'l.Ooc P*pe 23 of 23

07/02/200S

ICT Hub I Switch Cabinets A number of other locations are being provided for additional remote switch rooms at strategic locations around the building e.g. adjacent to risers, so that cables to data outlets required at the extremities of the building do not exceed the 90m maximum length.

Essentially, there is one Comm's Cabinet per floor, per phase, all of which are linked back to the main server room in the following configuration to create a 'star' topology for both voice and data networks.

Leicester Academy ICT Draft Stage P Hepartvl.doc Page 23 of 23

02/02/2005

ICT Technicians Room All technical support services for the Academy are likely to operate from this room, and consequently it needs to fulfil a variety of functions;

• Accommodation for 4 technical support staff, with a PC workstation each for Network Management as well as personal productivity purposes

• Storage for a significant quantity of spare parts, consumables, software, manuals and licences etc.

• Storage of backup tapes in a secure fire-proof safe. • Working space for minor repair work and trouble shooting activities on failed existing equipment. • Working space for the preparation and configuration of new equipment, including temporary

storage space for equipment as it is delivered. • A help desk reception area where students and staff can approach the technical staff for support

and advice.

Suggested Room Layout for Technicians Workspace

LetceiterAcaattny ICTtmn Stage DReaerWl.dtx Page 13*23

07M1/2OO5


Appendix J Breeam Assessment


Fe i lden C l e g g Brad ley Architects LLP Arup Fire Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds

) 1 > ) )

BREEAM for Schools 2005: Assessment

Design Stage D Pre Assessment

of


TPS s c h a l ^

Prepared for Michael Lytrides

Capita Symonds Ltd 1 Procter Street, London. WC1V6DW

P r e p a r e d by Schal International Management Ltd Centre Tower, Whitgift Centre, Croydon CR9 OAU

TPS schal

• • •

Contents

Design Stage Assessment

of


4th February 2005

Introduction About BREEAM About TPS Schal

Executive Summary

The Assessment Process The Brief Directory of contacts Summary of meetings and assessments Evidence presented

The Assessment Checklist

Areas for Improvement How scores could be improved

TPS schal ^ Formal Issue 1: February

2005 Page 8 of 5 0

Introduction What is BREEAM? The Building Research Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM) is the world's leading system for assessing the range of environmental impacts associated with buildings. BREEAM is used by owners, users and designers to demonstrate their environmental commitment and to reduce the impact that their buildings have on the environment. Buildings are assessed against performance criteria set by the BRE and awarded 'credits' based on their levels of performance.

The Building Research Establishment has standard models for 5 types of development: Bespoke versions can be tailored by BRE by commission and will be required for this type of building.

• Offices • Light industrial, warehousing (non-retail) • Residential ("Eco Homes") • Retail • Schools

A BREEAM assessment generally comprises three parts: a core assessment of the building fabric and services plus two alternative parts dealing with the quality of the design and procurement, and management and operating procedures, which are included as appropriate. However, for schools, there is currently one set of criteria for design stage assessments. Pre-assessment design support can also be provided by the licensed assessors. The assessment is arranged under nine headings.

Management: This part of the assessment looks at management policies, approaches and structures that achieve maximum benefits and minimum

TIPS scha.lv Formal Issue 1: February

2005 Page 2 of 50

environmental impacts through the construction, correct commissioning and future operation of the school building and grounds. Health and well-being: The aim is to ensure that practical steps are taken to minimise the negative affects of a building on the occupants and those of its neighbours in terms of their health and well being. This aspect includes teachings and workplace conditions (eg daylight and views out) and control of hazardous substances. Energy: There is wide consensus amongst environmentalists that greenhouse gas emission is the most important impact. The energy used in buildings is probably the most important environmental impact and is scored accordingly. This section rewards those who have taken steps in terms of the building fabric and systems, and in planning for future monitoring of energy use. Transport: The Carbon Dioxide emissions associated with transporting staff to the workplace can be of the same magnitude as that emitted in running it. It is therefore important to consider the location of the building and transportation impacts in any assessment. Safety is also a factor. Water: Consumption of water has risen 70% over last 30 years. Credits are awarded for metering, leak prevention and low consumption fittings Materials: The materials in a building represent a significant part of the impact of-the .construction process, with an estimated 10% of UK's energy use'annually associated with their production, together with a range of land use, bio-diversity and pollution issues. The largest benefits can be achieved by specification at the design stage. Land use: With growing concern about the use of land in the United Kingdom, there is strong preference for the re-use of land. Ecology: This section is related to the land use issues and directly affects the variety of species on the site. The aim is to minimise the impact of development on the natural life on the site, and ideally to enhance the species variety ("biodiversity").

BREEAM for Schools .2005 Design Stage Assessment

i ;

Pollution: The final section relates to a range of pollutants which are produced by or for buildings. The main issues are the ozone depleting and global warming chemicals, with NOx and water courses also covered.

About BREEAM for Schools The previous version for Offices were released in 1998 and 2002. During the period, the environmental and sustainability debate has moved on, best practice has become more rigorous and expectations of what constitutes "green building" have risen. BREEAM for Offices is updated every year to ensure that BREEAM keeps ahead of best practice.

BREEAM for Schools derives from the offices model but has a considerable number of changes of emphasis and additional credits. It was released late 2004 and is endorsed by the Department for Education and Skills. The achievement of a Very Good rating will be a requirement of future funding of major new build and refurbishments.

The Scoring System The key changes reflect the environmental impacts that the BRE considered most important. Extensive consultation across environmental authorities and pressure groups has revealed a broad consensus on weightings of the spectrum of environmental impacts associated with development. The eight sections each contain a number of specific criteria that have to be achieved. Each of the criteria are weighted according to the perceived importance of their environmental impact and contribute to the total score.

Research carried out by the Centre for Sustainable Construction at BRE in 1997/8 established a set of consensus weightings for environmental

TPS s c h a ! ^ Formal Issue 1: I

Page

issues based on the priorities and views of a wide range of interest groups. This work was funded under the Department of the Environment, Transport and the Region's 'Partners in Technology' programme. Broader issues of sustainable construction were also considered. The project found a high degree of consensus about the relative importance of different sustainability issues across the following interest groups:

* Government Policymakers * Construction Professionals * Local Authorities * Materials Producers

Developers and Investors Environmental Groups and Lobbyists Academics

The results of this work have been used to inform the calculation of a final rating based on weightings as set out in the pie chart below.

1

iv'aniKjclt1£rU 16% "

l-oalih and |M> 1JW

0 V/i ..J11 Vj ' r r , : ! i| I :_-,< I ! . I: I .-,1H>J,-,I m;;.! .: (>-:-•• V, 'J II .M <••'. .

BREEAM establishes a set of issue categories under which specific credit requirements are grouped.

Within each category there are a variable number of credits that reflect the options available to building designers and managers. The number of credits in each category does not reflect the relative importance of these issues.

The percentage of credits is calculated for each issue category and an issue-weighting factor is applied to adjust score under each category.

An overall building score can then be calculated for the building. _ _ _ _ _ , , y \ . F o r m a l I s s u e 1 : F e b r u a r y

TIPS schal 2005 P a g e 4 o f 5 0

By applying weightings in this way, BRE is able to make sure that these fully reflect current knowledge and consensus. It is also possible to add and subtract specific actions in the form of credit requirements without affecting the overall importance of an issue. It is envisaged that the weighting procedure will be repeated at intervals to update the factors within future revisions of BREEAM. This is necessary to allow BREEAM to progressively adapt to current best practice and remain at the leading edge of practicable building design and management practice.

The BREEAM Assessment Process BREEAM certification is carried out by BRE. The certificate is issued on the basis of a report prepared by a registered assessor. Assessment organisations are licensed by BRE to carry out formal assessment reviews, prepare assessment reports and offer related consultancy services under the BREEAM label. Stringent quality management procedures have been adopted to ensure a consistent approach and level of service.

Using BREEAM Effectively The most'vajuable and cost-effective way to ensure a high BREEAM rating is to introduce the main issues at the earliest stage in the design process, to form a focus for the discussion of the environmental impacts of the building. Input will be needed from a wide range of people. Although the architect and building services designers have the largest share, the project manager, structural engineer and contractors, teachers, pupils and other end users all have a part to play. The BREEAM assessor can also be appointed early to assist the team in optimising its approach and to undertake preliminary BREEAM assessments to assess the predicted rating.

1

Education Authorities can use BREEAM to specify the environmental sustainability performance of their buildings in a way that it quick, comprehensive and visible. Individual schools can use BREEAM to promote the environmental credentials and benefits its buildings to potential parents and pupils whilst design teams can use BREEAM as a tool to improve the performance of the buildings and their own experience and knowledge of environmental aspects of sustainability.

Copyright The BREEAM name and logo are registered Trade Marks of the Building Research Establishment Ltd and are used in this Report under Licence and consent of BRE.

Disclaimer This assessment has been carried out on the basis of statements made at the team workshop on 3/2/2005 by applying the standard methodology for BREEAM assessments set out by BRE. Neither TPS Schal, the Assessors nor the Building Research Establishment are deemed to accept any responsibility or liability for the accuracy of the information provided by the team or the building's performance or fitness for purpose.

,/V Formal Issue 1: February — TPS schal? 2005 / j f

Page 5 of 5 0 fjf

• • • • •

1M11M1 IE®!? l i ® § 8

About TPS Schal

A Brief History Schal was the first company to introduce construction management into the UK from the United States. In 1981 Schal Associates, based in Chicago, teamed up with Tarmac to form the Schal/Tarmac joint venture in the UK. Schal Associates was a North American firm of construction managers formed by the partnership of two senior staff from Morse Diesel, Harold Schiff and Richard Halpen, hence the derivative name, Schal. By 1989, Schal was well established, having been involved in some of the most prestigious construction projects in the country, such as the £600m Broadgate development, Europe's largest business park - Stockley Park, Canary Wharf and Embankment Place. In 1990 Schal became a wholly owned subsidiary of Tarmac, and changed its name to Schal International Ltd. In 1995 Grove Construction Management was integrated into Schal following the Tarmac/Wimpey asset swap. The project management arm of the old PSA, which had been acquired by Tarmac in 1992, was integrated into Schal in January 1996 to form Schal International Management Ltd, one of the leading providers ofj both project management and construction management services in the UK. Following the demerger of Carillion from Tarmac in 1999 we now operate'tinder the umbrella of the Carillion group. The 1990s brought with it major projects such as the Royal Opera House, Tate Modern, British Library, Foreign & Commonwealth Office and Portcullis House.

Schal Project Management (now TPS Schal) is a separate Company within the fee based organisation encompassing TPS Consult - a

TIPS scha l ^ Formal Issue 1: Fe

Page 6

multidisciplinary design service with £25M turnover and 400 staff. The PM section has 60 staff and a turnover of £5M. Its sen/ices include:

Project management: client focussed management of both construction and non-construction related projects from inception and feasibility through to post completion Safety Management: H&S audits, Planning Supervisor sen/ice, safety consultancy Consultancy Services: project monitoring (including Arts Council and Heritage Lottery funded), project audits, BREEAM, EcoHomes and CEEQUAL Assessments, advice on any construction aspects including risk and value management,

-: procurement, programming, claims resolution.

TPS Schal and Sustainability TPS Schal has made a very serious commitment to environmental issues, as set out in our published Environmental Policy. Our comprehensive Environmental Management System (EMS) is Certified to ISO 14001 (external assessors are BSI: Certificate No. EMS 56359). Every Schal project is required to prepare a project-specific Environmental and Sustainability Plan, which identifies all the significant aspects including risk assessments,! stakeholder interests, supply chain management, and an emergency plan, through to monitoring and auditing environmental performance. The plan is a pro-active document identifying the client's objectives, involving environmental stakeholders and where appropriate, green design. Schal has also developed Sustainability Best Practice Notes and an Environmental Design checklist. All staff have access, via the company Intranet, to relevant legislation, best practice and procedures.

Towards Sustainabilitv

;bruary 2005

> of 50

BREEAM for Schools 2005: Design Stage Assessment

TPS Schal, as part of the Carillion group of Companies recognises the need to move beyond environmental management, important though this is, towards sustainable practices. Carillion has been a "Pathfinder" organisation working with The Natural Step in the UK. A scientific definition of ultimate sustainability is expressed by the four "System Conditions' of "The Natural Step". We recognise that sustainability is a journey which can only be undertaken with much effort and fundamental rethinking and we invite our customers and suppliers to begin that journey with us.

In "Building a Better Quality of Life", the then DETR (now DEFRA) set out "Ten Themes for Action" towards sustainability: We invite clients to consider adopting TPS Schal's approach to these themes for projects:

Re-use existing built assets: we are experienced in restoration and conversion and fit-out projects and Brownfield development Design for Minimum Waste: we encourage the project team to address life-cycle costs, buildability in terms of designing to module sizes, to identify reuse and recycling opportunities and to minimise waste to landfill. In construction stage, we manage our sites to address waste management issues Aim for lean Construction: we are highly customer focussed and aim to develop best value proposals, through value management and engineering, management of the building supply chain. We have extensive experience of Partnership arrangements with clients and suppliers and have carried out Egan Demonstration projects

1 The four "Natural Step" system conditions can be summarised as: Nature cannot withstand a progressive build up of waste derived from the Earth's crust Nature cannot withstand a progressive build up of society's waste, particularly artificial persistent substances which it cannot degrade into harmless materials T h e productive areas of Nature must not be diminished in quality, diversity or quantity Society must use energy and resources in a sustainable, equitable and efficient manner

Formal Issue 1: TPS

Page

Minimise energy in construction: Our objectives and targets require us to measure and understand energy usage during construction. We also encourage designers to address embedded energy in their choice of building materials Minimise energy in use: Our studies show that energy in use (both by the building itself and transport of workforce and supplies) is by far the greatest impact on the global environment caused by the built environment. TPS Schal has developed a Design for Sustainability checklist and we encourage our clients and their designers to address this issue at the earliest possible stage Do not pollute: our Environmental Policy and Management System commits us to avoid polluting the environment. Preserve and enhance bio-diversity: We encourage clients to consider Brownfield development in favour of productive land and to adopt conservation practice in designing landscaping. The project team is encouraged to consider the impacts of extraction and manufacture of specified materials (e.g. using the BRE's Environmental Profiles" system or equivalents) Conserve water resources: Where possible, we invite design teams to consider non-piped systems of surface water disposal, grey water recycling-and low water usage fittings. TPS Schal is also committed to minimising water wastage on sites Respect people and the local environment: our procedures and project environmental plans require teams to engage stakeholders' interests, including "good neighbour" practice at our sites Set Targets: Our Environmental Management System sets Objectives and Targets which are reviewed and monitored on a regular basis. Our performance is published annually in the Carillion Environment Community and Social Report. We encourage clients and teams to set targets for

February 2005

: 7 of 50

projects, including adoption of the BREEAM ratings or the BRE "Envest" appraisal system.

TPS schal ^ Formal Issue 1: February

2005 Page 8 of 5 0

Executive Summary This assessment was carried out by Licensed BREEAM Assessor by Steve Webster, and quality assurance checked Chris Gee; B.A. Hons, B.Arch (Manch.)


This facility is a new build Academy for pupils ages 3-16. the Academy form expresses the client's educational ethos and vision which organises the pupils into three 'phases' Phase 1 Nursery, reception and years 1 -4 Phase 2 Yrs 5-8 Phase 3 Yrs 9-11

The academy will have a specialism in Business and Enterprise with a curriculum focus on food

The project also has a chaplaincy centre at the heart of the Academy for the diocese of Leicester

The client set a target of achieving "Very Good" in accordance with the Department of Education and Skills' target. The assessor carried out a team workshop at RIBA Stage D, The assessor encourages the client and design team to endorse the improvement initiatives identified in the Action Plan as this will enable the project to reach Very Good.

Conclusions The building achieved a "Good" rating in this pre assessment.

TPS i d i * Formal Issue 1: February

2005 Page 9 of 5 0 0

BREEAM ASSESSMENT RATING SCORE % Pass Good Very Good Excellent

ACTUAL

Aspect score Poss score

Comment

Management 20 7 If called in before stage B this would of helped Construction site impacts will also help to improve this and will involved the contractor buying into it

Health and Well being

19 8 Work on specific lighting and thermal zoning of phase 1 floor heating has long lag

Energy 15 12 Connecting water meters to the BMS will help

Transport 6 5 Provision of lockers for cyclists to use will improve score

ter 7 3 Sanitary shut off will help to prevent flood damage, out of hours if toilet cistern ball valve breaks.

terials 17 4 A re look at some of the materials used could help here

Lalid Use & Ecology

13 5 If someone in the design team is a practicing ecologist member of the Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA) or

full member of the Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (IEEM) with 3 years+ experience of impact assessments this could lead to improved ecology

Pollution 12 5 Specify external luminaries to prevent liqht pollution

Overall (weighted) 48.32 %

A "GOOD" Rating

TIPS scha.l Formal Issue 1: February

2005 Page 10 of 50

* • • •

BREEAM for Schools 2 005: Design Stage Assessment :

y 1

S l l W ^ i l & ^ S S l S ^ ! . s. 1 -. - - . a P . - a y

The Assessment Process

The Brief and Client's Instructions TPS Schal was first commissioned in January 2005 to conduct an indicative Design Stage Assessment of the building, on design proposals at Stage D in order to advise the client and design team on how to achieve "Very Good". This first interim assessment indicates that the team are on course, to meet the DEFS goal for this year but many areas have yet to be firmed up in detail.

Recommendations for improvement to a "Very Good" are set out at the end of this report.

Directory of contacts

Client DfES Client's representative Keith Panes Project Lead School Leicester City Academy School representative David Samworth CBE DL Design Team Feilden Clegg Bradley Architects LLP

Bath Brewery Toll Bridge Road Bath BA1 7DE

Assessor Steve Webster TPS Schal, Centre Tower, Whitgift Centre, Croydon CR9 0AU: Tel 020 8256 4372

Checking Assessor Chris Gee:: TPS Schal, Centre Tower, Whitgift Centre, Croydon CR9 0AU: Tel 020 8256 4364

, , A, Formal Issue 1: February T P S s c h a l ? 2 0 0 5

Page 11 of 50

The Assessment Checklist

The following pages contain details of the assessment. Each Credit has a commentary on the eligibility or otherwise of evidence assessed.

TIPS s c h a l T . Issue 1 : February 2 0 0 5 Assessment Schedule

Page 12 of 50

Management Good intentions in delivering environmental and sustainable building solutions can be severely undermined if management is not in place to deliver that intended performance. BREEAM awards credits for a structured approach to realisation of those intentions.

The Schools model places emphasis on communications and consultations over school usage and environmental aspects.

In a Design and Procurement assessment, the project is required to demonstrate that the building will be commissioned to achieve the design intent and that good practice will be adopted in how the building site itself is managed to minimise its environmental impacts.

(There are no "Core" credits in this aspect).

MAN Credits Credits Credits Commentary available awarded

Credit is awarded where evidence can be provided showing:

TIPS SChal ^ Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule

Page 13 of 50 0 BRE

1 U H M 1 ^©g 1 ©dflK§X6)lg 1 © © § 8

MAN Credits Credits available

M 01 Detailed site investigation carried out prior to start of 1 RIBA Stage D to ascertain ground conditions, ground water chemical constituents including contaminants:

and

Local Authority/English Heritage or equivalent bodies have confirmed no buildings affecting archaeological or historic/ locally distinguished buildings, features or landscape

M 02 Whole life costing analysis carried out (60 year life) 1 including initial and operational costs

Study carried out through stages from Stage B, options 1

appraised and lowest discounted cost option selected provided that a reduction in energy consumption also results

M03 Ease of Maintenance: specifications for building services 1 consider ease of maintenance:

From feasibility stage. CIBSE Guide checklist addressed, cleaning storage to Building Bulletin 98/99, maintenance strategy at design stage

M 04 A design team member(s) are expressly appointed to 1 monitor commissioning on behalf of the client

Seasonal commissioning to be carried out

TIPS SChal Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule

Credits Commentary awarded

This was carried out at stage D

The project is based on 50 years not 60

Whilst Appendix 2 of CIBSE A1 is being carried out, I cannot see any maintenance strategies

Buro Happold will be appointing a member of the design team as a commissioning monitor

Project costs do not allow 2nd visit

Page 14 of 50 BRE

BREEAM for Schools .2005: Assessment

MAN Credits Credits available

M 05 Consultation process carried out with local community and users and feedback acted on

Consultation uses recognized facilitation process (such as QQI, DQM, School Works)

M 06 There is provision of a simple O&M guide for a non-technical Building Manager

M 07 Shared facilities provided, directly linked to consultation feedback

These shared facilities can be accessed without compromising security/safety of rest of complex

M 08 Security incorporated in design by:

Consultation with Architectural Liaison Officer or Crime Reduction Design Adviser

Security Risk Assessment report produced (following BREEAM checklist of topics)

M 09 Considerate Constructor (or equivalent local/national) Scheme adopted

TIPS SChal ^ Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule


There is a project steering group made up of the church, 4 schools, and the community association

Was not convinced this was followed

A building user guide will be provided

Provision of shutters on Chaplin areas to allow use of wing but not the rest of the school

Stuart Bradshaw from Secure by Design also liaison with police and community police officer

The second credit the contractor will have to buy into it.

Page 15 of 50 BRE

Credits Credits available

Construction Site Impacts minimized by Energy/C02 monitoring on site and associated transport Adoption of waste minimisation and recycling on site Adoption of best practice no minimise pollution to air and water Site timber from responsible sources

Publication of Building environmental information by design team (must comply with checklist)

Development as a learning resource: feature(s) of the development used to demonstrate/communicate an environmental aspect (such as energy or water usage, ecology, waste reduction etc). It should be capable of use to support the National Curriculum studies

Score

TIPS SChal Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule


0 No evidence supplied

0

0 Design team believe that they cannot advertise the price of the project

0 No evidence supplied

7 35%

Page 16 of 50 BRE

Health & Well-being Indoors, the key issues are indoor air quality, noise, good daylighting and artificial lighting without glare, thermal comfort. A number of these are dealt with by Building Bulletins, published by DfES

Internal Conditions BREEAM aims To minimise the risk of discomfort due to overheating of buildings.

Achieving the aims Credits are given for: Providing local control of temperature

Using accepted techniques to assess thermal comfort at the design stage

Indoor noise Noise is a frequent cause of disturbance and can be distracting. Intrusive noise levels used for building design are given in British Standard BS 8233:1987 (Sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings)

BREEAM aims To ensure a comfortable and productive internal acoustic environment in occupied areas. Achieving the aims Credits are awarded on the basis of calculated or measured ambient noise levels.

Legionnaires' disease arising from domestic hot water systems CIBSE Technical Memorandum TM13 recommends design procedures for minimising risks.

TPS Issue l: February 2005 Assessment Schedule

Page 17 of 50

BREEAM aims To minimise the risks to health from legionellosis in all water systems.

Achieving the aims Systems should be designed to minimise risks using TM13, steps should be taken to minimise risks in older buildings, and appropriate maintenance schedules should be in place.

Indoor Air Quality Satisfactory indoor air quality can be achieved by removing pollutants at source, diluting them with fresh air, or doing both. There are many pollutants present arising from the materials used in the building fabric and building services, and also from the activities of the occupants.

Ventilation is usually provided by openable windows controlled by room occupants, by trickle vents in windows. The DfES has a calculation method which can be applied to designing of natural ventilation.

BREEAM aims To ensure a high quality of indoor air for occupants.

Achieving the aims Credits are awarded for: o A high proportion of openable windows o Provision of fresh air in mechanical ventilation systems, or trickle vents in naturally ventilated buildings o Location of air intakes and outlets to avoid pollutants and recirculation

BREEAM also seeks to eliminate the use of Volatile Organic Compounds in finishes and materials and encourages availability of fresh drinking water.

S C h a l T. Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Page 18 of 50 Schedule 3

• • • •

BREEAM for Schools 2005: Assessment •

HW Credits Credits available


HW 01 Daylighting: 80% of occupied spaces to have even 1 daylight factor of 2% (even = meets BREEAM depth criterion or uniformity ratio of 0.4, or 0.7 if top lit)

Further credit if DF <4% in single storey or 3% if multistorey

HW 02 Where occupier operated blinds are provided to 1 windows to control glare in offices, reception, ICT spaces and all class rooms (unless North facing)

Where design features obviate glare whilst maintaining 1 daylight (e.g brise soleille, eaves, geometry...)

HW 03 Where all desks have a view out and are no more than 1 7 metres from a window. If facing a courtyard, desk to be 10m+ from far wall.

HW 04 Fluorescent luminaires to have high frequency ballasts 1 to obviate flicker

HW 05 Lighting levels: illuminance in internal and external 1 scheduled areas meet the BREAM criteria and CIBSE criteria for non listed spaces.

In addition lighting in spaces with display screens must meet LG3

TIPS schal y. Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule


1 Possibly 3.00% if re calculated using BRE figures

0

1 Blinds to be fitted to all windows

0 No brise soleille or other items in spec

0 Some rooms are 9m deep

1 M&E Consultant confirmed HF ballasts specified

0 IT rooms not to 350 LUX but to a lower level

Page 19 of 50 BRE


HW 06 Lighting controls: separate controls required for:

• Teaching space / demonstration areas

• Blackboard / display screen

• In offices, 4 work spaces

HW 07 Thermal Zoning: heating and cooling to be zoned to permit control. As a minimum:

• Perimeter zone to max 7m depth and core area

• If long lag system (e.g under floor), to be sized for base load with secondary controllable heating/cooling

HW 08 Thermal Control: full dynamic modeling used to demonstrate compliance with CIBSE AM11 AND

• If school has no comfort cooling system, a "significant" improvement over Building Bulletin 87 for number of hours over 28°C (BB87 = 80 hours per annum)

• If school has comfort cooling, DT must prove that no form of construction could avoid need for cooling.

TPS schal $ Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule


0 There is not enough control over some of the large areas

whilst the project is Zoning the building in a good way, Phase 1 is to be heated by underfloor heating and this has a long lag. BREEAM requires, for example, radiators on the perimeters of this area to give quicker response as well as the floor heating.

Complies with BB88 but no significant improvement below 80hrs demonstrated.

Page 20 of 50 BRE

! BREEAM for Schools 2005: Assessment i.


HW 09 Rain Noise: design calculations show that noise from 1 roofs etc is not more than 5dB greater than ambient noise levels set out in Table 1.1 Section 1,1 of Building Bulletin 93

H W 1 0 New Buildings

Acoustic performance: commitment to carry out ^ programme of testing and remedial work if necessary to ensure compliance with Building bulletin 93

Additional credit for music accommodation (or multi purpose halls in Primary schools if none) which exceeds BB93 by 5dB for airborne sound transmission and 5dB lower than BB93 for impact sound transmission

Refurbishments:

1 credit where spaces achieve reverberation times in 1 Table 1.5 section 1 of BB93

additional credit if spaces comply with all other performance standards of Section 1 of BB93



Not demonstrated: performance is likely to be seriously impaired because of roof lights.

The team has committed to the first credit.

But the second is not achievable at present

N/ A

N/ A

Page 21 of 50 BRE


HW 11 Volatile Organic Compounds: Design Team to produce 1 report on VOC use in finishes and fittings demonstrating that use of VOCs has been minimized.

Any VOCs remaining must be comprehensively justified.

HW 12 Hot and cold water systems, cooling towers, 1 humidification systems have been designed, or actions taken to, minimise the risk of Legionellosis: Design teams to confirm compliance with CIBSE TM13 and HSE AcoP L8. (Humidification to be steam, or else referred to BRE)

HW13 Natural ventilation: natural ventilation strategy allows 1 occupants to control supply of fresh air to teaching spaces and meets BB87

• Background ventilation

• Good air quality throughout year, draught free

• Higher rates to remove odours / summer overheating

NB DfES Classvent model can be used to demonstrate.

Schools with mechanical vent systems would still need to comply to gain credit

TIPS schal y . Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule


1 The team has committed to this and will be covered in the spec

1 Hot and cold water designed to TM13. No Cooling towers

1 all windows are openable and looking at the drawing seem large enough for adequate ventilation

Page 22 of 50 BRE

HW Credits Credits Credits Commentary available awarded

HW 14 Internal Air pollution:

where air intakes serving occupied areas avoid sources of external pollution (distances of 10 metres between intake/exhaust and intake 20 metres from pollution source specified)

where opening windows are over 10m from source of pollution

HW 15 Ventilation rates

Mechanical vented / air conditioned: 8 litres per person per second normal occupancy and 3 l/sec/person at maximum occupancy

Naturally ventilated:

• Trickle vents @ 400mm7m2

• HW 13 achieved

• Plan depth < 15m (or additional technique deployed: e.g atrium / stack ventilation)

HW 16 Drinking water: mains fed water coolers provided for both staff and pupils, (in toilets does not count)

Score % 19

Unlikely to be 10m apart

The credit is met well with both natural ventilation and mechanical

No commitment at present

8 42%

TPS schal $ Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Page 23 of 50 Schedule

Issue 1: Schedule

February 2005 Assessment

Page 24 of 50

Energy

The main source of greenhouse gases is the burning of fossil fuels for energy. The construction and use of buildings is directly and indirectly responsible for a high proportion of the total UK emission of CO2. About 50% of the total arises from energy used for heating, cooling and lighting in buildings, 10% from energy used during the production and transport of materials and construction of the building (embodied energy), and a further 22% from energy used by the occupants in travelling between buildings. CO production is related to the amount and type of fuel consumed. The CO2 emissions are greater from electricity owing to the inherent inefficiency of generation, conversion and transmission. Also energy consumption, particularly in the generation of electricity from fossil fuels, can cause sulphur and nitrogen oxide emissions which combine with water vapour in the atmosphere to form acidic aerosols. These cause damage to forests and rivers, especially in high-rainfall upland areas of Northern Europe.

The aims should therefore be to: o Maximise the energy efficiency of buildings in use, by design and o Management action. o Reduce embodied energy of materials used in construction and maintenance, o Reduce transport energy for commuting and business travel.

BREEAM aims

To minimise the overall emission of CO, to the atmosphere arising from the operation of a building and its services.

Achieving the aims BREEAM adopts an energy targeting approach, with an increasing number of credits (up to 10) available for better performance, measured against specific CO 2 levels. The performance of the building is assessed by calculation for new-build and refurbishment. Design Team calculations are required: these may be based on the methodology set out in Building Bulletin 87.

TPS schal^ 1 ssue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule

Page 2 5 of 50

ENE Credits Credits available


E 01 That electrical sub-metering is provided to monitor consumption separately for:

Space heating Lighting Small power Humidification plant Cooling plant Major fans Other major users (e.g swimming pools, theatres)

(Under Building Regulations, at least 90% of load must be accounted for. Unlike B.Regs, load must be metered, not estimated from run time) Additional credit if submeters have pulsed output (for connection to BMS)

E 02 Carbon Dioxide Emissions 10

Credits awarded on sliding scale from 10 (zero emissions) to zero credits if over 18kg CO/mVyear (new build) or over 40kg for refurbishments

Calculation may use Building Bulletin 87's Energy and CO, Workbook

TPS schal t. Issue 1: February 200S Assessment Schedule


The team has committed to this

This is not covered in the specs

The M&E consultants have told me this is 5kg C02/m2/year

Page 26 of 50

BREEAM for Schools 2005: Assessment :

ENE Credits Credits available

E 03 Free Cooling: design incorporates a free cooling technology to obviate need for a mechanical system whilst meeting HW08 conditions.

^ 04 High efficiency light fittings: One credit where the average efficiency of both internal and external lights is 65 lumens/watt or more Two credits if average is 100 lumens/watt or more Score %



1 Night time cooling by passive ventilation.

1 The lighting is T5 fluorescent, It is unlikely that the second credit can be awarded.

12 80%

Page 27 of 50 BRE

Transport The transport of people between buildings accounts for 22% of national energy use. This reflects how homes, workplaces and amenities are located and how our transport infrastructure is planned. Transport energy and emissions are growing at 4% per year, mostly owing to the increase in personal transport. Freight transport (about half of which transports construction materials) is responsible for 10% of UK energy use.

BREEAM aims To encourage greater use of public transport and other safe alternatives to the private car for travel to school.

Achieving the aims BREEAM credits the provision of cycling facilities, good access to public transport, and policies and actions taken to encourage the use of public transport or to discourage the use of private cars, or to do both. Safety is also of paramount importance.

TRA Credits Credits Credits Commentary available awarded


j ot Transport Plan: a transport / green travel plan for the site to include assessment of current environment, reduction of car journeys and promotion of other forms of transport, including safe walking

It is part of the planning condition that a travel plan is implemented

TPS schal f. Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule

Page 28 of 50

• • • • <

!• BREEAM for Schools 2005: Assessment:

TRA Credits Credits available

T 02 That adequate provision for cycling has been incorporated - bike sheds, changing and showers for staff and pupils:

One credit for provision of some lock up cycle facilities: at a ratio of 5 spaces per each single-form entry

Two credits for provision of sheltered cycle lock up, showers, lockers and changing at a rate of 10% of pupils and staff (reduced for larger schools and city centre locations where good public transport)

T 03 Pedestrian and Cyclist Safety: one credit if

• Onsite foot/cycle paths connect to public paths without crossing vehicular routes

• Delivery routes segregated from pupil routes

Drop off areas are off road and give safe route to school entrance

0-3 One credit if there is good access to public transport networks for staff commuting (within 800 metres and 30 minute service frequency at school peak times)

Two credits if within 400 metres

1

or

1 or 2



420 Primary and 600 Secondary 125 cycle racks but there is no provision for lockers.

Separate gate and path for pedestrians

The bus stop is 150M away from the School and routes 26, 40, 41 47 & 48 to Leicester rail station. The 26 runs every 10 min during the day

Page 29 of 50 BRE

TRA Credits

Score

TPS schal Y. Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule

Credits available

6


5 83.3 3%

Page 3 0 of 50

Water economy In 1995 approximately 33 200 million litres of water a day were abstracted in England and Wales, much of this for the supply of water to the public. In the UK as a whole, water consumption has risen by 70% over the last 30 years. In offices, on average, 43% of water is used for WC flushing, 20% for urinal flushing, 27% for washing and 9% in canteens. A variety of technical options exists for reducing water use for WCs, urinals and washing, for detecting leaks, and for measuring and controlling consumption. These can be supplemented by management policies dealing with monitoring and targeting.

BREEAM aims

To reduce consumption and leakage of water during internal usage of a building.

Achieving the aims BREEAM uses an estimate of water consumption to assess water economy. Credits are awarded when the predicted or actual water consumption is less than specific targets. Additional credits are awarded where monitoring and targeting is carried out.

W Credits Credits Credits Commentary available awarded


TPS a <f Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule

Page 31 of 50

w

W 0 1


That predicted water consumption is in the ranges of:

• 4.5-5.5 m3/per person/per year

• 1.5 - 4.5 m3/per person/per year

• less than 1.5 m3/per person/per year

The BREEAM water calculator is to be used for this prediction

W 02

W 03

W 04

That a leak detection system is fitted on all water supply(ies) to the building and is capable of detecting internal and external leaks.

All mains supplies are metered. Meter to have a pulsed output.

That proximity detection shut off is fitted to water supply in toilet areas to W.C.s and urinals

W 05 Use of greywater or rainwater to flush W.C.s and urinals

(either 50% rainwater collected, or 80% waste from showers and WHBs, or greywater /rainwater meets 50% flushing demand)

Score %

1

T P S SChc3l T. Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule


1 Using BREEAM water calculator and specification of fittings from team

1 a leak detection system is to be put in

1 The water meter is to be connected to the BMS

0 Not in brief

1 This is not part of the project and to be installed, room would need to be found to install storage tank

3

42. 86%

Page 32 of 50 01

Materials and Waste New buildings consume new resources and impose new impacts on the environment, but they may be more energy efficient. A balance has to be struck, but generally it is preferable to re-use existing buildings rather than demolishing them and build new. BREEAM therefore encourages refurbishment and retention of key elements of the original building. It also encourages the re-use of construction and demolition material.

BREEAM aims

To encourage the re-use of buildings and re-use and recycling of waste and materials.

Achieving the aims Credits are awarded where a high proportion of the existing structure and facade are retained, where use is made of recycled material, and where there are facilities and active policies for storage and collection of operational waste for recycling. Buildings are a major consumer of resources, both during their construction and in their operation. They use land, consume minerals, fossil fuels and other natural materials, and consume energy; and their occupants use water, and generate domestic waste, office waste, etc. When they are demolished, some material is recycled; the rest goes to landfill sites or incineration causing more pressure on land and potential pollution.

Greener Const ruct ion Materials

BREEAM aims To encourage the use in construction and maintenance, of materials that have less impact on the environment, taking account of the full life cycle of the material in question.

Achieving the aims There are credits available for choosing a specified proportion of major building elements with an overall A rating from the Green Guide.

TPS I* Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule

Page 33 of 50

Timber

Deforestation of tropical forests is a matter for global concern and there are various international and national commitments to forest conservation. To encourage the sustainable growing and harvesting of timber in properly managed plantations.

Achieving the aims Credits are given where timber and timber panel products are specified from sustainably managed sources. Appropriate assurance will be required by assessors and five certification schemes are currently recognised.

Re-use and recycling of Construction Materials The construction industry accounts for 29% of all UK controlled waste arising each year, of which 70 million tonnes is construction and demolition (C&D) waste. The bulk of C&D waste that is recycled is used for low-grade purposes such as road sub-base construction or landfill engineering, and only about 4% is recycled for higher-grade applications. However, 30% of this waste is dumped in landfill or otherwise disposed of.

BREEAM aims

To encourage the re-use of buildings and re-use and recycling of waste and materials.

Achieving the aims Credits are awarded where a high proportion of the existing structure and facade are retained, where use is made of recycled material, and where there are facilities and active policies for storage and collection of school waste for recycling

MW Credits Credits Credits Commentary available awarded


Page 34 of 50 0 - BRE

MW Credits Credits available


MW 01 a Impact of Floor Covering:

One credit if 50% of floor covering by area achieves an A rating

Two credits if 80% achieves A Rating

MW 01 b Impact of Upper Floor Slab

1 credit if 80% by area of upper floors achieves an A Rating

MW 01 c Impact of External Walls

1 credit if 80% by area of external walls achieves an A Rating

MW 01 d Impact of Internal Walls

1 credit if 80% by area of internal walls achieve an A Rating

MW 01 e Impact of Roof

1 credit if 80% by area of roof achieves an A Rating

MW 01 f Impact of Windows

1 credit if 80% by area of windows achieve an A Rating

1 or 2



nylon carpet with rubber backing

0

0 Concrete slab

0 Pre cast concrete is a B rated material

1 Metal stud plaster board twin layered

q Pre cast concrete ply and bitumen vapour barrier and chippings.

n Aluminum and timber framed.

Page 35 of 50 BRE


MW 01 g Impact of Hard Landscaping and Fencing

1 credit if 80% by area of hard landscaping and boundary protection achieve an A Rating (average of both used)

MW 02 That there is a dedicated labeled storage area for recycling either within the building or site skips are provided with good access (specifications defined by BREEAM)

Additional credit if operational policies and procedures for recycling established at design stage and approved by Governors

MW 03 That timber and timber composite products in structural and non structural elements is from sustainably managed sources of timber or utilises reused or recycled timber (including structural timber, cladding, carcassing, and internal joinery)

• One credit if 60% Certified timber from temperate or non temperate sources

• Two credits if 75% Certified timber from temperate sources

TIPS SChal Y issue l: February 2005 Assessment Schedule


Brick pavers are C rated

Not allowed for or discussed with governors/users

0

Birch ply and soft wood studding, Architects policies are to insist on FSC timber. ( Note Birch ply is possible at a premium)

2

0W

• • • •

• BREEAM- for Schools 2005:, Assessment


MW 04 Designing for Longevity: 1

Suitable protection is built in for heavily used and vulnerable areas (e.g. bollards, Kick plates, protection rails, washable floors, etc..)

MW 05 Reuse of facades: either

That the proposed design uses more than 50% of the original facades by area, OR

That 80% of the reused fagade by mass is made from in-situ reused material

MW 06 Reuse of Structure

One credit if design uses 80% of existing structure by volume without significant strengthening works (significant = where new structure exceeds 50% of mass of the total)

(Where a mix or refurbishment and new build, the reused structure should be 50%+ of total structure)

TPS schalV' Issue 1: February 2 005 Assessment Schedule

Credits Commentary awarded 0 No evidence submited

New buildings and not reuse

New buildings and not reuse

Page 3 7 of 50 0 BRE


MW 07 Recycled Aggregates 1

One credit where significant (25% total +) use of recycled aggregate replaces high grade quarried aggregate for use in roads, slabs, structure, hardcore, etc.

Recycled materials must come from one of

• on site or within 30 Km radius

• recycled post consumer waste (e.g. glass, PFA, blast slag etc)

MW 08 Asbestos

1 credit where asbestos prohibited from new works (NB may still occur in lift brake linings) and/or

an asbestos survey carried out on existing building and a management /H&S Plan in place and asbestos removed/contained.

Score %



0 Due to asbestos being part of the structure reuse is not viable and availability within 30km not researched/demonstrated.

All asbestos to be removed by specialist contractor and certificate to be issued,

4

23. 53 %

Page 38 of 50 &

BREEAM for Schools 2 005: Assessment

TPS schal • Issue 1: February 2 005 Assessment Schedule

Page 3 9 of 50

Land Use and Ecology The re-use of sites previously built upon or reclaimed from industrial processes or landfill will reduce the pressure on land and, where built within an existing urban area, reduce pressure on the countryside. It is also an issue concerned with the preservation, enhancement or creation of natural habitats, dealt with in the section on wildlife.

BREEAM aims

To encourage the use of sites previously built upon, reclaimed from industrial processes, etc, particularly within existing urban areas.

Achieving the aims Credits are awarded for using sites previously built upon, or used for industrial purposes and for reclaimed contaminated land.



L 01 That at least 75% of the site has been previously built on or used for industrial purposes within last 50 years

L 02 That land had been designated as contaminated by specialist report and that remedial steps taken to decontaminate the site prior to construction


Previous use was Mary Linwood school

Not contaminated land

TPS Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule

Page 40 of 50

• • • •

BREEAM for Schools 2 005: Assessmenti

L Credits Credits available

L 03 Consultation with Students and Staff 1

One credit where both of the following met:

• Design team consults with staff and students (min 2 workshops each) to determine educational and social needs and ideas for design of school grounds

• DT agrees to keep students and staff informed of how their ideas are built into the design

Land Use Score


Credits Commentary awarded 0 Although there is a good relationship with the community and other

schools I have not got any notes of a workshop being carried out with potential or similar aged students.

1

33. 33 %

Page 41 of 50 BRE

BREEAM for Schools 2005: Assessment Assessment Criteria

Ecology Damage can be minimised either by selecting a site of low ecological value or by developing a site in a way that protects the most important ecological attributes. Construction does not have to reduce the ecological value of a site — it can be used to enhance it.

One attractive option is to build on and revitalise a previously derelict site. Care must be exercised because an apparently derelict site may be inhabited by rare, protected or locally important species if it has been derelict for some time, and so be ecologically valuable. Derelict sites may also be contaminated, so care must be taken to protect occupants and construction workers. Landfill sites which are producing gas present significant difficulties. Landscaping offers a major opportunity for the protection of an existing site ecology, enhancement of a site and even creation of new habitats. Suitable expertise should be brought into the team from a qualified ecologist.

Water run-off from car parks can be collected in a suitable storage tank, or even left free draining. Some form of treatment may be required to avoid pollution from oil contamination. A wetland habitat can be created using reed-bed techniques. Alternatively, streams and ponds can be created next to the car park.

BREEAM aims

To minimise the ecological impact of a development project and maximise the enhancement of a site for both new and existing buildings.

Achieving the aims BREEAM identifies key features on a site and the steps taken to protect and enhance them. It also evaluates the ecological diversity of a site before and after development, using plant species diversity as a proxy for overall ecological diversity.

ECO Credits Credits Credits Commentary available awarded


Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Page 42 of 50 Schedule

ECO Credits

EC 01

EC 02

Credits available

1 Low Ecological Value

One credit where the development site is classified as low ecological value. This is assessed using a checklist(no trees, hedgerows, streams, etc) Local Wildlife partnerships

One credit where Design Team has set up partnership with a local group with wildlife expertise to

• Advise on habitat/design in keeping with locality

• Provide ongoing advice to the school for managing and developing its outdoor site(s)

Credits awarded 0

Commentary

The site is not low ecological value

No relationship formed.

TPS scha IV Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule

Page 43 of 50

M l M i M l lE®^ i

ECO Credits Credits available

1 EC That the team has sought and acted upon advice from 03 one of:

• A member of the Association of Wildlife Trusts or

• a practicing ecologist member of the Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA)

• full member of the Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (IEEM) with 3 years+ experience of impact assessments

• Full member of the Landscape Institute (3 years experience)

• Other advisor approved by BRE That the ecological value of a development is changed

04 in the following ranges (assessed using the BREEAM value of "SpeciesHectares" o Change is between -9 and -3 SpeciesHectares o Change is between -3 and +3 SpeciesHectares o Change is between +3 and +6 SpeciesHectares o Change is between +6 and +9 SpeciesHectares o Change is above +9 SpeciesHectares (This is evaluated on a BREEAM checklist or by ecoiogis's report)



0 It is possible that one of the design team has this qualification but not proven to date.

There is little change to footprint of development.

2

Page 44 of 50

d * • • •


EC Protection of Ecological Features 1 05

1 credit where the contract Specification ensures that all trees over 100mm trunk diameter, hedges, ponds, streams etc are maintained and adequately protected from damage during clearing and construction works.



1 This is to be covered in the specs

Page 45 of 50 BRE

• • • • •


Long term Impact on Biodiversity

1 credit where the client has committed to producing 1 reports where an

• Ecologist (as EC03) confirms that all legislative requirements met

• Ecologist confirms that a 5 year management plan has been developed and handed over to a school working party

And any three of the following: to specify that

• the contractor must appoint a Biodiversity Champion

• The contractor must train workforce in protecting ecology of the site

• Contractor must monitor and record actions taken to protect

• A new ecologically valuable habitat is created

• The contractor must programme site works with regard to the needs of wildlife

• Actions to protect biodiversity must take full account of the UK Biodiversity Action Plan (will often refer to any Local Biodiversity Action Plan) - NB ecologists advice required


ECO

EC 06

• • • • • •


If the eoologist in section EC 03 is proven then this credit could „ be achieved.

Page 4 6 of 50 BRE


Ecology Score % I 8



3 37.5%

Page 47 of 50

Pollution

Ozone depletion Building services can have a profound impact on the amount of damage done to the ozone layer from chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) and hydrochlorofluoro-carbons (HCFCs). These substances are used as refrigerants and in some insulating materials; they cause long-term damage to the Earth's stratospheric ozone layer, exposing living organisms to harmful radiation from the sun. They also have significant global-warming potentials and so contribute to global warming. In 1987 many of the world's governments signed an agreement (The Montreal Protocol) to reduce emissions of CFCs and halons into the atmosphere. This agreement was subsequently reviewed and the current requirement is that signatories ceased production by the year 2000. Global warming has become a prime issue of international importance and building materials should avoid the use of substances with global warming potential.

BREEAM aims • To reduce the emissions of refrigerants to the atmosphere arising from accidental release from cooling plant in buildings. • To discourage the use of thermal insulants which include the use of ozone-depleting or global warming substances in their manufacture or composition. • To reduce the release of ozone-depleting and global warming substances to the atmosphere.

Achieving the aims The aims can be achieved by avoiding the use of ozone-depleting and global warming substances as refrigerants, and in insulation materials (either in their manufacture or composition). In addition, appropriate equipment can be installed to reduce the risk of accidental releases from cooling plant.

TIPS SChal Y Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Page 48 of 50 Schedule i

4 • • • i

'BREEAM for Schools, 2005: Assessment-*

POL Credits Credits available


P 01 Night-time Light Pollution 1

One credit if external lighting designed to minimize amount of upward transmitted light. Light from 80% of external fittings for street lighting, signs and building lighting, external storage and working areas and multi-use sports areas to fall within an angle of 70" to vertical

(Note "Dark Skies" standard is insufficient)

P 02 That sustainable drainage schemes, soakaways or other 1 site facilities reduce the surface water run off from roofs and hard surfaces to natural or municipal water courses by 50%

P 03 One credit where on site treatment mitigates risk of 1 water pollution from vehicular surfaces, potential spillage areas, etc (e.g by interceptors)

P 04 1 credit where there are no refrigerants, OR 1

That the refrigerants specified have an Ozone Depleting Potential (ODP) of zero and a global warming potential of less than 5.



0 Fitting selection to be confirmed

Swale for surface water but no calculations to demonstrate 50% reduction: credit withheld.

No separators

407c and 134a. Has a high GWP

Page 609 of 50 BRE

POL Credits Credits available

P 05

P 06

An additional credit where no refrigerants, OR

• there is a refrigerant leak detection system in high risk areas (the coil may be omitted)

One credit where insulating materials (both fabric and services) have an ODP of zero and a GWP of less than 5

(Note: blowing agents tend to have high global warming potential) That burners of the boilers have maximum N0X

emissions in the following ranges at zero excess 02: 1) for space heating services • <140mg/KWH delivered energy • <89mg/KWH delivered energy • <39mg/KWH delivered energy For water heating • less than 140mg/KWH delivered energy (Note for grid electrical energy, N0X output is 1400mg/Kwh)



The total system is less than 5KG so credit can be awarded by default

This credit could not be proven and because of this the credit has not been awarded it is highly likely that the below slab insulation being manufactured with HCFC

Hoval ultra gas boilers are to be used @20mg/KWH

Andrews super flow DHW 20 mg

Page 50 of 50 0

POL Credits Credits Credits Commentary available awarded

P 07 Onsite renewable energy: 1 0 Not in brief or budget

One credit where design team conducts feasibility study into alternative energy sources to find most effective method of educing COa emissions

A further credit when at least 10% of heating or electricity consumption is met from local renewable sources (such as photovoltaic, active solar thermal, wind turbine, micro hydro, biomass heating, ground source heat pump, thermal moderation by ground/water sources)

Score % 12 5

41. 67 %

TPS schal^' issue i February 2005 Assessment Page 51 Schedule

Areas for Improvement Easy wins

How scores could be further improved in the relevant sections. This information can be used to bring the rating up from "Good" to "Very Good".

Management:

Energy:


M02: Recalculate lifecycle at 60 years M03: ease of maintenance study-should be good practice anyway M10: Construction site impacts: pick easier wins to achieve 2 credits out of 4. M12: identify aspect that could be a learning resource: discuss with client/head and get commitment

E01: if 2nd credit withheld for no pulsed output, add this as easy spec win.

IPS schal Issue 1: February 2005 Assessment Schedule


Materials:



Transport: Water

Pollution:

Materials get poor marks, Not addressed yet as may be expensive to change MW02: addressing recycling facility easy win + getting user buy in for 2 credits

EC03: check ecologist qualifications. Otherwise get client to appoint one. EC06: then get ecologist to develop 5 year plan

H05: improve IT room lighting to comply H16: add water coolers for drinking water

Water: I have not addressed these as a very low weighting in the marks so makes small difference P01: specify external luminaries to prevent light pollution P06: insulant ODP/GWP: change spec of floor insulation. Scores 59.7% so some room to drop a few of these out

Page 52 of 50 m 1

Areas for Improvement

With the entire list below and the entire list above. This just scrapes into Excellent. You could also improve the water credits if one of these is too difficult.

Management:

Energy:


M04: add full seasonal commissioning M09: go for full considerate constructors points M11: commit to publishing building information

E04: reexamine light fitting specs to achieve higher efficacy (probably expensive)


Materials:



Transport:

Water Pollution:

Page 53 of 50


Materials: generally reappraise in light of Green Guide as this is a poor scoring section MW01a: change floor finish specification for 2 credits MW01c: external walls: many conventional methods achieve A MW01d: internal walls: ditto MW04: protection for longevity: sensible design really

EC04: use ecologist to develop biodiversity improvement

H06: add better lighting controls H07: add better thermal zoning, perimeter heating etc

T02: increase cyclist provision (possibly expensive)

P03: provide petrol interceptors etc

F e i l d e n C l e g g B r a d l e y Architects LLP Arup Fire Fleming and Barron

Appendix K Performance Specified Work/ Contractor Designed

Portions


F e i l d e n C l e g g B r a d l e y Architects LLP Arup Fire Fleming and Barron Buro Happold Davis Langdon Churchman Landscape Architects Capita Symonds

• • •


Buro Happold

Structural & Civil Engineering PSW/CDP Document

Job No-. 008946 Oate: January 2005

This document has been prepared for the sole benefit, use and of the Department for Education and Skills (DfES) and the Academy Sponsors; David Samworth and the Diocese of Leicester. The liability of Buro Happold Limited, its Partners and Employees in respect of the information contained in the report will not extend to any third party.

Author Jenni Wood Approved Stephen Fisher

Signed Signed

Date January 2005 Date January 2005

Leicester City Academy Report Revision 00 Structural Scope or Services Status: Stage D - Draft V:\1200-1249U242 LEICESTER ACAOEMY\1242 REPORT'S:.':}? Dl ts aooenrticss\Aoo?ntii* f f f r f o . " P. ip? ? of to

Revisions

Revision: Date: Comments: Made by: Approved: •

Leicester City Academy Report Revision 00 Structural Scope of Services Status: Stage D • Draft V:\1200-1249\1242 LEICESTER ACADEMYX1242 REPORT\Stage D\14apoendices\Appendix_K1.doc Page 3 of 10

INTRODUCTION

This document acts to describe and define the responsibilities for Contractor-designed items envisaged for the structural and civil engineering works on this project. It is intended to help define the Interfaces between different parties for various elements of the works and avoid possible conflicts or misunderstandings.

It Is Important that the responsibilities listed are conveyed to the relevant subcontractors by the Main Contractor as early as possible to maximise design and construction co-ordination Issues between disciplines.

Leicester City Academy Report Revision 00 Structural Scope of Services Status: Stage D - Draft V:\1200-1249M242 LEICESTER ACADEMY 12*2 REPORT\Stage D\I4 appendlcesiAppendix K1.doc Page 4 ol 10

• • •

Bum Happotd

2 CONTRACTOR DESIGNED PORTIONS

It is envisaged that a number of elements on this project will be designed by specialist subcontractors. The design Intent will in each case be shown on the Engineer's and Architect's drawings. Load and performance design criteria are set out in within the Structural Specification Preamble document and other relevant contract documents.

2.1 DEFINITIONS

The definitions for Performance Specified Work (PSW) and Contractor Designed Portions (CDP) have been used based on 'Practice Note 25, Performance Specified Work. Part 5, Clause 42 of the Standard form of Building Contract 1998 Edition (JCT 98)', as follows:

PSW Performance Specified Work will normally comprise materials and components or assemblies of a kind or standard to satisfy design requirements given in the tender documents for the contract. These would be, for example: trussed rafters; pre-cast concrete floor units; or simple installations for lighting, heating or power. Performance Specified Work will not be used where the Contractor's proposals for the work could materially affect the appearance of the building or may result in changes in the design of other work,

CDP Where PSW might have an effect as described above, the proposals must be received from the contractor before the contract, which includes for such work, is entered into. Where it is necessary for the Employer and Architect to have these proposals before the contractor's tender is accepted, the Contractor's Designed Portion Supplement to the Standard Form 1980 Edition can be used. Under this Supplement, the Contractor's proposals for what the Employer or Architect require by way of design from the Contractor are submitted with his tender for the Works, which are to include the Contractor's Designed Portion.

The Contractor shall be responsible to the Employer for the design and production of detailed production information. This shall include, but not be limited to, the detailed design activities listed below including and in addition to those activities normally undertaken through the custom and practice of the industry ail of which shall be generally subject to the approval of the Architect and/or Buro Happold.

Primary Structure Buro Happold is responsible for the design of all primary structure, which is defined as 'structure essential to the integrity and robustness of the structural frame'.

Secondary Structure Secondary structural elements are those items connected to and supported by the primary structure. Examples are given in the table below. Design of these secondary items is the responsibility of the particular designer of the item, i.e. the Architect, Contractor or specialist supplier. Buro Happold will assess the impact of the forces exerted on the primary structure, resulting from these secondary elements.

2.2 CHECKING AND APPROVAL OF CONTRACTOR SUBMISSIONS

Our review of any Contractor submissions will be limited to checking that you have: 1. correctly interpreted our design intent and requirements, with substantiating

calculations, where necessary; 2. satisfied the relevant performance specifications; 3. fully considered any exposed/visual details, which are of particular interest to the

Architect, and relevant drawings should be copied to them as necessary for their a p p r o v a l .

A p p r o v a l b y t h e A r c h i t e c t a n d / o r B u r o H a p p o l d ( B H ) s h a l l n o t r e l i e v e t h e C o n t r a c t o r o f b i s

responsibility for the suitability and correctness of the approved designs and his ' obligations as to their "fitness for purpose".

Leicester City Academy Report Revision 00 Structural Scope of Services Status: Stage D - Draft V:\T2QQ-1245\1242 LEICESTER ACADEMYM242 REPORP.Slage DIIJ appendtce!>\Appendix Kl.doc Pjge 5 of W

Buro Happold APPENDIX3: DESiQN RESPONSIBILITIES UNDER D&B FORM / CDP SUPPLEMENT^

2.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS

The Main Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordinating all as-built record drawings for inclusion in the H&S file, including: • as-built foundations (depths, sizes, locations) • as-bullt drainage (MH co-ordinates, Inverts, cover levels, etc) • structural sub-contractors drawings and interfaces

2.4 PERFORMANCE SPECIFIED WORK AND CONTRACTOR DESIGNED PORTIONS

Each member of the design team will produce performance specifications for items related to their specific disciplines, with the Architect being responsible for overall co-ordination of these.

For the performance specifications produced by BH, as described in the table below, these will define relevant design criteria, including: • Material performance/design life • Loading • Deflection limitations • Tolerances • Fire Rating • Dynamics

The Contractor's design obligations shall include, but not be limited to:

I Type ( Notes STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING ITEMS • Demolition PSW Where required, demolition would be carried out

by a specialist sub-contractor to a desk study (summarising the available existing knowledge of structures to be demolished) and performance specification, both produced by BH.

• Embedded retaining walls (e.g. sheet piling, king post walling, contiguous piling, secant piling, diaphragm walling, etc)

PSW Where required, BH will pre-design embedded retaining walls lor the purposes of the cost plan. The detailed design, calculation and detailing will be carried out by a specialist sub-contractor based on soil parameters and performance specification by BH.

• Gas impermeable membranes PSW Where required, these would be designed to a performance specification produced by BH with Indicative details provided by the Architect and BH.

• Connection design in structural steel frames

PSW Connection design will be carried out by a specialist sub-contractor to design forces and geometrical constraints given by BH. Where exposed, these shall also be submitted to the Architect for approval.

• Corrosion protection PSW Corrosion protection to the steel frame will be specified by BH with surface finish (top coats) for any visible steelwork specified by the Architect. Written confirmation of compatibility between each coat must be provided by the coatlnq supplier.

• Fire protection PSW All fire protection and Intumescent coatings will be d e s i g n e d b y s p e c i a l i s t s u b - c o n t r a c t o r t o s a t i s f y r e q u i r e m e n t s s p e c i f i e d b y B H a n d t h e A r c h i t e c t . Any applied coating must be compatible with the corrosion protection system, with written

Leicester City Academy Report Re vision 00 Structural Scope of Services Status: stage D - Draft V:\12QO-1249\1242 LEICESTER ACAOEMYUZ42 R£PORT\StaaR DU4 apoenrticesMnpendir K1.doc Page 6 of 10


• Finishing of fair-faced in situ concrete surfaces

CDP For all exposed areas, the concrete subcontractor is required to submit his proposals (and include within his tender) for all making-good/flnlshlng of any fair-faced concrete surfaces, Including Joints and arrises, to achieve the quality of surface finish required by the Architect, as per the reference project specified.

• Pre-cast concrete stairs and landings

PSW Where required, design and detailing of pre-cast concrete stairs and their connections will be by specialist sub-contractor based on drawings by the Architect and loading criteria by BH.

• Proprietary steel stairs PSW Where required, design and detailing of proprietary steel stairs and their connections will be by specialist sub-contractor based on drawings by the Architect and loading criteria by BH.

• Timber stairs PSW Where required, design and detailing of timber stairs and their connections will be by specialist sub-contractor based on drawings by the Architect and loadinq criteria by BH.

• Proprietary timber floor/roof joists (e.g. ply-web, gfulam, etc)

PSW Joist sizes will be selected by BH based on manufacturer's published data. The manufacturer will be responsible for the design performance of the elements and proprietary connectors, to suit indicative details provided by the Architect. Any connections should be capable of carrying the full design capacity of the Joists, unless noted otherwise.

• Permanent metal decking formwork to in situ concrete slabs

PSW Proprietary profiled metal decking will be selected by BH using manufacturer's published design data. The steelwork/flooring subcontractor will be responsible for detailed design of decking, co-ordination with main structural frame and design of fixings to satisfy loadinq criteria provided by BH.

• Profiled structural roof decking PSW Proprietary profiled decking will be selected by BH using manufacturer's published design data. The roofing sub-contractor will be responsible for detailed design of decking and fixings to satisfy loading criteria provided by BH and diaphragm action (where specified).

• Secondary support steelwork (i.e. handrails, balustradlng, shading screens, building services supports, aerials, signage and signboards, lift guides, partition frames, access walkways, ladders, cleaning gantries, fall arrest systems, lighting grids, cooker hoods, ceiling systems, sports equipment, roller shutters, gutters, etc)

PSW Design and detailing of secondary steelwork items are the responsibility of the particular specialist sub-contractor, based on drawings by the Architect and loading criteria provided by BH. For fixings, see below.

• Cladding systems (e.g. |umbo stud, timber stud, curtain walling, etc)

CDP Design and detailing of cladding systems will be by specialist sub-contractor based on drawings by the Architect. BH will supply building tolerances and movements to allow the Architect and sub-contractor to detail the cladding. BH will determine imposed loads on the overall building,

Leicester City Academy Report Revision 00 Structural Scope of Services Status: Stage D - Draft V:\ 1200• 1249\ 1242 LEICESTER ACADEMY\ 1242 REPORT\$tage DM4 appendices\Append'x_ K1.doc Page 8 of 10

• • •

Buro Happold

walls and roof (ie dynamic pressures, site snow) but the localised wind loads and pressure coefficients on individual structural components (ie cladding units and their fixings) are to be calculated by the specialist sub-contractor to the relevant British Standard. For fixings, see below.

• Cold-formed steelwork (e.g. purlins, cladding rails, sheeting rails and connections)

PSW Proprietary purlins and sheeting rails will be selected by BH using manufacturer's published design data. The manufacturer will be responsible for the detailed design and co-ordination of the elements, which should satisfy the loading criteria provided by BH. For fixings, see below.

• Wind and parapet posts PSW Proprietary wind and parapet post sizes will be selected by BH based on manufacturer's published data. The manufacturer will be responsible for the detailed design and co-ordination of the elements, based on setting-out drawings and details by the Architect and loading criteria by BH. BH will provide advice on windpost locations to the Architect who will incorporate them on theirdrawings. For fixings, see below.

• Brickwork support angles PSW Brickwork support angles will be specialist sub-contractor designed based on a performance specification and drawings produced by the Architect. The specialist subcontractor is responsible lor fully co-ordinating their proposals with the Architect and BH, in order that locations and details may be agreed and the impact on the primary structure assessed. For fixlnqs see below.

• Heavyweight fixings (for all secondary support steelwork, cladding systems, cold-formed steelwork, wind posts, parapet posts, brickwork support angles and cast-in fixings)

PSW Design, co-ordination and detailing of any cleats aad/or cast-in fixings required for connecting mechanisms to the main structural frame will be by the specialist sub-contractor requiring the fixing. The specialist sub-contractor is responsible for fully co-ordinating their proposals with the Architect and BH, in order that locations and details may be agreed. BH will check the impact of resulting forces exerted on the primary structure, based on this co-ordinated information.

* Lightweight fixings (e.g. for electrical trunking, ceiling panels, etc)

PSW These have a negligible effect on the primary structure and do not require involvement of the structural engineer. Fixings to proprietary sections (eg cold-formed rails) must be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Leicester City Academy Structural Scope of Services VM200-1249\f242 LEICESTER ACAOEMY\ 1242 PEPOflT\Stnae D* 14 appendices\Apoendi.r

Report Revision 00 Status: Stage O - Draft

Kf.doc P.-ipe 9 of 10


CIVIL ENGINEERING ITEMS • Specialist sports surfaces (e.g.

MUGA's, Astroturf pitches, etc) CDP Where required, design and detailing of specialist

sports surfaces will be by specialist sub-contractor based on drawings and a performance' specification by the Architect and Landscape Architect. The specialist subcontractor Is responsible for providing full make-up details, surface finish and specific sub-base design requirements (le CBR rating), in order that proposals may be agreed. BH will detail the sub-base make-up, based on this co-ordinated Information.

• Permeable block paving CDP Design and detailing of permeable block paving will be by specialist sub-contractor based on layout drawings by the Landscape Architect and performance specification by BH. The specialist subcontractor is responsible for providing full make-up details and specific sub-base design requirements (ie CBR rating), in order that proposals may be agreed. BH will detail the sub-base make-up, based on this co-ordinated information.

• Reinforced earth embankments PSW Where required, detailed design of reinforced earth embankments will be by specialist sub-contractor to satisfy a performance specification produced by BH.

• Pumping installations PSW Where required, detailed design of pumping installations and control equipment will be by specialist sub-contractor based on a performance specification by BH. BH will design the chamber housing, which will define the spatial limitations to be followed by the specialist sub-contractor.

• Specialist pipe-laying techniques CDP The detailed design and construction methodology of any specialist pipe-laying will be by specialist sub-contractor to satisfy a performance specification produced by BH.

• Underground surface-water storage installations

PSW The design and detailing of any underground surface-water storage installations will be by specialist sub-contractor based on a performance specification and loading criteria provided by BH.

Leicester City Academy Report Revision 00 Structural Scope of Services Status: Stage 0 - Draft V:11200-1249\ 1242 L E/CES TER AC AD EM Y\ 1242 FtEPO RT\Stt>ge D\ 14 nooendices tApoentfx K1.doc Page 10 of 10

Buro Happold APPENDIX 3: DESIGN RESPONSIBILITIES UNDER D&B FORM /CDP SUPPLEMENT

Item Description PSW/ CDP Notes

General 1 Requirements for access to ceiling

voids and builderswork ducts for maintenance.

PSW To be fully co-ordinated with the architect, BH and the Contractor.

2 Design of details for the weatherproofing of all services passing through external elements of the building.

PSW In accordance with guidelines defined in BH specification.

Builderswork 3 Checking the provisions for, and

adequacy of, the preliminary builderswork information previously issued by others.

PSW The structural engineer will define all builderswork critical for the structural integrity of the building.

4 Subsequent builderswork information including access to risers, false ceilings and ducts for maintenance.

PSW This is a joint process between the contractor, BH and the CA. See definitions (Error! Reference source not found.) for contractors obligations.

Plant & Equipment 5 Final selection of all anti-vibration

mountings. PSW In accordance with guidelines

defined in BH specification. 6 Final selection of all sound attenuation

equipment based upon installation drawings and certified manufacturer's sound power levels.


7 OHP Installation. CDP In accordance with performance requirements defined in BH specification.

8 Supply and installation including design of the boiler chimneys, gas fired AHU's, flues, generator flue and gas fired water heaters installation including the requirements of the respective manufacturers, the environmental health officer and the clean air act.

CDP In accordance with performance requirements defined in BH specification.

9 Design and installation of all necessary temporary facilities for flushing, commissioning, etc.


10 Design of adequate provision for movement of services and systems due to thermal expansion and contraction, hydraulic pressures and building movement, including cold draw calculations and proving of expansion loops in lieu of expansion equipment.

PSW in accordance with guidelines defined in BH specification.

11 Design of trace heating systems for f r o s t p r o t e c t i o n o f r e l e v a n t s e r v i c e s a n d t e m p e r a t u r e m a i n t e n a n c e o n domestic hot water systems.

PSW In accordance with guidelines d e f i n e d i n B H s p e c i f i c a t i o n .

Project Name Revision Building Services Engineering - Mechanical 3 Electrical Specification - Section A: Preliminaries (Version J. f) Date

Buro Happold APPENDIX3: DESiQN RESPONSIBILITIES UNDER D&B FORM / CDP S U P P L E M E N T ^

Pipework Systems

12 Final pump system resistances. PSW BH will provide provisional resistances, these are to be verified by the contractor following completion of the installation drawings and selection of all materials.

13 Valve locations. PSW In accordance with guidelines defined in BH specification.

14 Detailed design and exact locations of brackets and supports excepting major supporting structures designed by the structural engineer.


15 Drain and vent point locations. PSW In accordance with guidelines defined in BH specification.

16 Drainage pipework gradients. PSW In accordance with guidelines defined in BH specification.

17 Detailed design of expansion joints, anchors, guides and compensators including their locations.


18 System water capacities and chemical additives.


19 Closed circuit water treatment to the performance requirements in this specification.


20 Size and selection of commissioning sets including any proportioning of mains losses, etc, using pipework layouts detailed on the trade contractors drawings and the selected plant and equipment installed; Provisioning of additional commissioning sets as required to facilitate commissioning.


21 Underfloor heating systems CDP In accordance with performance requirements defined in BH specification.

Ductwork Systems 22 Final fan system resistances. PSW BH will provide provisional

resistances, these are to be verified by the contractor following completion of the installation drawings and selection of all materials.

23 Damper and access point locations. PSW In accordance with guidelines defined in BH specification.

Project Name Revision Building Services Engineering - Mechanical & Electrical Specification - Section A: Preliminaries (Version 3.1) Date


24 Detailed design and exact locations of brackets, supports, hangars, clips, plinths, inertia bases etc excepting major supporting structures designed by the structural engineer, necessary for the support of plant and services unless otherwise indicated In the tender documentation.


Electrical

25 All conduit dimensions, locations and routes.

PSW BH will define design intent for major trunking and tray-work and spare capacity requirements.

26 Wiring details for power and control systems (between control panel and equipment).

CDP The installation of this wiring shall be the responsibility of the contractor installing the controls system.

27 Fire alarm system. CDP In accordance with performance requirements defined in BH specification. Note that any critical cable routes will be defined on BH drawings.

28 Security (CCTV & intruder detection). CDP In accordance with performance requirements defined in BH specification. Note that any critical cable routes will be defined on BH drawings.

29 Access control. CDP In accordance with performance requirements defined In BH specification. Note that any critical cable routes will be defined on BH drawings.

30 Lighting control system. CDP In accordance with performance requirements defined in BH specification.

31 Lightning protection system. CDP In accordance with performance requirements defined in BH specification.

Controls 32 Final locations of control sensors,

detectors and thermostats. PSW In accordance with guidelines

defined in BH specification.

33 Automatic controls system / building management system (BMS).

CDP In accordance with performance requirements defined in BH specification. Note that any critical cable routes will be defined on BH drawings.

Lift

34 Lift installation. CDP In accordance with performance requirements defined in BH specification.

Project Name Building Services Engineering - Mechanical & Electrical Specification - Section A: Preliminaries (Version 3.1) V:\120C-l2t9\12J2 LEICESTER ACADEMYM2-12 RSPORT\SLigo OM4 appendicesSAppendix K2.do'J

Revision Date

Pnrje J.-l

APPENDIX 3: DESIGN RESPONSIBILITIES UNDER D&B FORM/ CDP SUPPLEMENT Buro Happold

APPENDIX 2 RESPONSIBILITIES

This schedule identifies the main areas relating to the engineering services works but Is not an exhaustible list and does not relieve of any responsibilities stated or Implied within the tender documents.

Item and activity BH Contractor 1.0 Documentation 1.1 Provide a drawing schedule of all proposed drawings to the

satisfaction of the CA. The schedule shall Indicate drawing number, title and service; scale and size of drawing; date of commencement of drawing production; date for first submission for comments; latest date for approval.

Yes

1.2 Provide sketch drawings. n/a n/a 1.3 Provide schematic drawings. Yes 1.4 Provide layout drawings. Yes 1.5 Provide co-ordinated ceiling layout drawings - design stage Yes 1.6 Provide tender documentation. Yes 1.7 Provide contract documentation. Yes 1.8 Provide builderswork documentation - design stage. Yes 1.9 Provide builderswork documentation - installation stage. Yes 1.10 Provide co-ordinated ceiling layout drawings - installation stage Yes 1.11 Provide setting-out information Yes 1.12 Provide co-ordination drawings. Yes 1.13 Provide installation drawings. Yes 1.14 Provide installation wiring diagrams. Yes 1.15 Provide progress drawings. Yes 1.16 Ensure preparation of specialist drawings. Yes 1.17 Ensure preparation of shop / fabrication drawings. Yes 1.18 Ensure preparation of manufacturer's drawings. Yes 1.19 Ensure preparation of manufacturer's certified drawings. Yes 1.20 Ensure preparation of equipment drawings. Yes 1.21 Ensure preparation of controls logic drawings.. Yes 1.22 Ensure preparation of.wiring / connection drawings. Yes 1.23 Ensure preparation of switchgear, starter & control

instrumentation panel drawings. Yes

1.24 Provide as-installed documentation. Yes 1.25 Provide record documentation. Yes 1.26 Provide plantroom & switchroom documentation. Yes 1.27 Ensure preparation of commissioning specification. Yes 1.28 Ensure preparation of the O&M manuals. Yes

2.0 General Design Activities 2.1 Ensure final/installed spatial co-ordination. Yes 2.2 Preliminary pressure drop calculations for pumps, fans, etc. Yes 2.3 Final calculation of fan/pump heads, prior to ordering

fans/pumps, using ductwork/pipework layouts detailed on the final installation drawings and the selected plant and equipment to be installed.

Yes

Protect Name Revision Building Services Engineering - Mechanical £ Electrical Specification - Section A: Preliminaries (Version 3.1j Date V.M200-1249\ 1242 LEICESTER ACADEMVM242 PEPORT\Stage D\U appendices\Appendix_K2.doc Page 3.5


Item and activity BH Contractor 2.4 Size and selection of commissioning sets including any

proportioning of mains losses, etc, using pipework layouts detailed on the trade contractors drawings and the selected plant and equipment installed; Provisioning of additional commissioning sets as required to facilitate commissioning.

Yes

2.5 Final selection of all terminal devices, including fan and natural convectors, grilles and diffusers, etc. Note applicable if contractor deviates from tender design.

Yes

2.6 Final selection of systems pressurisation units and expansion vessels based on the installation drawings and Installed plant and equipment.

Yes

2.7 Final sizing of sections of ductwork between terminal units and diffusers to ensure the specified acoustic criteria is met. Yes

2.8 Final selection, supply and installation of provisions to ensure that the specified acoustic and vibration criteria are met based on plant and equipment selected for incorporation into the works and the configuration of the finally Installed systems.

Yes

2.9 Selection and positioning of control dampers, controls valves, sensors, etc. to achieve the specified function and to suit the characteristics of items served and final system configurations.

Yes

2.10 Supply and installation including design of the boiler chimneys, gas fired AHU's, flues, generator flue and gas fired water heaters installation Including the requirements of the respective manufacturers, the environmental health officer and the clean air act.

Yes

2.11 Develop the design into detailed co-ordinated installation of fully tested & working systems, via contractors working submittals (working drawings etc)

Yes

2.12 Co-ordinate the complete building services installation, including spatial co-ordination between different services and architectural elements.

Yes

2.13 Design all steelwork, brackets hangers, clips, etc., plinths and inertia bases necessary for support of plant and services unless indicated otherwise In the tender documentation.

Yes

2.14 Select sleeves, inserts, frames, fixing, anchors, etc., and any other items required under this contract to be cast or built into the structure by others, including the co-ordination of positions

Yes

2.15 Co-ordinate all access platforms, stairs, rails, and protection elements required for future maintenance and operation of plant in piantrooms and risers. Co-ordinate where appropriate with the package or sub-contractor responsible for the provision and installation of such equipment to complete the istallatlon.

Yes

2.16 Install all fire stopping within cable trays, trunklng and wiring, pipes and sleeving systems where these pass through fire compartments.

Yes

2.17 Design and sinatallation of all necessary temporary facilities for flushing, commissioning, etc. Yes

2.18 Design of adequate provision for movement of services and systems due to thermal expansion and contraction, hydraulic pressures and building movement, including cold draw calculations and proving of expansion loops in lieu of expansion equipment.

Yes

Project Name Building Services Engineering - Mechanical & Electrical Specification - Section A: Preliminaries (Version 3.1) V: 11200-1249\ 12*2 L EIC ESTER A CADEM Y\ 1242 REPORT\Stnga 0114 appendices!Appendix K2.doc

Revision Date

Page 3.6


Item and activity BH Contractor 2.19 Temporary works, facilities and provisions required during

construction, commissioning and testing necessary to progress the works in accordance with the construction programme and to meet the specified requirements.

Yes

2.20 Design of trace heating systems for frost protection of relevant services and temperature maintenance on domestic hot water systems.

Yes

2.21 Final confirmation of the location and sizes of duct connections to external louvres. Yes

2.22 Design of details for the weatherprooflng of all services passing through external elements of the building. Yes

2.23 Detailed sizing of all trunking / tray systems 75mm or larger. Yes 2.24 Detailed sizing of all conduit and trunking / tray systems below

75mm (square or round) and all supporting structures. Yes

2.25 Verify cable sizes, voltage drops, discrimination and fault handling of cables based on the installation drawings, selected plant equipment and actual installed cable lengths.

Yes

2.26 Verify cable sizes, volts drops and fault handling capability of cable within specialist systems e.g. controls, BMS, access control and security CCTV systems.

Yes

2.27 Design of fixing, connections, and bonding details as required for final installation of earthling and lightning protection systems. Yes

3.0 Selection of Plant & Equipment

3.1 Select plant, equipment, components and material to meet the specified performance, where these differ from those specified by the consultant. The trade contractor shall ensure that they are fully compatible with all the other system parameter components and design requirements.

Yes

3.2 Identify project limitations that may influence the installation of plant. This may Include consideration of factors such as space and weight limitations and the need to comply with health.

Yes

3.3 Where appropriate, consider the possible application of packaged system solutions i.e. plant and systems designed and supplied as a package..

Yes

3.4 Provide a report in consideration of any alternative plant selections proposed subsequent to the issue of the tender documents and advise whether the alternative complies with the selection criteria.

Yes

3.5 Fully re-evaluate all parts of the services and building design that may be effected by acceptance of alternative plant sections.

Yes

3.6 Confirm any alternative plant selections. Yes 3.7 If accepted, amend the design to incorporate the alternative. Yes r 4.0 Selection and Appointment of Specialists 4.1 Define the essential performance requirements of systems to be

designed by the speclalist(s). This may Involve establishing numerical criteria for the nominal capacities of plant, the range of operating duties anticipated, and consideration of the requirements for submitting samples and prototypes.

Yes

4 .2 C o n t r i b u t e t o t h e d e s i g n o f t h e b u i l d i n g , a g r e e i n g p r o v i s i o n a l a l l o w a n c e s f o r t h e s e r v i c e s i n s t a l l a t i o n s t o b e d e s i g n e d l a t e r b y t h e s p e c i a l i s t ( s ) .

V e s

Project Name Revision Building Services Engineering - Mechanical <5 Electrical Specification - Section A: Preliminaries (Version X 1) Date VM200-1249)1242 LEICESTER ACADEMY\1242 REPORT\Stage D)f4 fippeodices\Avpe«d<t.K2.doc P.ign 3.7


Item and activity BH Contractor 4.3 Define the selection criteria that the specialist(s) must comply

with. Yes

4.4 Identify specialists that meet these criteria and arrange for names to be Included within the main tender documents as appropriate.

Yes

4.5 Provide a description of the design, fabrication and installation input required from the specialises) and arrange for Inclusion within the main tender documentation.

Yes

4.6 Make appropriate arrangements for the specialism's pre-determined construction activity for incorporation into the main contract tender documentation.

Yes

4.7 Advise specialises) of significant allowances or constraints incorporated in the main design that may effect the specialist design.

Yes

4.8 Evaluate and report on the speclallst(s)'s proposals. Yes 4.9 As 3.4 subsequent to the issue of the specialist tender

documents. Yes

4.10 Advise whether the alternative complies with the performance criteria established cost and programme. Yes

4.11 Confirm any alternative specialist design. Yes 4.12 Monitor the specialist design Input for compliance with the

design Intent. Yes

4.13 Evaluate the impact of the specialist design on those parts of the overall design left provisional. Yes Yes

5.0 General Site Activities 5.1 Monitor the on-going progress of the procurement, manufacture,

installation and commissioning of all plant Hems. Yes

6.0 Specifying System Commissioning Activities 6.1 Ensure the selected systems will meet the Buro Happold

specification (all parts) and that their commissioning requirements are compatible with any project restraint concerning sectional handover/phasing. Note: phasing or sectional completion requirements are detailed in the main contract preliminaries.

Yes

6.2 Identify and incorporate into system designs the essential components and features necessary to enable the proper preparation and commissioning of building services.

Yes

6.3 Review all designs to ensure systems can be properly prepared and are commissionable. Yes

6.4 Produce a commissioning method statement and logic diagram for Integration into the building contractor's construction and finishes programmes.

Yes

6.5 Produce a flushing, chemical cleaning and water treatment method statement, logic diagram and programme for integration Into the building contractor's construction, commissioning and finishes programme.

Yes

6.6 Attend commissioning meetings as necessary or arrange and chair commissioning meetings as necessary. Yes

6.7 Comment on the adequacy of systems for commissioning as detailed on specialists' drawings and manufacturers' shop drawings prior to actual manufacture at works and ensure comments are incorporated.

Yes

Project Name Revision Building Services Engineering - Mechanical <8 Electrical Specification - Section A Preliminaries (Version J, 1/ Date V:\1200-1249\ 1242 LEICESTER ACADEMY\1242 REPORT\Stage D\ 14 appendices\Appendix.K2.doc Page 3.8


Item and activity BH Contractor 6.8 Carry out site inspections, to ensure the commissioning facilities

are being installed and check compliance with specified guides / standards.

Yes

6.9 Monitor and report against progress to the services installation and the completion of interfaces with the building works critical to the commissioning programme. Formulate strategies to overcome potential delays.

Yes

6.10 Establish an agreed set of pro forma documentation relating to the commissioning and testing of plant and systems.

Yes

6.11 Ensure the measurement instrumentation is periodically calibrated as necessary and records retained.

Yes

6.12 Flush, clean and treat the systems in accordance with the BH commissioning specification/requirements.

Yes

6.13 Witness the flushing, cleaning and treatment of systems in accordance with tha commissioning specification.

Yes

6.14 Pre-commission in accordance with the commissioning specification.

Yes

6.15 Witness pre-commlsslonlng activities In accordance with the commissioning specification.

Yes

6.16 Commission all systems to method, logic and programme and record results.

Yes

6.17 Witness commissioning of specified plant items and system(s). Yes 6.18 Witness and record commissioning results of specified plant

items and system(s). Yes

6.19 Establish procedures to enable the demonstration of normal, emergency, shut down and standby mode operations of all plant items and systems.

Yes

6.20 Witness the demonstration of normal, emergency, shut down and standby mode operations of all plant items and systems.

Yes

6.21 Witness the partial load testing of plant to the Employer and the CA in accordance with the commissioning specification.

Yes

6.22 Witness the operation of the BMS / controls system on site to the specified requirements.

Yes

6,23 Witness the functional testing of all safety interlocks in accordance with the commissioning specification.

Yes

6.24 Witness the demonstration of acoustics tests in accordance with the commissioning specification.

Yes

6.25 Witness the operation of plant and systems for specified periods of time to prove plant reliability.

Yes

6.26 Produce commissioning report detailing the results of the commissioning and commenting on the performance of systems.

Yes

6.27 Ensure all plant settings are recorded, including appropriate reference to plant items. The records should be incorporated within the operating and maintenance manuals.

Yes

7.0 Production of Handover Information 7.1 Assist the Employer in developing an operating and maintenance

strategy. Yes

7.2 Advise on an appropriate method of procuring maintenance expertise and recommend the required technical capabilities of operating and maintenance staff.

Yes

Project Name Revision Building Services Engineering - Mechanical A Electrical Specltication - Section A: Preliminaries {Version 3.1) Date V:\1200-124SX 1242 LEICESTER ACADEMY] 1242 REPORT\Stage D\ 14 appendices\Appendix_K2.doc Page 5.9

Buro Happold APPENDIX 3: DESIGN RESPONSIBILITIES UNDER DAB FORM / CDP SUPPLEMENT

Item and activity BH Contractor 7.3 Define the scope and content of operating and maintenance

manuals appropriate to the size of project, the Employer's operating and maintenance strategy and the technical capability of the maintenance staff.

Yes

7.4 Define the requirement for record drawings appropriate to the Employer's operating and maintenance strategy.

Yes

7.5 Advise on the need for a specialist author for production of operating and maintenance manuals.

Yes

7.6 Advise on the need for a separate survey of installed systems to facilitate production of record drawings.

Yes

7.7 Provide a specification for operating and maintenance manuals -specify the section headings and required technical content of the manuals.

Yes

7.8 Provide a specification for record drawings - specify content, form of delivery and the method of production of the drawings to be produced.

Yes

7.9 Define what level of documentation, commissioning results and other information must be available prior to practical completion and handover. Take into account possible implications of phased handover and partial possession.

Yes

7.10 Produce operating and maintenance manuals in accordance with the specified requirements.

Yes

7.11 Ensure information needed for inclusion In the operating and maintenance manuals is obtained as the works progress. Identify individual sources of information.

Yes

7.12 Establish target dates for when information must be available to the author of the operating and maintenance manuals. Advise on time scales for production of maintenance information relative to key dates i.e. Installation start date, setting to work.

Yes

7.13 Monitor the programme for production of operating and maintenance manuals and adjust dates to allow for progress of the project.

Yes

7.14 Check the contents Of the operating and maintenance manuals in order to ensure compliance with the specified requirements.

Yes

7.15 Modify and update operating details to reflect commissioning results.

Yes

7.16 Accept the completed operating and maintenance manuals on behalf of the Employer.

Yes

7.17 Identify key dates and intervals at which draft record drawings will be Inspected.

Yes

7.18 Modify the records and drawings as the works progress so that all alterations form the Installation drawings are recorded as work proceeds.

Yes

7.19 Inspect draft record drawings at agreed intervals,and comment on their content with respect to the size and positions of Installed systems and plant.

Yes

7.20 Accept the completed record drawings on behalf of the Employer.

Yes

7.21 Prior to handover, make recommendations for the commencement and carrying out of operation and maintenance during and after the defects liability period.

Yes

Project Name Building Services Engineering - Mechanical & Electrical Specification - Section A: Preliminaries (Version 3.1) V:\ 1200• I249\ 1242 LEICESTER ACADEMY] 1242 REPORT\$t,iqe D\14 aopendices\ Appendix _K2.doc

Revision Date

Pnge J.io

25 May 2005 Ref: 1242-GEN-025-AT

Leicester City Academy-Addendum to Stage D Report

Following comments from the DFES we confirm the following:

• As far as the design team are aware the stage D (Rev H ) cost plan reflects the information contained within the Stage D report and forms the basis for developing the scheme during stage E.

• The brief area remains at 7675m2.

• The additional area of 120m2 has been included in the revised cost limit sheet as recognition of forthcoming BB 98 areas-The original cost limit sheet being based on BB82. Tribal were forward looking when they set the brief for the classroom sizes and this has now been acknowledged in the additional area allowance of 120m2.

• It was never the intention to suggest that the Academy would have a prison like quality-ln fact the text suggests that this is exactly the impression that the boundary fencing needs to avoid. Hence the boundary fencing to the entrance areas has an upgraded metre length cost allowance to achieve an interesting and welcoming boundary.

• We confirm that it is an aspiration of the scheme is to achieve Very Good under a BREEAM assessment. A further assessment will take place to establish the final rating. No extra funding has been allowed to achieve a very good rating therefore the design team are using their best endeavours to maintain that rating. We acknowledge that the minimum BREEAM requirement for Academies from the DFES is to obtain a good rating.

• The stage D cost plan (rev H) dated 6th April 2005 (rev 2) is the final agreed cost plan that forms an annex to the stage D report. This confirms that the total anticipated funding requirement is £19,501,915.

The design team undertake to re-establish the level of contingency to 6% by identifying cost savings during the RIBA work stages E and F.

Schedule of approvals by Secretary of State required in relation to Capital Programme to establish

The Samworth Academy

86

ANNEX 7

THE PROCESS FOR MONITORING THE CAPITAL PROJECT AND THE FORMAL APPROVALS REQUIRED BY THE SECRETARY OF STATE

DfES approval or authorisation ( shown in bold tvpe) is required at various staqes of the design, building or equipping works involved in establishing an Academy 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

DESCRIPTION OF STAGE ACTION BY SCHOOL BUILDINGS AND DESIGN UNIT (SBDU)

FORM OF SBDU RECOMMENDATION

ACTION BY ACADEMIES DIVISION (AD) FORM OF AD FORMAL APPROVAL OR AUTHORISATION TO PROCEED

COPY SBDU REC

COPY AD APPR

DESCRIPTION OF STAGE ACTION BY SCHOOL BUILDINGS AND DESIGN UNIT (SBDU)

FORM OF SBDU RECOMMENDATION

ACTION BY ACADEMIES DIVISION (AD) FORM OF AD FORMAL APPROVAL OR AUTHORISATION TO PROCEED

COPY SBDU REC

COPY AD APPR

1 F ( 1 ) AD receives Expression of Interest to SBDU comments on site, costs None. AD seek Ministerial approval for If Minister approves, AD issues establish an Academy. and programme if required project to go into feasibility. feasibility letter.

2 Upon receipt of Expression of Interest, from LEA None None AD contacts LEA for AMPs, OS Done or Sponsor, AD commission ELE to advise on map, floor plans. AD sends to SEN/inclusion implications apparent in the E of I.. SBDU to pass on to others.

3 ELE produce report on SEN/inclusion SBDU qets copy of report and makes None. Comments noted only. AD send E of I to ELE for AD request by email for SBDU to Done implications in E of I comments to AD comment as per Framework contact ELE to set up site visit.

Aqreement. 4 Upon receipt of Expression of Interest, AD SBDU liaise with surveyors re site None. SBDU will later brief

commission initial site survey/option appraisal meetinq with SBDU and site surveys. consultants AD considers ELE report and asks None. Done Aqree timescale for survey results. questions of SBDU as necessary.

5 Sites are subject to an AMP-based suitability and Surveyors briefed by SBDU : SBDU advise AD of expected AD contact LEA to arranqe access AD issue instructions on standard Done condition assessment. Options for developing the Ordnance Survey of the site date of survey conclusions. for surveys. AD request SBDU to form to surveyors to proceed. site will also be considered. This assessment Floor plans contact surveyors. provides information about whether new build Typical accomm schedule for size or remodellinq offers the best value for money Curriculum model

SEN implications if known Any AMP reports by LEA

6 Survey team visit site with SBDU and discuss SBDU consider whether buildings are None. SBDU make comments AD consider SBDU comments None Done qeneral condition/suitability before startinq survey. suitable for refurbishment and convey and form conclusions. Survey team and ELE combine visits. conclusions to surveyors and AD SBDU advise AD informally.

7 ELE visit site with SBDU and produce report for SBDU comments to AD on ELE report None. Report only. AD consider SBDU comments None Done AD on implications for site of qeneral inclusion conclusions and implications for and particular SEN requirements evident in E of I project budget.

8 Informal approval of the survey recommendations SBDU comments to AD on survey Email to AD with observations AD considers SBDU comments re None Done arisinq from 5,6,7 above. report conclusions. new-build or remodelling.

9 AD appoint Project Manager. None. None. AD interviews and prepares contract AD appoints Project Manager. Done

10 F ( 2 ) Approval of the project brief and cash limit SBDU produce project cost Recommendation. Email AD liaise with SBDU as AD send Feasibility letter to (excluding abnormals) - informed by the spreadsheet. necessary. Sponosr confirming cash limit above surveys and reports. and if new build/remodel project

11 Project Manager prepares full Action Plan and SBDU respond to any specific None AD consider PM submission, AD confirm acceptability of Done programme of work for establishing the Academy request by AD for comments. plan.

12 AD appoint Construction Manager. SBDU to consider any particular needs of SBDU to recomment suitable AD notify sponsor and project manager Contract signed with Construction Done the project in terms of Construction Construction Manager from of details of Construction Manager Management supplier Management framework appointment

13 Sponsor requests from AD the names of suitable SBDU send AD the names of suitable Recommendation. Email AD sends list to Sponsor None Done design teams for interview for Academy project. design teams from framework list

14 Sponsor selects those to be interviewed from the SBDU provides sponsor with marking None AD advises selected design teams None Done list and arranges interviews. matrix. SBDU attends interviews of interview criteria.

as reguired. None

15 Sponsor selects preferred team. Advises AD SBDU advises AD of conclusions on SBDU comments to AD on AD considers Sponsor's choice in None Done interview exercise. Sponsor's choice. light of SBDU comments.

16 F ( 3 ) Approval of the Sponsor's preferred deslqn None None AD prepares contract for AD appoints consortium for work team. Followlnq the selection process, the appointment of desiqn up to RIBA stage C. Contracts team is appointed by DfES for the work up as consortium signed. far as the Funding Agreement.(RIBA stage D)

17 Induction meetinq with project team after SBDU/AD advise project team None. None. None. Done appointment to familiarise them with the of reguirements and procedures. process of establishing an Academy. Attended by: Project team are given:

Project manager AMP reports Principal Site survey reports and drawings Design team Cash limit spreadsheet AD Typical accommodation schedule SBDU Typical curriculum analysis ELE ELE report

18 The desiqn team develops the project within SBDU monitor progress of project Informal comments to AD AD consider comments from SBDU. None Done the overall conclusion of the analysis already for adherence to cash limit, areas, advising of concerns carried out (RIBA stages A&B) educational planning, SEN, design for action as necessary.

guality and overall VFM. SBDU obtain ELE comments on proposals, and discuss with project team as necessary. AD informed of additional cost implications.

19 Approval to the contents of the submission for SBDU monitor developing proposals SBDU confirm that scheme None AD confirm to Sponsor that outline planning approval. SBDU will advise if and intended PP submission. matches reguirements and project may be submitted for planning there are contentious isues that suggest Funding outline PP should be sought. approval. Aqreement should be delayed until full planning approval is granted.

20 F ( 4 ) Approval at the end of RIBA stage D (detailed SBDU consider project details: SBDU confirm to AD on AD make formal submission to When approved by Ministers, AD Done proposals). At this point the proposals should Costs standard form that project Minsters for approval. arrange for signing of Funding demonstrate ability to meet the educational Areas meets cost and area targets Project Manager agree Annexes 5 & 6 Agreement by Sponsor and on requirements and be supported by drawings, Accommodation balance and there are no obvious showing project cash flow and behalf of SofS. a cost plan, programme, and report. Informal Planning of curriculum areas adverse education or elemental budget breakdown. acceptance by planning may be adequate. SEN/inclusion planning implications. AD prepare FA and annexes Proposed method of procurement must be Specialism SBDU recommend approval for Inclusion. approved and comply with OJEU, European Indicated abnormal costs Including for procurement and domestic legislation. Procurement method method.

21 M 1 ) Approval at the end of RIBA stage D (detailed SBDU consider performance of No recommendation AD consider any adverse reports AD approve appointment of design Done proposals) for the design team to be contracted, design consortium and comment Informal comments to AD about performance of design team by Academy Trust, under the under the aegis of the framework, by the as appropriate consortium. terms and conditions of the Academy Trust. This approval is dependent upon framework, following signing of the adherence by the design team to their terms Funding Agreement. of appointment.

22 From the end of RIBA stage D and onwards, all SBDU monitor compliance and performance No recommendation. None None Done amendments to the design specification aqreed at of Construction Manaqer and comment as Informal comments to AD Fundinq Aqreement and to cost plans must be appropriate aqreed by the Construction Manager.

23 At RIBA stage D, full planninq permission is SBDU monitor any chanqes to No recommendation. None None Done applied for. This may be the first formal planning project and consider contents of Informal comments to AD approval for a project, since projects may omit proposed submission for PP. outline applications if no problems are foreseen.

24 Informal approval at the end of RIBA staqe E SBDU monitor development No recommendation. None None (final proposals). At this staqe the proposals, durinq this staqe. Check to ensure Informal comments to AD while conforminq broadly with those contained conformity with earlier proposals in the Funding Aqreement, show all relevant as accepted at end of staqe D details of the use, size and shape of all areas of and projected abnormal costs. the building and external areas. The ability of the SBDU advise AD. project to be delivered within cash limit and programme and meet statutory requirements will be confirmed by the design team.

25 Informal approval of schedules and costs of SBDU ensure that sums proposed No recommendation. None None educational furniture and equipment. for educational F&E allow reasonable Informal comments to AD as

provision in line with typical F&E necessary. schedules and benchmark. Ensure procurement method is satisfactory.

26 Informal approval of schedules and costs of ICT SBDU ensure that sum proposed No recommendation. None None equipment. for ICT equipment allows reasonable Informal comments to AD as

provision in line with typical ICT necessary. schedules and benchmark. Ensure procurement method is satisfactory.

27 M 2 ) Approval at the end of RIBA stage G (tender SBDU monitor development SBDU advise AD that the AD consider Information AD confirm by letter that project documentation), to proceed to tender. during this stage. Check against scheme broadly conforms from SBDU and discuss as may proceed to tender At this point the construction details will be earlier proposals and soundness to the earlier proposals and necessary. fully developed and will give more certainty of cost plan. there is reasonable to the pre-tender cost plan assurance of cost certainty.

• • • • • • • • • • • •

28 1 ( 3 ) Approval at the end of RIBA stage H (tender SBDU check that scheme, after SBDU confirm to AD that AD consider information AD Issue approval to Trust action) to appoint contractor. negotiations, conforms to proposed scheme after from SBDU and discuss as to enter into building contract At this point, tenders have been evaluated requirements as earlier identified, negotiations is reasonable necessary. for an agreed sum. and negotiation entered into with the offers value for money and is and proposed scheme preferred contractor to agree the scope within the cash limit. matches that already of work and the contract sum. SBDU consider the situation agreed. Recommend The contract sum, plus all the other costs if lowest tender, after negotiation, approval by standard letter, of the project, should be within the cash limit is above cash limit. or suggest further action. as contained in the Funding Agreement.

29 Informal approval of the arrangements made SBDU discuss proposals for project None. Comments only to AD AD note SBDU comments. None during RIBA stage J (mobilisation).These planning with project team and with by email. arrangements will include the project programme responsible officer. and the nomination of the responsible officer from the design team.

30 During RIBA staqe K (operations on site), SBDU warn AD if continqency beinq None. Emails to keep AD AD consider SBDU comments AD take remedial action if With advice from Project Manaqer, SBDU monitor used too fast for project staqe appraised of position in timely and discuss as necessary. necessary to safeguard cash limit. expenditure of contingency to ensure availability reached. fashion. AD brinq any concerns to the to prevent project cost over-run. SBDU alert project attention of Academy Trust. team where rate of spend causes concern

31 1 ( 4 ) Durinq RIBA stage K (operations on site), Minutes of site meetings should be E malls to AD AD note SBDU comments and AD agreed remedial action to be there will be monitoring by monthly reports available for inspection by DfES If observations about delays, conveys to Trust any concerns over taken with sponsor. to adhere to proqramme and budget. required. SBDU will attend site at projected cost overrun cost/programme. If necessary Any claim for additional funding must be extended intervals to check broad or potential claims, with. meeting set up to discuss way in advance. adherence to programme and cost. reasons. forward.

32 1 ( 5 ) Academy may be occupied before completion. SBDU to obtain confirmation from None. Emails indicating any AD consider Implications of any AD notify Academy Trust of any If so, the Trust confirms that the buildinq Academy Trust re safety of areas of concern are sent to reservations about readiness for concerns raised and ask Trust to is safe for occupation by staff and pupils and building users.. AD. early occupation and discuss with address concerns. the arranqements to complete the project with SBDU. AD ensure that AD approve occupation. after occupation, permit curriculum delivery certificates are on file. whilst minimising disruption and risk.

33 Durinq RIBA staqe L (completion) the buildinq is SBDU monitor proqress of project SBDU advise AD that project is AD ensure that documents are filed. None normally handed over to the Academy Trust. towards meetinq proqramme. SBDU completed. AD establish that procedures for

34 1 ( 6 ) At RIBA stage L (completion), application When certificate of confirmation of SBDU recommend to AD that AD consider SBDU comments and AD approve final account. for release of retention is made by the makinq qood defects has been issued. final account may be settled, recommendations. contractor. SBDU check final account and or advise AD otherwise. AD advise Darlinqton to settle

establish whether retention should. final account be released.

SIDE AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE SECRETARY OF STATE FOR EDUCATION AND SKILLS AND THE SAMWORTH ACADEMY

Introduction

1. The parties to this agreement are the Secretary of State for Education and Skills ("the Secretary of State") and The Samworth Academy ("the Academy Trust").

2. This agreement is supplemental to a funding agreement executed by the Secretary of State and the Academy Trust of even date (the "Funding Agreement") for the establishment of an Academy ("the Academy") in accordance with section 482 of the Education Act 1996;

3. This agreement is a side agreement to the funding agreement and shall be read in conjunction with and as supplemental to the funding agreement. In all other respects the terms of the funding agreement shall continue without amendment.

4. Words and phrases defined in the funding agreement shall have the same meaning as in this agreement.

5. In the event of termination of the funding agreement the terms of this agreement will no longer be binding on either party.

Legal agreement

6. The Secretary of State agrees to make a payment to the Academy Trust in accordance with the provisions of this agreement and the Academy Trust agrees to a reduction in General Annual Grant.

Payments to be made by the Secretary of State

7. By virtue of the Funding Agreement the Secretary of State agreed to contribute a total of £19,501,915 towards the capital expenditure required to establish the Academy (being the school to be established by the Academy Trust), on condition that the Academy Trust contributed a total of £2,443,000 towards the capital expenditure required to establish the Academy, the arrangements for the payment of such costs being described in Annex 6A and 6B to the Funding Agreement.

8. The Secretary of State recognises that the Academy Trust will receive a payment from Leicester City Council from the proceeds of sale of Newry Junior School and Southfields Infants School ("the Leicester payment") and thus is not able to pay its full contribution during the period when capital costs will be incurred by the Academy Trust, and accordingly the Secretary of State agrees to pay an additional £400,000 to the Academy Trust, such amount to be offset by a subsequent reduction in the General Annual Grant paid by the Secretary of State to the Academy Trust.

9. The additional £400,000 referred to in clause 8 shall be paid by 1st January 2008.

Reduction in General Annual Grant

10. The Academy Trust will promptly notify the Secretary of State when it